Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutWARM STORAGE BUILDING/PUBLIC WORKS/2012WARM STORAGE BUILDING/ PUBLIC WORKS/ 2012 iO4rrn S�rc,5e.. dw;? - 5-Uur)' /!q o_2rb1a tjn g Io, "-s S OIIAC. ir� CG-I�.� 6Y+r�/I /�" J�rjw�, -)p�- cD r� -r�rci f-� c�Stte ma (' i cos7' _4r 41, CDrt$+r'KL�rO.{r1��.� >� T� 1 KbI(i C �IO r�•S%S `girtl'P-ic — `^- aG Srt'Orage_ -D4 r 1 ! , vI1Q l r`ii , 2.L�� CLr r2C�'. v�,p �r^-Fri L� 1�PV� 44t C-Ct/ Fnljra[t✓ `" sa;d Pl(,ns on %fans/ Pe, cw ;wS r. ct �D/31rc _ t 25�',ma c� Ca St. i 306(( (�,(c�at,1025(�, "fYOfYI'7- \0'1-V c�RYrac� PS+1,rnu o� cos'y 'YOr 4kcJ oll s4t_.1 (-t nn 4T T4 Pub(:,_ WOr rl$ U✓,�_rr?7 4rage �Ju;IcL;.f �)ro�ec`)�, e.s(-r,.b1;s9,ny, cr gy•m. - o -F 6;q� Secur:-�" �v accDrrcap2�rrt++/--fgcn b,[C-r �;r'.ec-�,n� /(`:� nc.)4:.1 ./a b:ddtrs `V O_-: t 2 _to 'E; cid EYS �`a-ffas'� a carr{-Ira/�or cari-rc.c-�-:o,-, nT-t<�i�etb�rc �ar�'S LJEtrM ]4v#- \v J . Prepared by Melissa Clow, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240,(319)356-5413 RESOLUTION NO. 12-273 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON JUNE 19, 2012 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE PUBLIC WORKS COMPLEX — WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the General Obligations Fund account #3970. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: 1. That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-mentioned project is to be held on the 19'h day of June, 2012, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 5th day of June 20 12 n:�/ ACV\ MAYOR Approved by/ ATTEST: 'ta/� CITY 5LERK City Attorney's Office Pwe nglres/pwcom plemsd l d g-setph.doc 5112 Resolution No. 12-273 Page 2 It was moved by Payne and seconded by Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: 19MR; ABSENT: the Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton June 12, 2012 City Clerk City of Iowa City, Iowa Re: Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Dear City Clerk: rIII114, CITY OF IOWA CITY 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240.1826 (319) 356-5000 (319) 356-5009 FAX www.icgov.org The estimate of cost, as prepared by Kueny Architects, L.L.C. of Pleasant Prairie, WI for the Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building is $168,200. Sincerely, Ronald R. Knoche, P.E. City Engineer CITY OF IOWA CITY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA ARCHITECT KUENY ARCHITECTS, LLC 10505 Corporate Drive Suite #100 Pleasant Prairie, Wisconsin 53158 PHONE (262) 857-8101 FAX (262) 857-8103 John F. Schmidbauer, PE Jon P. Wallenkamp, Project Manager PLUMBING AND SOUTHPORT ENGINEERED SYSTEMS FIRE PROTECTION 6919 — 51st Street Kenosha, Wisconsin 53144 Bob Novak, CPD PHONE (262) 818-4409 FAX (715) 832-7850 HEATING, VENTILATING, SOUTHPORT ENGINEERED SYSTEMS AIR CONDITIONING 6919 — 51" Street Kenosha, Wisconsin 53144 PHONE (262) 654-6630 FAX (262) 654-6404 Tim Pann, P.E. ELECTRICAL DAVID L. HANSON, AND ASSOCIATES 6402 — 32nd Avenue Kenosha, Wisconsin 53142 PHONE (262) 654-2010 FAX (262) 658-1127 Dave Hanson, P.E. THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or OFEsB���, under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed ` µ „ .,, 0,� �� Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa JOHN F. w E SCHMIDBAUER p- 2C42- 17116 a �� gnature) (date) .•,aA; *'•.., My license renewal date is December 31, 2013 r�W '1411110,% � Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Specification - Division 1 throuah Division 31 SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE SHEET TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING...................................................................... NOTICE TO BIDDERS..................................................................................... NOTE TO BIDDERS........................................................................................ INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS.......................................................................... FORM OF PROPOSAL.................................................................................... BIDBOND........................................................................................................ FORMOF AGREEMENT................................................................................. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND ...................................................... CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (ANTI -DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) ........................................... GENERAL CONDITIONS................................................................................ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.................................................................. RESTRICTION ON NON-RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON -FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS................................................................................................. TECHNICAL SECTION Page Number .... CC -1 (thru pg.7) .... GC -1 .... SC -1 .... R-1 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (applies to all Contractors) 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 4 pages 01 2000 PAYMENT AND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES fi; pages 01 2300 ALTERNATES 3pages= ; 01 3000 COORDINATION 01 30 00 Project Coordination -.0 pages: 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 4 pages_. 01 3300 SUBMITTALS 6 pages 01 4500 QUALITY CONTROL 4 pages 01 5000 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 14 pages 01 6000 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 7 pages 01 7000 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 9 pages 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 3 pages 01 77 16 Final Cleaning 4 pages DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3 pages DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 9 pages DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 5 pages DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 INSULATION 4 pages 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 4 pages 07 92 00 JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 Sealants and Caulking 5 pages DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 6 pages 08 30 00 SPECIAL DOORS 7 pages 08 41 00 ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 00 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 6 pages 08 71 00 HARDWARE 5 pages 08 80 00 GLAZING 6 pages DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 90 00 PAINTING T2 pages DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 18 POLE BUILDING 12 pages 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 12 pages DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 14 Plumbing Specialties 22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping Equipment 22 11 00 Facility Water Distribution 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewer DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 23 09 14 PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRIC INSTUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 11 00 FACILITY FUEL PIPING 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 34 00 HVAC FANS 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 54 00 FUEL FIRED HEATING EQUIPMENT DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL WORK 6 pages 3 pages 2 pages 4 pages 6 pages 5 pages 7 pages 2 pages 5 pages 4 pages 6 pages 7 pages 5 pages 6 pages 6 pages 6 pages 3 pages 3 pages 4 pages 26 05 00 Electrical Provisions 26 05 19 Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 0 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 3 16 Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Id ntification for Electrical Svstem 26 05 83 Wirin2Kconnections 2609 16 Electric Controls and 2621 16 Low-Voltage'llJnderg 2624 16 Panelboards \ 2627 16 Electrical CabinetssJa 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2628 13 Fuses rourA Electrical Service Entrance d Enclosures 26 28 16.16 Enclos d Switches 26 29 13 Enclos d Controllers 26 51 00 Inter r Lighting 26 56 00 E erior Lighting DIVISION 31 SITE// EVELOPMENT WORK 31 20 00 EARTHJWORK 8 pages 6 pages 4 pages 2 pages 6 pages 4 pages 2 pages 2 pages 2 pages 2 pages 4 pages 2 pages 6 pages 2 pages 4 pages 4 pages 6 pages 6 pages 10 pages DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL WORK 26 05 00 Electrical Provisions 7 pages 26 05 19 Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables 6 pages 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3 pages 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 2 pages 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 5 pages 26 05 33.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems 4 pages 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 2 pages 26 05 83 Wiring Connections 2 pages 26 09 16 Electric Controls and Relays 2 pages 2621 16 Low -Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance 2 pages 26 24 16 Panelboards 4 pages 26 27 16 Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures 2 pages 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 5 pages 26 28 13 Fuses 2 pages 26 28 16.16 Enclosed Switches 3 pages 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 5 pages 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 5 pages: DIVISION 31 SITE DEVELOPMENT WORK — 31 20 00 EARTHWORK 10 pages ATTACHMENT: FORMAL PROJECT FORM OF PROPOSAL [TO SUBMIT] ATTACHMENT: PLANS ATTACHMENT: FORMAL PROJECT FORM OF PROPOSAL [TO SUBMIT] ATTACHMENT: PLANS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA. AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, forms of contract and estimated costs for the construction of the: 1. U.S. Highway 6 and Sycamore Street Intersection Improvement Project 2. 2012 Muscatine Avenue Water Main Improvements Project 3. Highway 1 Trail Project - Orchard Street to Sunset Street 4. Public Works Complex - Warm Storage Building Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the 19'' day of June. 2012. said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 41C E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, forms of contract and estimated costs are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contracts or the costs of making said improvements. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City. Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK NP -1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS PUBLIC WORKS COMPLEX WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 3 P.M. on the 19th day of July, 2012. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine or email shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 31 st day of July, 2012. The Project will involve the following: Construction of a pre -fabricated steel or wood frame structure with four (4) overhead doors and a poured concrete floor The project will include floor drains and a sanitary sewer connection, water service and electric heat. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Kueny Architects, L.L.C., of Pleasant Prairie, Wisconsin, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) year(s) from and after its com- pletion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Working Days: 64 Specified Start Date: August 1, 2012 Liquidated Damages: $100 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of the Engineering Division of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $40 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to the City of Iowa City. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals at (515) 281-5796 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalit 6AI, and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK NTB-1 9 9 NOTE TO BIDDERS The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1 Envelope 2 Bid Bond Form of Proposal NB -1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. The bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 2007 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to which work may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternate bids. D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the contract documents. F. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G. A sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2 — BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read andIM,clerstands tbe'w bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents, 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract docurrients, to - the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is -submitted. 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder's personal observations with the TWi requirements of the contract documents. 2.4 The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 — BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of the Engineering Division of the City of Iowa City, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, IA, 3'd floor, for the deposit sum as indicated. The deposit will be refundable to plan holders. A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents, and his deposit will be refunded. Successful sub -bidders, including material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, and their deposit will be refunded if the Architect receives written notification within the 30 calendar day period following receipt of bids. B. Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding documents. No partial sets will be issued. C. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D. Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documents may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data'' contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are incorporated therein by reference. 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub -bidders requiring clarification or inter retati onl of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be 'Made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 Substitutions I:II. A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. Refer to AIA Substitutions form for substitution requirements. B. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.4 Addenda A. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have a complete set of bidding documents. B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. C. No addenda will be issued later than seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the proper location on the bid form. ARTICLE 4 — BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 Form and Style of Bids A. A separate copy of the bid form is contained within the back cover of this document. B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. C. Bidders may submit Base Bid Lump Sums for Design Option 'A' — Pole Barn Design, Section 13 34 18 and the follow Alternates: a. Alternate#1 —To install a Metal Building System Design. b. Alternate #2 — To install a Concrete Floor for this project. c. Alternate #3 — To do all the Painting work on the project. d. Alternate #4 — To do all the Plumbing work on the project. e. Alternate #5 — To do all the Heating and Ventilating work on tfie-project. f. Alternate #6 — To do all the Electrical work on the project. D. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall'bo expressed -in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the -two, the'amount' written in words will govern. E. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. Im All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter "No Change". G. Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidders refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. H. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor. a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the bidder. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of opening. 4.2 Bid Security A. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested. furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier's check, cash or certified check will not be an accepted bid bond. B. Surety bond shall be written on enclosed "Bid Bond" form bound within the project manual and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. C. The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until either, 1. The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 4.3 Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB — Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving the bids ('City Clerk; City of Iowa City'), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation: "SEALED BID, ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and. date for IB -4 receipt of bids. C. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. D. Oral, electronic, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or by telegram. If by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 — CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 Opening of Bids A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. 5.2 Rejection of Bids A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required :by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete'or irregular. 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) a. J A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsible bidder ; for the construction of either a Pole Building Design or a Metal Buodjng System that." is in the best interest of the owner, provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. IB -5 6.1 7.1 7.2 B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. ARTICLE 6 — POST -BID INFORMATION Submittals A. The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Architect: 1. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. 3. A list of names of the subcontractors or other persons or entities proposed for the principal portions of the work. B. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. C. Prior to the award of the contract. the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder's option: 1. Withdraw the bid. 2. Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. D. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7 — PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND Bond Requirements A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three_(3) days following the date of execution of the contract. If theworkis to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. IQ10 0 B. The bonds shall be written on the 'Performance and Payment Bond" form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D. The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 — PRE-BID CONFERENCE Conference A. Bidder is encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference on Friday, July 6`h, 2012 at 10:30 AM local time, in the Engineering Conference Room in the Engineering Division of the City of Iowa City, located at 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa, 3`d floor. B. Limited metered or free parking is available on neighboring streets, otherwise hourly -fee parking is available in the Chauncy Swan Parking Ramp, located on the south side of Washington Street, across from City Hall. WA FORM OF PROPOSAL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT ) CITY OF IOWA CITY 1. PLEASE D0,,NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MkNUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER 6F THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 3:60,PM local�irne on Thursday, 19th of July 2012 TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for ids, and in co fiance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigne• proposes to furn h all labor. materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and/2all related incidentals rtcessary to perform the work to complete IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILbtNG PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the/brawings dated May 31, 2012\including Addenda numbered , and inclusivV, prepared by Kueny Architects, LL'F, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of: BASE BID FOR DESIGN OPTION `A' - POLE BUILDING DESION SECTION 13 3418 Dollars ($ \ ) ALTERNATES ALTERNATE eil - OPTION `B' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS SECTION 13 34 19" To install a Metal Building Systems in lieu of a Pole Building Design: Total Cost f�k the Metal Building System - Dollars ($ )� FP -1 ALTERNATE #2 — CONCRETE FLOOR — SECTION 03 30 00 To install a Concrete Floor: ADD the Sum of: Dollars ALTERNATE #3 — PAIING SECTION 09 90 00 To do the Painting work for is building: ADD the Su ALTERNATE #4 — PLUMBING WORK, To install the Plumbing work in the buildi ALTERNATE #5 — HEATING To install the Heating and Ve 122: the Sum of: :NTILATION WORN work in the building Dollars — DIVISION 23 ,ADD the Sum of ALTERNATE #6 — ELEC7RICAL WORK - DIVISION 26 To install the Electrical ork in the building: ADD the Sum of: Dollars FP -2 UNIT PRICES: Required Base Bid quantities of the items li§ied below can be determined from the bidding documents. If increases in quantities occur, per Owners representative direction of the Contract Price shad{ be adjusted by Change Order on the basis of the following: Unit Price NO 1. Cost rate of unknown,,bver-excavation of unsuitable soils and placement of structural fill, fo structures per Earthwork Section 31 20 00. Add the Sum of Per Cubic Yard The undersigned bidder subiN ten percent (10%) of the Base Dollars erewith bid security in the amount of amount. FP -3 The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract, are as follows: FP -4 The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that t Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30 consecutive calendar days following the da of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Pro eed or a prepared Agreement provided y the Owner is received at the business address identifi below within the thirty (30) day peri , the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, ackno edge acceptance of the contract a ard. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Own r address the Agreement, th Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certi i ates of insurance, and will roceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project. and have e Project at Substantial Completion on or before November 1, 2012 Firm: Phone: Contact: FP -5 FORM OF PROPOSAL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY BIDDERS PLEASE NOTE: 1. PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 3:00 PM CDT on Thursday, 19`h of July 2012 TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall -- I 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated May 31, 2012, including Addenda numbered , and , inclusive, prepared by Kueny Architects, LLC, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of : BASE BID FOR DESIGN OPTION `A' — POLE BUILDING DESIGN SECTION 13 3418 Dollars AMOUNT SHALL BE INDICATED IN BOTH WORDS AND FIGURES. IN CASE OF DISCREPANCY, THE AMOUNT INDICATED IN WORDS SHALL GOVERN. The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. FP -1 BID ALTERNATES: ALTERNATE #1 —OPTION Z'— METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS SECTION 133419 To install a Metal Building System in lieu of a Pole Building Design: Total Cost for the Metal Building System. Dollars ALTERNATE #2 — CONCRETE FLOOR — SECTION 03 30 00 To install a Concrete Floor. ADD the Sum of: Dollars ALTERNATE #3 — PAINTING — SECTION 09 90 00 To do the Painting work for this building. ADD the Sum of: Dollars ($ ) ALTERNATE #4 — PLUMBING WORK — DIVISION 22 :,1 To install the Plumbing work in the building. ADD the Sum of: Dollars ALTERNATE #5 — HEATING AND VENTILATION WORK — DIVISION 23 To install the Heating and Ventilation work in the building. ADD the Sum of: Dollars ALTERNATE #6 — ELECTRICAL WORK — DIVISION 26 To install the Electrical work in the building. ADD the Sum of: Dollars FP -2 UNIT PRICES: Required Base Bid quantities of the items listed below can be determined from the bidding documents. It increases in quantities occur, per Owners representative direction of the Contract Price shall be adjusted by Change Order on the basis of the following: UNIT PRICE #1 — Cost rate of unknown over -excavation of unsuitable soils and placement of structural fill for structures per Earthwork Section 31 20 00. ADD the Sum of: Dollars Per Cubic Yard The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract, are as follows: NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. FP -3 The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period; the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement. Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance. and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before November 1, 2012. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: Title: Address: - Phone: Contact: FP -4 as Principal, and , as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated July 19, 2012 for the Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Project NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this A.D., 20_ Witness Witness Ma day of E (Seal) Principal By = (Title). c' (Seal) Surety By _.._ �fAttorhey-in-fact) Attach Power -of -Attorney FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the 31st day of May, 2012, for the Public Works Warm Storage Building Project ('Project'), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW. THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers b. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201-2007, as amended: C. Plans; d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders; g. Performance and Payment Bond, h. Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding on Non -Federal -Aid Projects; i. Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements); j. Proposal and Bid Documents; and ; k. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together, 4n the• -, event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG -1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 5. The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of: To be completed after award DATED this 31 s' day of July, 2012. [DATE BASED ON FORMAL COUNCIL MEETING AWARDING CONTRACT BY RESOLUTION NUMBER ] (Signature) (Printed name) ATTEST: Contractor (Signature) (Printed name) Mayor (Title) City Clerk AG -2 ATTEST: Title (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) . as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of l� ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators. successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has. as of July 31, 2012. entered into a written Agreement with Owner for the Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Project: and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Kueny Architects. L.L.C., which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that. if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default. or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work ptogresses (even. though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient - funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractors Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of two (2) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. 20 SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF IN THE PRESENCE OF. Witness Witness am (Principal) (Title) (Surety) (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) _ A Contract Compliance Program CITY OF IOWA CITY 0 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALL BLANK CC -1 SECTION I - GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors. consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race. color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity. sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract. all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. El 5. 6. 7 Prior to execution of the contract. the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead;" and instead use gender neutral signs. All contractors; vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2-3-1. CC -2 SECTION II - ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et sec.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. CC -3 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6.. are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Signature Print Name CC -4 Title Date Phone Number SECTION III -SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices_ In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising_ 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word-of-mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only use job-related tests which do not adversely affect any' particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advaecee. to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination,raws. Biased and; subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of ,cri;?crirrrination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non -biased promdtion, transferanq training policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of':your "workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting car dildates foIr promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CC -5 it �. -4 It w VN i ' City Of OYPA G, Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 — 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City, CC -6 2-3-1 CHAPTER3 DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES 2-3-1 SECTION: C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organiza- 2-3-1: Employment; Exceptions tion or the employees or members 2-3-2: Public Accommodation; thereof to directly or indirectly adver- Exceptions tise or in any other manner indicate or 2-3-3: Credit Transactions; Exceptions publicize that individuals are unwel- 2-3-4: Education come, objectionable or not solicited 2-3-5: Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; for employment or membership be- Intlmidation cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: D. Employment policies relating to preg- A. It shall be unlawful for any employer nancy and childbirth shall be governed to refuse to hire, accept, register, by the following: classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in 1- A written or unwritten employment employment against any other person policy or practice which excludes from or to discharge any employee be- employment applicants or employees cause of age, color, creed, disability, because of the employee's pregnancy gender identity, marital status, nation- is a prima facie violation of this Title. al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- B. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- riage, childbirth and recovery there- nization to refuse to admit to member- from are, for all job-related purposes, ship, apprenticeship or training an temporary disabilities and shall be applicant, to expel any member, or to treated as such under any health or otherwise discriminate against any temporary disability insurance or sick applicant for membership, apprentice- leave plan available In connection with ship or training or any member in the employment or any written or unwrit- privileges, rights or benefits of such len employment policies and practices membership, apprenticeship or train- involving terms and conditions of ing because of age, color, creed, employment as applied to other tem - disability, gender identity, marital porary disabilities. status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- E. It shall be unlawful for any person to plicant or member, solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or pro- 897 Iowa City CC -7 2-3-1 spective employee a test fcr the pros- ence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus, An agree- ment between an employer, employ- ment agency, labor organization or their employees, agents or members and an employee or prospective em- ployee concerning employment, pay or benefits to an employee or pro- spective employee in return for taking a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this subsection do not apply if the State epidemiologist determines and the Director of Public Health declares through the utilization of guidelines established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- ment of Health and Human Services, that a person with a condition related to acquired immune deficiency syn- drome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human lmmunode- ficiency virus to other persons in a specific occupation. F. The following are exempted from the provisions of this Section: 1. Any bona fide religious institution or its educational facility, association; corporation or society with respect to any qualifications for employment based on religion when such qualifica- tions are related to a bona fide reli- gious purpose. A religious qualifica- tion for instructional personnel or an administrative officer, serving in a supervisory capacity of a bona fide religious educational facility or reli- gious institution shalt be presumed to be a bona fide occupational qualifica- tion. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-6-1994) 2-3-1 2. An employer or employment agency which chooses to offer employment or advertise for employment to only the disabled or elderly. Any such employ- ment or offer of employment shall not discriminate -among the disabled or elderly on the basis of age, color, creed, disability, gender Identity, mari- tal status, national origin, race, reli- gion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord, 95-3697 11-7-1995) 3. The employment of individuals for work within the home of the employer if the employer or members of the family reside therein during such em- ployment. 4. The employment of individuals to render personal service to the person of the employer or members of the employer's family. 5. To employ on the basis of sex in those certain instances where sex is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- rowly. 6. A State or Federal program de- signed to benefit a specific age classi- fication which serves a bona fide pub- lic purpose. 7. To employ on the basis of disability in those certain instances where pres- ence of disability is a bona fide occu pational qualification reasonably nec- essary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 94-3647, 11.8-1994) GENERAL CONDITIONS "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA DOC A201-2007 amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. GC -1 CITY OF IOWA CITY SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201-2007. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions.. the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. B. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated belowwhich are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as ctr;ke o - and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as "bold italic". D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Law or Regulations in respect to any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety. 1.2 ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 Contract Documents to read as follows: 1.1,1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is listed as A G in the project manual. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide. C. Add the following paragraph 1.2.4: 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements, govern the" execution of all sections of the specifications. 1,3 ARTICLE 2 - OWNER — A. Change paragraph 2 4 to read as follows: 2.4 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligerice and promptness, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies — In such case An appropriate Change Order hbe issued ded4Gting the Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the SC -1 remAr,p",i^ entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's and/or Consultant's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1 4 ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.2 to read as follows: 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents, however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing 'es involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume apprepuate responsibility for such performance and shall bear aR aPPFGPFat6 arne ..t ^c the ^ttrr, table all costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. B. Change paragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, vendors, materialmen and suppliers and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. C. Add the following 3.3.4: 3.3.4 Contractorshall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. Contractor shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. D. Change paragraph 3.4.1 to read as follows: 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, storage, parking and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work to be performed after regular working hours or shouhd-the Contractor elect to perform work after regular hours, the additional cost of such -work shall be borne by the Contractor. _... SC -2 `':, E. Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6. 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 0160 00 - Post Bid Substitutions. 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor., .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. .5 will adhere to the contract schedule Change paragraphs 3.5 to read as follows, 3.5 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, exisept for those Work, materials or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. G. Change paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer. use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. All such information for said certificates shall be submitted to the City/Owner together in one submission. H. Change paragraph 3.72 to read as follows: 3.72 The Contractor shall comply perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work _e I. Change paragraph 3 T to read as follows 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable .laws , statutes;:, ordinances codes, rules and regulations. or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume full appreprlate responsibility for such Work and shall- bear Ahe costs ,tt hutphIp. tn the Gorreptinin and expenses of correcting orreplacing such Work SC -3 J. Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are 1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or 2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than the next business day 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's costs of or time required for performance of any part of the work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. J. Change paragraph 3.11 to read as follows: 3.11 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and eae copy 0 all approved Shop Drawings, MSDS Sheets, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed, K. Change paragraph 3.13 to read as follows. 3.13 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment, The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are located may be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted. L. Change paragraph 3.17 to read as follows. 3.17 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such,loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Ownerin.writing.;; M. Change paragraphs 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18 .1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, -defend. and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includir-Q;.but not,limited;td attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease drdeath, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other th3R th Work it rn but -only to the extent caused in whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of Wi;ether or Rat suGh elaig;�, SC -4 expense s caused rt, nolo ;.;:fdhope..rdar Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18 Nothing in the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnification by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to Paragraph 3.18.1. Change paragraph 3.18.2 to read as follows 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City Of Iowa City, Iowa. In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor. a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable the indemnification obligation under Section 318.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages. compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 1.5 ARTICLE 4 -ARCHITECT A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows: 4 1.2 Duties. responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner—,Geiitraacter and Architect- Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2 1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein during construction and until the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment to the Contractor on the Project. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner 1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and 2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect and the Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's — Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and se4ify recommend to -the Owner the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such. 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work which does not ccnform'to- the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable fora implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the 'Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors. material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. SC -5 E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. Th GlHt es, forth n aR e..h'b t to he incorporated -n the Cnr14q At��oaF"...�..AentT 42 11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regarding decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then the Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations cipssia.iaRs of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and recommendations diens, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations decsons rendered in good faith. 1.6 ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS A_ Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following: 5.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. 1. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3 to read as follows: 5.3 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable -portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub -subcontract Us: All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and impli4warranties in _the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Cofftractor -and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and -be forthe benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against, the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. -_ _ 1: 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. B. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: 6,2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor WFGRgfally causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: B. Add paragraph 7.2.2 as follows: 7.2.2 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Work and related parts of the Work. C. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed directly by the Contractor's employees, not including oversight of such work performed by subcontractor, fifteen percent (151.) of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub -subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub -subcontractor. .5 in order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 1.9 ARTICLE 8 -TIME A Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shallbear 4_I1, costs78r overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. _. . B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. SC -7 C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay an dPI••moi ec unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, Gr -4 delay thor zed by the Owner ^.r^ a. b brat on, OF by oche causes .,high the AFAh icat .rotor... nes may edf • delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. D. Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. E: Add paragraph 8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES to read as follows: Since the actual monetary value of damages sustained by the Owner as a result of delayed completion of the Work is extremely difficult or impractical to assess, the Owner and Contractor agree as follows: 1. Upon failure of the Contractor to achieve "Substantial Completion" of the Work in compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents: The Contractor shall pay as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum of amount as listed in the Notice to Bidders (or Instruction to Bidders) for each calendar day that "Substantial Completion" is delayed beyond the date written in the Agreement, subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents. 2. The Owner shall give written notice to the Contractor of intent to assess liquidated damages pursuant to provisions of this Article. Calculation of the amount of liquidated damages shall commence on the date the Owner notifies the Contractor of this intent. 3. Liquidated damages assessed in accordance with these provisions are exclusive of other monetary damages to which the Owner may be entitled as a direct result of the Contractor's failure to achieve final completion of the Work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. These liquidated damages are not intended to be exclusive of Owner's right to terminate this Contract based on Contractors' failure to comply with the terms and provisions of the Contract. 4. Partial performance of the Work of this Contract shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for liquidated damages. 5. Contractor's liability for liquidated damages shall cease upon issuance of Substantial Completion Certificate for the Work of the Contract. 6. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, amounts assessed to the Contractor as liquidated damages may be deducted by the Owner from any money payable to the Contractor pursuant to this Corftract. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of a claim for dfquidated' damages prior to the date the Owner deducts such sum from money payable to the Contractor. 1.10 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ` ,r'r J A. Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment SC -8 application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such final waivers. Change paragraph 9.4 1 to read as follows. 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment. with a copy to the Contractor. for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due. or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. C. Add paragraph 9.4.2.1: 9.4.2.1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. D. Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 The Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor within 30 days after the Owner has received a Certificate for Payment from the Architect. To insure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. Payment Documents and Shall r at f the Arch t F Change paragraph 9 8 4 to read as follows: When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion. shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and contractor for security. maintenance, heat, utilities. damage to the Work, and insurance and shall fix the time within which the contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warrant'es requiredcommence on the a -,of -Substantial le -tion of the o" ,�,.r"r--designatedportion ,ereof nie oth�„r^.'� provided in the Certificate of F. Add paragraph 9 10.6: 9.10.6 Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa (2009), as amended. G. Add paragraph 9.10.7 7 9.10.7 Warranties required by the Contract Documents, including those stated in the'. performance and payment bond, shall commence on the date' of finali formai; acceptance of the work by the City. 1.11 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A Add paragraph 10 1.1: 1. The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all`trazardous chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as SC -9 necessary throughout the project. This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to -know. B. Change paragraph 10 2 4 to read as follows: 1. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice and shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel_ C. Add paragraph 10.2.9: 10.2.9 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. The Owner shall be notified once these notices have been served and before the work is performed. 1.12 ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS A- Change paragraph 11.1.1.5 to read as follows: 5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities and loss of use resulting therefrom, B. Change paragraph 11. 1.2 to read as follows: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11. 1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverage w teethe shall be written on an occurrence .,F MA FRq MRCIP basis and shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the contractor's completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 11.1.3 to read as follows. 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted upon final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness_ D_ Delete paragraph 11.1.4 in its entirety and add the following paragraphs 11.1.4 through 11.1.14: 11.1.4 Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Confr-actor to - satisfy -his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the following type and minimum amounts: SC -10 Tyne of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Bodily Injury & Property Damage' Automobile Liability Bodily Injury & Properly Damage Excess Liability Employer's Liability Each Accident Each Employee Policy Limit Professional Liability (if applicable) Each Occurrence Aggregate $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $500,000 $500,000 $500,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage. Comprehensive General Liability using Insurance Services Office CG0001 or equivalentshall include Contractual, Premises & Operations, Products & Completed Operations, Independent Contractors, Personal & Advertising Injury coverages, and Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) endorsernent. Automobile Liability shall include all owned, non -owned and hired autos and also coverage for Contractual Liability. Excess Liability shall provide no less than following form coverage to the primary underlying policies. Workers Compensation shall include the Alternative Employer and Waiver of Subrogation endorsements in favor of the Owner. Professional Liability, if applicable. Tthe Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Professional Errors and Omissions Liability insurance. The Contractor will notify the Owner if claims made erode the policy limits below those required above. Ali liability policies above, except for Workers Compensation and Professional Liability, shall include the Owner's Governmental Immunities Endorsement. [See attached]. 11.1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. in addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 11.1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11.1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy= limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this `requirerment is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. 11.1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions. or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance and copies of such shall be SC -11 attached thereto. 11.1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. The Contractor shall include the Owner (City of Iowa City, including its employees, agents and assigns) as additional insured on all policies, except worker's compensation and professional liability. Such additional insured endorsement(s) shall make the Contractor's liability insurance primary to the Owner's and, furthermore, shall not be contributing with any other insurance or similar protection available to the Owner, whether such available protection be primary, contributing or excess. Owner shall be an Additional insured with repect to all required aforementioned coverages, which shall be stated on all Certificates of insurance. Such Certificates shall also state that the Governmental Immunities Endorsement (see attached) apply and said endorsements shall be attached thereto. The Contractor shall require any of its agents and subcontractors who perform work and/or services pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement to purchase and maintain the same types of insurance as are required of the Contractor. 11.1.10 The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. if Contractor can only provide "claims -made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: A. if the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. B. if Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. D. "Tail" or' prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self-insured retention than the insurance which it replaces 11.1.11 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either'award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case may be. 11.1.12 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance goverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activlties und6r this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. SC -12 11.1.13 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.14 Contractorshall be responsible forany deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. Delete paragraphs 11.3 in its entirety and add paragraphs 11.3 as follows: 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: .1 include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Owner's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; .2 be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; .3 include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property; .4 include $100,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER, 5 allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER, 6 include testing and startup; and 7 be maintained in effect until final payment is made. .8 Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences 11.3.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants;; and any other. individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions,each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or -additional insured. SC -13 11.3.3AI1 the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. 11.3.5 if CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. Delete section 11.4 in its entirety and add paragraph 11.4 to read as follows: 11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with the American institute of Architect's Document A-312 (1984 Edition), with coverage provided by a surety having a financial rating from A.M. Best of A, VIi or higher. .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner/Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. .3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract Documents. .4 The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, time being of the essence. in said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its Principal's denial of default as justification for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. _ .5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to_pay all such." damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure -in any - respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited t6,alf repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural• and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory. fees; and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. .6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand SC -14 of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. 99.4.2 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. 1.13 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Change paragraph 13.1 to read as follows: 13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Iowa of th�e the PF9jest is located exGept that, if the parties have selected wbi#at on Aq the mp-thed 0 bindiRq al spate resoli tinR, the Fadpi,A'Arb tratiep Act shall govern Seat OR 15 4. B. Change paragraph 13.3 ,1 to read as follows: 13.3 .1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at 9 sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. C. Change paragraph 13 5.1 to read as follows. 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws. statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect and Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect and Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of 1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded and 2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. D Delete paragraphs 13.7. E Add the following Section 13.8: 13.8 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. r. .2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified' applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard td 'race; --religion,; color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be regaieed by local or state ordinance SC -15 Add the following Section 13.9: 13.9 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) for all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. 1.14 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A_ Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: .5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. B. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract. 1.15 ARTICLE 15- CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Change paragraphs 15.1.1 through 15.1 .3 to read as follows: 15.1 1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other similar relief with respect to the administration teras of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. 15.1.2 Notice of Claims. Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor. ,n less subm Re, in a timely ^ ^^..e. 15.1.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in "accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. B. Change paragraph 15.2.5 to read as follows: 17`"" 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approvingdrrejecting the claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the claim. This initial decision shall 1) be in writing, 2) state the reasons therefore, and 3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of �riy change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approv lb,Pfie initial hall be final and h' ding GR the aFti s but subject to er at on 444e, parties SC -16 C. Delete paragraphs 15.2.6 and 15.2.6.1 in their entirety. D. Delete Section 15.3 MEDIATION in its entirety. E. Delete Section 15.4 ARBITRATION in its entirety, F. Add the following paragraph 15.5 to read as follows: 15.5 The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT 00800 - A ,J SC-17 RESTRICTION ON NON-RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON -FEDERAL -AID PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: TYPE OF WORK: DATE OF LETTING: A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a non-resident bidder from a state or foreign country which gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state or foreign country. That preference is equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the non-resident bidder is a resident. "Resident bidder' is defined as a person authorized to transact business in this state and having a place of business within the state, and has conducted business for at least six months prior to the first advertisement for the public improvement. In the case of a corporation, the above requirements apply as well as the requirement that the corporation have at least fifty percent of its common stock owned by residents of this state. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the bidder and his/her contractors and subcontractors at the work site until the project is completed. I hereby certify that the undersigned is a resident bidder as defined above and will remain such from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME: CORPORATE OFFICER: TITLE, DATE: R-1 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK SPECIFICATIONS FOR PROJECT: IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING OWNER: City of Iowa City Waterloo Iowa City, Iowa 50703 SPECIFICATION DATE: May 30, 2012 BID DATE: July 19, 2012 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 71 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section INDEX 1.1 Work Covered by Contract Documents 1.2 Contracts 1.3 Work by Others PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Work Covered by Contract Documents 1.4 Work Sequence 1.5 Contractors use of Premises A. The project consists of the following: Construction of a pre -fabricated wood frame structure 80 ft X 80 ft. The structure will have four (4) insulated overhead doors, three (3) hollow metal service doors, 6" concrete floor and an 8" masonry fire barrier wall. Alternate bids include a pre-engineered metal frame structure, concrete floor, painting, plumbing, heating and ventilation and electric. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Kueny Architects, L.L.C., of Pleasant Prairie, Wisconsin, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. B. Bids under the GENERAL CONTRACTOR will include plumbing, heating and ventilation and the electrical work. C. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: The Conditions of the Contract — General and Supplementary, and these General Requirements shall apply with equal force and effect to all Contractors engaged in this Work. D. Contractor's Duties 1. Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for: a. Labor and materials, tools and equipment. (See General Conditions). b. Water, heat and utilities required for construction. c. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of Work. 2. Taxes: See Supplementary Conditions page SC -3, paragraph G. of these Specifications. 3. Permits, fees licenses, notices: the contractor is required to obtain all permits. The City will wave all fees. 4. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders and other requirements of public authorities which bear on performance of Work. 5. Promptly submit written notice to Architect of observed variance of Contract Documents from legal requirements. It is not the Contractor's responsibility to make certain that Drawings and Specifications comply with codes and regulations:, a. Appropriate modifications to Contract Documents will adjust necessary changes. b. Assume responsibility for work known to be contrary to such requirements, without notice. -- 6. Enforce strict discipline and good order among employees. Do not—nploy Work of;,., a. Unfit persons. b. Persons not skilled in assigned tasks. l May 30, 2012 01 1000-1 SUMMARY OF WORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 7. It will be the affected Contractor's responsibility to call the utility companies prior to and while work is in progress to obtain utility locations and clearances within the work limits. 1_2 Contracts: (See General Conditions) A. Construct Work under one single prime Contract: 1. General Construction 1_3 Work by Owner A. Various Furnishings and Equipment 1_4 Work Sequence A. Construct Work in stages: The General Contractor will determine the schedule. All Contractor's will be required to keep up with General Contractor's schedule. 1.5 Contractors use of Premises A. Confine operations at site to areas permitted by: 1. Law 2. Ordinances 3. Permits 4. Contract Documents B. Do not unreasonably encurnber site with materials or equipment. Do not interfere with other projects underway during the same time period. C. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. D. Assume full responsibility for protection and safe keeping of products stored on premises. E. Move any stored products which interfere with operations of Owner or other Contractors. F. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations. G. Use Site: The contractor is required to work with and around Owner's existing operations. 01 1000-2 May 30; 2012 SUMMARY OF WORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 20 00 PAYMENT AND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.2 Changes in the Work 1.2 Submittals 3.1 Applications for Payment 1.3 Availability of Forms 3.2 Change Order Procedures 2.1 Application and Certificate Payment 3.3 Dispositions of Forms by the Architect PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included: To insure prompt and proper payment of all bills and to expedite processing of Change Orders, procedures, as outlined in this Section, have been established by the Architect and must be followed. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Lump Sum and Unit Prices 2. Progress Payments, Retainage and Final Payments 3. Changes in the Work 4. Schedule of Values 6. Substitutions 7. Contract Closeout Owner -Contractor Agreement General and Supplementary Conditions General Conditions Section 01 30 00 Section 01 60 00 Section 01 70 00 C. Definitions 1. Change Order: See General Conditions 2. Construction Change Authorization, AIA Document G 713: A written order to Contractor, signed by the Owner and the Architect, which amends the Contract Documents as described, and authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change which affects the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, for inclusion in a subsequent Change Order. 3. Architect's Supplemental Instructions, AIA Document G 710. A written order, instruction or interpretation, signed by the Architect making minor changes in the Work not involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 1.2 Submittals A. Applications for Payment: Submit requests for payment on forms called for in this Section and in accord with the Schedule established in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. Submit a minimum of three copies. B. Change Orders: Submit request for changes with supporting data as outlined in the General Conditions. May 30, 2012 0120 00-1j PAYMENT AND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE OWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 1_3 Availability of Forms A. Forms required under the provisions of this Section may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects www.aia.org or the following sources: 1. AIA Chicago 222 Merchandise Mart -#1049 Chicago, Illinois 60654 Phone 312-670-7770 2. AIA Iowa 1000 Walnut St. #111 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone 515-244-7502 B. Forms are sold for a fee in pads of 50 sheets. Only latest revisions of these forms should be used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Application and Certificate for Payment A. The Contractor must make all requests for payment on AIA Document G 702. Application and Certificate for Payment, completely filled out as described on the back of the form. B. Each request for payment shall include AIA Document G 703, Continuation Sheet, completely filled out as described on the back of the form. C. Requests for payment not properly submitted will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. 22 Changes in Work A. The Contractor will submit to the Architect the supporting data for any changes in the Work, as described in the General Conditions, Article 7, and in Section 01 60 00, for all changes initiated by the Contractor or upon request of the Owner or Architect. B. The Architect will use the above to prepare a Change Order on AIA Document G 701, Change Order. The Contractor will not prepare form G 701 unless instructed to do so by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Applications for Payment A. Preparation of Application for each Progress Payment 1. Application and Certificate Form a. Submit Application on form specified in this Section, in accord with Form' Instructions. All data must be typewritten. All computations must he correct. b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with the respective totals indicated on continuation sheet. c. Execute Application with the signature of responsible officer of the -contracting-: fi rm . d. All applications must be notarized. 01 2000-2 May 30; 2012 PAYMENT AND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING e. All items of the Architect's Certificate will be filled out by the Architect. 2. Continuation Sheets (AIA Form G 703) a. Submit itemized data and values on form specified in this Section in accord with example bound into this Section. All data must be typewritten. All computations must be correct. b. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of Work, with item number and the scheduled dollar value for each item based on actual Contract sum listed on Owner -Contractor Agreement. c. Fill in the dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when Work has been performed or products stored. The Architect will not allow payment on any line item until after Shop Drawings, for that item, have been reviewed. d. List each Change Order executed prior to the date of current application, at the end of the last continuation sheet. List by Change Order number, and description, as for original component item of Work. e. Use as many Continuation Sheets as required. 3. Substantiating Data for Stored Materials: a. For each item on the Continuation Sheet listed as stored material, the Contractor shall submit the following: (1) Supplier's invoice for the item listed as stored. (2) A description of each item stored. (3) The location and times at which the Architect or Owner can inspect the stored materials. 4. Waivers of Lien: The Contractor will include all waivers as required by the Specifications, Owner -Contractor Agreement or as may be required by the Owner. C. Preparation of Application for Final Payment 1. Fill in Application Forms as specified for progress payments. 2. Continuation Forms shall indicate 100% completion of all items. 3. Supply all final waivers of lien. 3_2 Change Order Procedures A. General Requirements 1. Promptly implement Change Order procedures. a. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. b. Maintain detailed records of Work done on a "time and material" force account" basis. c. Provide full documentation to Architect on request. 2. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization, a. Who is authorized to accept changes in the Work. b. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the authorization of changes in the Work. 3. Owner will designate in writing the person who is authorized to execute Change Orders. B. Preliminary Procedures 1. Owner of Architect may initiate changes by submitting a Proposal Regvestto Contractor. Request will include: a. Detailed description of the Change, Products and location of the -change in the Project. - b. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specification. May 30, 2012 0120 00=3 PAYMENT AND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING c. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized. d. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. e. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor to stop Work in progress. 2. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to Architect: containing: a. Description of the proposed changes. b. Statement of the reason for making the changes. c. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract time. d. Statement of the effect on the work of separate Contractors. e. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as appropriate. C. Construction Change Authorization 1. In lieu of Proposal Request, Architect may issue a Construction Change Authorization for Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 2. Authorization will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change, and will designate the method of determining any change in the Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time. 3. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Construction Change Authorization as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. 4. Contractor may sign and date the Construction Change Authorization to indicate agreement with the terms therein. D. Documentation of Proposals and Claims 1. Support each quotation for a lump -sum proposal, and for each unit price which has not previously been established. with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate the quotation. 2. On request provide additional data to support time and cost computations: a. Labor required. b. Equipment required. c. Products required. (1) Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. (2) Quantities required. d. Taxes. insurance and bonds. e. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. f. Overhead and profit. g. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 3. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a "time and material'Y'force account basis", with documentation as required for a lump -sum proposal, plus additional information: a. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work, and date of the order. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 01 2000-4 May,30, 2012 PAYMENT AND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES "`i IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING d. Receipts and invoices for: (1) Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. (2) Products used, listing quantities. (3) Subcontracts. 4. Document requests for substitutions for Products as specified in Section 01 60 00. E. Preparation of Change Orders 1. Architect will prepare each Change Order. 2. Form: Change Order — AIA Document G 701, 3. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. 4. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time. F. Lump-Sum/Fixed Price Change Order 1. Content of Change Orders will be based on, either: a. Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's responsive Proposal as mutually agreed between Owner and Contractor. b. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by the Architect. c. Owner and Architect will sign and date the change Order as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. d. Contractor may sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. G. Unit Price Change Order 1. Content of Change Orders will be based on, either: a. Architect's definition of the scope of the required changes. b. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by the Architect. c. Survey of completed work. 2. The amounts of the unit prices to be: a. Those stated in the Agreement. b. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. 3. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be determined prior to start of the work: a. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. b. Contractor may sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. 4. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: a. Architect or Owner will issue a Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and will cite the applicable unit prices. b. At completion of the change, the Architect will determine the cost of such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. (1) Contractor shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. (2) Unit prices for excavation, backfill, concrete, etc., stated in dollars per cubic " yard, shall be based on actual physical measurement of the arezaffected and will not be based on converting weight, truck loads, etc. into' cubicyards.. c. Architect will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract ., Sum and in Contract Time. - May 30, 2012 01'20.00-5. PAYMENT AND CHANGE. - ORDER PROCEDURE= IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING Owner and Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement with the terrns therein. H. Time and Material/Force Account Change Order/Construction Change Authorization 1. Architect and Owner will issue a Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor to proceed with the changes. 2. At completion of the change; Contractor shall submit itemized accounting and supporting data as provided in the Article "Documentation of Proposals and Claims" of this Section. 3. Architect will determine the allowable cost of such Work, as provided in General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 4. Architect will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 5. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement therewith. Correlation With Contractor's Submittals 1. Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Request for Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of Work. and to record the adjusted Contract Sum, 2. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. a. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes. 3. Upon completion of Work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents. 3_3 Disposition of Forms by the Architect A. Payment Request 1. After receiving the Application, the Architect will review the submission, enter the amount certified for payment and sign the form. 2. Distribution: a. One copy for the Architect's file. b. Two copies to the Owner. One copy for Owner's records and one copy to be returned to the Contractor along with payment. Changes in the Work 1. After receiving from the Contractor the necessary information, the Architect will fill out the Change Order Form and sign it. 2. Two copies of the Change Order will be sent to the Contractor for his signature and both copies will be returned to the Architect. 3. The Architect and Contractor approved copies will be sent to the Owner for his signature. One copy will be sent by the Owner to the Contractor. 4. After receiving the copy which has been signed by the Architect and the Owner, the Contractor will incorporate the Change Order amount into the next payment r application. 01 2000-6 PAYMENT AND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATIVES SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 governs work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Submittals 1.3 Product Handling PART IGENERAL 1_1 Description 2.1 Description of Alternatives 3.1 Advance Coordination 3.2 Surface Conditions A. Work Included: To allow the Owner to compare total costs where alternate building material might be used, and to enable the Owner's decision prior to awarding the Contract. Alternates have been established as described in this Section of these Specifications. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Basis of Awards Instruction to Bidders 2. Summary of Work Section 01 10 00 3. Coordination Section 0145 00 4. The sections of the Specification as listed under the respective alternatives. 5. The method for stating the proposed alternative sum is described on the Bid Form. C. This Section describes the changes to be made under each alternative. D. The referenced Specification sections contain the pertinent requirements for materials and methods to achieve the work described herein. E. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the project under each alternative designated in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. 1.2 Submittals: All alternatives described in this Section of these Specification are required to be reflected in the Bid submitted on the Proposal Form for the Work, however, do not submit alternatives other than those described in this Section except as provided for under "Substitutions" in Section 01 60 00 of these Specifications. 1_3 Product Handling: If the Owner elects to proceed on the basis of one or more of the alternatives, make all modification to the Work required in the furnishing and installation of the selected alternative or alternatives to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner other than as proposed on the Bid Form. May 30, 2012 01 23 00=T ALTERNATES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 2 PRODUCT 2_1 Description of Alternatives A. General Contractor 1. Alternate #1 — To install a Metal Building System Design in lieu of a Pole Building Design. 2. Alternate #2 — To install a Concrete Floor for this project. 3. Alternate #3 — To do all the Painting work on the project. 4. Alternate #4 — To do all the Plumbing work on the project. 5. Alternate #5 — To do all the Heating and Ventilating work on the project. 6. Alternate #6 — To do all the Electrical work on the project. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Advance Coordination: Immediately after award of Contract, and to the maximum extent practicable, thoroughly and clearly advise all necessary personnel and suppliers as to the nature and extent of alternatives selected by the Owner. Use means necessary to alert those personnel and suppliers involved as to all changes in the Work caused by the Owner's selection of alternatives. 32 Surface Conditions: Prior to installation of the alternative items, verify that all surfaces have been modified as necessary to accept the installation ad that the item or items may be installed in complete accord with their manufacturer's current recommendations. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect proceed as he directs. 01 2300-2 May 30, 2012 ALTERNATES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 30 00 PROJECT COORDINATION SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.1 Project Manager 3.1 General Duties of Project Managers 3.2 Coordination Between Contractors at the Project Site PART IGENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included 1. General Contractor will coordinate the Work of the entire Project. 2. The General Contractor shall: a. Coordinate work of their own employees and subcontractors. b. Expedite their work to assure compliance with schedules. c. Coordinate their work with that of other prime contractors and work by Owner. d. Comply with orders and instructions of the Owner. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Division'l PART 2 PERSONNEL 2_1 Project Manager A. The General Contractor and each of the Mechanical and Electrical sub -contractors shall designate a qualified project manager for the duration of the construction work. 1. Qualification: a. Experienced in field work of the type required for this Project. 2. Submit name to Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 General Duties of Project Managers A. Construction Organization and Start-up 1. Project Managers shall establish on-site lines of authority and communications: a. Establish procedures for intra -project communication: (1) Submittals (2) Reports and records (3) Recommendations (4) Coordination drawings __ (5) Schedules -� t:. (6) Resolution of conflicts. 'a'e b. Interpret Contract Documents: (1) Consult with Architect to obtain interpretations. (2) Assist in resolution of questions or conflicts which may arise. May 30, 2012 01 3000-1 PROJECT COORDINATION IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (3) Transmit written interpretations to Prime Contractors, and to other concerned parties. c. Assist in obtaining permits and approvals: (1) Building permits and special permits required for Work or for temporary facilities. (2) Verify that contractors and subcontractors have obtained inspections for Work and for temporary facilities. B. Project Manager Duties 1. Prepare Coordination Drawings as required to resolve conflicts and to assure coordination of the work of, or affected by, mechanical and electrical trades, or by special equipment requirements a. Submit to Architect. b. Reproduce and distribute copies to concerned parties after Architect review. 2. Inspection and Testing: a. Inspect work to assure performance in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. b. Administer special testing and inspections of suspect Work. c. Reject Work which does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. d. Coordinate Testing Laboratory Services: (1) Verify that required laboratory personnel are present. (2) Verify that tests are made in accord with specified standards. (3) Review test reports for compliance with specified criteria. (4) Recommend and administer any required retesting. 3. Monitor the use of temporary utilities: a. Verify that adequate services are provided and maintained. b. Coordinate installation, operation and maintenance, to verify compliance with project requirements and with Contract Documents. c. Coordinate use of Owner's facilities. 4. Monitor Contractors' periodic cleaning: a. Enforce compliance with Specification. b. Resolve any conflicts. 5. Arrange for delivery of Owner -furnished products. a. Inspect for condition at delivery. b. Turn over to appropriate Contractor, obtain receipt. 6. Changes and Substitutions: a. Recommend necessary or desirable changes to Owner and to Architect. b. Review subcontractors' requests for changes and substitutions, submit recommendations to Owner and to Architect. c. Assist Architect in negotiating Change Orders. d. Promptly notify all subcontractors of pending changes or substitutions. 7. Provide cost control for Project a. Revise and refine the approved estimate of construction cost periodically. (1) Record actual costs, and estimates for uncompleted work. (2) Incorporate approved changes as they occur. (3) Develop cash flow reports and projections. b. Maintain cost accounting records for authorized work performed. under. (1) Unit costs. -- (2) Actual costs for labor and materials. (3) Other basis requiring accounting records. 01 3000-2 May 30,'201 PROJECT COORDINATION IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING c. Implement procedures for review and processing of Contractor's applications for progress payments and for final payments. (1) Review each application for payment, submit recommendations to Architect. 8. Maintain Reports and Records at Job Site, available to Architect and Owner. a. Daily lob of progress of Work. b. Records: (1) Contracts (2) Purchase orders. (3) Materials and equipment records. (4) Applicable handbooks, codes and standards. c. Obtain information from subcontractors, and maintain file of record documents. d. Assemble documentation for handling of claims and disputes. 9. Coordinate the work schedules of the subcontractors: a. For temporary utilities. b. Among the work of the trades specified in Division 23 and 26. c. With the work of trades specified in Division 2 through 26. 10. Coordinate the schedules of subcontractors. a. Verify timely deliveries of Products for installation by other trades. b. Verify that labor and materials are adequate to maintain schedules. 11. Conduct conferences among subcontractors, and other concerned parties, as necessary to: a. Maintain coordination and schedules. b. Resolve matters in dispute. 12. Participate in Project Meetings: a. Report progress of Work. b. Recommend needed changes in schedules. c. Transmit minutes of meetings to trades, as appropriate. 13. Temporary Utilities: a. Coordinate installation, operation and maintenance, to verify compliance with Project requirements and with Contract Documents. b. Verify adequacy of service at required locations. 14. Shop Drawings, Product Data Samples: a. Prior to submittal, review for compliance with Contract Documents. (1) Check field dimensions and clearance dimensions. (2) Check relation to available space. (3) Check anchor bolt settings. (4) Review the effect of any changes on the work of other contracts or trades. (5) Check compatibility with equipment and work of other trades. (6) Check motor voltages and control characteristics. (7) Coordinate controls and interlocks: (a) Voltages (b) Wiring of pneumatic electric switches or relays. (8) Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. 15. Job Site Visits: r—: a. Project Managers shall visit Site monthly until work of their Contract -begins. b. Visit site weekly after Contractor has begun. _ 16. Verify that subcontractors maintain accurate record documents. -- 17. Observe Work for compliance with requirements of Contract Docum-at?fs:: a. Maintain list of observed deficiencies and discrepancies. i b. Promptly report deficiencies or discrepancies to Architect. c. Record results, including time and date of start-up. May 30, 2012 01 300(5-3 PROJECT COORDINATION IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 18. Equipment Startup: a. Check to assure that utilities and specified connections are complete and that equipment is in operable condition. b. Observe test, adjust and balance. c. Record results, including time and date of start-up. 19. Inspection and Acceptance of Equipment: a. Prior to inspection, check that equipment is clean, repainted as required, tested and operational. b. Assist inspector: prepare list of items to be completed or corrected. c. Should acceptance and operation of equipment constitute the beginning of the specified warrantee period, prepare and transmit written notice to Architect for the Owner. 20. Assemble Record Documents from subcontractors. transmit to Architect. C. Project Manager's Close-out Duties 1. Mechanical and Electrical equipment start-up: a. Coordinate check-out of utilities, operational systems and equipment. b. Assist in initial start-up and testing. c. Record dates of start of operation of systems and equipment. d. Submit to Owner written notice of beginning of warranty period for equipment put into service. 2. At completion of Work of each Contract. conduct an inspection to assure that: a. Specified cleaning has been accomplished. b. Temporary facilities have been removed from site. 3. Substantial Completion: a. Conduct an inspection to confirm or supplement Contractor's list of work to be completed or corrected. b. Assist Architect in inspection. c. Supervise correction and completion of work as established in Certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. When Owner occupies a portion of Project prior to final completion. coordinate established responsibilities of Contractor and Owner. 5. Final Completion: a. When each Contractor determines the Work is finally complete, conduct an inspection to verify completion of Work. b. Assist Architect in inspection. 6. Administration of Contract Closeout: a. Receive and review subcontractors' final submittals. b. Transmit to Architect with recommendations for action. D. Additional Duties of General Contractor's Project Manager 1. Control the use of Site: a. Supervise field engineering and site layout. b. Allocate space for each Prime Contractors use for field offices, sheds and work and storage areas. c. Allocate field office and storage space, and work and storage areas, for use of each Prime Contractor. d. Establish access, traffic and parking allocations and regulations.' e. Monitor use of site during construction. 01 3000-4 PROJECT COORDINATION May 30 2012, IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Construction Schedules: a. Coordinate schedules of the several Prime Contractors. b. Prepare a detailed schedule of basic operations for all Prime Contractors. (1) Each Prime Contractor shall prepare sub -schedules to comply with critical phases. c. Monitor schedules as work progresses: (1) Identify potential variances between scheduled and probable completion dates for each phase. (2) Recommend to Owner adjustments in schedule to meet required completion dates. (3) Adjust schedules of Contractors as required. (4) Document changes in schedule, submit to Owner, Architect and to involved Contractors. d. Observe work of each Contractor to monitor compliance with schedule. (1) Verify that labor and equipment are adequate for the work and the schedule. (2) Verify that product procurement schedules are adequate. (3) Verify that product deliveries are adequate to maintain schedule. (4) Report noncompliance to Owner, with recommendation for changes. 3. Daily Reports: Establish a procedure for the General Contractors' job superintendent to write a daily report on the progress of the job. These reports will be sent to the Architect at the end of each week. The report will include date, weather conditions, temperatures, manpower for all prime contractors and subcontractors, work being done by all prime contractors, problems and delays, extra work done or materials purchased. 3_2 Coordination Between Contractors at the Project Site A. All Contractors and all subcontractors shall coordinate their work with adjacent work and shall cooperate with all other trades so as to facilitate the general progress of the Work. Each trade shall afford all other trades every reasonable opportunity for the installation of their work and for the storage of their material. In no case will any Contractor be permitted to exclude from the premises or work, any other Contractor or their employees, or interfere with any Contractor in the executing or installation of their work. B. Each trade shall perform its work in proper sequence in relation to that of other contractors or trades and as approved by the Architect- Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the trade responsible therefore. C. Each Contractor shall arrange their Work and dispose of their materials so as not to interfere with the Work or storage of materials of other Contractors and each shall join their work to that of others in accord with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. D. All mechanical and electrical contractors shall work in cooperation with the General Contractor and with each other, and fit their piping, ductwork, conduit, etc., into the structure as job conditions may demand. All final decisions as to the right-of-way Viand run of pipe, ducts etc., shall be made by the Architect or his/her representative_at prearranged meetings with responsible representatives of the mechanical and electrical'cpntractors. May 30, 2012 01.30 00-5 PROJECT COORDINATION IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING E. Each Contractor shall give due notice and proper information to other Contractors of any special provisions necessary for the placing or setting of their work coming in contact with work of other Contractors. Failing to do so in proper time, they will be held responsible and shall pay for any and all alterations and repairs necessitated by such neglect. It shall be the responsibility of all Contractors and all subcontractors to keep constant check on the progress of the Work so that the particular trade can insure proper preparation for installation of that trade's work and not cause delay in the progress of the Work. It shall be the responsibility of each contractor to periodically make inspections of work in progress and to notify the Architect when work is complete in compliance with Specifications and Drawings. G. Contractors for Fire Protection, Plumbing. Heating and Ventilating and Electrical Work shall check and cross check the Drawings and Specifications of other trades to inform themselves of the work interrelated with their work. H. Any voluntary effort on the part of the Architect to expedite the notice to other Contractors shall not relieve any Contractor of their primary responsibility to give such notice. 1. Contractors shall determine as far in advance as possible the exact size of openings and guarantee them to the General Contractor. All Contractors working on the site shall coordinate storage of materials on ground slabs and on above ground floor and roof members so as not to exceed the design live load shown on the Drawings. Material storage will not be allowed on any cantilevered members. Contractors will take immediate remedial action when so directed by the Architect. 01 3000-6 PROJECT COORDINATION _ c3 May 30, 2012 r. > _ c3 May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.1 Pre -Construction Meetings 2.2 Progress Meetings 2.3 Roof Conference PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 2.4 Completion Inspection Meeting 2.5 One Year Warranty Review Meetings 3.1 Representatives List 3.2 Meetings A. Work Included: Throughout the course of the Work, in order to provide coordination of the Project, the Architect will schedule meetings which will include but are not limited to: 1. Preconstruction Conference 2. Progress Meetings 3. Roof Conference 4. Completion Inspection Meeting B. Related Requirements Specified in Other Sections 1. Summary of Work Section 01 1000 2. Quality Control Section 01 4500 3. Construction Schedules Section 01 3000 4. Submittals Shop Drawings and Samples Section 01 3300 5. Project Record Documents Section 01 7000 6. Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 7000 C. Related Requirements in Other Parts of the Project Manual 1. Pre -Bid Conference: Instruction to Bidders D. Definitions: See General Conditions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Preconstruction Meeting A. Schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: The Architect will designate a central site convenient for all parties. C. Attendance 1. All persons named on the Representatives List described in Part 3 of this Section. 2. Major subcontractors. 3. Major suppliers. 4. Others as appropriate. D. Suggested Agendum 1. Distribution and discussion of: - 1 a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers :... May 30, 2012 01 31 19_1 PROJECT MEETINGS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. Projected construction schedules. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination; designation or responsible personnel. 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change orders e. Application for payment 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents, 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas. b. Owner's requirements. 9. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 10. Temporary utilities. 11. Safety and first-aid procedures. 12. Security procedures. 13. Housekeeping procedures. 2.2 Progress Meetings A. Schedule regular periodic meetings, as required. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the Work. C. Location of the Meetings: The project field office. D. Attendance 1. Architects, Owner's and Contractor's representatives as shown on Representatives List in Part 3 of this Section. 2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the Agenda. 3. Suppliers as appropriate to the Agenda. 4. Others. E. Suggested Agendum 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule 5. Review of off-site fabrication; delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Plan progress schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedule. - 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 11. Maintenance of quality standards -- - 12. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 01 31 19-2 May 30, 2012 PROJECT MEETINGS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 13. Other business. 2_3 Roof Conference A. Scheduled prior to start of Roofing work. B. Location: At field office. C. Attendance 1. Architect 2. Owner's Representatives 3. General Contractor's project manager and field superintendent. 4. Roofing Manufacturer's representative. 5. Roofing Contractor. D. Suggested Agendum 1. Review all roofing materials to be used. 2. Review acceptable condition of roof deck. 3. Review installation of all roofing materials. 4. Review maintenance procedures. 5. Review warranty and bonds. 2_4 Completion Inspection Meeting A. Schedule after Punch List has been returned to Architect and before final payment. B. Location: A walk -though of the entire project. C. Attendance 1. Architect 2. Owner's Representatives 3. Field Superintendent for each prime Contractor. 4. Subcontractors as requested. 5. Engineers D. Suggested Agendum 1. Review of Punch List items not completed. 2. Review of Project requirements for determination of final payment. 2_5 One Year Warranty Review Meeting: Approximately 11 months after the date of substantial completion the Architect, Owner and Contractor will inspect the project and develop a list of items to be corrected under the provisions of the One -Year Warranty division of the General Conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION - 3_1 Representative List: After Contracts are awarded, each Contractor will submit to the Architect the names of the Project Manager and Field Superintendent. the Architect will then compile a list of all the representatives of the Owner, Architect, i ngineers and, Contractors who are authorized to make decisions about he Project and distribute_ this list to all interested parties. May 30, 2012 01 31 19-3 PROJECT MEETINGS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3_2 Meetings A. The General Contractor shall schedule and administer pre -construction meeting, periodic progress meetings and specially called meetings throughout the progress of Work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes: include all significant proceedings and decision. 6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. B. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors and suppliers attending the meeting shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 01 31 19-4 May 30, 2012 PROJECT MEETINGS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.2 Product Data 1.2 Submittals 2.3 Samples 2.1 Shop Drawings 3.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples PART IGENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included 1. To insure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accord with design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for its review by the Architect. 2. Construction Schedule 3. Progress Reports 4. Shop Drawings 5. Product Data 6. Samples 7. Layout Data 8. Schedule of Values 9. Instruction Manuals B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1. General Conditions a. Progress Schedule b. Shop Drawings, Product Data and samples c. Schedule of Values 2. Instructions to Bidders Section 00 21 13 3. Project Meetings Section 00 31 19 4. Quality Control Section 0145 00 5. Material and Equipment Section 01 60 00 6. Project Closeout Section 01 70 00 C. Definitions 1. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are prepared by the Contractor or any subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor and which illustrate some portion of the Work. 2. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and to assist in the establishment of standards by, which the work will be judged. 1.2 Submittals A. Construction Schedule 1. Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date of Award of Contract gtij a. Architect will review schedules and return review copy within tep days after 7 receipt. _T May 30, 2012 01 3300-1 SUBMITTALS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. If required, resubmit within seven days after return of review copy. 2. Submit periodically updated schedules accurately depicting progress to first day of each month. B. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 1 Schedule submissions at least 14 days before dates reviewed submittals will be needed. 2. Submit number of copies of Shop Drawings. Product Data and Samples which Contractor required for distribution plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. An additional copy shall be submitted for mechanical engineers as required. 3. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: a. Date b. Project title and number c. Contractor's name and address d. The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Data and Sample submitted. 4, Submittals shall include: a. Date and revision dates. b. Project title and number. c. The names of. (1) Architect or Engineer (2) Contractor (3) Subcontractor (4) Supplier (5) Manufacturer (6) Separate detailer when pertinent. d. Identification of product or material. e. Relation to adjacent structure or materials. f, Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. g. Specification Section number. h. Applicable standards, such as ASTM number. i. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. j. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittals, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents. 5. Resubmission Requirements: a. Shop Drawings: (1) Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. (2) Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made other than those requested by Architect. (3) Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as required for initial submittal. 6, Distribution of submittals after review: a. Distribute copies of Shop Drawings and Product Data which carry Architect's stamp to: (1) Contractorsfile (2) Job -site file (3) Record document file — (4) Other prime contractors (5) Affected subcontractors -- (6) Suppliers 01 3300-2 May 30, 2012 SUBMITTALS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (7) Fabricator (8) Erector b. Distribute samples as directed. 7. Note: Architect will not accept any drawing or data that has been transmitted by means of telephone facsimile or electronic mail. 8. Provide sufficient space for both Contractors and Architect's Review Stamp. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Shop Drawings A. Original drawings, prepared by Contractor, subcontractor, supplier or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the Work; showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection details. B. Prepared by a qualified detailer. C. Identify details by reference to sheet, room schedule, detail numbers or other identification for coordinating with Contract Drawings. D. Reproductions for Submittals: Five copies in blue or black line on white background. E. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, make all Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the item and its method of connection to the Work. F. One set of corrected drawings used for fabrication will be made available on the Owner's request. 2_2 Product Data A. Manufacturer's Standard Schematic Drawings: 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to project. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to project. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data. 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Shop performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring diagrams and controls. 2_3 Samples A. Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work is judged. B. Office Samples: Of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: . 1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related..parts-and attachment devices. d May 30, 2012 01 3,3; 00-;} SUBMITTAL'S IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Colors: Submit accurate color charts and pattern charts to the Architect for review and selection as required. Indicate any cost differential between samples. 3. After review, samples may be used in construction of Project. C. Field Samples and Mock-ups: Erect at Project site at location acceptable to the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples A. Contractor Responsibilities 1. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples prior to submission. The Contractor will be responsible to submit samples which are to be available during the period of construction. 2. Verify a. Field measurements b. Field construction criteria c. Catalog numbers and similar data. 3. Secure all necessary approvals from public agencies and others and signify by stamp, or other means. that they have been secured. 4. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work. Contract Documents, all trades, and public agencies involved. 5. Contractors responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals. 6. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations. 7. Notify Architect in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. 8. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect's stamp and initials or signature indicating review. The Architect takes not responsibility for items delivered to the site and rejected if no Shop Drawings were submitted. 9. After Architect reviews, distribute copies. Architect's Duties (General Conditions) 1. Review submittals with reasonable promptness. 2. Review for: a. Design concept of project. b. Information given in Contract Documents. 3. Review of separate item does not constitute review of an assembly in which item functions. 4. Affix stamp and initials or signature certifying to review of submittal 5. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution. 6. Review of Shop Drawings by Arch itecUEngineer shall not be construed as_a- complete check but will indicate only that the general method of construction and' detailing is satisfactory. Review of such drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any error which may exist in the submittals as Contractor, shall be responsible for dimensions and design of adequate connections, details and satisfactory construction of all work. 01 3300-4 May 30, 2012 SUBMITTALS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 7. The Architect will only check those submittals which have been prepared by the contractor or subcontractor that is actually supplying, fabricating or installing the product to be reviewed. Any evidence that the submittal was prepared by a prime contractor for a subcontractor without the subcontractors knowledge will result in the submittal being return marked Rejected/Resubmit. 8. The Architect's stamp, affixed to the Shop Drawing, means only what is says; that the submittal has been reviewed and is released for fabrication as is or as noted, must be resubmitted or has been rejected. The stamp does not represent a Change Order Authorization. The Contractor will bear all increased costs for reviewed products that have not been previously approved by the Architect for use on this project. C. Timing 1. General a. Make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates of installation to provide all required time for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revision and resubmittal, and for placing orders and securing delivery. b. In scheduling, allow at least ten full working days for the Architect's review following receipt of the submittal. c. Mechanical and Electrical submittals should be allowed additional lead time for Engineer's review. d. Submittals pertaining to color selection are interdependent. No colors will be selected without all samples. 2. Delays: Costs of delays occasioned by tardiness of submittals may backcharged as necessary and shall not be borne by the Owner. Such costs will include the purchase, installation and removal of temporary materials, equipment and fixtures, as required in writing by the Owner, to allow the project to be used or occupied until the permanent materials, equipment and fixtures can be installed. The Owner will not be forced to accept alternate materials, equipment, fixtures or colors because of the failure of the contractor's to make timely submission of Shop Drawings and product data. n .rr l_J May 30, 2012 01 3300-5 SUBMITTALS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 01 33 00-6 May 30, 2012 SUBMITTALS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Handling 2.1 Testing 22 Inspections PART GENERAL 1_1 Description 2.3 Documents 3.1 Contractor's Inspections 3.2 Architect's Inspections 3.3 Testing Laboratories 3.4 Updated A. Work Included: During the course of the Work the Contractors will maintain a means of insuring quality control of the Project. Such means of control shall include: 1. On-site construction. 2. Off-site operations. 3. Testing laboratory. 4. Reports 5. Testing and inspection requirements. 6. Updated documents. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Requirements for quality controls, certification and tests may be described in various Sections of these Specifications and the General Conditions. C. Work Not Included 1. Selection of testing laboratories employed by Owner. 2. Payment of testing laboratories for initial testing. D. Work by Owner 1. Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified testing. a. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. b. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Inspectors: Quality control personnel shall be familiar with all aspects of the Work and experienced in controlling the finished quality of the Work. B. Qualifications of Testing Laboratories --; 1. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifucation',r, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. �_'; _ �•. IT May 30, 2012 01,4500-1, QUALITY CONTROL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E 329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction." 3. Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located. 4. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 5. Testing Equipment. a. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: (1) National Bureau of Standards. (2) Accepted values of natural physical constants. C. Codes and Standards: Testing, when required, will be in accord with all pertinent codes and regulations and with selected standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. 13 Submittals: Test reports, inspection reports and other documents will be submitted to all interested parties. 1_4 Product Handling: Promptly process and distribute all required copies of reports and related instructions to ensure all necessary retesting and/or replacement of materials with the least possible delay in progress of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Testing A. Code Compliance Testing: Inspections and tests, required by codes or ordinances, or by a plan approval authority and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of and shall be paid for by the Contractor. unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor's Convenience Testing: Inspection or testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. C. Testing laboratory inspection, sampling and testing is requested by the Owner for 1. Portland cement concrete paving Section 03 30 00 2. Concrete reinforcement Section 03 30 00 3. Cast -in-place concrete Section 03 30 00 4. Structural metal framing Section 05 12 00 5. Metal fabrications Section 05 50 00 6. Soil compaction control Section 31 20 00 D. Payment for Testing 1. Initial services: a. The Owner will pay for all initial testing services requested by the Owner _ b. When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents; the costs of initial tests associated with that non-compliance will be deducted -by the -Owner` from the Contract Sum. 2. Retesting: When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents; all subsequent retesting occasioned by the non-compliance shall be peffo Ted by the I1 01 4500-2 May 30, 2012 QUALITY CONTROL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING same testing laboratory and the costs thereof will be deducted by the Owner from the Contract Sum. 2_2 Inspections A. On -Site: The Contractors will provide the necessary personnel to maintain continuous inspection of the Work to insure compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents, all applicable Codes and Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Off -Site Construction: The Contractors will provide the necessary inspections to insure the adequacy of all items manufactured off site and delivered to the job ready for installation. 2_3 Documents: The Contractors will prepare all documents necessary to comply with the requirements of this Section and deliver same to all interested parties. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Contractor's Inspections: The Contractor will continuously monitor the quality of the Work. Any work found to be inadequate will be corrected immediately. Any work found inadequate but requiring the consultation of the Architect will be reported to the Architect and then corrected immediately after clarification. Proper inspection procedures by the Contractor will eliminate the need for a Punch List at the completion of the job. 3_2 Architect's Inspections A. The Architect will perform a periodic inspection of the job as required by his/her agreement with the Owner. The Contractor will immediately carry out the Architect's instructions based on these inspections. The Architect will not assume the role of a full time inspector because of the inadequacies of the inspection procedures of the Contractors. B. As part of the Architect's inspections, the Contractor will provide the necessary tools and instruments to allow for the on-site verification of all dimensions, grades and elevations. 3_3 Testing Laboratories (Owner or Contractor Employed) A. Laboratory Duties 1. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor, provide qualified personnel after due notice. 2. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction: Comply with specified standards. As certain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. 3. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of Work or products. 4. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor and one copy to Record Document File. 5. Perform additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner. B. Limitations of Authority of Testing Laboratory c 1. Laboratory is not authorized to: N8' v a. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Dodumi elms b. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. May 30, 2012 01 45 00-3 QUALITY CONTROL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING c. Perform any duties of the Contractor. C. Contractor's Responsibilities 1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to Manufacturer's operations. 2. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. 3, Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. 4. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. 5. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested. b. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. c. To facilitate inspections and tests. d. For storage and curing of test samples. 6. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. a. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence. D. Schedules for Testing 1. Establishing schedule: a. By advance discussion with the testing laboratory selected by the Owner, determine the time required for the laboratory to perform its tests and to insure each of its findings. 2. Adherence to schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the determined schedule but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the Work, all extra costs for testing attributable to the delay may be back -charged to the Contractor and shall not be borne by the Owner. E. Taking Specimens: All specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in these Contract Documents. will be taken by the testing laboratory; all sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the testing laboratory; and all deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory. F. Notification: Testing agency shall notify all interested parties before testing begins, 3_4 Updated Documents A. Latest Contract Documents: The Contractors will be responsible for prompt distribution to all parties of the latest revised Contract Documents as supplied by the Architect. B. Record Documents: The Contractors will supply the Architect with record documents for those items which differ from the Contract Documents. This will be done immediately and not be left to the end of the Construction. =' 01 4500-4 May 30 2012 QUALITY CONTROL r, IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.6 Access Roads and Parking 1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Areas Agencies 2.7 Traffic Regulations 2.1 Utilities 2.8 Project Identification and Signs 2.2 Construction Aids 2.9 Field Offices and Sheds 2.3 Barriers 2.10 Owner Occupancy 2.4 Security 3.1 Removal 2.5 Temporary Controls PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included: Temporary facilities and controls required for this Work include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Temporary utilities such as gas, water, electricity, heat, ventilation and light. 2. Field offices and sheds. 3. Sanitary facilities. 4. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades and canopies. 5. Signs. 6. Barriers. 7. Access roads and parking. 8. Construction elevators and hoists. 9. Security. 10. Special controls such as noise, dust and water. 11. Winter protection. 12. Fire protection. 13. Telephone. 14. Traffic. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Compliance with safety regulations: Comply with all requirements of pertinent regulations as described in the General Conditions of the Contract. 2. Subcontractor equipment: Except that equipment furnished by subcontractors shall comply with all requirements of pertinent safety regulations, the ladders, hoists, planks and similar items normally furnished by individual trades in execution of their own portions of the Work are not part of this Section of these Specifications. 3. Utility hook-up: Installation and hook-up of the various utility lines are described in the pertinent other Sections of these Specifications. 4. Sitework Section 31 20 00 5. Mechanical Materials Division 23 Electrical Materials and Lighting 1_2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: regulations. May 30, 2012 Division 26 Comply with Federal, State andtb-cbl codes andr, 01'50 00-1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Utilities A. Temporary Heating, Cooling and Ventilating 1. Conditions Required: a. Provide and operate equipment required to control temperature and humidity, as necessary to facilitate progress of Work. b. Provide ventilating and cooling required to maintain adequate conditions. (1) To control humidity, and to prevent condensation which would have and adverse affect on products and finishes or which would affect application of materials. (2) To cure installed materials. c. Ventilation Required: (1) General: To prevent hazardous accumulations of dust; fumes, mists, vapor or gases in areas occupied during construction. (a) Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. (b) Dispose of exhaust materials in a manner which will not result in harmful exposure to persons. (c) Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials. 2. Use of Permanent System: a. Prior to used of permanent system, obtain written permission of Owner, which will define: (1) Conditions of use. (2) Provisions relating to guarantees on equipment. 3. Costs of Installation and Operation: a. The General Contractor will pay fees and charges for applications, permits and inspections. b. The General Contractor will pay costs of installation, fuel, operation, maintenance and removal of equipment and restoration of permanent facilities used. c. The Owner will assume payment for heat providing the building is either permanently or properly temporarily enclosed and usable part of the permanent heating system is operating. 4. Materials: a. Comply with applicable Sections of Division 23, Mechanical. b. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for the purposes intended, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 5. Equipment: a. Provide required facilities, including piping, wiring and controls, as appropriate. b. Portable heaters: Standard units, in compliance with applicable codes and regulations. 6. Installation: a. Comply with applicable Sections of Division 23, Mechanical. b. Modify and extend system as work progress requires. c. Locate units to provide uniform distribution of heat and air movement. -' 7. Operation of Permanent Equipment (HVAC Sub -Contractor) , a. Place operational zones of permanent HVAC system in use sequentially as respective areas of Project become adequately enclosed for efficient operation.': g. 01 5000-2 May 30, 2012 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. Prior to operation verify that inspection has been made by proper authorities and installation has been approved for operation. c. Install temporary filters for air handling units and for permanent ducts. d. Protect permanent radiation units, such as convectors or finned pipe. e. Provide operation and maintenance of systems. 8. Removal: a. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when use is no longer required. b. Restore existing equipment used for temporary services to original or better condition. c. Restore permanent equipment used for temporary services to specified condition. d. Remove temporary filters and install new. Temporary Electricity (See applicable sections of Division 26 Electrical) 1. Service Requirements: a. The Electrical Contractor will provide temporary power during the course of construction for all Contractors. This will be done through a separate temporary service. b. Power centers for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in the work: (1) Weatherproof distribution box with minimum of four 20 ampere, 120 volt grounded outlets. (2) Locate so that power is available at any point of use with not more than 100 foot power cords. (3) Minimum: One on each floor of building. (4) Circuit breaker protection for each outlet. c. Power to maintain continuous operation of Owner's facilities during changeover of electrical services. d. Capacity of Service: (1) Provide electrical service for construction used by trades during construction period; minimum 120/240 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. See Electrical Specifications. (2) Notify power company when unusually heavy loads, such as for welding and other equipment with special power requirements, will be connected. (3) Any trade requiring service of capacity or characteristics other than that specifies shall provide and pay for the additional service. e. Power Source: Mid American Energy Co., Michelle Payne, Phone (319) 341-4432; Fax (319) 341-4490 f. Preliminary Power Source: (1) Prior to availability of service, provide portable power plants of a capacity adequate for construction needs. 2. Use of Permanent System: a. Prior to use of permanent system for construction purposes, obtain written permission of Owner. b. Maintain permanent system as specified for temporary facilities 3. Costs of Installation and Operation a. General Contractor: ' (1) Pay costs of electrical power used. b. Electrical Contractor: - (1) To obtain permits and applications. The General Contractor to pay for permits, installation fees and related charges. May 30, 2012 01 5000-3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (2) Pay costs of installation, maintenance and removal of temporary services. and restoration of any permanent facilities used. c. Subcontractors: Should any subcontractor do any electric welding on the job, they shall inform the Electrical Contractor and work out a satisfactory agreement for payment to the General Contractor for his power. 4. Materials and Equipment: a. General: (1) Comply with applicable sections — Division 26 Electrical. (2) Products may be new or used. but must be adequate in capacity for required usage, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. (3) Each trade will provide all extension cords. 5. Installation: a. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Sections of Division 26. Electrical. b. Maintain system to provide continuous service. c. Modify and extend service as work progress requires. d. Make connections for temporary heating, cooling and ventilating equipment: (1) Wire all safety devices specified for final operation of equipment. (2) Verify proper operation of safety devices. 6. Removal: a. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment: (1) When construction needs can be met by use of permanent installation. (2) At completion of Project. Ip. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to original or better condition. c. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition. C. Temporary Lighting 1. The Electrical Contractor will provide temporary artificial lighting in enclosed areas and for all areas when natural light does not meet minimum requirements for: a. Construction work. (1) For work areas: uniform illumination of 20 foot-candles. b. Security. c. Temporary offices, storage, shop and other construction buildings. 2. Use of Permanent System: Prior to use of permanent lighting system, obtain written permission of Owner. 3. Materials: a. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Sections of Division 16. Electrical. b. Immediately prior to final inspection, clean fixtures and replace defective lamps and any other defective parts. D. Temporary Telephone Service 1. Service Requirements: a. The General Contractor will arrange for local telephone service gompany to provide direct line service for use of personnel and employees: (1) One direct line instrument in Contractor's field office. (2) Other instruments at Contractor's option, or as required by regulations. ,.1 01 5000-4 May 30,'2042 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. Provide adequate number of service lines and instruments for needs of trades. Telephone Service Company: Qwest / Century Link, Rob McGovern; Phone (319) 399-7227; Fax (319) 399-7307, Cable Service: MEDIACOM — Tim Eagan: Phone (319)-351-0408 x235, Fax (319) 351-3839; Fiber Optics: A T & T — Jim Goeke: (515) 986-9413. c. Provide one alphabetical and one classified telephone service company directory: (1) In Contractor's field office. d. Provide Project directory at each instrument, listing name and telephone number of job representative of each entity. (1) Prime Contractor and major subcontractors. (2) Architect. (3) Professional consultants. (4) Testing laboratory. (5) Regulatory agencies. (6) Other listings as required by laws, codes or regulations. 2. Use of Permanent System: Do not allow use of permanent telephone system by construction personnel, except by written agreement with the Owner. 3. Costs of Installation and Operation: a. The General Contractor will pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal of temporary services, and restoration of existing or permanent facilities used. b. The General Contractor will pay service company charges for local telephone service and for toll charges. (1) Contractor is responsible for collecting for toll charges made by persons other than those in their own organization. 4. Materials: a. General: (1) Comply with applicable sections of Division 26 — Electrical. (2) Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for purpose and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 5. Equipment: a. Standard products of service company. b. At Contractor's option, patented specialty devices may be used, when in compliance with applicable codes and service company requirements. 6. Installation: a. Comply with applicable provisions of applicable sections of Division 26 — Electrical. b. Install and maintain system for uninterrupted service, to required locations. c. Modify, relocate and extend services as work progress requires. 7. Removal: a. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment on completion of construction. b. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities) E. Temporary Gas and Water f. 1. Construction Water and Gas: - a. Provide adequate supply of water and gas suitable for construction usage. b. Capacity of Service: (1) Size water and gas service to provide adequate volume for all anticipated construction uses, and to maintain minimum specified pressure when taps are in use. May 30, 2012 01 5000-5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING c. Water Source: City of Iowa City Water Dept: Ed Moreno (319) 356-5160 d. Gas Source: Mid American Energy Co., Michelle Payne, Phone (319) 341-4432; Fax (319) 341-4490 e. Water and Gas Source: (1) Install specified permanent system, sufficiently complete to serve for temporary supply. (2) Obtain inspections and certifications from authorities prior to use. f. Maintain strict supervision of use of temporary system: (1) Protect against freezing; repair leaks. 2. Use of Permanent System: a. Prior to use of permanent system for construction purposes, obtain written permission of Owner. b. Prior to use of system for drinking water: (1) Disinfect piping. (2) Obtain inspection and approval of governing authority. c. Extend system as necessary to comply with temporary water and gas requirements. 3. Costs of Installation and Operation: a. The General Contractor will pay fees and charges for applications and permits. b. Pay costs of installation, maintenance and removal of temporary servicesand restoration of existing and permanent facilities used. c. The General Contractor will pay costs for water and gas used. d. Obtain and pay costs for temporary easements required across proprieties other than that of the Owner. 4. Materials: a. General: (1) Comply with applicable sections of Division 23 — Mechanical (2) Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for purpose required, must be sanitary.. and must not violate requirements of applicable codes. 5. Installation: a. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Sections of Division 23, Mechanical. b. Maintain system to provide continuous service. c. Modify and extend service as work progress requires. d. When necessary to maintain pressure, provide temporary pumps, tanks and compressors. 6. Removal: a. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment. (1) When construction can be met by use of permanent installation. (2) At completion of Project. b. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities c. Restore existing facilities, used for temporary services, to original or better condition. d. Restore permanent facilities, used for temporary services, to specified condition. Temporary Sanitary Facilities 1 Use of Permanent Facilities: a. When portions of permanent sanitary sewerage and water systemshave been-- , installed, tested and inspected, install temporary plumbing fixtures for u_se of construction personnel. 01 5000-6 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (1) Remove and relocate fixtures as work progress requires. b. Permanent sanitary facilities may be used by construction personnel after completion of installation, testing and inspection. (1) Obtain written permission of Owner prior to usage, establishing conditions of use. 2. Cost of Installation and Operation: a. The General Contractor will obtain and pay for permits as required by governing authorities. b. The General Contractor will pay costs of temporary sanitary facilities, including costs of installation, maintenance and removal. c. The General Contractor will pay service charges for use of portable units. 3. Materials: a. General: (1) Comply with applicable sections of Division 23 — Mechanical. (2) Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate for purpose intended, and must not create unsanitary conditions nor violate code requirements. b. Toilet Facilities: (1) Portable toilets or temporary flush toilets at Contractor's option. 4. Installation: a. Comply with applicable provisions of Sections of Division 23, Mechanical. b. Modify and extend service as work progress requires. c. Place portable toilets in conformance with applicable laws, codes and regulations. d. Temporary flush toilets: Provide water and sewer connections, and install toilets as soon as water supply and sewerage connections are available. 5. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in a clean, operable sanitary condition. 6. Removal: a. Remove portable units when no longer required. b. Remove temporary flush toilets when the space is ready for finishing and adequate facilities are provided elsewhere. c. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment at completion of project. d. Clean and repair areas used for temporary purposes, replace damaged fixtures, surfaces and accessories. G. Temporary Fire Protection: The General Contractor shall provide and maintain, in working order, during the entire construction period, a minimum of three (3) fire extinguishers on each floor level including basement of the building, one in temporary office and such other fire protective equipment and devices as is deems necessary and suitable for any possible class of type of fires. They shall be non -freeze type such as A- BC rated dry chemical extinguishers of not less than 10 pound capacity each. In addition each contractor who maintains an enclosed shed on the premises shall install and maintain in an accessible location one or more similar non-freezing type of fire extinguisher in each shed. Provisions of Local, State or Federal requirements, where more restrictive, shall comply. 2.2 Construction Aids A. General: Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpo§@-;-but must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. — - " o May 30, 2012 01;50 00-7 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING Construction Aids 1. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel to facilitate the execution of the Work; scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other such facilities and equipment. 2. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Construction Elevators and Hoists: The Contractors shall furnish, install and maintain all necessary material hoists, skips, tools, equipment, scaffolding, etc., in approved locations and in sufficient quantities to properly expedite the Work and protect the public. The Contractors will be responsible for the operation of their equipment and allow all contractors to use it as the progress of the work requires. This equipment shall be installed according to State and local requirements and shall be removed by the Contractors at the completion of the Work. The permanent elevator may not be used. D. Temporary Enclosures 1. Provide temporary weather -tight enclosures of exterior walls for successive areas of the building as work progresses, as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. a. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks. b. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. c. Exterior partitions or enclosures shall be covered with 3 inch insulation on interior face. 2. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from the areas of existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations. a. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. (1) Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetrations of dust of moisture. Installation 1. Preparation: Consult with Architect, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and construction aids, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the Work. 2. General: a. Preparation: Consult with Architect, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and construction aids, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the Work. b. Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate legitimate requirements of Owner and other Contractors employed at the site. F. Removal 1. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment and services: - a. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 01 5000-8 May 30,12012 — CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. At completion of the Project. 2. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities. a. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids. b. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean this area. 3. Restore existing facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. 4. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified condition. 2.3 Barriers A. Materials, General: Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. B. Silt Fencing: Materials: as required by detail shown on Site Plan. C. Installation 1. General: a. Install facilities of neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for the required purposes. b. Maintain barriers during entire construction period. c. Relocate barriers as required by progress of construction. 2. Silt Fences: a. Prior to the start of Work at the Project Site, install as located on Site Plan. D. Removal 1. Completely remove barricades; silt fence, when construction has progressed to the point that they are no longer needed, and when approved by Architect. 2. Clean and repair damages caused by installation, fill and grade the areas of the Site to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. 2_4 Security A. Responsibility: During the course of construction, up until the time the Owner accepts the Work as completed, the General Contractor only assumes care and custody of the Work and will be responsible for the Work. B. Maintenance of Security 1. Initiate security program promptly after job mobilization, when enclosure fence and gates are installed. C. Personnel 1. Identification: 2. Exclude from Site personnel not properly identified. �i D. Entrance Control 1. Provide control of all persons and vehicles entering and leaving Project Site. a. Allow no visitors except with issuance of temporary identification.- 2. Owner will control deliveries and vehicles related to his/her own opeF606ns. f E. Safety Barrier: The Contractor is responsible to secure the site. May 30, 2012 01 5000-9 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2_5 Temporary Controls A. Dust Control: All Contractors will provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from construction operations, and provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. B. Water Control 1. The General Contractor will provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to the Project, the Site, or adjoining properties. See silt fence location and construction on Site Plan. a. Control fill, grading and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits. tunnels and other construction areas: and to direct drainage to proper runoff. 2. Provide, operate and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to control surface and water. 3. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion.. or other damage to any portion of the Site or to adjoining areas as required by applicable codes and ordinances. C. Debris Control 1. Maintain all areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris. 2. Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction Site, storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes. a. Provide containers for deposit of debris as specified in Section 01 77 16, Cleaning. b. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes. (1) Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements. 4. Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris as specified in Section 0 77 16, Cleaning. a. Provide additional collections and disposals of debris whenever the periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent accumulation. D. Pollution Control 1. All Contractors will provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. 2. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillages, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids, a. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. 3. Take special measure to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters. a. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals or other such substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers. 4. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. a. Prevent toxic concentration of chemicals. b. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. E. Erosion Control: Per Local and State requirements — see section 31 2016d' 01 5000-10 May 30, 2012 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING F. Soil Control: After the soil is excavated, General Contractor will isolate any excavated areas that tend to become tacky due to vehicular traffic. 2_6 Access Roads and Parking Areas A. Site Access Roads 1. The General Contractor will provide site access for all construction equipment vehicles. 2. Construct new temporary access roads over designated easements from public thoroughfare to entire construction site area. B. On -Site Roads and Parking Areas 1. Locate roads, drives, walks and parking facilities to provide uninterrupted access to construction offices, mobilization, work, storage areas, and other areas required for execution of the Contract. 2. Provide access for emergency vehicles. a. Maintain driveways a minimum of 15 feet wide between and around combustible materials in storage and mobilization areas. 3. Maintain traffic areas free as possible of excavated materials, construction equipment, products, snow, ice and debris. 4. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and accessible for use. C. Base and Topping Materials 1. For temporary construction which will be removed when no longer needed for construction purposes: To Contractors option. 2. For earthwork and topping which will become a permanent part of the work: respective sections of Specifications. D. Preparation 1. Clear areas required for access roads and parking areas. 2. Fill, compact and grade areas as necessary to provide suitable support for vehicular traffic anticipated loadings. Provide for heaviest vehicle that will use site e.g. concrete trucks, mobile cranes, precast concrete trucks, etc. 3. Provide for surface drainage of facilities and surrounding areas. a. Provide and operate temporary pumps. E. Construction 1. Construction methods for temporary facilities to be removed when no longer needed: To Contractor's option to provide the required results. 2. For work which will become a part of permanent work, comply with respective sections of Specification for preparation and construction. 3. Any gravel topping used for temporary roadway shall be at least 6 inches below finished elevation of permanent drives. Topping shall be at least one foot below finished landscape areas or removed to that point below finished grading. F_ Maintenance 1. Maintain roads, walks and parking areas in sound, clean condition.=`;R" a. Repair or replace any portions damaged during progress of consiruetion work; May 30, 2012 04 50 00-11 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING G. Removal 1. Completely remove temporary materials and construction when construction needs can be met by use of permanent installation. a. Remove and dispose of compacted materials to depths required by various conditions to be met in completed Work. 2. See Section 31 20 00. Access for all contractors. 2_7 Traffic Regulations A. Traffic Signals and Signs 1. The General Contractor will provide and operate traffic control and directional signals required to direct and maintain an orderly flow of traffic in all areas under Contractor's control, or affected by Contractor's operations. 2. Provide traffic control and directional signs, mounted on barricades or standard posts: a. At each change of direction of a roadway and at each crossroads. b. At detours. c. At parking areas. B. Haul Routes 1. Consult with governing authorities to establish public thoroughfares which will be used as haul routes and site access. 2. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. 3. Keep haul routes free of mud and debris to meet local ordinances. 2_8 Project Identification and Signs A. Project Identification Sign 1. The General Contractor will providebe allowed to have one (1) 4' X 8' FT identification sign as approved by Owner prior to installation. B. Quality Assurance 1. Sign Painter: Professional experience in the type of work required. 2. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to resist weathering and fading for the scheduled construction period. C. Allow no other signs or advertising of any type on the job Site except as specifically approved by the Architect. D. Sign Materials 1. Structure and Framing: May be new or used, wood or metal, in sound condition structurally adequate to the work and suitable for specified finish. 2. Sign Surfaces: Exterior softwood plywood with medium density overlay, standard large sizes to minimize joints. a. Thickness: As required by standards to span across framing members, to provide even. smooth surface without waves or buckles._ 3. Rough Hardware: Galvanized. ` ---- 4. Paint: Exterior quality, as specified in Section 09 90 00. — -- a. Use bulletin colors for graphics. 01 5000-12 May' 30, 2012` CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. Colors for structure, framing, sign surfaces and graphics: As selected by Architect. E. Execution 1. Project Identification Sign: a. Paint all exposed surfaces of supports, framing and surface material; one coat of primer and one coat of exterior paint. b. Paint graphics in the styles, sizes and colors as selected. 2. Information Signs: a. Paint all exposed surfaces: one coat of primer and one coat of exterior paint. b. Paint graphics in the styles, sizes and colors as selected. c. Install at a height for optimum visibility, on ground -mounted poles or attached to temporary structural surfaces. F. Maintenance 1. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition: repair damages to structure, framing or sign. 2. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of the Work. G. Removal: Remove signs, framing, supports and foundations at the completion of project. 2.9 Field Office and Sheds A. Coordination: Prior to installation of offices and sheds, consult with Architect on location, access and related facilities. B. Requirements for Facilities 1. Construction: a. Structurally sound, weathertight, with floors raised above ground. b. Temperature transmission resistance: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. c. At Contractor's option, portable or mobile buildings may be used. (1) Mobile homes, when used, shall be modified for office use. (2) Do not use mobile homes for living quarters. C. Materials, Equipment, Furnishings: May be new or used, but must be serviceable, adequate for the required purpose, and must not violate applicable codes or regulations. D. Preparation: Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide surface drainage. E. Installation 1. Construct temporary field offices and storage sheds on proper foundations, provide connections for utility services. - a. Secure portable or mobile buildings when used. b. Provide steps and landings at entrance doors. 2. Mount thermometer at convenient outside location, not in direct sunlight.... F. Maintenance and Cleaning: Provide periodic maintenance and cleaning dor temporary structures, furnishings, equipment and services. May 30, 2012 01 50 00-13 7 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING G. Removal 1. Remove temporary field offices, contents and services at time they are no longer needed. 2. Remove storage sheds when they are no longer needed. 3. Remove foundations and debris, grade the site to required elevations and clean the areas. 2.10 Owner Occupancy: As portions of the building are completed the space should be made so the Owner can set up their equipment, if so requested. In those areas occupied, the General Contractor will take the necessary precautions to protect Owner's equipment against damage and dust, PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Removal: Maintain all temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for the safe and proper completion of the Work; remove all such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the Work will permit or as directed by the Architect. 01 50 00-14 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS f- - 01 -- IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 0160 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.3 Storage and Protection 1.2 Submittals 2.4 Substitution and Product Options 2.1 Materials and Equipment 3.1 Storage of Materials 2.2 Transportation and Handling 3.2 Protection PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included: The Work under this Section will insure the proper handling and protection of materials and establish methods for product approval and shall include but is not limited to: 1. Transportation and handling 2. Storage and protection 3. Installation requirements 4. Identifying markings 5. Product approval standards 6. Substitutions and product options B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Substitutions during bidding Instruction to Bidders 2. Coordination Section 01 30 00 3. Schedule of Values Section 01 30 00 4. Shop Drawings, Project Data, Samples Section 01 30 00 5. Quality Control Section 01 45 00 C. Definitions 1. "Or Equal' Clause: Whenever the Contract Documents designate any article, material or equipment by describing a propriety product or by using the name of a Manufacturer or vendor, the term "or equal' shall apply. The article, material or equipment so named shall be understood to define a type, function, minimum standard of design, efficiency and quality desired, and is not intended to eliminate competition. The Contractor may, by complying with the requirements of Article E of the Instruction to Bidders, use authorized substitutions in the Bid. Determination of "or equal" products is the responsibility of the Architect. The burden is on the Manufacturer, who has not been specified by name, to convince the Architect that the product is equal. 1.2 Submittals = A. Product Approval r 1. Within fifteen (15) days after date of Contract, submit to Architect five'popies of complete list of all products which are proposed for installation. 2. Tabulate list by each Specification Section. _ 3. For products specified under reference standards, include with listing -of each product - May 30, 2012 01 6000-1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING a. Name and address of Manufacturer b. Trade name. c. Model or catalog designation. d. Manufacturer's data. (1) Performance and test data. (2) Reference standards. B. Substitutions 1. Architect will consider substitutions quoted with Base bid, and requests submitted with Bid. 2. Within 15 days after date of Contract, Architect will consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Materials and Equipment A. General 1. Materials and equipment incorporated into the Work" a. Conform to applicable Specifications and Standards. b. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Architect. c. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: (1) Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. (2) Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable. (3) Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same Manufacturer. (4) Products shall be suitable for service conditions. (5) Equipment capacities. sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. d. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified. B. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with Manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation and until completion. a. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. 2. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. a. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions. 3. Perform work in accord with Manufacturer's instructions. Do no omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract` Documents. r , 01 6000-2 May 3b 2012, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING C. Identifying Markings: Nameplates and markings required by codes of regulations or as required for proper operation of equipment shall be affixed for ready access but shall not be placed in exposed surfaces unless required otherwise. 2_2 Transportation and Handling A. Delivery 1. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. 2. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site: a. Work of other Contractors or Owner. b. Limitations of storage space. c. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. d. Owner's use of premises. 3. Deliver products in undamaged condition in original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 4. Partial deliveries of component parts of equipment shall be clearly marked to identify the equipment, to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly. 5. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure: a. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. b. Quantities are correct. c. Containers and packages are intact, labels are legible. d. Products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Product Handling 1. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by Owner by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 2. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring or otherwise damaging products or surrounding surfaces. 3. Handle products by methods to prevent bending or overstressing. 4. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. 2_3 Storage and Protection A. Storage 1. Store products immediately on delivery, and protect until installed in the Work. a. Store in accord with Manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weathertight enclosures. 3. Exterior Storage: a. Provide substantial platforms, blocking or skids to support fabricated prodEets above ground, prevent soiling or staining. (1) Cover products, subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, wit impervious sheet coverings. Provide adequate ve'rikilatior( to avoid condensation. b. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces such as paved areas,.or provide plywood or sheet materials to prevent mixing with foreign matter..` , ._ ) (1) Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rain water. _. May 30, 2012 01 6000-3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (2) Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials with liquids. 4. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection. B. Maintenance of Storage 1. Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to assure that: a. State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions. b. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. c. Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected. (1) Any weathering of products, coating and finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Mechanical and electrical equipment which requires servicing during long term storage shall have complete Manufacturer's instructions for servicing accompanying each item: with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package. a. Comply with Manufacturer's instructions on scheduled basis. b. Space heaters which are part of electrical equipment shall be connected and operated continuously until equipment is placed in service. C. Protection After Installation 1. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage form subsequent operations. Remove when no longer needed, prior to completion of Work. 2. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment and surfaces. 3. Provide coverings to protect finished surfaces from damage. a. Cover projections, wall corners and jambs. sills and soffits of openings, in areas used for traffic and for passage of products in subsequent work. b. Protect finished doors and stairs from dirt and damage: (1) In areas subject to foot traffic, secure heavy paper, sheet goods or other materials in place. (2) For movement of heavy products, lay planking or similar materials in place. (3) For storage of products, lay tight wood sheathing in place. (4) Cover walls and floor of elevator cars, and surfaces of elevator car doors, used by construction personnel. 4. Waterproofed and roofing surfaces: a. Prohibit use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of any products. b. When some activity must take place, in order to carry out the Contract. obtain recommendations of installer for protection of surface. (1) Install recommended protection, remove on completion of that activity. (2) Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. 5. Lawns and Landscaping: Prohibit traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscaped areas. 2_4 Substitution and Product Options A. Product Approval Standard 1. Definitions: a. The term "product' shall include material, equipment, assembV-ri ethods; Manufacturer, brand, trade name, or other description. b. References to "approved equal' or similar terms mean that approval of the - Architect is is required. 01 6000-4 May 30, 2012 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Contractors Options: a. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, by any Manufacturer. (1) Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product be in accord with Federal Specifications, ASTM designation, ANSI Specifications or other association standards, the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the Manufacturer certifying that the product complies therewith. Where requested or specified submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance. b. For products specified by naming several products or Manufacturers, select any product and Manufacturer named. c. For products specified by naming one or more products, but indicating the option of selecting equivalent products by stating "or equal" after specified product, Contractor must submit request, as required for substitution, for any product not specifically named. d. For products specified by naming only one product and Manufacturer, there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed. B. Availability of Specified Items: Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the Work. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, so notify the Architect prior to receipt of Bids. Costs or delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could have been avoided by the Contractor, will be backcharged as necessary and shall not be borne by the Owner. C. Substitutions 1. For a period of 30 days after Contract Date, Architect will consider written requests from Contractor for substitutions of Products. 2. Submit five copies of request for substitution. Include in request: a. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. b. For products: (1) Product identification, including Manufacturer's name and address. (2) Manufacturer's literature: (a) Product description. (b) Performance and test data. (c) Reference standards. (3) Samples (4) Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date of installation. c. For construction methods: (1) Detailed description of proposed method. (2) Drawings illustrating methods. d. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. e. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. -,--. f. Relation to separate contracts. g. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with.product_or method specified. 2. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents: a. They have personally investigated proposed product or method,.and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. May 30, 2012 01 6000-5 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. They will provide the same warranty for substitution as for product or method specified. c. They will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. d. They waive all claims for additional costs related to substitution which consequently becomes apparent. e. Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under the Contract, but excludes: (1) Costs under separate Contracts. (2) Architects or Engineer's redesign. 3. Substitutions will not be considered if: a. The substitutions will result in any increased cost for the Owner over the cost of the item as it was originally specified. b. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or project data submittals without a formal request submitted to the Architect. c. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Storage of Materials A. General 1. All Contractors shall confine their equipment, apparatus. storage of materials and operations to limits indicated and shall not bring materials onto the site until needed for the progress of the Work. 2. Storage of materials within the building shall at no time exceed the design carrying capacity of the structural system. 3. The General Contractor shall slot space to other Contractors and subcontractors for storage of their materials, erection of their sheds. 4. The Owner assumes no responsibility for materials stored in building or on the Site. The Contractors assumes full responsibility for damage due to the storing of material. 32 Protection A General 1. Precaution shall be exercised at all times for the protection of persons, including employees, and property. The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be observed. Machinery equipment and all hazards shall be guarded or eliminated. 2. Notify Owners of corporate or private property if their property interferes with the Work so the arrangements for proper protection can be made. 3. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing to prevent earth from caving or washing into the building excavation. Provide temporary protection around openings through floors and roofs, including elevator openings, stairwells and ;edge of slabs. B. Finish Construction 1. Each Contractor shall assume the responsibility for the protection of:ail''finishied construction under this Contract and shall repair and restore any and .611 damage of finished Work to its original state. 01 6000-6 May 30, 2012 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Where responsibility can be fixed, the cost shall be charged to the party responsible. If responsibility cannot be fixed, the cost shall be pro -rated among all Contractors in proportion to their activities at the building at the time the damage was done. 3. No wheeling of any loads over finished floors, either with or without plank protection will be permitted in anything except rubber tired wheelbarrows, buggies, trucks or dollies. This applies to all finished floors and to all concrete floors exposed as well as those covered with composition tile or other applied surfacing, and shall apply to all Contractors and subcontractors. 4. Where structural concrete is also the finished surface care must be taken to avoid marking or damaging those surfaces. May 30, 2012 01 6000-7 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 01 6000-8 May 30, 2012 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 2.1 Project Close Out 3.1 Damage Repair 3.2 Tests and Adjustments 3.3 Project Record Documents 3.4 Operating and Maintenance Data 3.5 Warranties and Bonds PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 3.6 Punch Lists 3.7 Substantial Completion 3.8 Final Inspection 3.9 Reinspection Fees 3.10 Contractor's Closeout Submittals to Architect 3.11 Final Adjustment for Accounts 3.12 Final Application for Payment A. Work Included: Such work as will be necessary to turn the project over to the Owner in a clean and usable condition. The Work shall include but is not limited to: 1. Damage repair 2. Test and adjustments 3. Punch lists 4. Warranties 5. Final waiver of lien 6. Operation and maintenance instructions 7. Project record documents Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Partial Owner Occupancy Section 01 10 00 2. Coordination Section 01 30 00 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Section 01 30 00 4. Operation and Maintenance Data Section 01 30 00 5. Cleaning Section 01 77 16 6. Closeout Submittals Required of Trades The respective Sections of Specification 7. Various Sections of these Specifications describe. Procedures, for individual items, to make finished Construction ready for acceptance by Owner. C. Work by Owner: Owner will pay for the occupancy permit. - 1_2 Quality Assurance A. The Contractor will promptly make any necessary corrections to the Work:as:directed by, the Architect so as to expedite final payments. =' B. Preparation of operating and maintenance data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products. 2. Completely familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. May 30, 2012 01 7000-1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 4. Skilled as a draftsperson competent to prepare required Drawings. 1.3 Submittals: The Contractors will submit all warranties, manuals; Drawings, waivers and test reports as required by the various Sections of this Specification to the Owner at the close of the Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Project Closeout: The Contractors will provide the manpower to promptly close out the Project so that Owner may occupy the building on the date of completion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Damage Repair: The Contractors will make final resolution of the repairing of damaged Work. 3_2 Tests and Adjustments: Each Contractor will perform all tests and make all final adjustments under the actual working condition of each piece of equipment. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations and turn over a complete and workable installation to the Owner. 3_3 Project Record Documents A. Maintenance of Documents 1. Maintain at jobsite, one copy of: a. Contract Drawings. b. Specifications c. Addenda d. Reviewed Shop Drawings e. Change Orders f. Other modifications to Contract g. Field test records. 2. Store documents in field office, apart from documents used for construction. 3. Maintain documents in a clean. dry and legible condition. 4. Do no use record documents for construction purposes. 5. Make documents available at all times for inspection by the Architect and Owner. B. Recording 1. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD". 2. Keep record documents current. 3. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. 4. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction. a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to Floor Level. b. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. d. Field changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes made by Change Order or Field order. -; f. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 5. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark up each Section to record 01 7000-2 May 30, 2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. b. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. c. Other matters not originally specified. Shop Drawings: Maintain as Record Documents; legibly annotate following Drawings to record changes made after review. C. Submittals 1. At completion of Project, deliver Record Documents to Architect. 2. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate containing: a. Data. b. Project title and number. c. Contractor's name and address. d. Title and number of each record document. e. Certification that each document is submitted is complete and accurate. f. Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative. 3_4 Operating and Maintenance Data A. General 1. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. a. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent Sections of Specifications. 2. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 3. This portion of these Specifications will be strictly enforced. Final Payment will not be made until all data has been submitted to the Architect. Any money or time spent by the Architect to obtain information from manufacturer shall be deducted from contractors final payments. B. Form of Submittal 1. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch. b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. c. Drawings: (1) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. (2) Fold larger Drawings to the size of the text pages. d. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. (1) Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of equipment. (2) Provide indexed tabs. e. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: (1) Title of Project (2) Identify of general subject matter covered in the Manual. 3. Binders: Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cle14nable plastic:. covers. r = May 30, 2012 01 7000-3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING C. Content of Manual 1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. c. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of. (1) Subcontractor or installer. (2) Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. (3) Identify the area of responsibility of each. (4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement. d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product, b. Annotate each sheet to: (1) Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. (2) Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. (3) Delete references to inapplicable information. 3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: (1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. (2) Control and flow diagrams. b. Coordinate Drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance Drawings. 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: (1) Proper procedures in the event of failure. (2) Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. D. Manual for Materials and Finishes 1. Submit two copies of complete manual in final form. 2. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes. a. Manufacturers data, giving full information on products. (1) Catalog number, size, composition. (2) Color and texture designations. (3) Information required for re -ordering special -manufactured products. b. Instructions for care and maintenance. (1) Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. (2) Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental tq the product. (3) Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 3. Content, for moisture -protection and weather -exposed products: a. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. (1) Applicable standards. -- (2) Chemical composition. (3) Details of installation. 01 7000-4 May 30. 2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective Sections of Specifications. Manual for Equipment and Systems 1. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. 2. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts. (1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. (2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. (3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures: (1) Start-up, break in, routine and normal instructions. (2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions. (3) Summer and winter operating instructions. c. Maintenance procedures: (1) Routine operations. (2) Guide to "trouble -shooting". (3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. (1) List of lubricants required. e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control Manufacturer. g. Original Manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. (1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear. (2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. h. As -installed control diagrams by controls Manufacturer. I. Each Contractor's coordination Drawings. (1) As -installed color coded piping diagrams. j. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. k. List of original Manufacturer's spare parts, Manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. I. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications. 3. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: a. Description of systems and component parts. (1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. (2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. (3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Circuit directories of panelboards. (1) Electrical service. (2) Controls. (3) Communications. c. As -installed color coded wiring diagrams. d. Operating procedures: (1) Routine and normal operating instructions. (2) Sequences required. --- (3) Special operating instructions. e. Maintenance procedures: : d (1) Routine operations. (2) Guide to "trouble -shooting". May 30, 2012 01 7000-5 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (3) Disassembly. repair and reassembly. (4) Adjustment and checking. f. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. g. List of original Manufacturers spare parts, Manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. h. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications. 4. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. 5. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: The respective Section of Specifications. 6. Provide complete information for products specified in: Submittal Schedule, Submit specified number of copies or approved data in final form ten days after final inspection or acceptance. G. Instruction of Owner's Personnel 1. Prior to final inspection or acceptance. fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation. adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems. 2. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. a. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. 3.5 Warranties and Bonds A. General 1. Compile specified warranties and bonds. 2. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. 3. Co -execute submittals when so specified. 4. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 5. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner. B. Submittal Requirements 1. Assemble warranties. bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturer's, suppliers and subcontractors. 2. Number of original signed copies required: Two each. 3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. a. Product or work item. b. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. c. Scope. d. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. e. Duration or warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. f. Provide information for Owner's personnel: (1) Proper procedure in case of failure. (2) Instance which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. - g. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.. C. Form of Submittals - 1. Prepare in duplicate packets. 2. Format: 01 7000-6 May -30, 2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING a. Size 8-112 inches by 11 inches, punch sheets for 3 -ring binder. (1) Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. b. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS'. List: (1) Title of Project. (2) Name of Contractor. c. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. D. Time of Submittals 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction: a. Submit documents within 10 days after inspection and acceptance. 2. Otherwise make submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. 3. For items of Work, where acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. E. Submittals Required: Submit warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective Sections of Specifications. 3.6 Punch Lists A. Prior to substantial completion, the Architect will inspect the project and publish all items of the Work found unacceptable in the form of a Punch List. The Work described should be done immediately and the Punch list returned to the Architect with each item initialed and dated. The Contractors should not use the punch list as a final inspection service because of their own lack of quality control. B. Contractor will, within 7 days of issuance of Punch List by Architect, provide in Writing to the Architect a Schedule of Completion for the Punch List items. 3_7 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the Work is substantially complete, they shall submit to Architect: 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. C. Should Architect determine that the Work is not substantially complete:_ = 1. Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore.. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a se6dnd written notice of substantial completion to the Architect. 3. Architect will reinspect the Work. May 30, 2012 01 7000-7 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3_8 Final Inspection A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accord with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. B. Architect will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. C. Should Architect consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written certification to Architect that the Work is complete. 3. Architect will reinspect the Work. D. When the Architect finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 3_9 Reinspection Fees A. Should Architect perform reinspections due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 1. Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor. 3.10 Contractor's Closeout Submittals to Architect: Documents required prior to Final Payment: Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of final certificate for payment the following items must be filed with the Architect: A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: 1. Certificates of Inspection a. Elevators b. Mechanical c. Electrical B. Project Record Documents: to requirements of Section 01 70 00. C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel: to requirements df, Section 01 70 00. D. Warranties and Bonds: to requirements of Section 01 70 00. 01 7000-8 May 30, 2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING E. Keys and Keying Schedule: to requirements of Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware. F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. G. Final Waiver of Lien: To indicate that all debts and claims against this Project have been paid in full or otherwise satisfied, and to give final evidence of release of all liens against the Project and its Owner, the Contractors shall submit a certification to that effect. H. Provide the Architect with a written statement that the Owner's maintenance personnel have received operation and maintenance manuals and have received complete instructions on the operation of all equipment under every possible condition. I. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. J. Investment Tax Credit 1. At the close of the Work, the Owner will submit to the Contractor a list of all items of construction eligible for Investment Tax Credits. 2. Contractor will attach separate costs for labor and material to each item and resubmit the list to the Owner. 3.11 Final Adjustment of Accounts A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Architect. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum - 1 . um:1. The original Contract Sum 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Unit Prices. c. Deductions for uncorrected work. d. Deductions for reinspection payments. e. Other adjustments. 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due. C. Architect will prepare a final Change order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. 3.12 Final Application for Payment A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accord with procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract. f r May 30, 2012 01" 7000-9. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 01 7000-10 May 30, 2012 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Submittals 1.3 Payment for Costs 2.1 Materials PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description A. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 1. General Conditions a. Cutting and patching of work b. Tests c. Uncovering and correction of work 2. Summary of Work 3. Coordination 5. Excavating and Backfilling 6. General Provisions, Mechanical Section 7. General Provisions, Electrical Section 3.1 Inspection 3.2 Preparation Prior to Cutting 3.3 Performance Section 01 10 00 Section 01 30 00 Section 31 20 00 Division 23 Division 26 B. Execute Cutting (including excavating), Fitting or Patching of Work, required to: 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing_ 6. Install specified work in existing construction. 7. To receive the work of other contractors as shown or reasonably implied by the Drawings or Specification C. In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions of Architect: 1. Uncover work to provide for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing. 3. Remove work to provide for alteration of existing work. D. Do not endanger any work by cutting or altering work or any part of it. E. Do not out or alter work of another Contractor without written consent of Architect. 1.2 Submittals A. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety of Project, or work of another Contractor, submit written notice to Architect, requesting consent to proceed with cutting, including: 1. Identification of project. 2. Description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting. May 30, 2012 01 73 29-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 4. Affect on other work, on structural integrity of project. 5. Description of proposed work— designate: a. Scope of cutting and patching. b. Contractor and trades to execute work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing. 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Designation of party responsible for cost of cutting and patching. B. Prior to cutting and patching done on instruction of Architect, submit cost estimate. C. Should conditions of work, or schedule, indicate change of materials or methods, submit written recommendation to Architect, including: 1. Conditions indicating change. 2. Recommendations for alternative materials or methods, 3. Submittals as required for Substitutions. D. Submit written notice to Architect, designating time Work will be uncovered, to provide for observation. 1_3 Payment for Costs A. Costs caused by ill-timed or defective Work or Work not conforming to Contract Documents, including cost for additional services of Architect: Party responsible for ill- timed, rejected or nonconforming work. B. Work done on instructions of Architect, other than defective or nonconforming work: Owner. C. Work caused by the damage of a Contractor's installation or equipment by another Contractor: Contractor responsible for causing the damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Materials: For replacement of Work removed, comply with Specifications for type Work to be done. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Inspection A. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movement or damage during: _ 1. Cutting and patching = 2. Excavating and backfilling. B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new product's. r, 01 7329-2 May 30, 2012 CUTTING AND PATCHING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3_2 Preparation Prior to Cutting A. Provide shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity of Project. B. Provide protection for other portions of Project. 3_3 Performance A. Each prime Contractor will arrange for all cutting and patching, for their portion of the Work. Hire only skilled workmen qualified in the type of work required. B. Each Prime Contractor will be expected to cut, bore, drill, etc. through all materials as required including concrete, steel and wood. C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances, finishes. D. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation or repairs and new work. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will prevent settlement. F. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish. 1. Continuous Surfaces: to nearest intersections. 2. Assembly: entire refinishing. H. The painting Contractor will be responsible for repairing all damage to their work under this Specification. May 30, 2012 01 7329-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 01 7329-4 CUTTING AND PATCHING May 30, 2012 i j May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 01 77 16 PROGRESS CLEANING AND FINAL CLEANING SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.3 Containers 1.2 Quality Assurance 3.1 Progress Cleaning 2.1 Cleaning Materials & Equipment 3.2 Final Cleaning 2.2 Compatibility 3.3 Cleaning During Owner's Occupancy PART 1GENERAL 11 1 Description A. Work Included 1. Throughout the construction period, maintain the building, the site and adjacent private and public property in a standard of cleanliness as described in this Section. 2. It shall be the duty of each Prime Contractor to keep the premises free of accumulations of surplus materials and rubbish caused by his operations and the operations of this subcontractors unless otherwise stated. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. General Conditions a. Cleaning up b. Owner's right to clean-up 2. Summary of Work Section 01 10 00 3. Coordination Section 01 30 00 4. Cutting and Patching Section 01 73 29 5. Temporary Controls Section 01 50 00 6. Project Closeout Section 01 70 00 7. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with all requirements for cleaning up as described in various other Sections of these Specifications. 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Inspection: Conduct daily inspections, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to the standards described in this Section, comply with all pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Cleaning Materials and Equipment: Provide all required personnel, equipment.and materials needed to maintain the specified standards of cleanliness. 22 Compatibility: Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which aie compatible with- the surface being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the'"ma'teria4 or as' approved by the Architect. May 30, 2012 01 77 1'6?1 FINAL CLEANING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2_3 Containers: Each Contractor for the General Work will provide metal containers for storage of rubbish which will be used by all persons working for that contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Progress Cleaning A. General 1. Retain all stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum, not impeding drainage or traffic, and providing the required protection of materials. 2. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material and other items not required for construction of this work. 3. At least twice each month, and more often if necessary. completely remove all scrap, debris and waste material from the job site and legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off Owner's propriety. 4. The General Contractor will assign adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site, observing all requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. 5. No burning of rubbish or debris will be allowed at site. No rubbish shall be thrown through openings or form heights without proper protection. 6. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust. 7. The General Contractor will vacuum -clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning on an as needed basis until building is ready for substantial completion or occupancy. 8. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 9. The General Contractor shall perform a broom cleaning of all appropriate surfaces, each Friday afternoon. B. Safety Requirements 1. Hazards Control a. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily. b. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. c. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. d. Keep work areas, passageways. ramps, stairs, free of debris and scrap. e. Form and scrap lumber shall have nails withdrawn or bent over and lumber shall be stacked or removed. f. Remove spills of oil, grease or other liquids immediately or sprinkle with sand. 2. Conduct cleaning and disposal operation to comply with local ordinances and anti- pollution laws. a. Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on project site. b. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. c. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. C. Site -- 1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pickup all scrap; debris and waste material. Remove all such items to the place designated for their storage. 01 77 16-2 May 30, 2012 FINAL CLEANING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site, restack, tidy or otherwise service all arrangements to meet the requirements of paragraph 3.1-A-1 above. 3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly conditions at all times to the approval of the Architect. D. Structures 1. Weekly, and more often if necessary, each prime contractor will inspect the structures and pick up all their scrap, debris and waste material. Remove all such items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, the General Contractor will sweep all interior spaces clean. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by reasonable diligence using a hand-held broom. 3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structures or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using all equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness. 4. Following the installation of finished floor materials, the General Contractor will clean the finished floor daily (and more often if necessary) at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials have been installed. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free form all foreign material which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material. 5. Daily cleanup, within all Owner occupied areas in which work has occurred, will be the responsibility of the Contractor doing the work. E. Graffiti: As directed by the Architect, the General Contractor will promptly remove all evidence of graffiti within the limits of the site. F. Disputes Over Responsibility for Cleaning: If, during the course of construction, disputes should arise over which parties are responsible for cleaning all or a portion of the work, the Architect will require each prime contractor, working at the site, to supply one employee for a clean-up crew, which will be under the direction of the General Contractor, 3_2 Final Cleaning A. Definition: Except as otherwise specifically provided, "Clean" (for the purpose of this Article) shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided by commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials. Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, as approved by the Owner, for final cleaning. B. General: Prior to completion of the Work, all Contractors will remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in Article 3.1 above.; C. Site: Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, the General"bontractor will hose down all paved areas on the site and all public sidewalks directly adjacent tQ the _ """' site. Completely remove all resultant debris. Rake clean other surfaces -of,,, grounds. May 30, 2012 01 77 16-3 FINAL CLEANING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING Remove snow and ice from access to building. D. Structures 1. Exterior: The General Contractor will visually inspect all exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste material, smudges and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the Architect may require light sandblasting or other cleaning, by the responsible Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Interior: The General Contractor will visually inspect all interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste material, smudges and other foreign matter. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. Remove all paint droppings. spots, stains and dirt from finished surfaces. Use only the specified cleaning materials equipment. Stubborn stains will be removed by the responsible Contractor at the direction of the Architect. 3, Window Washing: General Contractor shall wash all glass immediately prior to occupancy of this project. Work shall include the removal of labels, paint splattering, putty or compound, etc. Surfaces shall include both sides of all glass in windows, borrowed lights, partitions, doors. Include mirrors. 4. Polished surfaces: To all surfaces requiring the routine application of buffed polish, apply the specified polish as recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. 5. Carpet: The General Contractor will vacuum all carpeted areas. 6. Mechanical Systems (HVAC Contractor) a. Clean ducts, blowers and coils, if air conditioning units were operated without filters during construction. b. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction. 7. Electrical Fixtures (Electrical Contractor) a. Lenses and louvers should be free of dirt and dust. E. Timing 1. Schedule final cleaning as approved by the Architect to enable the Owner to accept a completely clean project. 2. The General Contractor will notify all prime contactors of the dates for the final cleaning of the building. After those dates, but prior to issuance of the prefinal inspection Punch List, any soiling of cleaned areas will be cleaned by the responsible Contractor or cleaned by the General Contractor and charged to the responsible Contractor. 3. After issuance of the prefinal inspection Punch List, recleaning will be done by the responsible Contractor or cleaned by the General Contractor or Owner and charged to the responsible Contractor. 4. Maintain cleaning until Project, or portion thereof, is occupied by Owner. 3_3 Cleaning During Owner's Occupancy: Should the Owner occupy the work; or any portion thereof, prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance,by the " Owner, ,;'; responsibilities for interim and final cleaning of the occupied spaces shall. -be determined by the Architect in accord with the General Conditions of Contract 01 7716-4 May 30, 2012 FINAL CLEANING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 1.3 Submittals 2.1 Supplemental Requirements A. Work Included: Cast -in-place concrete required for this work (including forms and reinforcing) is indicated on the drawings and includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Footings - foundations 2. Interior floor slabs B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Testing laboratory 2. Sitework (for foundation work only) Per Drawings C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others: Anchor bolts, templates and built-in items for Sections 13 34 18 and 13 34 19. 12 Quality Assurance A. Workers: Use only workers experienced in the placing and finishing of concrete and erecting of reinforcing. B. Codes and StandardsConcrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings Current Edition, except as modified by the Supplemental Requirements below: 1. A copy of ACI -301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings is on file at the office of the Architect. The Contractor in submitting a proposal verifies that he has complete knowledge of ACI 301. A copy of ACI 301 will be bound into the copy of the building Specifications and kept on the site during construction. All concrete work will also conform to ACI 318-05 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 1.3 Submittals: At award of Contract and before any concrete is delivered to the job site submit to the Architect in accordance with these Specifications: Reinforcing steel drawings and Mix designs. May 30, 2012 033009-1 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Supplemental Requirements: Numbers listed below correspond to numbering designations used in ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. (2.2) Admixtures: No admixtures other than air -entraining agent specified will be permitted, except upon written request by the Contractor and written approval by the Architect. (3.2) Concrete Strength: All concrete - 4000 psi at 28 days. (3.5) Maximum slumps as follows: Walls and footings - 3": Slabs and Piers - 4": Slump tests must be taken for each truck load of concrete. (4.3.1) Tolerances: Concrete to be true to plane, plumb and level with true curves. Deviations from dimensions, pitches, contours may not exceed 114" when by adding to scratch coat this may be corrected. Deviations which require a reduction in total two inch thickness of tile and setting bed, as shown on the Drawings will not be allowed. (5.2) Reinforcing steel: 5.2 ,2 Deformed bars grade: ASTM A 615 Grade 60. New billet steel. 5.2.5 Wire grade: ASTM A 185. (6.2.2) Joint at perpendicular filler to meet Article 6.2.2. (Bituminous type) Control Joints: saw cut or trowel as shown on plan or max size 14'-0" x 14'-0" curbing 10' o.c. (8) Placing: Notify Architect 24 hours in advance of starting time of each pour. Allow time for inspection of forms, reinforcement, screeds. etc., and to explain procedures for slump and cylinder tests. (10.2) As -cast finishes: 10.2.2 Smooth form finish required. (10.3.1) Smooth rubbed finish on exposed sections of retaining walls. exposed foundations and curbs. Remove form marks prior to application. Commercial coating as approved by Architect. (12.2.1) Wet cure concrete in all areas for seven days. No curing compounds allowed. (12.2.2) Concrete surface sealer: One (1) coat of Ashford Formala-by Cu'recrete._ Apply per manufacturers specifications for new concrete.immediately-- after finishing. t`l (16) Testing: Take test cylinders as directed by Architects for testing - by Owner. 03 30 00-2 May 30, 2012 CAST -IN PLACE CONCRETE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.1 Materials 1.2 Quality Assurance 3.1 Surface Conditions 1.3 Product Delivery, Storage 3.2 Co-ordination and Handling 3.3 Installation 1.4 Job Conditions 3.4 Field Quality Control 3.5 Cleaning Up PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included: Unit Masonry required for the work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but is not limited to: 1. Nonload bearing interior concrete block- 2 hour fire barrier wall 2. Furnish and install wall reinforcement and anchorages. 3. Install items furnished by other Sections of the Work. 4. Furnish and install masonry accessories. 5. Install reinforcement in bond beams and fill with concrete. 6. Install reinforcement in bond beam lintels under 3'-8" and fill with mortar. 7. Grout under base and bearing plates on masonry walls. 8. Slush full all jambs of hollow metal frames. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Cleaning Section 01 74 00 2. Concrete Section 03 30 00 3. Rough carpentry Section 06 10 00 4. Flashing and sheet metal Section 07 60 00 5. Caulking Section 07 92 13 6. Painting Section 09 91 00 C. Work Installed but Supplied by Others 1. Loose lintels 2. Bolts 3. Anchors 4. Inserts 5. Expansion Joints Sections 13 34 18 or 13 3419 D. The General Contractor will hire a testing agency for on-site testing 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Workmen 1. For the actual cutting and placing of concrete masonry units, use only skilled.., journeyman masons who are thoroughly familiar with the design requirements' 2. In acceptance or rejection of installed concrete masonry units, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. May 30, 2012 04 20 00-1 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3. Provide one skilled journeyman mason who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section and who shall personally direct the execution of this portion of the Work. B. Tolerances: Walls to be erected in accord with standard industry practices and written guidelines of ACI Standard for concrete masonry and BIA Standards for brick masonry. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Work of this Section shall comply with all applicable building codes and as supplemented in subsequent articles contained herein. D. Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and standards, comply with the following standards of masonry installation described in: 1. Masonry construction and materials shall conform to all requirements of (ACI -530). 2. "Specifications for the Design and Construction of Load Bearing Concrete Masonry" by the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA). 3. Recommended practices of the International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council. 4. Modular System: Sizes of masonry units and brick: Modular sizes. whether so indicated or not, so that materials specified in this Section will be as per Modular Planning Standards. 5. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A 82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. b. A 153, Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A 615, Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement d. C 90, Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. e. C 129. Hollow non -load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. f. C 270. Mortar for Unit Masonry. g. C 387, Packaged Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 6. Federal Specifications (FS): a. QQ-W-461. Carbon Steel Wire. 1_3 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: 1. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 2. Stack masonry for facing work on platforms, cover or store in an approved manner that will protect them from contact with soil, weather exposure. Exercise care in handling masonry units to avoid chipping, breakage. Locate storage piles, stacks or bins to avoid being disturbed, or barricade to protect materials from damage. Stack units immediately upon delivery to job, under cover, or otherwise protect from weather conditions. 3. Protect anchors, ties and reinforcement from elements. 4. Mortar Materials a. Deliver and store manufactured products in original unopened canfaine s: -< b. Keep water free of harmful materials. �1 04 20 00-2 May 30, 2012 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1 .4 Job Conditions A. Environmental Requirements 1. Cold Weather Protection a. Preparation: (1) Remove ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch. (2) Remove frozen or damaged masonry. (3) Use dry masonry units. (4) Do not use frozen units. b. Mortar (1) Heat mixing water when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. and heat aggregates when air temperature is below 32 degrees F., to assure mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F. and 120 degrees F. until used. (2) Do not heat water or sand above 12 0 degrees F. c. Protection Requirements While Masonry Units are Being Laid: (1) Air temperature 25 degrees F. to 20 degrees F.: (a) Use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. (2) Air temperature 20 degrees F. and below. (a) Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F. (b) Minimum temperature of units when laid: 20 degrees F. d. Protection Requirements for Completed Masonry and Masonry not Being Worked on: (1) Mean daily air temperature 48 degrees F. to 32 degrees F.: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with non -staining weather -resistive membrane. (2) Mean daily air temperature 32 degrees F. to 25 F degrees: Completely cover masonry with nonstaining weather -resistive membrane for 24 hours. (3) Mean daily air temperature 25 degrees F. to 20 degrees F.: Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours. (4) Mean daily air temperature 20 degrees F. and below: Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F. for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infra -red lamps, or other acceptable methods. (5) Cover top of walls with nonstaining waterproof coverings at end of each day or shutdown. (6) Cover partially completed walls with nonstaining waterproof membrane when work is not in progress. -' (7) Provide minimum 2 foot overhand of protective covering on each sid6-of wall- securely anchored. 2. Hot Weather Protection: Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in an ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F. in'the shade with relative humidity less than 50 percent. May 30, 2012 04 20 00-3 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Mortar 1. ASTM C 387, color as selected by Architect. 2. Color as selected. 3. Mixes: a. Mix mortar materials to product mortar cubes having the following compressive strength when tested in accord with compressive strength test, ASTM C 270. MORTAR COMPRESSIVE WATER MAXIMUM TYPE STRENGTH(PSI) RETENTION AIR CONTENT M 2500 75 18 S 1800 75 18 B. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Hollow Nonload Bearing Units: a. ASTM C 129, Type II b. Nominal face dimensions: 8 inches by 16 inches. 2. Bond: running C. Setting material for base and bearing plates: Mortar shall be same as used in all construction. D. Anchors and Ties: 1. Welded Wire: a. Type: truss b. Longitudinal wire: (1) Style: single (2) Treatment: deformed (3) Wire: ASTM A 82 (4) Size: 9 gauge c. Transverse wires: (1) Wire ASTM A 82 (2) Size: 9 gauge d. Finish: Galvanized, FS QQ-W-461, Finish No. 5, Class No.3. e. Installation to conform to IBC Code. 2. Corrugated Metal: a. Type: plain end. b. Material: galvanized steel c. Size: (1) Thickness: 22 Gauge. (2) Length: System required to pass thru 3" insulation and 3" into stone. (3) Width: 314 inch d. Finish: Galvanized, ASTM A 153, Class B-2. E. Reinforcement: Billet Steel Deformed Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 E. Weep hole Material: Plastic or rubber tube. 24" o.c. at masonry termination`s at concrete or steel. 04 20 00-4 May 30, 2012 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING G. Flashing: Butyl rubber membrane locate where detailed on Drawings or standard masonry practice to relieve water penetration brick veneer and base flashing to be a stainless steel plate with drip. H. Cleaning Agents: As recommended by block supplier. I. Grout: All grout shall be transit -mixed in accord with ASTM C 94 and shall consist of one part portland cement, 2-1/2 parts sand, two parts pea gravel, and adequate water to produce a concrete of approximately ten inches slump, and shall have an ultimate compressive strength of at least 2000 psi in 28 days. J. Control Joint Resilient Keys: Control joint resilient keys: Factory -fabricated solid section of natural or synthetic rubber, combination thereof, plastic, or other rubber -like material. Durometer hardness shall be not less than 70 when tested in conformance with ASTM Specification D 2240. The key shall be of the shape indicated and of dimensions to completely fill and fit neatly, but without forcing, into masonry -unit jamb -sash grooves and to provide control -joint width of 3/8 inch with tolerance of 1/6 inch. Shear section shall be 5/8 inch minimum thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section the mason contractor shall inspect related installed work of other trades, notify the Project Manager who shall verify that such work is complete to the point where portions of the masonry installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that unit masonry may be completed in accord with the referenced standards and the contract documents. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Project Manager and the Architect for clarification. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been completely resolved. 32 Co-ordination: Carefully coordinate with all other trades to insure proper artd adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section. 3_3 Installation A. General 1. Protection: Protect masonry surfaces not being worked during construction work. At such time as rain or snow is imminent, work is discontinued; protect work with water proof membrane, well secured. Overlap covering two feet each side of wall. 2. Temperature: Do not erect masonry when ambient temperature has dropped below 45 degrees F., unless it is rising; at no time when it has dropped below 40 degrees F., except by written permission. When masonry work is authorized during temperatures below 40 degrees F., make provisions for heating and drying May 30, 2012 04 20 00-5 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING materials. Protect completed work as per recommended practices for cold weather masonry construction by the International Masonry Industry All-weather Council. 3. At completion of each day's work, all masonry should be cleaned with brushes and as required to keep work neat and clean at all times; covered and protected from weather. 4. Do not permit mortar to touch aluminum surfaces to be exposed. 5. Do not use chopped or broken units; if any such units are discovered in the finished wall, the Architect will require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to the Owner. 6. Lay masonry plumb, true to line, with level. accurately spaced courses. Keep bond plumb throughout, Lay corners. reveals, plumb, true. Exposed block to be running bond. Set in ties. "Durowall" or "AA Wire" reinforcing, etc. 7. Building -In: Unless otherwise required, fill solidly with mortar, spaces around metal door frames, other built-in items. Built-in work required to be built-in with masonry, Including anchors, wall plugs, accessories, as erection progresses. 8. Cutting, patching: For cutting, patching of masonry required to accommodate work of others use masonry mechanics, Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units. 9. Adjust masonry unit to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 10. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened. remove, clean joints and units of mortar and relay with fresh mortar. 11. Adjust shelf angles to keep masonry level and at proper elevation. 12. Provide pressure -relieving joints by placing a continuous 118 inch foam neoprene pad under the shelf angle and seal joint with sealant specified in Division 7. 13. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry construction, clean exposed surface of set masonry and remove loose mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 14. If necessary to stop off a horizontal run of masonry, rack back one-half block length in each course. 15. Do not use toothing to join new masonry to set or partially set masonry when continuing a horizontal run. 16. Anchors. ties and reinforcement: Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale prior to installation. 17. Placement of loads (i.e. floors and upper walls) on completed sections of masonry construction shall not proceed until 7 days have elapsed from the completion of that particular construction. Placement of such loads may be made in advance of this time period provided that prism tests show that the construction has achieved sufficient strength and also subject to the approval of the Architect. 18. Installing Control Joints a. Provide expansion and control joints as shown on Drawings (min 12'4" o.c ). Sealants and backing will be by Sealant Contractor. b. Control joints shall extend through bond beams unless otherwise indicated. 19. Setting Base and Bearing Plates: For those base and bearing plates set by masons, place grout under plates to thoroughly fill all the space under the plates. Plates to be set level. B. Mixing Mortar 1. General a. Use a mechanical mixer of one sack minimum capacity. b. Mix mortar at least three minutes after all materials have been added. " c. Mix only as much mortar as can be used in one hour after water has been first mixed into batch. 04 20 00-6 May 30, 2012 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Retempering: Retemper mortar only within 2-1/2 hours of mixing. Discard unused mortar that has begun to set or that is more that 2-1/2 hours old. C. Built-in Items 1. Build in, around, items required, as indicated. Set loose lintels, small beam plates, bearing strips, in locations required, as indicated. Loose lintels, small beam plates, bearing strips furnished under "Structural Steel" Section. Set anchors, anchor bolts for parapet, fascia, cap, door frames, flashing, etc. 2. Avoid cutting and patching. 3. Solidly grout spaces around built-in items. D, Blockwork 1. General a. Lay only dry units. Wetting the units shall not be permitted except when hot and dry weather exists causing the units to be warm to the touch, and then the surface only may be wetted with a light fog spray. b. Bond: Running bond with vertical joints located at center of masonry units in alternate course below. c. Bond: Stack bond with vertical joints aligned. 2. Reinforcement a. Install all reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings. b. Fully embed reinforcement in grout, not in mortar or mortar joints. c. Furnish and install all required metal accessories to insure accurate alignment of steel during grout filling operations. 3. Mortar Beds a. Hollow Units: (1) Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. (2) Provide full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells and webs in all courses of following: (a) Piers, columns and pilasters. (b) Starting course on footings and solid foundation walls. (c) Where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. b. Solid Units: Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints. 4. Joints: a. Horizontal and vertical face joints. (1) Nominal thickness: 3/8 inch. (2) Construct uniform joints. (3) Shove vertical joints tight. (4) Strike joints flush in surfaces to be plastered, stuccoed, or covered with other masonry, or other surface -applied finish other than paint. (5) Point joints tight in unparged masonry below ground. (6) Tool joints in exposed or to -be -painted surfaces when thumb -print hard with round jointer. (7) Remove mortar protruding into cells of cavities to be reinforced.or filled. (8) Fill horizontal joints with mortar between top of masonry parEitioris and underside of concrete slabs or beams 5. Grouting a. Timing: Do not grout until masonry has cured at least 24 hours. May 30, 2012 04 20 00-7 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. Consolidation: Consolidate all grout at time of pouring by puddling with a mechanical vibrator, filling all cells of the masonry, and then reconsolidating later by puddling before the plasticity is lost. Pointing and Cleaning a. At final completion of unit masonry work fill holes in joints and tool. b. Do not fill weepholes. G. Cut out and repaint defective joints. d. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at end of each day's work and after final pointing. e. Leave work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots and drippings. 3_4 Field Quality Control A. Prism Testing 1. These requirements generally meet NCMA or BIA. The required 28 day strength, fm, is shown on the Drawings for each class of masonry construction. The actual strength of the masonry construction shall be determined by the prism method. 2. One prism test consisting of three specimens for each class of masonry shall be made in advance of construction to confirm f m. Prisms made at the job site shall be carefully handled so as to preclude damage during both handling operations and transportation to testing lab per ASTM E 447. a. Of the three specimens used in the advance test, two shall be tested at 28 days and one shall be tested at 7 days. b. As part of the advance test procedure, six 2 inch by 2 inch by 2 inch mortar cubes shall be fabricated and tested with the three prism specimens. Two tests shall be at 7 days and four at 28 days. c. As a part of the advance test procedure, tests on three masonry units shall be made at the same time as the 28 day prism test. 3. After prism testing and during the construction process, additional prism tests will be required. Prism tests are as defined above and one test shall be made for each 5000 square feet of wall constructed. Subject to written approval of the Architect, test of units and mortar cubes may be made in lieu of prism test. Cubes shall be as described above. Three unit tests will be required at the testing of each set of mortar cubes. For bidding purposes, assume that prism tests will be required during the construction phase. B. Mortar Tests: The Architect may at his sole discretion order test on mortar at any time during the construction to insure compliance with the Property requirements of Part 2 even though laboratory test data has been submitted. Mason Contractor stiall _ cooperate with the testing laboratory during the taking of samples. 3_5 Cleaning Up 7 A. Inspection and Adjustment: Upon completion of the Work of this Section :make a thorough inspection of all installed masonry and verify that all units have 'beedinstalled in accord with the provisions of this Section. Make all necessary adjustments. ' B. Cleaning 1. Clean, point and wash down brick and concrete block surfaces. Clean as units are being set and again upon completion. Use all cleaning agents in strict conformance 04 20 00-8 May 30, 2012 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING with the Manufacturer's instructions. Make ready for application of the specified finishes. 2. Remove surplus mortar and leave surface of all masonry clean and finished. Remove large particles of mortar with putty knife or chisel before cleaning walls. Remove sharp burrs on exposed block mortar joints with rubbing stone. 3. Remove shoring, supports, centering, scaffolding, mason's wedges, false work and protection. Remove mortar spatterings from sills, walls and finished work of other trades and contractors. Take special care during cleaning operations not to damage glass, window frames, shrubbery or other similar completed adjacent construction. 7 May 30, 2012 04 20 00-9 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 04 20 00-10 May 30. 2012 UNIT MASONRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Handling 2.1 Grade Stamps 3.1 Surface Conditions PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 3.2 Workmanship 3.3 Installation 3.4 Fastening 3.5 Nailing Schedule 3.6 Protection 3.7 Cleaning Up A. Work Included: All wood, nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other rough hardware, and all other items needed for rough carpentry in this Work but not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications, and the installation of all blocking as indicated on Drawings. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Concrete Section 03 30 00 2. Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 00 3. Painting Section 09 91 00 4. Pole Building Section 13 34 18 5. Metal Building Systems Section 13 34 19 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Workmen 1. Provide sufficient skilled workmen and supervisors who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and the materials and techniques specified. 2. Rejection: In the acceptance or rejection of rough carpentry, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. A. Codes and Standards 1. Lumber grading rules and wood species to be in conformance with Voluntary Product Standard PS 20: Grading rules of the following associations apply to rrlaterials` - furnished under this Section: a. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). b. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 2. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies = a a. Pressure treated material: American Wood Preservers Bureau Standards. r b. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB): - (1) LB -2, Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber, and Plywood PressUre Treated with Water -borne Preservatives for Above Ground Use. c. Federal Specifications (FS): (1) FF -B-561, Bolts (Screw), Lag. May 30, 2012 06 1000-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (2) FF -B-575, Bolts, Hexagon and Square. (3) FF -B-584, Bolts, Finned Neck, Key Head, Machine; Ribbed Neck; Square Neck, Tee Head. (4) FF -N-105, Nails, Wire, Brads and Staples. (5) FF -N-836, Nuts, Square, Hexagon, Cap, Slotted, Castellated, Clinch Knurled and Welding. (6) FF -S-111, Screw. Wood. d. Product Standards (PS) (1) 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 3. Conflicting requirements: In the event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations and the requirements of the referenced standards or these Specifications, the provisions of the more stringent shall govern. 1.3 Submittals A. Certification (only on request of Architect) 1. Pressure -treated wood: Submit certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amount of salts retained, and conformance with applicable standards. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection 1. Use all means necessary to protect the materials before and after delivery to the job site, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 2. Deliver the materials to the job site and store, all in a safe area, out of the way of traffic. 3. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation or ventilation. 4. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building. 5. Protect sheet materials from corners breaking and damaging surface, while unloading. 6. Identify all framing lumber as to grades and store all grades separately from other trades. Keep grade marks legible. 7. Protect all metal products with adequate weatherproof outer wrappings. 8. Keep all damaged material clearly identified as damaged, and separately store to prevent its inadvertent use. 9. Do not allow installation of damaged or otherwise noncomplying material. 10. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- 2.1 Grade Stamps: Identify all other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the agency listed in the reference standards, or by such other means as are approved - in advance by the Architect. 06 10 00-2 May 30. 2012 ROUGH CARPENTRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2.2 Materials A. Lumber 1. Dimensions a. Specified lumber dimensions are nominal. b. Actual dimensions to conform to PS 20. 2. Moisture Content: Unseasoned or 19% maximum at time of permanent closing in of building or structure, for lumber 2 inches or less nominal thickness. 3. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S), unless specified otherwise. 4. End Jointed Lumber a. Structural purposed interchangeable with solid sawn lumber. 5. Framing lumber, any commercial softwood species a. Light framing (1) General framing: Standard and Better or Stud grade. Chloride treated at roof blocking and where in contact with concrete. (2) Plates, blocking, bracing and nailers: Utility grade. (3) Bracing, blocking, bulk headings and general utility purposes: Economy grade. b. Beams and Headers — Size and Grade as noted on drawings. B. Building Paper 1. Tyvek commercial wrap membrane or approved equal. C. Preservative -Treated Wood Products 1. Waterborne salt preservatives for painted, stained, or exposed natural woad product: a. AWPB LP -2, above ground applications. b. Lumber redried to maximum moisture content of 19%, stamped "DRY". D. Rough Hardware 1. Bolts a. FS FF -B-575. b. FS FF -B-584. 2. Nuts: FS FF -N-836. 3. Expansion shields: FS FF -B-561. 4. Lag screws and bolts: FS FF -B-561. 5. Toggle bolts: FS FF -B-588. 6. Wood Screws: FS FF -S-111. 7. Nails and staples: FS FF -N-105- 8. Metal nailing discs: a. Flat caps, minimum 1 inch diameter. b. Minimum 30 gauge sheet metal. c. Formed to prevent dishing. d. Bell or cup shapes not acceptable. May 30, 2012 06 10 00-3 ROUGH CARPENTRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that all rough carpentry may be performed in strict accord with the original design and all pertinent codes and regulations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3_2 Workmanship A. General: All rough carpentry shall produce joints true, tight and well secured with all members assembled in accord with the Drawings and with all pertinent codes and regulations. B. Selection of lumber pieces. 1. Carefully select all members, select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing or making proper connections. 2. Cut out and discard all defects which will render a piece unable to serve its intended function; lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp. twist, bow crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting, 3.3 Installation A. General Framing 1. General: In addition to all framing operations normal to fabrication and erection indicated on the Drawings, install all backing required for the Work of other trades. 3_4 Fastening A. Nailing 1. Use only common wire nails or spikes, except where otherwise specifically noted in the Drawings. 2. Provide penetration into the piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the nail or spike provided, however, that 16d nails may be used to connect two pieces of two inch (nominal) thickness. 3, Do all nailing without splitting wood, preboring as required, replace all _ split members. B. Bolting 1. Drill holes 1/16 inch larger in diameter than the bolts being used; drillstraight ; and true from one side only. 06 10 00-4 May 30, 2012 ROUGH CARPENTRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Bolt threads must not bear on wood; use washers under head and nut where both bear on wood; use washers under all nuts. C. Screws 1. For lag -screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of thread; enlarge holes to shank diameter for length of shank. 2. Screw, do not drive, all lag screws and wood screws. 3_5 Nailing Schedule: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or required by pertinent codes and regulations, provide at least the nailing shown in Table 2304.9.1 Fastening Schedule of the International Building Code — 2006 Edition. 3_6 Protection: Protect wood decking with protective waterproof covering until roofing has been installed. 3_7 Cleaning Up A. General: Keep the premises in a neat, safe and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of Work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut -ends, and debris. B. Sweeping 1. At the end of each working day, or more often if necessary thoroughly sweep all surfaces where refuse from this portion of the Work has settled. 2. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its storage. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces. May 30, 2012 06 10 00-5 ROUGH CARPENTRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 06 10 00-6 May 30, 2012: ROUGH CARPENTRY I'd 06 10 00-6 May 30, 2012: ROUGH CARPENTRY IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 07 21 00 INSULATION SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.5 Job Conditions PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 2.1 Materials 3.1 Surface Conditions 3.2 Preparation 3.3 Installation 3.4 Cleaning A. Work Included: Building insulation required for this Work includes, but is not limited to: 1. Roof Insulation 2. Rigid wall panel insulation 3. Batt Insulation 4. Below Grade Insulation 5. Sound Insulation B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Concrete Section 03 30 00 2. Masonry Section 04 20 00 3. Carpentry Section 06 1000 4. Pole Building Section 13 34 18 5. Metal Building Systems Section 13 34 19 6. Mechanical System Insulation Division 23 C. Work Furnished by Installer 1. Below grade perimeter rigid insulation by Concrete Contractor. 2. Roof and wall insulation by 13 34 18 or 13 34 19. 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Design Criteria: The Heating and Air Conditioning system for the Project was designed for the insulation values listed for each type of insulation in Part 2 of this Section. The Contractor will insure that all insulation used meets or exceeds those values. The Architect will orderthe removal of all material not meeting this Specification. All insulation will meet State Fire Code. Thickness of roof insulation supplied shall not exceed the space available that would require additional blocking, or raising of parapet, door sills, flashing or curbs. B. Testing: Flame spread: ASTM E 84, 25 or less. C. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): -- - May 30, 2012 0721 00-1, I NSULATIO-N IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING a. E 84, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning b. C 1289, closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core board. 2. Federal Specifications (FS): a. HH -1-521, Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber for Ambient Temperatures) b. HH -1-524, Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene) c. HH -1-1972, Insulation Board, Thermal (Urethane) d. L -P-375, Plastic Film. Flexible, Vinyl Chloride 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Architect in accord with these Specifications; the following: A. Manufacturer's Literature: Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. B. Material List: Submit to the Architect for review a complete list of all insulation material proposed to be furnished. Any material which differs from that specified, shall have engineering data submitted to show that its performance is equal to insulation specified. C. Technical Data: Submit technical data indicating thermal conductance factors of furnished insulation. D. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that materials meet Specification requirements. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Deliver materials to Project site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging. C. Identify contents.. Manufacturer, brand name, thermal values and applicable standards. D. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture, and open flame or sparks. E. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately replace materials at no additional cost to the Owner. Tears in foil face insulation will not be acceptable. 1.5 Job Conditions A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install insulation when temperature is 40 degrees F. or below, during rain or wet weather, or when surfaces are wet B. Scheduling: Coordinate installation with other trades whose work may be affected or have effect. PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.1 Materials (See Drawing Details for applicable products) 0721 00-2 May 30, 2012 INSULATION IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING A. Roof Insulation 1. Loose Insulation a. Fiberglass Batt or Blown -In (at Pole Building Design Section 13 34 18) b. Thickness (R -Value) and location per drawings C. 0.006 mil Vapor Barrier with GWB (by others) d. Heavy Duty Reinforced Vapor Barrier without GWB as detailed. e. Energy saver FP by GBP Silvercote or equal at Metal Building Systems Section 13 34 19) B. Building Insulation 1. Rigid Below Grade Insulation a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation Manufacturer. b. Expanded polystyrene board, Type IX - 1.80 density minimum, — 5.0 per inch at 40 degrees F. c. Total thickness per drawings — 2 layers with staggered joints. 3. Wall Insulation a. Cavity insulation - fiberglass batt - R = 19 for installation in a wall cavity. b. Vapor Barrier - 0.006 mil, polyethylene per details. c. Exterior wall insulation - extruded polystyrene insulation — thickness per drawing R-50 per inch. d. Building wrap. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection: Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may be installed in accord with original design and the Manufacturer's recommendation. 1. Examine space allocated for insulation for proper depth to receive material. 2. Check surfaces to receive rigid insulation to assure they are in uniform plane, and free of mortar chips, debris, grease, oil or other items detrimental to installation. B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3_2 Preparation: Remove or protect against projections in construction framing that may damage or prevent proper installation. 3_3 Installation A. Below grade perimeter insulation: mechanically bond to concrete. 3.4 Cleaning A. Any installer using mastic will clean all excess material from all surfaces to be exposed or to receive the work of other trades. Follow criticisms of Architect completely. May 30, 2012 0721 00-3 INSULATION IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 0721 00-4 May 30, 2012 INSULATION IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.5 Warranty PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 2.1 Materials 3.1 Surface Conditions 3.2 Preparation 3.3 Installation 3.4 Repairing 3.5 Cleaning A. Work Included: Furnish and install all flashing and sheet metal not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications but required to prevent penetration of water through exterior shell and tower roof of the buildings. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Sealants and Caulking Section 07 92 13 2. Pole Building Section 13 34 18 3. Metal Building Systems Section 13 34 19 4. Plumbing Division 22 5. Louvers and Vents Division 23 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Installers: Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the Work of this Section and who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the materials and methods required and who shall direct the entire flashing and sheet metal fabrication and installation. Mock-ups 1. Before work of this Section begins, fabricate for review a one (1) ft. mock-up of the edge flashing using identical project materials and methods. 2. Include seams, fasteners. 3. Maintain accepted mock-up for comparison with finished work. C. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A 525, Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Profess, General Requirements b. A 526, Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized by the Hot -Dip Process., Commercial Quality 2. Federal Specifications (FS): - a. FF -S-107, Screws, Tapping and Drive 3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Assn., Inc. (SMACNA) a. Sheet Metal Manual May 30, 2012 07 60 00-1 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Architect in accord with the these Specifications; the following: A. Samples 1. Two, 12 inch by 12 inch samples of each sheet metal material. 2. Show pattern, finish color and thickness. 1_4 Product Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1_5 Warranty: All sheet metal work done in conjunction with the roofing membrane shall be warranted for two years against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Materials and Gages: Where sheet metal is required and no materials or gage is indicated on the Drawing, furnish and install the highest quality and gage commensurate with the referenced standards. B. Sheet Metal 1. Aluminum: a. ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14 b. Finish: AS-C22A41 c. Minimum thickness of gage: 0.032 inches 2. Wall Cap: a. Base Clip: 22 gauge galvanized steel, ASTM A 526 commercial quality, coating - G-90. ASTM A 525. b. Cap" Prefinished galvanized steel, 24 gauge, with Kynar 500 coating, smooth surface. "Colorklad" by Vincent Metals, color as selected from all standard colors. 3. Galvanized Steel: a. ASTM A 526, commercial quality C. Fasteners: 1. Nails: galvanized, flathead roofing nails. ---r J - 2. Screws: Self -tapping sheet metal type, FS FF -S-107. =- _. D. Gutters and Downspouts (Sections 13 34 18 and Section 13 34 19) 1. Seamless stock 5" aluminum with 3" x 4" stock rectangular downspouts.Pipe' covers at grade connection to pipe. 2. Color as selected — to match building colors. 07 60 00-2 May 30, 2012 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Verify that flashing and sheet metal may be installed in accord with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, the reference standards, and the approved Shop Drawings. 1. Verify that substrates are smooth and clean to extent needed for sheet metal Work. 2. Verify that reglets, nails, cants and blocking to receive sheet metal are installed and free of concrete and soil. B, Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3_2 Preparation: Before installing sheet metal verify shapes and dimensions of surface to be covered. 3.3 Installation A. General 1. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction. 2. Angle bottom edges of exposed vertical surfaces to form drips. B. Reglets: Install in accurate locations, straight, in-line and with leak proof joints. C. Sealant Installation: Apply 1/4 inch diameter bead, centered on full length of joint. G. Roof Penetration Flashing 1. Base Flashing a. Extend flange onto roof 6 inches minimum away from penetration. b. Extend flange upward around penetration to at least 8 inches above roofing felts. c. Fold back upper and side roof flange edges 1/2 inch minimum. d. Solder -lap joints. 2. Counterflashing a. Overlap base flashing one inch minimum with storm collar sloped away from penetration. b. Secure to penetration with draw band and sealant. H. Equipment Support Flashing 1. Full cap support. 2. Overlap base flashing 4 inches. 3. Solder -lap joint. 4. Provide sealant around penetration through flashing. May 30, 2012 07 60 00-3 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING I. Gutters and Downspouts 1. Install where shown on drawings. 2. Provide metal cap at pipe connection at grade. 3_4 Repairing: Repair or replace damaged work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3_5 Cleaning A. As work progresses. neutralize excess flux with 5 to 10% washing soda solution and thoroughly rinse. B. Leave work clean and free of stains, scrap and debris. 07 60 00-4 May 30, 2012 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 07 92 00 SEALANTS AND CAULKING SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.5 Warranty PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included 2.1 Caulking Materials 2.2 Caulking Equipment 2.3 Acceptable Manufacturers 3.1 Surface Conditions 3.2 Preparation 3.3 Installation 3.4 Caulking Schedule 1. The purpose of caulking in this work is to provide a positive barrier against penetration of air and moisture at joints between items where caulking is essential to continued integrity of the barrier. 2. Such caulking will normally be performed under the work of various Sections of these Specifications but shall be performed in strict accord with the provisions of this Section. 3. Exterior of Building: Joints and cracks around windows, aluminum entrances, door frames, columns, louvers, wall penetrations, connections and otherjoints necessary to seal off building from outside air and moisture. 4. Interior of Building: a. Inside jambs and heads of exterior door frames. b. Interior hollow metal doorframes. Both sides of interior hollow metal frames at exposed masonry or precast concrete. c. Inside perimeter of windows. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Individual requirements for caulking are described in various other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Masonry Section 04 20 00 2. Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 60 00 3. Pole Building Section 13 34 18 4. Metal Building Systems Section 13 34"19 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Applicators: Installation of caulking shall be performed or�ly.'byworkers thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the techniques of caulking, -,and who are completely familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the" caulking materials being used. Minimum two years experience and approved by manufacturer. a_ B. Rejection of Installed Caulking: Indication of lack of skill on the part of caulking installers shall be sufficient ground for the Architect to reject installed caulking and to require its immediate removal and complete recaulking at no additional cost to the Owner. This item May 30, 2012 07 92 00-1 SEALANTS AND CAULKING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING will be strictly enforced and no excuses accepted. C. Manufacturer's Representative: Arrange for manufacturer's technical representative to be on project site to advise installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of materials and to check installation. D. Reference Standards American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C 790, Recommended Practices for Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. b. C 804, Recommended Practice for Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. c. C 920, Elastomeric joint sealants. d. D 1056, Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. e. D 1565, Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Co -polymers (Open Cell Foam). 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Architect in accord with these Specifications; the following: A. Product Data: Copies of product manufacturer's specification, recommendations and installation instructions for sealant, backing and associated materials. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials in original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages with Manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and lot numbers where appropriate. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1_5 Warranty A. Provide Manufacturer's standard year 10 material warranty. Replace sealants which fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion, or do not cure. B. Guarantee workmanship against leakage for two years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Caulking Materials: All caulking materials shall be a single or double companent,.n:on- sagging type. A. Sealants 1. Silicone base, solvent curing conforming to requirements of C 920, Type S: Grade NS; Class 25; Use NT; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 50;non- staining; non-bleeding; color as selected. 07 92 00-2 May 30, 2012 SEALANTS AND CAULKING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Polyurethane base, multi-component, chemical curing; self leveling type for application in horizontal joints and non -sagging type for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstand movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 to 80 degrees F., uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins and coarse particles when mixed, Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 50; non- staining; non-bleeding; color as selected. B. Accessories 1. Primer: Non -staining type, as recommended by sealant Manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant Manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Filler: as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant Manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape. 2_2 Caulking Equipment: All caulking equipment shall be only such equipment as is specifically recommended by the manufacturer of the caulking material being installed. 2_3 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Dow Chemical B. General Electric C. Tremco PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that caulking may be installed in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Examine joints to be sealed for construction defects which would adversely affect execution of work. 4. Ensure that masonry and concrete have cured 28 days minimum. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. _ t May 30, 2012 079200-3, SEALANTS AND CAULKING-- IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3_2 Preparation A. Cleaning: Clean joint surfaces, using joint cleaner as necessary to be free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, rust, lacquers, laitance. release agents, moisture, or other matter which might adversely affect adhesion of sealant. B. Do not apply caulking to painted surfaces. Remove old paint and caulking material before applying new caulking. C. Masking: Mask area adjacent to joints. D. Very porous surfaces require priming. E. Before caulking, clean and prime surfaces to receive caulking per manufacturer's recommendations. F. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant, G. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. H. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform properly. Use bond breaker where required. 3.3 Installation A- Application of Backing 1. Verify the compatibility of filler material with caulking before installation. 2. Polyurethane for open joints shall be at least 1-112 times width of open joint and of thickness to give solid backing. 3. Backing shall fill up joint do depth of joint is approximately 1/2 of its width for joints from 1/2" to 1". 4. Install backing material in joints using blunt instrument to avoid puncturing. Do not twist rod while installing. Install backing so that joint depth is 50% of joint width, but a minimum of 1/4" deep. B. Mixing: (Two Part) 1. Mix in exact proportions recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Do not thin. 3. Secure a perfect blend by thorough slow mixing. 4. Mix five minutes mechanically (one gallon units) or ten minutes by hand: 5. Do not mix in direct sunlight. C. Application of Caulking 1. General: a. Do not caulk under weather conditions or sun conditions potentially harmful to the set and curing of the caulking material. b. Perform work in accord with ASTM C 804 for solvent release. 07 92 00-4 May 30, 2012 SEALANTS AND CAULKING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Installation a. Install caulking in strict accord with the manufacturer's recommendations, taking care to produce beads of proper width and depth, to tool as recommended by the manufacturer, and to immediately remove all surface caulking. b. Apply with hand caulking gun. Use gun nozzles of proper size to fit joints. c. A minimum adhering surface should be as lease 1/2". For joints from 1/2" to 1" wide, depth of sealant shall be 1/2 the width. Forjoints over 1", maintain depth of sealant to 1/2". (For unusual requirements, consult supplier.) d. Seal joint when it is normal;, not in a contracted or expanded condition. e. Use masking tape to protect surrounding surfaces. Remove tape immediately after drawing bead with inner edge drawn away first to eliminate feather edging. f. Tool with putty knife of suitable size within 10 minutes after gunning. Tool may be moistened with solvent to avoid sticking. Tool joints as indicated. g. Do not apply caulking at temperatures under 50 degrees F. h. Caulk entire perimeter of all openings unless otherwise indicated. I. Joints: Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges and sags. D. Cleaning: Remove excess materials adjacent to joints by mechanical means or with xylol (xylene) or mineral spirits as work progresses to eliminate evidence of spillage or damage to adjacent surfaces. Note: When using flammable solvents, avoid heat, sparks and open flames. Always provide adequate ventilation and follow all precautions listed on solvent container label. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surfaces. 3_4 Caulking Schedule A. Carefully study the Drawings and furnish and install the proper caulking of each point where called for on the Drawings plus all other points where caulking is essential in maintaining the continued integrity of the watertight barrier. In general, caulk all joints of masonry meeting non -masonry surfaces including interior and exterior door and window frames, caulk all masonry expansion joints. May 30, 2012 07 92 00-5 SEALANTS AND CAULKING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 07 92 00-6 May 30. 2012 SEALANTS AND CAULKING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.2 Materials 1.2 Quality Assurance 2.3 Fabrications 1.3 Submittals 3.1 Inspection 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage 3.2 Installation and Handling 3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning 2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included 1. The metal doors and frames required for this work are indicated on the Drawings and include non -labeled and labeled hollow metal doors and frames and hollow metal frames for borrowed lites. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Caulking Section 07 92 00 2. Anchors and Inserts Section 08 11 00 3. Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00 4. Weatherstripping and Seals Section 08 71 00 5. Glazing Section 08 80 00 6. Finish Painting Section 09 91 00 7. Pole Building Section 13 34 18 8. Metal Building Systems Section 13 34 19 9. Electrical Division 26 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Installers: For actual installation of metal doors and frames and installation of finish hardware on metal doors and frames, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required and who are completely familiar with the Manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation as well as the requirements of this Work. Minimum two years experience. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Testing agency: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 2. Door assembly fire test a. Procedure: ASTM E 152. b. Exposure: As labeled on Door Schedule. C. Reference Standards 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A 115, Series on Door and Frame Preparation. b. A 151.1, Performance Test for Standard Steel Doors, Reinforcing and Exit Device Reinforcings. May 30, 2012 Frames, Anchors, Hinge 08 11 00-1 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) a. Standard 800, Hollow Metal Manual 3. Steel Door Institute (SDI) a. 100, Recommended Specification, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. c. 107, Hardware on Steel Doors, (reinforcement application). d. 110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction. e. 113, Standard Thermal Performance Tests ply Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. 4. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations: a. Manufacturer all labeled doors in strict accord with the specifications and procedures of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. b. In Warranty and Shop Drawings, comply with nomenclature established in American National Standards Institute publication A 123.1 "Nomenclature for Steel Doors and Steel Door Frames". 1.3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract; and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Architect in accord with these Specifications; the following: A. Samples 1. A sample of door, showing edge, top and/or bottom construction, insulation, hinge reinforcement and face stiffening. 2. A sample of a typical frame, showing welded corner joint, welded hinge reinforcements, dust cover boxes and floor anchor. 3. All samples submitted shall be of the production type and shall represent in all respects the minimum quality of work to be furnished by the Manufacturer. No work represented by the samples shall be fabricated until the samples are approved and any downgrading of quality demonstrated by the samples may be cause for rejection of the work. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrations and schedule of door and frame sizes, types, materials. construction, finishing, anchoring, accessories and preparation for installing hardware. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions. D. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificates that materials meet specification requirements. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: 1. Deliver, store and handle all metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration. 2. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, bandirng, spreaders and paper wrappings as required to completely protect all metal doors and frames during transportation and storage. 3. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least one inch off the ground and with as least 1/4" air space between individual pieces; protect all pref:nished_and hardware surfaces as required. - 0811 00-2 May 30, 2012 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2_1 Acceptable Manufacturers: All metal doors and frames shall be the product of one Manufacturer. A. Hollow metal doors and frames - Pioneer, Amweld, Ceco, Kewanee, Republic, Precision, Steelcraft, Curries. 2_2 Materials (Hollow Metal) A. Steel Fabrications: Carbon Steel: Cold rolled, ASTM A 366. B. Coating Materials: Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. C. Core Filler Material: Manufacturer's standard. D. Anchors, Fasteners, Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard. 2_3 Fabrication ((Hollow Metal) A. General 1. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. 2. Completed fabrications to meet ANSI A 151.1. 3. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, including astragals if utilized. 4. Clearly identify work, that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. 5. Grind and dress exposed welds to form smooth, flush surfaces. 6. Do not use metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects. B. Doors 1. Form interior face sheets of 18 gauge and exterior face sheets of 16 gauge metal. 2. Stiffener a. Stiffen face sheet with continuous vertical formed steel sections over full thickness of interior space between door faces. b. Stiffeners of 22 gauge minimum spaced not more than 6 inches apart, spot welded to both face sheets not more than 4 inches on center. c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with core material. 3. Join door faces at vertical edges by continuous weld extending full height of door, grind welds flush. 4. Form astragal on meeting edge of door. i 5. Close top and bottom edges of doors with steel channel minimum 16 gauge, extending full width of door and spot welded to both faces. 6. Form door seal mortise on door bottom. May 30, 2012 08:11 00-3.:' METAL DOORS AND FRAMES-- IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 7. Edge profiles shall be provided on both vertical edges of doors as follows: a. Single -acting swing doors - beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. b. Double-acting swing doors - rounded on 2-118 inch radius. 8. Hardware reinforcements a. Doors shall be mortised. reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated hardware only, in accord with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface -mounted hardware is to be applied doors shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be done by others. b. Minimum gages for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows: (1) Hinge and pivot reinforcements: 7 gauge (2) Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or surface -mounted closers: 12 gauge (3) Reinforcements for all other surface -mounted hardware: 16 gauge 9. Vision Panels a. Framed for glazing b. Glazing beads: (1) Manufacturer's standard mitered corners. (2) Form beads from minimum 2 0 gauge metal, prefitted for field glazing. (3) Locate beads on nonsecurity side of opening. (4) Locate screws within one inch of ends of beads and spaced not more than 8 inches apart. C. Frames 1. Anchors: T -strap or stirrup strap type. 2. Dust cover boxes: Minimum 26 gauge at hardware mortises. 3. Welded frames a. 14 gauge exterior and 16 gauge interior minimum. b. Weld frames to form rigid, neat, square and true units free of defects, warp or buckle. c. Close corner joints tight with trim faces mitered and continuously welded and ground smooth. d. Weld temporary steel brace to both feet of jambs to serve as brace during shipping handling. e. Head assemblies integrally reinforced and mitered joints with 18 gauge minimum channel section. D. Edge Clearances 1. Between doors and frame at head and jamb: 118 inch. 2. At sills without thresholds: 314 inch maximum. 3. At sills with thresholds: 114 inch maximum between threshold and door. 4. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 118 inch. E. Preparation for Hardware: ANSI A 115. F. Finish ... 1. Dress tool marks and surface imperfections to smooth surfaces and, remove irregularities. - 2. Chemically treat and clean doors and frames. 3. Apply Manufacturer's standard prime and finish coating. Frames to be painted by the dipping process. 0811 00-4 May 30, 2012 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Inspection A. Assure that frame openings correspond to dimensions of frame furnished. B. Check that surfaces to contact frame are free of debris. C. Verify that metal doors and frames may be installed in strict accord with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, approved Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's recommendations. D. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 Installation A. Anchorage 1. Attach anchor to opening. 2. Minimum number of anchors. a. Masonry walls. (1) Frames up to 7 feet 6 inches: 3 anchors per jamb. (2) Frames 7 feet 6 inches to 8 feet 0 inches: 4 anchors per jamb. (3) Frames more than 8 feet 0 inches: 1 anchor for each 2 feet of jamb or fraction thereof. b. Stud partitions (1) Frames up to 7 feet 6 inches: 3 anchors per jamb. (2) Frames 7 feet 6 inches to 8 feet 0 inches: 4 anchors per jamb. (3) Frames more than 8 feet 0 inches: 4 anchors plus one additional anchor for each 2 feet of jamb or fraction thereof. B. Frames 1. Remove shipping spreaders if used. 2. Attach frames square, plumb and true to line with adjacent construction. 3. Frames to be mortar filled by mason. C. Finish Hardware: Install all finish hardware supplied under Section 08700 in strict accord with the Manufacturer's recommendations, eliminating all hinge -bound conditions and making all items smoothly operating and firmly anchored into position. D. Doors: SDI 100. E. Installation: Install hollow metal work in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 3_3 Adjustments and Cleaning A. Remove dirt and excess sealants or glazing compound from exposed surfaces.:- -d B. Touch up marred or abraided surfaces to match original finish. May 30, 2012 0811 00-5 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING C. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. D. Remove debris from project site. 08 11 00-6 May 30, 2012 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION O8 30 00 SPECIAL DOORS SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 2.1 Materials PART IGENERAL 1_1 Description 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers 3.1 Surface Conditions 3.2 Installation 3.3 Touching Up 3.4 Instructions A. Work Included: Special doors required for this Work are indicated on the Drawings and include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Electrically Operable, Insulate Overhead Sectional Doors. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Concrete Section 03 30 00 2. Finish Painting Section 09 91 00 3. Pole Building Section 13 34 18 4. Metal Building Systems Section 13 34 19 5. Electrical Hook-up (line voltage by electrical contractor and low voltage by door contractor). Door contractor to supply all equipment to Electrical contractor. Division 26 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Installers: For actual installation of the special door, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in installation of the selected products and who are completely familiar with the requirements of this Work. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: In addition to meeting all local standards and codes, comply with the provisions of Standards of the American Rolling Door Institute, National Electrical Manufacturer's Association and Factory Mutual. C. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A 526, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction - "Manual of Steel Construction". 3. American Iron and Steel Institute - "Light Gage Steel Design Manual'; 4. American Welding Society - "Code for Arc and Gas Welding". 5. Metal Building Manufacturer Association - "Recommended Design F'faet_ices z Manual". -. 6. Aluminum Association - "Aluminum Construction Manual". May 30, 2012 08 30 00-1 SPECIAL DOORS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING D. Design Criteria 1. The intended design wind load for the Exterior doors to be 90 -MPH a Hangar Doors. The primary and secondary framing of hangar door, upper guide rail assemblies shall comply, where applicable, with wind loads and specifications in accordance with the latest American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications of Standard Structural Sections. Cold form shapes and/or hot rolled shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 Specification, Steel for Bridges and Buildings. 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Owner in accordance with these Specifications, the following: A. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and details, anchorage methods, hardware locations and installation details. B. Operation and Maintenance information. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Deliver doors in Manufacturer's packaging complete with installation instructions. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1_5 Warranty: Doors and motors - one year on workmanship and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Electrically Operable Insulated Overhead 1. Door Panels — Overhead doors should be from a single manufacturer in compliance with either of the following: a. Overhead Door Company (Thermoseal Standard) Door Panels: Panels shall be 1- 3/4" thick, roll formed from commercial quality hot dip galvanized steel per ASTM A-525 and A-526. Door sections constructed of 26 gauge interior and 25 gauge exterior skins -mechanically interlocked and pressure bonded to a 1-3/4" inch thick expanded polystyrene core. Interior and exterior skins to be separated by a continuous dual durometer vinyl extrusion to form an effective thermal break and complete weather tight seal along section joint. Thermal break extrusion to be held in place by means of a mechanical interlock. End stiles to be minimum 14 -- gauge, separated from exterior skin with vinyl thermal break. Built inkbackup plates for attaching all end style hardware to be minim 14 gauge. Bgckup,plates for attaching all other hardware to be minimum 16 gauge. y 08 30 00-2 May 30, 2012 SPECIAL DOORS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. Raynor Manufacturing Company (Tri -Core): Door Panels: Panels shall be 3" thick, roll formed from commercial quality hot dip galvanized steel per ASTM A- 525 and A-526. Door sections constructed of 26 guage interior and exterior skins - mechanically interlocked and pressure bonded to a 2-7/8 inch thick expanded polystyrene core. Interior and exterior skins to be separated by a continuous dual durometer vinyl extrusion to form an effective thermal break and complete weather tight seal along section joint. Thermal break extrusion to be held in place by means of a mechanical interlock. End stiles to be minimum 14 gauge, separated from exterior skin with vinyl thermal break. Built in backup plates for attaching all end style hardware to be minim 14 gauge. Backup plates for attaching all other hardware to be minimum 16 gauge. 2. Finish: Exterior and interior of door skins pre -coated prior to roll forming with a two coat process of baked on Kynar White finish over epoxy primer. Exterior color to be beige, interior white. 3. All overhead doors to have lift clearance type track operation. 4. Weatherstripping: Doors to be furnished with complete weatherstripping system to reduce air infiltration. Top of door provided with EPDM rubber sealing strip. Jamb seal to be EPDM rubber blade type attached to track angle mounting with rigid vinyl snap -on extrusion. Weatherstripping to be replaceable without removal of track, angle mounting or door hardware. Maximum air leakage per foot of door perimeter (floor, jamb, and header) shall not exceed .81 CFM @ 25 M.P. H. when tested in accordance with ASTM E-283. 5. Weather/Sensing Edge: Provide automatic reversing control by an automatic sensing switch within neoprene or rubber astragal extending full width of door bottom bar. a. Contact with switch before fully closing shall cause door to immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to the fully opened position. b. Provide retracting safety cord and reel connection to control circuit. 6. Track: All tracks to be galvanized 3" type 12 gauge. Track to have Graduated Seal for weather tight closing. Tracks to be continuous angle mounted and fully adjustable for sealing door to jamb. Continuous angle size to be not less than 3-1/2" x 6" x 1/8" — 3" tracks. Horizontal track to be adequately reinforced with continuous angle. Installation to be for operation as high as possible to room framing. a. Hardware: All hinges and brackets made from galvanized hardened steel balls per roller (3"). Cylinder locks at manual doors only. Stainless steel rollers required at all Wash Bay doors. 7. Springs: Heavy duty 75,000 cycle oil tempered wire torsion springs on continuous ball bearing cross header shaft. Galvanized aircraft type lifting cables with minimum safety of 7 to 1. 8. Wind Load: Doors designed to withstand 20 lbs. per square foot. Deflection of door in horizontal position to be maximum 1/120 of door width. 9. Glazing: Lite inserts to be 24" x 8" thermal type, 5/8" insulated glass. Glass unit to be encased in one piece vulcanized EPDM rubber frame. All doors to have lites in third section or as shown on exterior elevations. c-. - 10. Electric Operators: (a) Shall be gearhead drive, jackshaft type with chain hoist. Verify VO4.electri,cal drawings. Horse power determined by door size. All doors to haveelectric Millers safety edge to stop and reverse door upon striking an object`'and photo r' , safety eyes. Activation Station — 1-3 button open close and stop Nema T surface mounted with 24 volt circuit. Motion loop detectors to open doors only where indicated on plans. Timers to close door, by overhead door contractor. Required May 30, 2012 08 30 00-3 SPECIAL DOORS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING at all doors. b. Wiring: All electrical wiring to be done by electrical contractor. Door Contractor to supply all materials necessary to Electrical Contractor. Low voltage wiring by Door Contractor. See details on electrical sheets for required work. 2_2 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Manufacturers must meet or exceed specifications. Overhead Sectional Doors 1. Raynor Manufacturing Company 2. Overhead Door Company PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Discrepancies In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 Installation A. Install all special doors in strict accord with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the approved Shop Drawings and the Manufacturer's current recommendations anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. B. Fit, align and adjust complete door assemblies level and plumb and to provide smooth operation. C. Securely brace overhead door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. 3_3 Touching Up: Upon completion of the installation, touch up all scuffs and abrasions in the shop priming coat, using primer specified above. 3_4 Instructions: Upon completion of the installing, and as a condition of its acceptance, instruct the Owner's maintenance and operation personnel with the operation and maintenance of the special door and grilles. 08 30 00-4 May 30, 2012 SPECIAL DOORS k 08 30 00-4 May 30, 2012 SPECIAL DOORS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 08 41 00 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.5 Warranty PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 2.1 Materials 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers 2.3 Fabrication 3.1 Surface Conditions 3.2 Preparation 3.3 Installation 3.4 Adjustments and Cleaning A. Work Included: Aluminum door, window and sash, complete with finish hardware B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Masonry Section 04 20 00 3. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 4. Caulking Section 07 92 13 5. Anchors and Inserts Section 08 11 00 6. Cylinders for locks Section 08 71 00 7. Glazing Section 08 80 00 8. Pole Building Section 13 34 18 9. Metal Building Systems Section 13 34 19 10. Electrical Division 26 C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others: 1. Door hardware others than specified in this Section 08 71 00. 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Installers 1. For actual installation of the work of this Section use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required and who are completely familiar with the Manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation as well as the requirements of this Work. 2. In acceptance or rejection of installed doors and frames, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the park of installers. B. Design Criteria 1. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused ~ by a cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F. without causing detrimoental effects' to system or components. 2. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads caused'by pressure_, and suction of wind as calculated in accord with the applicable building,codes: 3. Limit mullion deflection to 11200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. May 30, 2012 0841 13-1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 4. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior. 5. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot of assembly surface area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 0.3 inches water gage as measured in accord with ASTM E 2831. 6. System to accommodate, without damage to system or components, or deterioration of perimeter seal; Movement within system, movement between system and perimeter framing components; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. B. Allowable Tolerances 1. Variation from Plane: 0.03 inches per foot maximum or 0.25 inches per 30 feet, whichever is less. 2. Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.015 inches. C. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A 164, Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Steel b. A 386, Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products c. B 221, Aluminum - Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes d. E 283, Air Performance e. E 330, Structural f. E 331, Water 2. Aluminum Association (AA): Designation for Aluminum Finishes. 3. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 501. Water b. 1503, Thermal 13 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Architect in accordance with these Specifications; the following: A. Samples: Submit a sample of the prefinished aluminum material illustrating the actual finish obtained in the specified anodizing. B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete Shop Drawings showing all details of the fabrication and installation, including system and component dimensions; components within assembly; framed opening requirements and tolerances; anchorage and fasteners, glass and infills; door hardware requirements; and adequate provision for installation of the specified glass. C. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificates that materials meet Specification requirements. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. - B. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's packaging complete with installation instructions. 0841 13-2 May 30, 2012 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING C. Provide wrapping or strippable coating to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1_5 Warranty: Provide three year Manufacturer's warranty to cover complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Touch-up primer for galvanized surfaces: FS TT -P-641. C. Fasteners, where exposed, shall be aluminum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accord with ASTM A 164. D. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, providing and steel is properly isolated from the aluminum. E. Glazing gaskets shall be EPDM elastomeric extrusions. F. Single acing entrance frame weatherstripping shall be a non -porous, polymeric material. G. Fabricated Components 1. General a. All assemblies for this Work, unless otherwise specifically approved by the Architect, shall be the product of one Manufacturer. b. All exterior frames and doors shall be of thermal break construction. Mullion and perimeter gutters shall be separated from mullion and perimeter faces by PVC members eliminating all metal to metal contact between exterior and interior of the frame so that it will perform in such a manner that condensation will first appear on the glass before the metal. 2. Exterior Framing System: 4'/z" deep by 2 wide profile of Kawneer TRI -FAB -VG -451-T; extruded aluminum alloy, ASTM B 221; thermally broken with interior portion of frame section completely insulated, complete with extruded aluminum security type snap -in glass stops for sidelights and transom lights, of profile to suit frame section. Verticals to be SSG Type Exterior Butt -Glazed. 3. Exterior Window Frames: 4-1/2 inch deep by 1-3/4 inch wide profile Kawneer Encore; of extruded aluminum alloy, ASTM B 221 complete with extruded aluminum' security type snap -in glass stops for sidelights and transom lights, of profile to -suit frame section. H. Finish 1. All exposed framing surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes: Aluminum moldings shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodidoxide treatment to obtain; May 30, 2012 0841 13-3 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING a. Annodized Finish Permanodic coating conforming to Aluminum Association Standard AA -M12 C22 A44. Dark Bronze. b. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accord with ASTM A 386 to 2 ounces per square foot. 2. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. I. Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation shall be new. first quality of their respective kinds and subject to approval of the Architect. 2_2 Acceptable Manufacturers: A. Kawneer D. Vistawall B. U. S. Aluminum E. Tubelite C. EFCO 2.3 Fabrication A. Fabricate aluminum doors and frames to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation. B. Fabricate aluminum sills, head jamb, jamb closures at exposed precast, insulation as all doors and sash terminations, caps at extended sills, etc. as shown on Drawings. C. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit door and frame assemblies in place. D. Accurately and rigidly fit together joints and corners. Match components ensuring continuity of line and design. Ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof. E. Provide for moisture entering joints and condensation occurring within frame construction to drain to exterior. F. Make provision for hardware and provide required internal reinforcing. G. Shop prefabricate all doors and frames into complete units. H. Fabricate in strict accord with the approved Shop Drawings and the Manufacturer's published recommendations. I. Weld or mechanically fasten along entire line of contact on the unexposed side..; J. No discoloration of the face after anodizing will be acceptable. 0841 13-4 May 30, 2012 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Surface Conditions A Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that doors and frames may be installed in complete accord with the original design and the approved Shop Drawings, 3. Assure that frame openings correspond to dimensions of frame furnished. 4. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3_2 Preparation A. Verify all measurements at the job site prior to fabrication. 3.3 Installation A. Install aluminum doors and frames in accord with Manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Use sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten door and frame assemblies to the building. C. Install all members with adequate provision for settling, expanding and contracting to occur without breaking glass. D. Install hardware in accord with Manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates. Adjust operating hardware. E. Install batt insulation in shim spaces around perimeter of door and frame assemblies, to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. F. Install perimeter sealant and related backing materials in accord with workmanship and installation requirements indicated in Section 07900. 3_4 Adjustment and Cleaning A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. - B. Remove dirt from exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners, Wipe surfaces clean. May 30, 2012 0841 13-5 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING C. Remove excess sealants or glazing compounds from exposed surfaces by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant Manufacturer. D. Touch up marred or abraded surfaces to match original finish. E. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. F. Remove debris from project site. 0841 13-6 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 08 71 00 HARDWARE SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers 1.2 Quality Assurance 3.1 Deliveries 1.3 Submittals 3.2 Installation 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 3.3 Inspection of Installation 2.1 Materials 3.4 Setup & Training PART 1GENERAL 11 Description A. Work Included: The required hardware for doors is indicated on the Drawings in the form of a hardware schedule, in addition provide hardware for all cabinetwork. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00 2. Installation on metal doors and frames Section 08 11 00 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualification of Supplier: The finish hardware supplier will employ a hardware consultant who will prepare all submittals and be available to the Owner for consultation should any problems arise during the course of the work; this consultation will be at no additional cost to the Owner. The hardware consultant shall check all installations and report to the Architect. B. Quality of Hardware: All hardware will meet applicable materials and finishes standards of the Builders' Hardware Manufacturer's Assn., ANSI A156, and Underwriters' Laboratory for all hardware in fire rated assemblies. C. Reference Standards 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. All 15.1 - Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. b. A115.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. c. A115.4 - Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. d. A115.5 - Frame Preparation for 181 & 190 Series Deadlock Strikes. e. All 15.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting. f. At 15.13 - Door and Frame Preparation for Tubular Deadlocks. `- g. A115.14 - Preparation for Standard Steel Doors for Open Back Strikes. h. A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. i. A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. ; j. A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim. k. A156.3 - Exit Devices. I. A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers). m. A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. a May 30, 2012 0871 00-1 HARDWARE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING n. A156.7 -Template Hinges. c. A15(3.8- Door Controls (Overhead Holders). 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract. and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Architect in accordance with these Specifications; the following: A. Samples 1. Submit samples of each type of hardware required for job. 2. Indicate required style and finish. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Submit Shop Drawings and product data for each style of hardware. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 3. Supply templates to door and frame manufacturers to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts for hardware. C. Material List: Before any finish hardware is ordered for this work, submit to the Architect, for approval, a complete list of all finish hardware proposed to be furnished, giving Manufacturer's name, catalog number with a picture of each item. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide Architect with Manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before. during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Packaging 1. Furnish all finish hardware with each unit clearly marked or numbered in accord with the Hardware Schedule. 2. Pack each item complete with all necessary pieces and fasteners. 3. Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches during delivery and storage. C. Delivery: Deliver all finish hardware to the installers in a timely manner to ensure orderly progress of the total work. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cgst to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials: All Hardware Finish is to be Bronze. - A. General 1. Provide items as listed in this Section, complete to function as intended:' 0871 00-2 May 30, 2012 HARDWARE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Furnish all finish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position securely. 3. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts, hex bolts and other anchors approved by the Architect, according to the material to which the hardware is to be applied and the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer. 4. Design: All fastenings shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. 5. Fire label approved hardware to be used on all fire rated doors. B. Hinges: 5 knuckle, button tip, full mortise, template type, butts with non -rising loose pins. See schedule for ball bearings. Finish 4-112 X 4-1/2. C. Closures: Furnish flat rectangular type closures with covers. Size all closers in accord with the Manufacturer's recommendations and good standard practice. All surface mounted closures shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Hold opens and door stops where scheduled. D. Door Holders: Surface mounted or integral with door closure where applicable. E. Kick -plates: Colored plastic to match Hardware. Lockset 1. Best Locks: 9K Series, or equal function as scheduled, lever style 15, Rose style D. finish to be Bronze. 2. Schlage Locks: D Series, function as scheduled, lever style "Rhodes", finish to be Bronze. G. Weatherstrip: PF 181 aluminum to sizes and profiles show on the Drawings. H. Threshold: Saddle type, aluminum 6063-T5 mill finish, aluminum color, size 4" X 1/2". I. Keying 1. All cylinders shall be construction masterkeyed. No substitutions will be allowed 2. Master key all locks in accord with Owner's Master Key system. 3. Perform all keying at the factory. Have construction Master Keys only delivered to the job site. Send all other keys, tagged and identified directly to the Owner by registered mail. Stamp all permanent keys and key blanks: "Do Not Duplicate" 4. Deliver two keys for each type of lock plus two master keys. 2_2 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Exit Devices B. Push -Pull C. Cylinder D. Closer E. Wall Stop F. Threshold G. Hinges H. Weatherstrip L Kickplates J. Locksets May 30, 2012 Russwin, Von Duprin Brookline, Dor-Line, Russwin, Hiawatha, Rockwood Schlage, Corbin LCN, Norton Ives, Corbin Russwin Brookline, Reese, Zero Hager Gossen, Zero Brookline Best Access Systems Schlage 0871 00-3 HARDWARE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING K. Door Holders Glynn -Johnson, Russwin L. Soundstops National Guard Products. Zero M. Door Sweeps National Guard Products, Zero N. Door Systems Tormax Automatic door systems PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Deliveries: Stockpile all items sufficiently in advance to ensure their availability and make all necessary deliveries in a timely manner to ensure orderly progress of the total work. 3.2 Installation A. Install all hardware securely in place, test, oil, grease, adjust for perfect operation. B. Maintain following mounting heights for doors. from finished floor to center line of hardware item: Conform to applicable codes for accessibility requirements. 1. Hinges a. Top - 5 inches from head of frame to top of hinge. it. Bottom - 10 inches from finished floor to bottom of hinge. c. Intermediate - centered between top and bottom hinges. d. On Dutch doors - 5 inches from head of frame to top of hinge: 10 inches from finished floor to bottom of bottom hinge. 5 inches from split line to top and bottom respectively of lower and upper intermediate hinges. 2. Unit and integral type locks and latches - 38 inches to centerline of knob. 3. Deadlocks - 48 inches to centerline of cylinder. 4. Panic hardware - 38 inches to centerline of cross bar. 5. Door pulls - 42 inches to center of grip. 6. Push-pull bars - 42 inches to centerline of bar. 7. Arm pulls - 47 inches to centerline. 8. Push plates - 48 inches to centerline of plate. 9. Roller latches - 45 inches to centerline. 10. Nameplates - 60 inches to centerline, on wall adjacent to latch side of door. 3_3 Inspection of Installation Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect a report signed by the hardware consultant stating that the consultant's inspection was made, that all adjustments recommended have been complete. and that all finish hardware furnished under this Section has been installed and is in optimum working condition. 3_4 Setup and Training: Upon completion of the installation of the electronic access hardware, install software and card encoder on site. Provide on site training and one- year of telephone support. 0871 00-4 May 30, 2012 HARDWARE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers 1.2 Quality Assurance 2.3 Fabrication 1.3 Submittals 3.1 Surface Conditions 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 3.2 Preparation 1.5 Job Conditions 3.3 Installation 1.6 Warranty 3.4 Protection of Completed Work 2.1 Materials 3.5 Cleaning PART IGENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included: Glass and glazing required for this Work includes tempered and regular plate glass; insulating glass; wire glass and safety glass; and bronze tint insulating glass; glass mirrors; glass doors; and glass sound seal. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Masonry Section 04 20 00 2. Joint sealers Section 07 92 13 3. Metal doors and frames Section 08 11 00 4. Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts Section 08 41 00 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Manufacturers B. Qualifications of Installers: Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, who shall be completely familiar with the referenced standards and the requirements of this Work, and who shall personally direct all installation performed under this Section of these specifications. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install glass and glazing to meet requirements of State and Federal Building Codes. D. Source Quality Control E. Reference Standards 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. Z 97.1, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of In- Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. E 84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. Federal Specifications (FS): a. DD -G-451, Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses). May 30, 2012 08 80 00-1 GLAZING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING b. DD -G- 1403, Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered). c. TT -S-230, Sealing Compound: Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building Construction. d. TT -S-1543, Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 4. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual for glazing installation methods. 5. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA): a. 64-7-2, Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Owner in accordance with these Specifications: the following: A. Shop Drawings: Sections and details of glass installation at framing members such as head. mullions, transoms, jambs and sills. Provide schedule of sizes, quantities, locations and mounting methods. B. Manufacturer's Literature 1. Manufacturer's descriptive data of glass materials. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 2. Provide data on glazing sealant identifying available colors. 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection 1. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before; during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 2. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass. B. Delivery of Materials 1. Deliver glass with Manufacturer's labels intact. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed. 2. Deliver glazing compounds and sealants in Manufacturer's unopened, labeled containers. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 Job Conditions A. Environmental Requirements 1. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F: 2. Perform glazing on dry surfaces only. 08 80 00-2 May 30, 2012 GLAZING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 1_6 Warranty 1. The subcontract for the glass will not be approved by the Owner until the subcontractor has submitted to the Owner, for approval, the proposed warranty on the glass material to be supplied. This warranty should be supplied to the Owner on execution of the General Contract. This warranty should cover a period of 5 years. 2. Include coverage of sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting and replacement of same. 3. Mirror warranty to cover glass and coating against discoloration or manufacturing defects and against failure from mastic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Glass 1. Insulated Glass Units: Double pane units with edge seal, outer pane 114 inch Bronze tint, inner pane 1/4" clear, 1/2 inch interpane space purged with inert argon gas. Total unit thickness 1 inch. Low emensitivity #3 surface. Tempered pane each face where required by 1.2.0 or if shown on Drawings or specified in addition to above code reference. Insulating glass to meet the following requirements: a. Transmittance: average daylight — 44%; solar — 35%; UV — 23% b. External reflectance: average daylight — 8%; solar — 7%. c. Winter U -Value — 0.30 d. Shading coefficient -0.53 e. Relative heat gain - 111 B. Glazing Accessories 1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 70-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4 inches long by 3/8 inch wide by 1/4 inch high, chemically compatible with sealant used. 2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene; 50 Shore A durometer hardness; 3 inches long by 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 inch thick; self adhesive one face, chemically compatible with sealant used. 3. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10-15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; Size and spacers where recommended by manufacturer; black color. 4. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinylchloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; color as selected. 5. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 6. Filler Rod: Compressible synthetic rubber of foam, chemically compatible with sealant use. 7. Primer -Sealers and Cleaners: As recommended by glass Manufacturer. 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Glass: SIGMA Member B. Glazing Compound: Tremco - 1. Standard glazing: Dymonic May 30, 2012 08-80 00-3•.; GLAZING - IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2.3 Fabrication A. Glass: All glass shall bear labels showing strength, thickness, type and quality and shall be relatively distortion free with all distortion waves in the horizontal direction and shall be in the following qualities. B. Interior Glazing: Door lites all tempered; 1/4 inch clear, tint, or frosted per door schedule: fixed lites 1/4 inch clear or tint plate tempered below eye level; 3/8 inch and 1/4 inch clear or tint plate, edges for butt glazing. 1. Tinting Schedule a. Provide Clear Glass at all interior glass. b. Provide Bronze tinted glass at all exterior glass. C. Exterior Glazing 1. Doors: One inch Bronze insulating tempered. D. Tempered Glass: Where tempered insulating glass is called for, both lites will be tempered. E. Insulating Glass: Exterior insulating glass construction shall be, 1/4 inch Bronze exterior. 1/2 inch air space and 1/4 inch clear interior lite. Low emensitivity #3 surface, inert argon gas, tempered where specified or required. Edges for butt glazing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that all glazing may be performed in accord with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design and the reference standards. 3. Check that glazing channels are free of burrs, irregularities and debris. 4. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections. 5. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory. 6. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3_2 Preparation A. Field Measurements 1. Measure size of frames to receive glass. 2. Compute actual glass size, allowing for edge clearances. B. Preparation of Surfaces 1. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed. 08 80 00-4 May 30, 2012 GLAZING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Clean glass and glazing surfaces, to remove dust, oil and contaminants and wipe dry. 3. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses. 4. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3_3 Installation - Application - Erection A. General 1. Positioning Glass a. Orient pattern and draw of glass pieces in same direction. b. Place glass waves parallel to floor. c. Set smooth side to exterior. 2. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade tempered, heat strengthened, coated or insulating glass. 3. Slope exterior surfaces of gaskets, tapes and sealant beads to provide for water runoff. 4. All glazing materials must be compatible. 5. Provide weep holes to remove all water from the glazing assembly. B. Exterior Dry Method (Preformed Glazing) 1. Cut glazing tape spline to length; install on glass pane. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. 2. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. 3. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane. 4. Install removable stops without displacement of glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. 5- Trim protruding tape edge. 3_4 Protection of Completed Work A. Attach crossed streamers away from glass face. B. Do not apply markers to glass surface. C. Replace damaged glass. 3_5 Cleaning A. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass and frames. B. Remove labels from glass surface as soon as installed - C. Wash and polish faces of glass. D. Remove debris from worksite. 4 w x x + x • • • a x w x :e x_ May 30, 2012 08 80 00-5 GLAZING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 08 80 00-6 May 30, 2012 GLAZING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 2.3 Mixing and Tinting 1.2 Quality Assurance 3.1 Surface Conditions 1.3 Submittals 3.2 Preparation of Surfaces 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage 3.3 Paint Application and Handling 3.4 Reinstallation of Removed Items 1.5 Job Conditions 3.5 Cleaning Items 2.1 Materials 3.6 Painting Schedules 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers PART IGENERAL 1_1 Description A. Work Included 1. The Painting Contractor shall furnish all material, labor and equipment required to complete all painting and finishing as shown on the Drawings, Plans and Specifications. 2. The Painting Contractor shall examine the Specifications for the various other trades and shall thoroughly become familiar with all provisions regarding painting. All surfaces that are left unfinished by the requirements of other Specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this Work. 3. In general, paint all wood, metal surfaces, doors, frames, masonry. 4. Following Specifications cover complete painting, finishing of wood and other surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, unless otherwise noted. 5. The types of paint to be used and the number of coats to be applied are listed in the Painting Schedule in Part 3.7 of this Section of these Specifications. 6. Furnish tools, ladders, scaffolding, other equipment necessary for work completion. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Prefinishing: Shop priming and factory prefinishing are required on some, but not all of the items described in other Sections of these Specifications. 2. Structural Steel, Miscellaneous Metals and Metal Doors and Frames, one shop coat and touching up in field. 3. Sealants and Caulking Section 07 92 00 4. Painting of Exterior Roof Vents/Louvers at all exposed elevations Division 23 C. Definitions 1. The term "Paint', as used herein, includes enamels, paints, sealers, fillers, emulsions, and other coatings, whether used as prime, intermediate of finish coats. 2. "Coats" described later are based on roller, brush or spray application. Above does not refer to processes that require spraying only for their application or where specifically specified to be sprayed. 3. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. May 30, 2012 0991 00-1 PAINTING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Painters 1. Maintain a crew of painters throughout the duration of the work who shall be qualified to fully satisfy the requirements of this Specification. 2. Use only qualified journeyman painters for the mixing and application of paint on exposed surfaces. Apprentices may be employed to work under the direction of qualified journeymen, in accord with trade regulations. In the acceptance or rejection of installed painting, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of painters. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Occupational Safety and Health and pollution Regulations: Conform to the Federal and State requirements for painting work applicable to this Project. 2. Permits: Obtain and pay for any special permits required by local governmental agencies. C. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. D 16. Definitions of Terns Relating to Painting, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products. 2. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with "Standard (Type 1)" as defined by the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America in their "Modern Guide to Paint Specifications", current Edition. 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Owner in accordance with these Specifications; the following: A. Samples: Accompanying the materials list, submit to the Owner two copies of the full range of colors, textures and finishes available in each of the proposed products. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: In each case where material proposed is not the material specified or specifically described as an acceptable alternate in this Section of these Specifications. submit for the Owner's review the current Manufacturer of the proposed material. C. Material List 1. A complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the Work. 2. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution of materials for those specified or approved for this Work by the Owner. D. Color Charts: Include color charts for selection by Owner. Extra Stock: Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver to the Owner an extra stock of paint equaling approximately 10% of each color used in each coating material used, with all such extra stock tightly sealed in clearly labeled containers. Extra stock to be from batch mix furnished for Work. 0991 00-2 PAINTING May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Delivery of Materials: Deliver all paint materials to the job site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. C. Storage of Materials 1. Store only the approved materials at the job site, and store only in suitable and designated area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related equipment. 2. Use all means necessary to ensure the safe storage and use of paint materials and the prompt and safe disposal of waste. 3. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of 90 degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by Manufacturer's instructions. D. Handling Materials and Equipment 1. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 2. All soiled or used rags, waste and trash must be removed from the building each night and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire. 3. Toxic Materials: a. Where toxic materials, including both toxic and explosive solvents are used, take appropriate precautions as a regular procedure, conforming to the Manufacturers recommendations and to the requirements of the applicable safety regulatory agencies. b. In applying acid etch coating or solutions and toxic materials, provide ventilation and take protective measures to conform to the requirements of regulatory agencies. E. Replacements: The painting trade is responsible for making repairs of their own Work when due to defective workmanship or materials. Repair of damaged paint finish caused by other trades will be done by this Contractor but paid for by the contractor causing such damage. See Section 01 70 00. 1.5 Job Conditions A. Environmental Requirements 1. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditionst' under which coatings and coating systems can be applied. — 2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. 3. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during and for48 hours;after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by Manufacturer's i6structions. 4. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by Manufacturer's instrrlctions. n 5. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exteriors, unless required otherwise by Manufacturer's instructions. May 30, 2012 0991 00-3 PAINTING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 6. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior, unless required otherwise by Manufacturer's instructions. 7. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 8. Do not do exterior work on unprotected surfaces if it is raining or moisture from any other source is present or expected before applied materials can dry or attain proper cure. 9. Allow surfaces wetted by rain or other moisture source to dry and to attain temperatures and conditions specified before proceeding or continuing with coating application. B. Protection 1. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted. 2. The Painting Contractor shall protect surfaces and objects inside and outside the building, as well as the grounds, lawns, shrubbery and adjacent properties against damage. The Painting Contractor shall be held responsible for damage to adjacent furnishings. 3. Drop Cloths: Provide sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or drippings from fouling surfaces not being painted including surfaces within the paint storage and preparation areas. 4. Exposed Concrete Floors: Floor slabs that will not be covered by other finishes will be protected against staining or damage by the work of the Painting Contractor. Repair of such damage may include replacement of the slab if so determined by the Architect or Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Select primary products of the coating system from products of a single manufacturer. B. Secondary products not specified by name and required for the job such as oils, thinners, patching, compounds, putty, shall be "best grade" or "first line" products of a reputable manufacturer. C. Compatibility 1. All paint materials and equipment shall be compatible in use: finish coats shall be compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated, all tools and equipment shall be compatible with the coating to be applied. 2. Thinners; when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the Manufacturer of the material to be thinned. 3. All shop primers are required to be approved by finish coat paint manufacturer. D. Colors and glosses: All colors shall be as selected by the Owner and will be limited to not more than six paint colors in the total Work. Multi colors may be used in one given room; but not more than two per room and the color will terminate -at.a corner. 1. Colors of paints and stains match color chips submitted to the Owner. 0991 00-4 May 30. 2Q1� s PAINTING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2_2 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2_3 Mixing and Tinting A. Deliver paints and enamels ready -mixed to job site. B. Accomplish job mixing and job tinting only when acceptable to the Owner. C. Fungicidal agent shall be incorporated into the paint by the Manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that paint finishes may be applied in strict accord with all pertinent codes and regulations and the requirements of these Specifications. 3. Examine surfaces schedules to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through preparatory work as included in Article 3.2 Preparation. 4. If woodwork, metal or any other surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, filling, sanding, dusting, puttying operation, notify Owner immediately for clarification. 5. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 6. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums or as required by paint materials manufacturer: (submit written documentation by paint manufacturer). a. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. b. Masonry, Concrete and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. c. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accord with ASTM D 2016. 7. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces or substrate. 3_2 Preparation A. General 1. Protection: Prior to all surface preparation and painting operation, completely mask, remove or otherwise adequately protect all hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with painted surfzLces, but not scheduled to receive paint. May 30, 2012 0991 00-5 PAINTING, IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Priming: a. Spot prime all exposed nails and other metals which are to be painted with emulsion paints using a primer recommended by the Manufacturer of the coating system. b. Back prime interior trim before installation, with interior trim primer. 3. Cleaning: a. Before applying paint or other surface treatment, thoroughly clean all surfaces involved. b. Previously Painted Surfaces: (1) Remove all blistered, peeling and scaling paint to bare substrate. Remove heavy chalk by scrubbing with seal and water. Sand or etch any glossy areas and dust clean. Clean and spot prime any failed areas. Rinse clean and let. dry. Any existing mildew on the surface must be completely killed and remove before applying paint. (2) Efflorescence should be removed from masonry surfaces. Rusted or abraded areas on painted metal should be thoroughly hand or power toll cleaned and spot primed. For optimum performance in more corrosive areas, entire metal surface should be abrasive blast cleaned. In all cases if the old paint shows poor adhesion, it shall all be removed and the entire surface primed. (3) Where new work joints existing work, prepare existing surfaces extending to the nearest break in the plane. (4) Wash surfaces with detergent and water or other solution as required to remove any accumulated dirt, oil. grease or other foreign matter which would impair bond or bleed through new finishes. After washing, rinse with water and allow to dry thoroughly. c. Schedule all cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. d. Work will be received broom clean only from General Contractor. Note protection and cleaning required by Painting Contractor. B. Wood Surfaces 1. Cleaning: Clean all wood surfaces until they are free from dirt, oil and other foreign substances. Remove all pencil marks and grade stamps, sanding when a semi- transparent finish is to be applied. All loose wood fibers or dust should be removed by brushing. 2. Smoothing: a. Unless specifically noted to be left rough, smooth all finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sandpaper, the dust off. b. Where so required; use varying degrees of coarseness in sandpaper tc produce uniformly smooth and unmarred wood surfaces. 3 Dryness: Unless specifically approved by the Owner, do not proceed with the painting of wood surfaces C. Masonry 1. Fill cracks and irregularities with portiand cement grout to provide uniform surface texture. 2. Fill concrete masonry unit surfaces with block filler. .. L , 0991 00-6 May 30, 2012 PAINTING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING E. Ferrous Metal Surfaces 1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces until they are completely free from dirt, oil, rust, scale or grease. When heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. 2. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint. 3. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. 3_3 Paint Application A. General 1. Workmanship: Very best, spread materials evenly, glow on smoothly without runs, sags, employ skilled mechanics. 2. Use materials only as specified by Manufacturer's direction label on container. 3. Where interior or exterior wood and metal are primed in the mill or ship, use material in every case same as the specified for such surfaces; use as per Manufacturer's directions for first or priming coat. 4. Finish door tops, bottoms, edges, same as balance of doors after they are fitted. 5. Cover surfaced to be stained with uniform stain coat; wipe off as required. 6. Sand smoothly woodwork to be finished with stain. Clean surface before proceeding with first coat application. Use fine sand paper between coats. Finish wood or metal to produce even, smooth finish. 7. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 8. Each coat shall cover preceding coat, so that preceding coat shall not show through. Each coat of paint shall be slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise directed. Undercoats shall be tinted similar to finish coats. Color of priming shall be lighter than body coat. Body coat shall be same color but lighter than finish coat. 9. Paint all surfaces, except glass, flat concrete and similar items, not pre -finished and not called out as unfinished. 10. Apply paint enamel stain and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, or spraying equipment. a. Rate of application shall not exceed that as recommended by paint Manufacturer for the surface involved. b. Keep brushes, and rollers, and spraying equipment clean, dry, free from contaminates and suitable for the finish required. c. Apply stain by brush. 11. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile up of paints, and skipped or missed areas. a. Finished metal surfaces shall be free of skips, voids or pinholes in any coat when tested with a low voltage detector. Test required on first application. 12. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping. 13. Apply primer on all work before glazing. 14. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable 15. Finish metal doors and frames to be Manufacturer's standard primed (not finish coated); finish coats by Painting Contractor. 16. No overhead doors or rolling steel doors should be painted. All tube steel door jambs are scheduled to be painted. May 30, 2012 0991 00-7 PAINTING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 17. All ceilings to be painted except acoustical tile ceilings. See schedules. B. Drying 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats. 2. Modify the period as recommended by the material Manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions. C. Environmental Conditions 1. Comply with the Manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which the coating system may be applied. No painting allowed when temperatures are below 50 degrees F., above 120 degrees F. or with 90% or above relative humidity. 2. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated. D. Defects: Sand and dust between coats to remove all defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. E. Dry Mil Thickness 1. General: Apply all coatings to the dry mil thickness indicated in the "Painting Schedule". In general all painted surfaces to have a DFT as listed unless noted otherwise. F. Recoating 1. Whenever possible, notify Architect between coats. 3.4 Reinstallation of Removed Items: Following completion of painting, in each space, promptly reinstall all items removed for painting or wall covering using only workmen skilled in the particular trade. 3_5 Cleaning Up A. General 1. During profess of the Work, do not allow the accumulation of empty containers or other excess items except in areas specifically set aside for the purpose. 2. Prevent accidental spilling of paint materials and in event of such spill, immediately remove all spilled material and the waste or other equipment used to clean up the spill, and wash the surfaces to their original undamaged condition, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Collect cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 4. Touch up and restore finish where damaged. 5. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. 6. Leave storage space clean and in condition required for equivalent spaces in , project. B. Prior to Final Inspection: Upon completion of this portion of the Work visually inspect all surfaces and remove all paint and traces of paint from surfaces not scheduled to be j painted. ' 1_L . 0991 00-8 PAINTING May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3_6 Painting Schedule A. Surfaces Not to be Painted. 1. Pre -finished wall, ceiling and floor coverings. 2. Items with factory applied final finish. 3. Concealed ducts, pipes and conduit. 4. Glass, flat concrete and similar items, not pre -finished. B. Exterior Work (use only exterior quality materials) 1. Exterior Ferrous Metals: a. Touch-up: Rust -inhibitive waterborne acrylic primer, free of heavy metals; Min. DFT: 2.5 - 5.0 mils Min. Volume Solids: 44% b. 2nd Coat: Non -blocking, 100% acrylic gloss coating c. 3rd Coat: Non -blocking, 100% acrylic gloss coating; Min. DFT: 1.3 mils per coat; Min. Volume Solids: 31%; Sheen: 70-90 units at 60 degrees. C. Interior Work 1. Concrete Masonry Units: a. First Coat: Vinyl acrylic blockfiller Min DFT: 8.0 mils; (50-90 sq.ft./gal) Min Volume Solids: 53.5% b. 2nd Coat: 2 -component water based catalyzed epoxy c. 3rd Coat: 2 -component water based catalyzed epoxy Min DFT: 2.5 - 3.0 per coat; Min Volume Solids: 38% (catalyzed) Sheen: 20-30 units at 60 degrees. 2. Interior Ferrous Metal: a. Touch-up: Rust -inhibitive waterborne acrylic primer, free of heavy metals; Min. DFT: 2.5 - 5.0 mils Min. Volume Solids: 44% b. 2nd Coat: Non -blocking, acrylic semi -gloss c. 3rd Coat: Non -blocking, acrylic semi -gloss coating; Pencil Hardness (ASTM D3363): H or harder Min. DFT: 1.3 mils per coat; Min. = Volume Solids: 33%; Sheen: 35-45 units at 60 degrees. - - D. Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Equipment 1. Paint in finished areas only and on exterior of building, exposed or visible galvanized metal ducts, hangers, sheet metal work, conduit boxes, brackets, collar's, supports, exposed covered and uncovered plumbing, heating and other piping and conduit. See Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for extent of such work. Do not include painting of pipes, ducts, conduit, etc. in mechanical rooms and other unfinished areas unless specifically noted. 2. Piping or ducts to be hidden above ceilings or in pipe chases will not be painted. 3. Paint plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical equipment not furnished with factory finish e.g. grilles, louvers, covers and access panels. Equipment furnished with a prime coat shall receive 2 coats of enamel in colors aS selected. May 30, 2012 0991 00-9 PAINTING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 4. Paint bright metal portion and interior surfaces of ductwork convectors and baseboard heating cabinets that is visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to the limits of sight lines. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles and convectors and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. 5. Remove oil or grease from piping and ductwork and apply one coat of primer compatible with surface being finished and with painting material being used for finished coats. 6. In general, exposed covered or uncovered piping and ductwork will be finished with the same materials, number or finish coats of paint and color as the surface to which they are attached. T Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. 0991 00-10 May 30, 2012 PAINTING IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 13 34 18 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Related Sections 1.3 References 1.4 System Description 1.5 Submittals 1.6 Quality Assurance 1.7 Delivery, Storage & Handling 1.8 Project Conditions 1.9 Warranty 2.1 Manufacturers 2.2 Structural Framing 2.3 Metal Roofing PART 1GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 2.4 Shingle Roofing 2.5 Roofing Accessories 2.6 Siding 2.7 Insulation 2.8 Interior Finish 2.9 Personnel Doors 2.10 Aluminum Windows 2.11 Joint Sealant Materials 2.12 Component Color 3.1 Examination 3.2 Erection -Structural Framing 3.3 Installation A. Provide pre-engineered building systems, including but not limited to primary and secondary structural framing systems, roofing, siding, roof and wall insulation, personnel doors, windows and accessories. Basis of design is the following system by Lester Building Systems: 1. Uni-Frame I, clear span truss and embedded columns. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Concrete Section 03 30 00 2. Masonry Section 04 20 00 3. Insulation Section 07 21 00 4. Sheet metal Section 07 60 00 5. Special Doors Section 08 30 00 6. Aluminum Windows Section 08 41 00 7. Glass and Glazing Section 08 80 00 8. Painting: Finish painting of interior primed steel surfaces Section 09 91 00 9. Plumbing Division 22 10. HVAC Division 23 11. Electrical Division 26 12. Earthwork Division 31 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 3. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Mas.oigy' Units. W 4w1 May 30, 2012 13 34 18-1 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 4, ASTM C523 - Method of Test for Light Reflectance of Acoustical Materials by the Integrating Sphere Reflectometer. 5. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 6. ASTM C991 - Standard Specification for Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation for Metal Buildings. 7. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 8. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 9. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss, 10. ASTM D3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 11. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules. 12. ASTM D3841 - Standard Specification for Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Polyester Plastic Panels 13. ASTM D4145 - Standard Test Method for Coating Flexibility of Prepainted Sheet. 14. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, 15. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Frame Design 1. Design shall be based on the building framing and enclosure Uni- Frame I as manufactured by Lester Building Systems. a. Type: Clear span roof truss. b. Maximum Width: 90 feet. C. Maximum Clear Height: 24 feet. d. Columns: Embedded in ground. e. Purlins: Recessed between trusses in galvanized steel joist hangers. B. Dimensions' 1. Width: 80 feet 0 inches, outside to outside of primary or secondary wall framing. 2. Length: 80 feet 0 inches, outside to outside of primary or secondary wall framing. 3. Height: 18 feet 0 inches, clearance from top of floor to underside of, truss or rafter. 4. Roof Slope: Per plans 5. Ceiling Slope: 0:12 (units of rise per 12 units of run). C. Structural Requirements: 1. Building Code: International building edition. 2. Design Loads: a. Ground Snow Load: 25 psf b. Ground Exposure Factor: 0.9. G. Roof Load. Live load: 20 psf 1334 18-2 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM Code (IBC) and ASCE,7,,current (122 kg /M2) (98 kg/m2) May 307 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING d. Roof Dead Load: 3 psf (15 kg/m') e. Ceiling Dead Load: 5 psf (25 kg/mZ) f. Wind Load: Wind speed (3 sec gust): 90 mph (145 km/h) g. Wind Exposure: Category C h. Maximum Considered Earthquake 0.2 Second Spectral Response Acceleration SDS — 0.107 i. Maximum Considered Earthquake 1.0 Second Spectral Response Acceleration SD[ — 0.083 j. Collateral Loads: Additional loads imposed by contract documents other than weight of building systems specified in this section. k. Combination Loads: Comply with Building Code. 3. Structural Design: a. Perform calculations using diaphragm and/or frame analysis. Incorporate bracing as required. b- Comply with AF&PA "National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS)." C. Trusses: 1) Limit deflection for live or snow loads to L/240 for trusses supporting ceilings and to L/180 for overhangs and trusses not supporting ceilings. 2) Limit deflection for live or snow loads to L/360 for trusses supporting ceilings and to L/180 for overhangs and trusses not supporting ceilings. 3) Comply with appropriate NDS and Truss Plate Institute (TPI) standards. d. Metal Wall and Roof Panels: 1) Design in accordance with AISI "Specifications for the Design of Light -Gauge, Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices. e. Plywood or Oriented Strand Board Sheathing: Comply with APA "Plywood Design Specification." f. Expansion/Contraction Provisions: Design roof attachment system to allow for expansion and contraction of metal roofing, due to seasonal temperature variations, without detrimental effect to the roof panels. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for building components and accessories. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Showing roof framing, cross sections, roof and vyall covering and trim details and accessory and component details'cfe'arly indicating proper assembly. May 30, 2012 13 3418-3 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM _' IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING C. Structural Engineer Certification: Letter signed by a Professional/Structural Engineer, registered to practice in the jurisdiction of the project, verifying compliance with Snow Design Requirements. Letter shall reference specific dead loads, live loads, wind loads, tributary area load reductions (if applicable) collateral loads, seismic loads, end use categories, and governing building code including edition and load applications. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum ten years experience in producing pre-engineered wood buildings of the type specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Minimum three years experience in erection of pre-engineered wood buildings of the type specified. C. Structural Engineer's Qualifications: Minimum of three years designing post frame structures: registered in the jurisdiction of the project. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Follow manufacturer's recommended storage procedures. Do not allow steel siding and roofing to contact the ground. B. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Anticipate environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Structural Design - Lifetime: Manufacturer warrants that the building designed by Lester will not experience an occurrence of structural failure or an occurrence of structural damage due to improper structural design (excepting ventilation'; ' systems) on account of weather conditions, such as wind, ice, and snow, M" indicated on the Lester Sales Agreement, "Building Description Section". The foregoing warranty is limited to 50 years with respect to any Owner which is hot ; an individual. B. Preservative Treated Materials: 50 years. Preservative treated lumber, including.._': structural columns, are warranted by the original materials manufacturer against 13 34 18-4 May 30, 2012 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING failures due to fungal decay and termite infestation. C. Roofing and Siding Finish, Lester UNI -RIB: Warranted by the original materials manufacturer for 40 years from the date of shipment. Refer to Warranty document for complete details. D. Individual Building Products: Manufacturer's standard warranty. E. Installation Warranty: One year general installation warranty, five years against roof leaks. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Lester Building Systems, which is located at: 1111 2nd Ave. S. ; Lester Prairie, MN 55354; Toll Free Tel: 800-826- 4439; Tel: 320-395-2531, Email: request info (infoCa.lesterbuildings.com); Web: www.lesterbuildings.com or approved equal. D. Substitutions: approved equal 1.4 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Footings: 1. Embedded Column Footings: a. Precast 4 by 17 inch diameter 4000 psi concrete footing pad. b. PrecastPlus augmented footing consisting of 4 by 17 inch diameter 4000 psi concrete footing pad resting on dry concrete mix of diameter and thickness specified in the shop drawings. C. Cast in place concrete footing of 3000 psi ready -mix concrete of size and thickness specified in the shop drawings. 2. Column Foundation, Above Grade: a. Monolithic floating slab. Sized and reinforced as specified in the shop drawings. b. Pier and Beam. Sized and reinforced as specified in the shop drawings. c- Cast in place trenched wall foundation. Sized and reinforced as specified in the shop drawings. d. Cast in place frost wall and foundation. Sized and reinforced -6s specified in the shop drawings. B. Primary Framing 1. Columns: - a. Treated Lumber Section: 1 Lumber: No. 1 or Better Southern Yellow Pine; pressure treated with Chromated Copper Arsenate, Type, [11, to,al retention of 0.6 pcf (9.6 kg/m') and kiln dried after treating to 19 percent maximum moisture content. 2) Fabrication: Laminate individual pieces using ring shank or wire feed nails per manufacturer's engineered nailing May 30, 2012 13 34 18-5 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING pattern. Fasteners shall have ASTM A153 galvanizing. b. Untreated Lumber Section: 1) Lumber: Lumber: No. 1 or Better Southern Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir -Larch or other equivalent NDS approved species/grade kiln dried to 19 percent maximum moisture content. 2) Fabrication: Laminate individual pieces using ring shank or wire feed nails per manufacturer's engineered nailing pattern. 3) Grade and size shall be selected to support imposed loads within deflection limits. c. End Joint Connection of Treated and Untreated Sections: Factory fabricated finger joint. d. Configuration: 1) Sidewall and Endwall Columns: 3 ply or ply combining 2x4, 2x6, 2x8, or 2x10 (50x150, 50x200, 50x250 mm) dimension lumber as required by "Structural Design" requirements specified herein. 2) Corner Columns: 2 ply or 3 ply 2x4, 2x6 or 2x8 (50x150, 50x200 mm) dimension lumber as required by "Structural Design" requirements specified herein. e. Embedded Column Anchorage: 1) Anchor blocks factory adhered to column base. 2) Concrete collar pinned to column base with steel reinforcing rods. f. Column on Concrete Foundation: g. Provide "Wedge Bolt" drill in anchors per shop drawings. h. Provide cast -in-place anchors per shop drawings, 2. Trusses: Comply with "Structural Design" and "Quality Assurance" requirements as specified herein. a. Comply with TPI "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses" and "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." b. Manufacturer shall have a third party inspection program to verify compliance with requirements of TPI. C. Stamp trusses with inspection agency identification. C. Secondary Framing: 1. Purlins and Girts: a. Lumber: No. 2 or Better dimension lumber kiln dried to 19 percent maximum moisture content. b. Configuration: 2x4 or 2x6 (50000. 50x150 mm) as required by "Structural Design" requirements specified herein. 1) Girts: Size, grade and spacing to meet wind and deflection criterion. a) Face mounted to exterior side of column.:: b) Precision cut to fit between columns. ; c) Flush to exterior and interior faces. - 2) Purlins: Precision cut to fit between trusses flush with top of top chord. Provide 20 gauge galvanized purlin,saddle hangers. 1334 18-6 May 3b,'2012 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3) Purlins: Factory drilled and dadoed to accept 3/16 inch diameter x 6 inch screw fastener and ensure building modularity. C. Spacing: As required by "Structural Design" requirements specified herein. 2. Splashplank: a. Lumber: No. 2 or Better Southern Yellow Pine, preservative treated, to a retention of 0.6 pcf (9.6 kg/m') of copper napthenate. b. Configuration: 2x6 or 2x8 (50x 150 or 50x200 mm) dimension lumber. Milled S4S for single row and milled T&G for multiple rows. 3. Sill Plate: a. Lumber: No. 2 or Better Southern Yellow Pine, preservative treated, to a retention of 0.17 pcf (B2O3) borate (0.25 pcf disodium octaborate tetrahydrate DOT) and kiln dried after treating to 19 percent maximum moisture content. b. Configuration: 2x4 or 2x6 or 2x8 (50x10 or 50x150 or 50x200 or 50x250 mm) dimension lumber as required by "Structural Design" requirements specified herein. Bracing, Wall and Lateral Truss Type (where required by "Structural Design"): a. Lumber: No. 2 or Better dimension lumber. b. Configuration: C. 2x4 or 2x6 (50x100, 50x150 mm) as required by "Structural Design" requirements specified herein. 1.5 METAL ROOFING A. Metal Roofing: UNI -RIB as manufactured by Lester Building Systems. 1. Material and Finish: 29 Gauge, ASTM A 653 (A 653 M), Structural Quality, Grade 80 (550) (formerly Grade E), galvanized steel with G60 (Z180) zinc coating both sides, Triple Spot Test. a. Exterior Surface Finish: 1) Bonderize and provide baked on primer and Valspar Weather -X (silicone polyester) finish coat, 0.9 mil (0.023 mm) minimum dry film thickness. 2) Gloss (60 Degrees): ASTM D523, 20 to 80. 3) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, F to 2H. 4) T -Bend: ASTM D4145: 2T to 4T. 2. Material and Finish: 29 Gauge, ASTM A 653 (A 653 M), Structural Quality, Grade 80 (550) (formerly Grade E), galvanized steel with G90 (Z275) zinc coating both sides, Triple Spot Test. a. Exterior Surface Finish: 1) Bonderize and provide baked on primer and Valspar Weather -X (silicone polyester) finish coat, 0.9 rnil_(9.023 mm) minimum dry film thickness. 2) Gloss (60 Degrees): ASTM D523, 20 to 80�-u_' 3) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, F 3. Material and Finish: 26 Gauge, ASTM A 653 (A 653 M), Structural Quality, Grade 80 (550) (formerly Grade E), galvanized steel'with'G60 May 30, 2012 13 34 18-7 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING (Z180) zinc coating both sides. Triple Spot Test. a. Exterior Surface Finish: Match Existing salt structure roof coir 1) Bonderize and provide baked on primer and factory applied, baked -on 70% MBCI Signature 300 . 0.9 mil (0.023 mm) minimum dry film thickness. 2) Gloss (60 Degrees): ASTM D523, 20 to 80. 3) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, F to 2H. 4) T -Bend: ASTM D4145: 2T to 4T. 4. Configuration: a. Roll -formed; 36 inch (915 mm) coverage width. Provide panels covering up to 35 foot (10.5 m) lengths in single pieces. b. Four major corrugations, 7/8 inch (22 mm) high, spaced 12 inches (305 mm) on center with 3 minor corrugations, 118 inch (3mm) high, spaced 3 inches (76 min) on center between each major corrugation. C. Form one outboard corrugation as overlapping corrugation. d. Form opposite outboard corrugation as underneath corrugation with full return leg to support side lap and a continuous anti - siphon drain channel. e. Factory cut to required length. 5. Material and Finish: As shown on Erection Drawings, except as specified herein. B. Fasteners: Color coated No. 10 piercing screws with 114 inch (6 mm) hex head pre -assembled to 1/2 inch (13 mm) O.D. dome seal or bond seal galvanized steel and EPDM washers. 1.6 ROOFING ACCESSORIES A. Ridge Cap: 1. Solid steel, painted. 2. Translucent ridge light. B. Translucent Ridge Light: Clear Polylit, standard ridge profile, acrylic and polyester resins with gel coat UV protective layer., ASTM D3841, minimum 8 ounces per square foot, 65 percent visible light transmission. C. Vents: Ridge vent, and/or low profile ridge ventilator as shown on Drawings. D. Cupola: Provide manufacturer's standard cupola or cupola and weathervane as shown on Drawings. E. Eave Overhang Fascia Flashing: 1. Size: 12 inches nominal. 2. Size: 24 inches nominal. 3. Fascia Flashing Color: MBCI Signature 300 — Colonial Red. -- 4. Vented Soffit Color: MBCI Signature 300 — Medium Bronze'. F. End Overhang Fascia Flashing: 1. Size: 12 inches nominal. 2. Size: 24 inches nominal. 3. Fascia Flashing Color: MBCI Signature 300—Colonial Red.- 133418-8 ed. 133418-8 May 307 2012 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 4. Vented Soffit Color: MBCI Signature 300 — Medium Bronze. G. Gutters and Downspouts: Provide manufacturer's standard gutters and downspouts as shown on Drawings. H. Closure Strips: Closed cell, 2 pcf density polyethylene foam, premolded to match configuration of panels. 1.7 SIDING A. Siding: UNI -RIB as manufactured by Lester Building Systems. Must match existing salt structure — MBCI Signature 300 —Rustic Red (building) Burnished Slate (trim). 1. Material and Finish: 29 Gauge, ASTM A 653 (A 653 M), Structural Quality, Grade 80 (550) (formerly Grade E), galvanized steel with G60 (Z180) zinc coating both sides, Triple Spot Test. a. Exterior Surface Finish: 1) Bonderize and provide baked on primer and Valspar Weather -X (silicone polyester) finish coat, 0.9 mil (0.023 mm) minimum dry film thickness. 2) Gloss (60 Degrees): ASTM D523, 20 to 80. 3) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, F to 2H. 4) T -Bend: ASTM D4145: 2T to 4T. 2. Material and Finish: 29 Gauge, ASTM A 653 (A 653 M), Structural Quality, Grade 80 (550) (formerly Grade E), galvanized steel with G90 (Z275) zinc coating both sides, Triple Spot Test. a. Exterior Surface Finish: 1) Bonderize and provide baked on primer and Valspar Weather -X (silicone polyester) finish coat, 0.9 mil (0.023 mm) minimum dry film thickness. 2) Gloss (60 Degrees): ASTM D523, 20 to 80. 3) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, F. 3. Material and Finish: 26 Gauge, ASTM A 653 (A 653 M), Structural Quality, Grade 80 (550) (formerly Grade E), galvanized steel with G60 (Z180) zinc coating both sides, Triple Spot Test. a. Exterior Surface Finish: 1) Bonderize and provide baked on primer and factory applied, baked -on 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 PVDF fluoropolymer resin based Fluropon paint coating as manufactured by Valspar, 0.9 mil (0.023 mm) minimumdry film thickness. 2) Gloss (60 Degrees): ASTM D523, 20 to 80. 3) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, F to 2H. _ 4) T -Bend: ASTM D4145: 2T to 4T. — Configuration: a. Roll -formed; 36 inch (915 mm) coverage width. Provide panels covering up to 35 foot (10.5 m) lengths in single pieces. b. Four major corrugations, 7/8 inch (22 mm) high, spaced 12 inches (305 mm) on center with 3 minor corrugations, 1/8 inch, (3 mm) high, spaced 3 inches (76 mm) on center between each May 30, 2012 13 34 18-9 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING major corrugation. C. Form one outboard corrugation as overlapping corrugation. d. Form opposite outboard corrugation as underneath corrugation with full return leg to support side lap and a continuous anti - siphon drain channel. e. Factory cut to required length. f. Factory miter cut gable ends. g. Material and Finish: As shown on Erection Drawings, except as specified herein. h. Fasteners: Color coated No. 10 piercing screws with 1/4 inch (6 mm) hex head pre -assembled to 1/2 inch (13 mm) 0. D. dome seal or bond seal galvanized steel and EPDM washers. B. Siding Accessories: 1. Wall Trim and Flashings: Provide manufacturer's standard pre- engineered wall trim and flashings. 2. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard sheet metal unit with 1/2 inch (13 mm) hardware cloth screen. pre -finished enamel in color selected from Lester standard colors, 18 x 24 inch (457 x 610 mm) size. 3. Closure Strips: Closed cell, 2 pcf (32 kg/m') density polyethylene foam, premolded to match configuration of panels. 4. Material and Finish: As shown on Erection Drawings, except as specified herein. 1.8 INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C, Kraft Faced Fiberglass Blanket. 1. Thermal Resistance: R-19 2. Physical Properties: a. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E 96, 1.00 Perm (57.45 ng/(Pa s m2) or less. 1.9 INTERIOR FINISH -WALLS AND CEILINGS A. White Steel: 1. Uni-Rib - 29 Gauge, ASTM A 653 (A 653 M), Structural Quality, Grade 80 (550) (formerly Grade E), galvanized steel with G60 (Z180) zinc coating both sides, Triple Spot Test. 1.10 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. Aluminum Windows: Thermally broken aluminum frame, 0.050 inch minimum wall thickness, screw fastened and sealed, electrostatically baked enamel finish, factory -assembled by AJ Manufacturing, www.aidoor.com. 1. Single -Hung Windows: Series 500 windows. a. Balance: Easy open block and tackle balancing system. b. Sash: Removable fiberglass screen, removable operating sash to allow cleaning from inside cf building. C. Glazing Seal: Marine glazing sealed with flexible vinyl -U- - channel. d. Glass: 13/16 inch thick insulated glass units. 1334 18-10 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING e. Internal Grid: White. f. Internal Grid: Brown. g. Internal Grid: Bronze. h. Internal Grid: Clay. i. Weatherstripping: Nonabsorbent woven polypropylene pile, factory water tested. Locking System: Painted, zinc die cast, cam -type sash locks. 1.11 JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant: Manus 75-A for applications that will not be painted, contains no solvents or isocyanates, non -yellowing. 1. Color: Clear. 2. Color: White. 3. Color: Bronze. 4. Color: Use white or bronze color for nearest match to adjacent substrate. B. Sealant: Manus 75 -AM for applications that will be painted, contains no solvents or isocyanates, non -yellowing. 1. Color: Clear. 2. Color: White. 3. Color: Bronze. 4. Color: Use white or bronze color for nearest match to adjacent substrate. C. Tape Sealant: Manus -Bond 64-A Polysul Grip tape. 1.12 COMPONENT COLOR: A. Siding Panels: Items with an asterisk meet Energy Star reflectivity standards. The plus symbol indicates availability in 26 gauge only. 1. MBCI Signature 300 — Rustic Red (building) Burnished Slate (trim) B. Roof Panels: Items with an asterisk meet Energy Star reflectivity standards. The plus symbol indicates availability in 26 gauge only. 1. MBCI Signature 300 — Match existing salt structure C. Eaves/Soffit: 1. MBCI Signature 300 — Colonial Red and Medium Bronze. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for erection/installation of pre- engineered wood building system. B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on' unsatisfactory conditions. - — C. Commencement of work by erector/installer is acceptance of siteV conditions, 2.2 ERECTION- STRUCTURAL FRAMING May 30, 2012 133418-11 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM 2.3 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING A. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. B. Provide temporary erection and wind load bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until installation of permanent bracing and/or roofing and wall coverings are completed. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect and manufacturer. INSTALLATION A. Erect building per manufacturer's instructions and sequencing. Metal Roofing: 1. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Secure to structural framing aligned, level and plumb. Space fasteners as shown on Erection Drawings. 2. Sidelap: Minimum one full corrugation. 3. Endlap: 8 inches (200 mm) for slopes 4 in 12 to 5 in 12. Secure together over and to structural members. 4. Endlap: 12 inches (300 mm) for slopes 2 in 12 to 4 in 12. Secure together over and to structural members. 5. Endlap: 6 inches (150 mm) for slopes greater than 5 in 12. Secure together over and to structural members. 6. Special detailing is required for slopes less than 2 in 12. Refer to construction documents. 7. Accessories: Install as shown on Erection Drawings. END OF SECTION 1334 18-12 POLE BUILDING SYSTEM IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handlinq 1.5 Job Conditions 1.6 Alternatives PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 1.7 Warranties 2.1 Materials 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers 2.3 Fabrication 3.1 Surface Conditions 3.2 Preparation 3.3 Erection A. Work Included: This Specification covers the material for and the fabrication of metal buildings as described herein and shown on the Drawings. The materials to be furnished and installed shall include the structural framing, roofing panels, wall panels, fasteners, sealants, and/or caulking, accessories, anchor bolts, connections, gutters, downspouts, roof leaders, sleeves, insulation, and any other component parts for the metal building. This Contractor will also obtain approvals from all regulatory agencies and provide erection of the complete building. The structural design shall include bracing and reinforcing for all crane and conveyor loads. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Concrete Section 03 3000 2. Masonry Section 04 20 00 3. Insulation Section 07 21 00 4. Sheet metal Section 07 60 00 5. Special Doors Section 08 30 00 6. Aluminum Windows Section 08 41 00 7. Glass and Glazing Section 08 80 00 8. Painting: Finish painting of interior primed steel surfaces Section 09 91 00 9. Plumbing Division 22 10. HVAC Division 23 11. Electrical Division 26 12. Earthwork Division 31 C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others D. Work Furnished but not installed 1. Anchor bolts - base plates Section 0130 00. E. Description of System 1. Beam and Column Framing 2. Secondary Framing: Purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, sill supports, clips, and other items detailed. May 30, 2012 1334 19-1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3. Wall and Roof System: Preformed metal panels of vertical profile, with girt, anchorage fasteners, insulation, liner sheets and accessory components as noted on drawings. Definitions: Refer to "Metal Building Systems Nomenclature" of the Metal Building Manufacturers Association. 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of Manufacturers: The Manufacturer of the building system used shall have been in the manufacture of metal buildings for at least 5 years; shall have the capabilities of supplying the specified materials in the quantities required to meet the construction schedule; shall have full engineering capabilities to meet all design requirements; and shall be able to transport the material to the job site. B. Qualifications of Metal Building Contractor 1. 5 years experience in the sale and erection of metal building type specified. 2. A licensed supplier of the Manufacturer whose system is selected for the Work. 3. Incorporated to do work as specified in applicable building codes. 4. Have the resources necessary to maintain the construction schedule. C. Qualifications of Installer 1. A firm with a least 5 years experience in the type of work required that will be under the direct supervision of the metal building Contractor. 2. Qualifications of Welders: AWS D 1.1 D. Design Criteria 1. Structural Design a. Design responsibility: The entire building system shall be designed by a Registered Professional Engineer employed by the Manufacturer. Any system required as specified in applicable Building Codes shall bear the stamp of a professional engineer registered in Iowa. The system shown is given as a guide to the required design. The final design is the responsibility of this contractor. Any load changes to the footings will be the responsibility of this contractor and the General Contractor. b. Loading (1) Initial handling and erection stresses. (2) All dead and live loads as specified on the Contract Drawings and as required by the State of Iowa Building Code. (3) All other loads specified for members where they are applicable. (4) Wind load: Applied to the main frame as specified in the "Recommended Design Practices Manual' of the Metal Building Manufacturers Association. (5) Load combinations shall be: (a) Dead load plus live load. (b) Dead load plus wind load. (c) Dead load plus live load plus wind load. -- (6) Equipment loads etc, shown on Roof Framing Plan and HVAC -drawings. (7) No live load reductions allowed in computing column loads forfiuture floors. (8) Exterior wall and roof system to withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of span: L/360. c� 1334 19-2 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS May. 30, 2012+ -.1 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within cladding system. 3. Assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental affects, when subject to temperature range of minus 20 to plus 100 degrees F. 4. Size and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 5. Permissible Design Deviations: a. Design deviations will be permitted only after the Engineer's written approval of the Manufacturer's proposed design supported by complete design calculations and Drawings. b. Design deviations shall provide an installation equivalent to the basic intent without incurring additional cost to the Owner. E, Allowable Tolerances: American Institute of Steel Construction, "Code of Standard Practice of Steel Buildings and Bridges". F. Source Quality Control 1. Material Compliance: Manufacturer will supply on request of Engineer, certificates showing mechanical, physical and strength properties of all materials supplied. 2. Inspection of Welds shall be in accord with AWS Building Code. 3. Inspection of Shop Painting: a. Surface preparation prior to painting shall be visually evaluated for degree of cleaning by comparison with SSPC pictorial standards. b. Measurement of dry film thickness of each coat of ship applied paint shall be it accord with ASTM D 1005. 4. Inspection of field assembled high strength bolted construction shall be in accord with Section 6, AISC Specification for Structural Joints. G. Reference Standards 1. Applicable Building Codes. 2. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA) a. Metal Building Systems Manual b. Recommended Design Practices Manual 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) a. Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Steel for Buildings. b. Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges 4. American Welding Society (AWS) a. Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction b. D 1.1, Structural Welding Code 5. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) a. Specification for the Design of Cold -formed Steel Structural Members b. Design of Light Gage Steel Diaphragms 6. Aluminum Association (AA) a. Specification for Aluminum Structures b. Aluminum Formed Sheet Building Sheathing Design Guide -_ 7. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) T a. A 1, Carbon -Steel Rails b. A 36, Structural Steel c. A 53, Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and.' Seamless Steel Pipe May 30, 2012 13 34 19-3 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING A 164, Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Steel A 165, Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium on Steel f. A 233, g. A 307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners h. A 325, High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints i. A 386, Zinc -coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products j. A 446, Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality k. A 490, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints 1. A 500, Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes m A 501, Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing n. A 515, o. A 525, Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements. p. A 529, Structural Steel with 42,000 psi Minimum Yield Point 8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. B 27.2 b. B 27.4 9. Commercial Standards (CS) a. 214, 10. Federal Specifications (FS) a. HH -1-521. Insulation Blankets, Thermal, Mineral Fiber b. TT -E-496. Enamel, Semi -gloss. Rust -inhibiting C. TT -P-31, Paint. Oil: Iron -Oxide, Ready Mixed, Red and Brown 1.3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Engineer in accordance with these Specifications; the following: A. Samples: Submit color samples for approval. B. Shop Drawings: Before foundation work begins, submit Shop Drawings for all the Work to be performed under this Section. 1. Structural Steel: Show all shop and erection details including cuts, copes., connections, holes, cambers, loads, threaded fasteners, rivets, and welds. All welds, both shop and field, shall be Indicated by AWS "Welding Symbols" A 2.0. Separate drawing sheet showing anchor bolt locations and installation. 2. Erection Procedure: Submit descriptive data to illustrate the structural steel erection procedure. including the sequence of erection and temporary staying and bracing. 3. Welding procedure: Submit written description as required to illustrate each welding procedure to be performed in specified Work. 4. Field welding equipment: Submit descriptive data for field welding equipment, including type, voltage and amperage. C. Calculations: The designer will submit to the Engineer one set of design calculations?for review. (Registered Iowa Engineer stamp required). 1334 19-4 May 30, 201 Z2l METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 1_4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed Work and materials of all other trades. B. Delivery and Handling: Handle all components in a manner consistent with their shape and design. Lift or support units only at points shown on erection drawings. Protect components from dirt and damage during transport and handling. Protect and support units during shipping. C. Storage at Jobsite: Deliver to job site in quantities only as needed for erection. Store location set aside by General Contractor. Store components to protect from contact with soil, staining, abrasions and general physical damage. Protect finished roof and wall panels, trim, doors, frames and sash by covering with plastic sheets. D. Delivery of Materials to be Installed Under Other Sections: Anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast -in-place concrete or masonry construction shall be delivered to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast -in-place concrete operations or masonry work. E. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 Job Conditions A. Site Conditions and Scheduling: Immediately after award of the Contract this Contractor will verify with General Contractor the requirements for site access for erection and the scheduling for erection. The General Contractor will be responsible for providing this Contractor access to the site so that all erection equipment can be used. 1 6 Alternatives: The Work of this Section is affected by alternatives as described on the Drawings and in these Specifications. 1_7 Warranties: At completion of Work, Manufacturer will provide Owner with written warranties as follows: A. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering complete assembly. B. Weather tightness endorsement — 50 year. C. Extended life endorsement on coated steel. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. General: All materials furnished shall meet or exceed the stated design requirements. B. Steel 1. General: Steel shall meet or exceed the physical requirements of AGSC; "Specifications for the Design" Fabrication and Erection of Structurdl Steel for Buildings" and/or American Iron and Steel Institutes, " Specificatibn_fdr the, ; May 30, 2012 1334 19-5 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members," whichever is applicable. 2. Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A 36 A 529. 3. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501 A 500 Grade B. 4. Crane Rails: Standard tee rails, ASTM A 1. 5. Pipe Columns: ASTM A 53, Grade B. 6. All cold formed structural material shall have a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. 7. All rods and angles shall have a minimum yield of 36,000 psi, except the angle stock used in open web framing, which shall have a minimum yield of 507000 psi. 8. Standard Threaded Fasteners: a. Standard bolts and nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. b. Plain washers: ANSI B 27.2, Type c. Beveled washers: ANSI B 27.4. 9. Anchor Bolts: Conform to Section 1c of ASTM A 325, 10. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 325. a. Use high strength bolts for all bolted connections. b. Bolt Holes: 1/16" larger than bolt diameter. c. All bolts to have threads excluded from shear plane. d. Avoid bolts in tension. 11. Welding Electrodes: ASTM A 233 E 70 Series. Suitable for position and other conditions of intended use, as per container instructions. 12. Plate or bar stock: ASTM A 529. 13. Primer: FS -TT -P-31 White. C. Aluminum: The Aluminum Association's, "Specification for Aluminum Structures" and "Aluminum Formed Sheet Building Sheathing Design Guide" shall be the guide in the design of aluminum parts for building components. D. Non -shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents, developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in two days and 7000 psi in 28 days. E. Minimum Standards for Thickness (except as specified elsewhere) 1. Individual structural members of steel other than roof and wall covering to be a minimum of 18 gage. 2. Roof and Wall Covering: a. Steel: minimum of 26 gage. b. Aluminum: minimum of 0.032 inch thickness. c. Plastic: minimum of 0.045 inch thickness. 3. Gable and eave trim, fascia closure strips, rake flashing, and copings: a. Steel: minimum of 26 gage. b. Aluminum: minimum of 0.032" thickness. c. Plastic: minimum of 0.045" thickness. 4. Eave Gutters and Downspouts: a. Steel: minimum of 26 gage. b. Aluminum: minimum of 0.032 inch thickness. 5. Use of materials of less thickness than that given above, may be allowed upon the submission of test data from approved authorities and/or calculations verifying the structural adequacy and erection feasibility of members formed from such material. F. Primary Framing 1. Beam and Column: This type of building utilizes frames with tapered or urtiform dept beam or girder supported by columns. This type of framing, commonly designated as a "simple" framing (unrestrained, free -ended), assumes that, insofar as gravity loading is 13 34 19-6 May 30, 2012 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING concerned, the ends of beams, or girders, are connected to resist shear only, and are free to rotate under gravity load. This primary framing is spaced on pre -determined bay lengths and supports the secondary framing and the roof and wall covering. Self -Framing: This type of building shall be a single span or multi -span structure utilizing the roof and wall covering as a load bearing diaphragm in addition to its function as an exterior skin of the building. Building Geometry: The roof slope, width, eave height, length of building and spacing of bents (bays) shall conform to the Manufacturers' standards covering the listed types of buildings. G. Secondary Framing 1. Purlins: Solid Purlins: Purlins shall be inches in depth and shall be designed for the specified loading conditions from 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, or 11 gage steel. Purlins shall be designed as simple span and/or continuous span and shall be "Z" shaped. They shall be pre - punched at the factory to provide for field bolting to the primary framing. Truss Purlins (1) Truss purlins shall be cold -formed trusses which are factory assembled and welded. (2) Purlins shall be braced on the top and bottom chords spaced at intervals shown on the erection drawings. (3) All concentrated loads shall be hung at purlin panel points. (4) Purlin top chords shall have factory punched holes for roof panel clip attachment. 2. Girts a. Girts shall be inches in depth and shall be designed for the specified loading conditions from 16, 15, 14, 13, 12 or 11 gage steel. Girts shall be designed as simple span and/or continuous span and shall be "Z" shaped. b. Outer flange of all girts shall have factory punched holes for panel connections. c. All girt webs shall have factory punched holes for sag rod, door post and fascia frame installation. 3. Eave Members a. Eave members shall be cold formed, C-shaped members. b. Webs and outer flange of all eave members shall have factory punched holes for panel connections and for connections to truss purlins, where required. 4. Bracing a. Wind bracing: Shall be as shown on Drawings and is to be accomplished by diagonal bracing, diaphragm action, knee bracing or portal type rigid frame. b. Flange Braces shall be steel angles attached to purlin and/or girts and primary framing. The quantity and location of all brace angles shall be as dictated by design. 5. Base Angle: A continuous member steel angle, should be attached to the base of the wall to the foundation with expansion bolts or equivalent anchors. a. See Section 07430 for base bid of the roof and wall panel system. H. Roof Covering 1. Panel Description (McElroy Metal — Maxima 2" rib / 16" wide panel or equal). a. Panels shall be produced on a precision roll forming machine. b. Panels of maximum possible lengths shall be used with no end laps. Lengths shall be used min. 65'-0" per roof plan. c. Roof panels shall be factory pre -punched at panel end to match pre -punched holes in the eave structural member. Panel end splices shall be prepttpched and prenotched. d. Profile: e. Edges: Male/female, Double lock standing seam May 30, 2012 13 34:19-7, METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Panel Design: a. Panels shall be designed in accord with AISI Specifications for the Design of Light Gage Cold Formed Steel Structural Members and in accord with sound engineering methods and practices. b. Panels shall be designed to support design live loads and roof traffic during construction. c. The roof shall provide for expansion/contraction without detrimental effect on the roof panel when ambient air temperature varies + 100 degrees F. from the temperature at which the roof was installed. 3. Panel Material a. 24 gage galvanized steel (42,000 yield) conforming to ASTM A 525. Coating shall be G-90 to ASTM A 446 grade D or A 515. color choices; Sandstone, Surrey, Beige or Medium Bronze. b. Gage aluminized steel - Type II MIL -S -4174A. c. Inch aluminum sheet. 4. Energy Conservation: Purlins shall be insulated so as to eliminate "thermal short circuits" circuits" between purlins and roof panels caused by compression of the blanket insulation between structural and panel. 5. U.L. Uplift Ratings: The roof system shall carry a U. L. wind -uplift Class 90 rating, U.L. construction No. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, galvanized to ASTM A 386 [1.25] [2.Oounces per square foot; finish to match adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed. 1. Self -tapping screws: 2. Lock -rivets: 3. Hidden clip: 4. Seaming: J. Sealants 1. Closure strips: 2. Tape Mastic: 3. Sealant: non -staining, elastomeric, skinning. 4. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type. K. Accessories 1. Trim: 2. Ventilators: 3. Insulation: Guardian (ES) energy saver system with FP banding; R40 — 12 inches. 4. Gutters -Downspouts: a. Fabricate of same material and finish as roofing metal. b. Form gutters and downspouts of profile and size to collect and remove water. Fabricate with connection pieces. G. Form sections in maximum possible lengths. Hem exposed edges. Allow for expansion at joints. 5. Soffit Panels: Marquee — LOK 12` wide flat panel: Minimum 1-1/2 inch metal V thickness, crimped profile. 6. Internal and External Corners: Same material thickness and finish as adjacent material; profile shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. Back brace mitered ., internal corners 7. Expansion Joints: Same material and finish as adjacent material Manufacturer's standard brake formed 8. Flashinas. Closure Pieces, Fascia, Infills. Cans.and same material andl 1334 19-8 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING finish as adjacent material; profile to suit system. Foam filled base tube with anchors, galvanized. L. Minimum Finish (except as specified elsewhere) 1. Galvanized (Zinc Coated) Steel Covering when specified shall be a minimum coating class of 1.25 ounces per square foot according to ASTM A 525. In addition, a mill treatment shall be added to aid in the prevention of oxidation on the zinc coated surfaces. 2. Aluminum Coated Steel Covering shall be a minimum of Type II Federal Specification MIL -S -4174-A (0.75 ounce per square foot). 3. Aluminum Cladding over Aluminum Covering shall be in accord with "Aluminum Standards and Data," of the Aluminum Association. 4. Pre -painted Covering -factory applied: The primer on pre-treatment shall be the building Manufacturer's standard, compatible with the metal surface to be painted as well as the finish coat of paint. The finish coat of paint, on the exposed exterior surface shall consist of a properly stabilized synthetic base coating oven dried and pigmented to obtain optimum performance. The dry film thickness shall be one mil (0.001 inch) with a tolerance of minus two tenths mil (0.0002 inch). Color shall conform to the building Manufacturer's standards. Red Primer. 5. Covering Fasteners: The minimum coating thickness for covering fasteners of carbon steel shall be 0.0003 inch electro -galvanized in accord with ASTM A 164 or 0.0003 inch cadmium plated in accord with ASTM A 165, 6. Structural Painting: All structural framing of the metal building systems, not protected by a corrosion resistant coating, is painted one coat of shop primer by the Manufacturer. All surfaces to receive shop primer are cleaned of loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign material by the Manufacturer prior to painting. The Manufacturer is not required to sandblast, flame clean or pickle the steel framing. The coat of primer is intended to protect the steel framing for only a short period of exposure to ordinary atmoshperic conditions. 7. Dissimilar materials which are not compatible with the adjoining materials when exposed to moisture must be separated by means of coatings, gaskets or other effective means. Aluminum surfaces which may contact unprotected steel should be separated by brush -on coatings such as per Federal Specification TT -F-496, Type 1, MIL -P-6883, JAN -P-735 or equal. Aluminum alloys shall be considered compatible with zinc and cadmium coated surfaces and the 300 and 400 AISI Series Stainless Steel Alloys and do not require application of barrier material. 2_2 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Foremost Building, Inc. B. Kirby C. Nucor Building Systems Group D. Ceco Building Systems, Butler E. Approved Manufacturers 2.3 Fabrication A. General: Fabricate all Work in accord with the approved Shop Drawings and' Leferenced standards. Be responsible for accurate fit of all Work. B. Connections " 1. Shop Connections: Welded or bolted. i 2. Field Connections: a. Provide bolted connections as follows: (1) High strength threaded fasteners shall be used for bolted connections, May 30, 2012 1334 19-9 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING except where standard threaded fasteners are permitted. (2) High strength bolted construction assembly: tightening shall be done in accord with Section 5 of Specifications for Structural Joints. (3) Fabricator is responsible for design and strength of connections unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 3. Holes a. Punch holes as required for connection of other Work per templates and directions of such trades. b. Steel requiring accurate alignment shall be provided with slotted holes and shims for truing up steel, as required for alignment. 4. Welded Construction: a. Welding process shall be limited to one or a combination of the following: (1) Manual shielded -arc (2) Submerged arc b. Welded assembles shall be stress relieved by heat treatment. c. Use equipment which will supply proper current in order that operator may produce satisfactory welds. Welding machine: 200 to 400 amperes, 25-40 volts capacity. d. Field welding: by direct current. Remove paint within two inches of weld. 5. Column bases shall be milled and attached to columns. 6. Bearing plates: a. Bearing plates shall be provided under beams, girders, columns and trusses resting on footings, piers and walls. b. Bearing plates shall be either attached or loose. C. Identifying Marks: All fabricated or purchased items shall have an identifying number corresponding to marking shown on erection drawings. The marking shall be stamped, stenciled, tagged, or printed on these items after shop paint has been applied. D. Shipping: The size and weight of the building components as packaged and shipped shall be such that will permit transportation by common carrier. E Painting 1. Prior to painting, the fabricator shall clean the steel of loose rust; loose mill scale, dirt, and other foreign material. Unless otherwise specified the fabricator shall not sandblast, flame clean or pickle prior to painting. The fabricator shall then factory coat all steel with one coat of zinc chromate alkyd primer formulated to equal or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specifications TT -P-636. a. All purlins shall be dip tank coated by an electro -deposition method. b. All other structural steel components and sub -assembly parts shall be spray painted. 3. The shop coat of paint is a primer and is intended to protect the steel for a short period of exposure. Subsequent finish painting, if required, is to be performed in the field by others. c PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection: Before fabrication or erection examine the Site, inspect bearing surfaces, .' take field measurements, and carefully inspect the installed Work of all other -trades 13 34 19-10 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS May 30, 2012 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING and verify that all such Work is complete and that the Work of this Section can be installed in accord with the original design and approved Shop Drawings. In the event of discrepancies, notify Engineer immediately for clarification. Do not proceed with the work of this Section until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 Preparation A. Supply the General Contractor with all anchor bolts, setting plates, bearing pads or other built-in items required for this Work. Site Access: The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable access to the building and firm level bearing for the hauling and erection equipment to operate under their own power. C. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing true, level bearing surfaces on all field placed bearing walls and other field placed supporting members. 3.3 Erection A. Column Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Attached column bases and bearing plates for beams and similar structural members shall be aligned with wedges or shims. 2. Loose column bases and bearing plates which are too heavy to be placed without a derreck or crane shall be set and wedged or shimmed. 3. Set column base plates with non -shrink grout to full plate bearing. B. Framing 1. Erect framing in accord with AISC Specifications. 2. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. (Locate braced bays as indicated) 3. Structural steel frames shall be accurately assembled to the lines and elevations indicated, within the specified erection tolerances. 4. The various members forming parts of a complete frame or structure after being assembled shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened. 5. Fastening of splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact. 6. Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled. 7. Splices shall be permitted only where indicated. 8. Use drift pins only for bringing members into position, not to enlarge or distort holes. 9. Erection bolts used in welded construction may be either tightened securely and left in place or removed and the holes filled with plug_ welds. 10. Give special attention to steel handling during construction to void overloading green floor slabs; adhere to Engineer's instructions when criticisms are made in this regard. 11. Gas Cutting: a. Field correcting of fabrication by gas cutting shall not be May 30, 2012 13 34 19-11 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING permitted on any major member in the structural framing without prior approval of the Engineer. b. Cut out and reinforce, as indicated and/or required, holes through webs of members for mechanical Work. Verify exact locations with heating and ventilating Contractor. B. Touch up: At completion of erection touch-up prime coat of paint at all welds, abraisions, bolts etc. with same material used for shop coat. s 1334 19-12 May 30., 2012 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 31 20 00 EARTHWORK SCOPE Applicable provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 govern work under this Section. INDEX 1.1 Description 1.2 Quality Assurance 1.3 Submittals 1.4 Job Conditions 2.1 Fill Material 2.2 Other Materials 3.1 Surface Conditions 3.2 Preparation 3.3 Excavation 3.4 Trenching PART 1GENERAL 1_1 Description 3.5 Excavation Bracing & Sloping 3.6 Unanticipated Subsurface Conditions 3.7 Excess Water Control 3.8 Preparation of Subgrade 3.9 Back Filling 3.10 Compaction 3.11 Site Access for Other Contractors 3.12 Surplus Earth Material 3.13 Grading 3.14 Clean -Up and Damage A. Work Included: Excavating, filling and grading required for this Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Excavating for footings and foundations. 2. Building excavation. 3. Filling and backfilling to attain grades at building line. 4. Trenching and trench backfilling. 5. Furnishing and installing granular cushion under all concrete slabs on grade. 6. Soil compaction. 7. Drainage of site for work in progress. 8. Erosion control. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Concrete Section 03 30 00 1_2 Quality Assurance A. Testing Agency 1. In-place soil compaction tests to be performed by testing laboratory employed by Owner. 2. Test on material for controlled fill to be performed by testing laboratory employed by Contractor. B. Allowable Tolerances 1. Grading tolerances: a. Rough grade: Building and parking areas - plus or minus 0.1 foot.:,.. b. Finish grade (1) Granular cushion under concrete slabs - plus or minus 0.1 foot: - (2) Parking areas: C. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): May 30, 2012 31 2000-1 EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING a. D 698 Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using 5 pound Rammer and 12 -inch Drop, Standard Proctor Method. b. D 2922 Nuclear Density Testing of Soil in Place, Shallow Depth. 1_3 Submittals: Within 35 days after award of Contract, and before any of the materials of this Section are delivered to the job site, submit complete to the Architect in accordance with these Specification; the following. A. Samples of Granular Backfill 1. Submit sample for under slab fill. See Soils report for approved design recommendations. 2. A seventy-five (75) pound bag of any imported granular fill. B. State of Iowa and local ordinance specification for soil erosion control. C. Test Reports. 1.4 Job Conditions A. Environmental Requirements 1. The General Contractor will provide for erosion control over entire working area in a manner that will satisfy all applicable regulations for same by the City of Iowa City, County of Johnson; the State of Iowa, and the Federal Government. The cost for the requirement will be included in the contractors proposal. This system will remain in effective operation until project is complete. 2. A written plan listing methods, materials, and means to satisfy all of the above will be submitted to the Owner within 14 days of receiving a Letter of Intent to enter into a contract from the Owner. Construction site operator BMP inspection and maintenance will need to be met. 3. Provide dewatering and drainage as required to accomplish Work of this Section. 4. Dust Control: provide as necessary to meet requirements and local ordinances. a. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the Work and on and near all off-site borrow areas if such dust is caused by the Contractor's operations during performance of the Work or if resulting from the conditions in which the Contractor leaves the site. b. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the Site. LI Protection 1. Use all means necessary to protect all materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect all objects designated to remain, 2. Provide site erosion control per jurisdictional requirements as noted above. 3. Erect sheeting. shoring and bracing as necessary for protection of persons, improvements and excavations. 4. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner, PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Fill Material 31 2000-2 May 30, 2012:' EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING A. General 1. Approval required: All fill material shall be subject to the acceptance of the Soils Engineer. 2. Notification: For approval of fill material, notify the Soils Engineer at least four days in advance when using excavated materials. Fill Material: 1. General: All fill material shall be of a nature with sufficient binder to form a firm and stable unyielding subgrade. 2. Crushed stone and sand may be substituted with the acceptance by Soils Engineer. 3. Expansion: All fill earth shall have a coefficient of expansion of not more than 3 percent from air dry to saturation under a surcharge of 60 pounds per square foot at 98 percent compaction. 4. Cleanliness: All fill earth shall be clean and free from debris and from rock larger than three inches in maximum dimension. 5. The cushion under exterior slabs, drains and walks shall be clean granular soil material with no more than 5% passing the No. 200 sieve and at least 90% passing the 1" sieve. Soils meeting Unified Soil Classification (USCG) categories SP, GP or GW may qualify. C. Interior Fill Material: Fill under all interior concrete slabs on grade shall be clean well graded crushed limestone with particle size grading within the follow limits. 1. Passing the one inch mesh: 100 percent. 2. Passing the number four sieve: 25-60 percent. 3. Passing the number 200 sieve: 3-12 percent. 4. Depth: as shown on Drawings. D. Trench and Structural Backfill 1. On -Site fill material: All on-site material used for trench and structural backfill shall meet the requirements of Article 2.1.13 above. 2. Imported Material: All imported material used for trench and structural backfill shall meet the requirements of Article 2.1.13 above. 3. Maximum Lift Thickness: Nine (9) inches. E. Exterior Foundation Wall Backfill: Compacted on-site clay soil as approved by the Soils Engineer or as specified in 2.1 B. above. F. Fill Beneath Foundations: All fill material has been placed and approved by the Soils Engineer. 2_2 Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described but shown on drawings or as required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3_1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection 1. Verify that preceding work affecting work of this Section has been satisfactory, completed. May 30, 2012 31 2000-3 EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Prior to all work of this Section, become thoroughly familiar with the site, site conditions and all portions of the Work falling within this Section. 3_2 Preparation A. Field Measurements 1. Finish Elevations and Lines: For the setting and establishing finish elevations and lines, establish two independent bench marks. carefully preserve all data and all bench marks. If displaced or lost, immediately replace to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. Remove at completion of project. 2. This contractor will be required to submit in writing that the existing grades have been verified and are within acceptable tolerances. If such verification is NOT received by the Architect prior to the start of excavation, contractor accepts ALL responsibility. B. Brush and tree removal: as indicated on the site plan. Remove trees and brush: dispose of off-site in accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances. Leave excavation free of roots and debris. Do not cause damage to trees not scheduled for removal. 3.3 Excavation A. Site Construction Areas: Strip off organic top soil and stock pile that amount needed to complete the work as shown on the site plan. Excess compactable soil and top soil can remain on the site as long as it is stock piled on separate piles; verify location with Owner. B. Depressions resulting from removal of obstructions: Where depressions result from, or have resulted from, the removal of surface or subsurface obstructions, open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft material as directed by the Architect or Soils Engineer. C. Remove any frozen soil prior to placement of any additional fill. D. Structure Excavation 1. Excavation: Remove all materials of every nature, description encountered, required, in obtaining indicated lines, grades. which, in Architect's opinion, can be loosened, removed by hand with hand tools, or with power shovels. Assume that all excavations to indicated lines, grades, can be done by aforementioned means; All excavated material will be removed from the Site except that material needed for backfill. E. Excavating for Footings 1. Preparation a. To minimize differential settlement, it is essential that earth surfaces upon which footings will be placed be compacted to the acceptance of the Soils Engineer and in accord with the compaction requirements established in this Section of these Specifications. b. Verify that all compaction is complete and accepted by the Soils Engineer prior to excavating for footings. 31 2000-4 May 30, 2012 EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING Excavating a. Excavate to the established lines and grades. b. Cut off bottom of trenches level and then remove all loose soil. c. Where soft spots are encountered, remove all defective material and replace with lean concrete or suitable compacted fill. d. Bearing soil conditions to be verified by the Soils Engineer prior to concrete placement on same. F. Below Floor Slabs and Adjacent Walks and Slabs: 1. Under all floor slabs and all adjacent walks and slabs, remove and replace the existing soil as required for finish subgrades. G. Other Areas 1. Excavate to grades shown on the Drawings. 2. Where excavation grades are not shown on the Drawings, excavate as required to accommodate the installation. 3. On cut banks, neatly trim to the required finish surface as the cut progresses. As and alternative, the Contractor may leave the cuts full and the finish grade by mechanical or hand equipment to produce the finish surfaces as shown on the Drawings. H. Overexcavation: Back fill and compact all overexcavated areas as specified for fill below. (See the Soils Report for required organic material to be removed). Unit price will be used for all required overexcavated areas beyond the contracted work. I. Removal of Unsuitable Materials 1. Remove unsuitable material from within the limits of the work specified in this Section. 2. Stockpile materials meeting requirements for controlled fill. J. Proofrolling: Within the limits of the concrete slabs and before placement of underslab fill, proofroll the existing grade in two mutually perpendicular directions. Proofrolling shall be accomplished by heavily loaded 25 ton minimum weight rubber -tired tandem - axle dump truck. Areas exhibiting excessive deflection shall be undercut and stabilized prior to constructing concrete slabs. 3_4 Trenching A. General 1. Perform all trenching required for the installation of items where the trenching is not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications. 2. Make all trenches open vertical construction with sufficient width to provide free working space at both sides of the trench and around the installed item_ as required for caulking, joining, backfilling and compacting_ B. Depth - 1. Trench as required to provide the elevations shown on the Drawings- 2. rawings-2. Where elevations are not shown on the Drawings, trench to sufficient -depth to give minimum of 18 inches of fill above the top of the pipe measured from Qhe adjacent finished grade. May 30, 2012 31 2000-5 EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING C. Correction of Faulty Grades: Where trench excavation is inadvertently carried below proper elevation, backfill with approved material compacted to provide a firm and unyielding subgrade and/or foundation to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Grading and Stockpiling Trenched Material 1. Control the stockpiling of trenched material in a manner to prevent water running into excavations. 2. Do no obstruct the surface drainage but provide means whereby storm and waste waters are diverted into existing gutters, temporary drains, or surface drains. 3. Do not stockpile materials adjacent to open trenches. 3_5 Excavation Bracing and Sloping: The soil report indicates that sloping or bracing of the excavation walls may be necessary to prevent caving in excavations. A. Properly support all trenches in strict accord with all OSHA pertinent rules and regulations or local Codes, whichever is more strict. The Contractor will be responsible for the design of the bracing system. Employ a Registered Engineer for the design of all bracing systems. B. Brace, sheet and support walls in such a manner that they will be safe and that the ground alongside the excavation will not slide or settle, and that all existing improvements of every kind, whether on public or private property, will be fully protected from damage. C. In the event of damage to such improvement, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Arrange all bracing, sheeting and shoring so as to not place stress on any portion of the completed Work until the general construction thereof has proceeded far enough to proved sufficient strength. Brace excavations along the existing buildings to prevent undermining of floor slabs and footings. E. Removal of Bracing: Exercise care in the drawing and removal of sheeting. shoring, bracing and timbering to prevent collapse or caving of the excavating faces being supported. 3_6 Unanticipated Subsurface Conditions: The Owner has had a subsurface investigation performed by a soils engineer, within this spec, the results of which are contained in the consultant's report. The Contractor acknowledges that he has reviewed the consultant's report and any addenda thereto and that his bid for earthwork operations is based on the subsurface conditions, as described in that report. At any point during earthwork, and foundation construction operations, that the contractor encounters conditions that are different than those anticipated by the Soils Engineer report, he shall immediately, (within 24 hours) bring this fact to the Architect and Soil Engineer's attention. Once a fact of unanticipated conditions has been brought to the attention of the Owner, Architect, and the Soils Engineer has concurred, immediate negotiations will be undertaken between the Owner and the Contractor to arrive at a change in Contract price for additional work or reduction at a change in Contract price for additional work or reduction -at a change in work because of the unanticipated conditions. The Contractor agrees that the unit prices 31 2000-6 May 30. 2012 EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING shown on the Bid Form would apply for additional or reduced work under the Contract. For changed conditions for which unit prices are not provided, the additional work shall be paid for on a time and material basis. 3_7 Excess Water Control A. Unfavorable Weather 1. Do not place, spread or roll any fill material during unfavorable weather conditions. 2. Do not resume operations until moisture content and fill density are satisfactory to the Specifications. B. Flooding: Provide berms or channels to prevent flooding of subgrade; promptly remove all water collecting in depressions including foundation excavations. C. Softened subgrade: Where soil has been softened or eroded by flooding or placement during unfavorable weather, remove all damaged areas and recompact as specified for fill and compaction below. For softened foundation subgrade refer to Section 3.3 E. 1.a. D. Dewatering: Provide and maintain at all times during construction, ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and dispose of all water from every source entering the excavations or other parts of the Work. Dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations and the preservation of the final lines and grades of bottoms of excavations. 3_8 Preparation of Subgrade A. Leveling: Remove all ruts, hummocks, and other uneven surfaces by surface grading prior to placement of fill. B. Wet Soil Conditions: At bearing elevations where unstable bearing soils are encountered for support of shallow foundations, over excavate and place at least a 6" layer of coarse crushed limestone to create a firm working base. Provide firm base for support of equipment described in Article 3.11 of this Section if required. Soils Engineer will review the base prior to concrete placement. 3_9 Backifilling A. Backfilling Prior to Approvals 1. Do not allow or cause any or the Work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of this Section prior to all required inspections, tests, and approvals. 2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. After the work has been completely tested, inspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Filling 1. After subgrade compaction has been reviewed by the Architect, spread: approved fill material in layers not exceeding nine inches in uncompacted thickness_ Promptly May 30, 2012 31 20 00-7_ EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING backfill excavations as work permits, but not before concrete walls, piers, have attained full design strength, and are properly braced. Bring each layer to the moisture content described herein prior compaction. At fill banks, grade full and then compact at least five feet beyond the grade of the finish band. After the bands have been filled, trim to the finish grades and limits shown on the Drawings. C. Placing Granular Cushion: Carefully place and compact the granular cushion in areas to receive concrete slabs on grade, uniformly attaining the thickness indicated on the Drawings and providing all required transition planes. 3.10 Compaction A. Moisture -conditioning 1. Water or aerate the fill material as necessary and thoroughly mix to obtain a moisture content which will permit proper compaction. 2. For all on-site clay soils designated to be compacted, bring to between minus 1 and 3 percent over optimum moisture content. 3. For all relatively non -expansive and predominately granular soils to be compacted; bring to within 2 percent below or above optimum moisture content. B. Compaction, General: Compact soil layer to at least the specified minimum degree; repeat compaction process until plan grade is attained. Percentage of compaction indicated shall be that percentage of maximum dry density obtainable by the ASTM designation D 698 method of compaction. C. Degree of Compaction Requirements 1. Structural fill: Densify all structural fill, including recompacted existing fill and backfill, to a minimum degree of compaction of 95%. 2. Pavement areas: Compact the upper twelve (12) inches of fill in pavement areas to a minimum degree of compaction of 98%. 3. Trenches in building areas: a. Building and pavement areas are defined, for the purpose of this Paragraph, as extending a minimum of five feet beyond the building and or/pavement. b. Compact cohesive backfill material to a minimum degree of compaction of 95%. c. Compact the upper twelve (12) inches of backfill in pavement areas to a minimum degree of compaction of 98%. d. Densify cohesionless backfill material to a minimum relative density of 70% as determined by the ASTM test designated as D 2049. 3. At the upper two feet in areas to receive planting, compact to at least 90% maximum dry density. Compact all fill in these areas, beneath the upper two feet. to 95% maximum dry density. 4. The base of all footing foundations supported on fill are to be compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum density. D. Soil Compaction Control 1. Inspections: Contractor will notify the Soils Engineer daily before starting soil compaction. Contractor will not start any soil compaction without Soils Engineer approval. Soils Engineer will make daily inspection to insure proper compaction. Any material found to be improperly compacted will be removed at the Soils Engineer direction. 31 2000-8 May 30. 2012 EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 2. Operators: All compaction will be performed only by qualified mechanics experienced in the use of equipment and techniques to be used. 3. Compaction methods: Compaction methods used must be accepted by the Architect and Soils Engineer prior to commencement of work. Contractor will be prepared to demonstrate any methods used prior to Architect's approval. 4. Samples and Test: The Owner will employ a qualified engineer to perform required site and laboratory tests to verify conformance of compaction requirements. Contractor will verify with Architect the nature of tests before starting work to assure sample can be taken in locations and at time interval required. E. Flooding and Jetting: Compaction by flooding and jetting is expressly prohibited. 3.11 Site Access for Other Contractors: The General Contractor will determine during the bidding period and include in the Base Bid all costs required to provide access to the Site for: A. Precast concrete hauling and erection equipment. B. Concrete transportation and placing equipment. C. Structural steel erector. D. Mechanical Contractors. E. The above Contractors are not responsible for any sitework to get their equipment into position. The Architect will not hear of any excuses for the General Contractor not having the Site accessible for these Contractors. 3.12 Surplus Earth Material: Stockpile all surplus earth, not needed to complete filling and grading, on the property and outside the limits of work as directed by the Architect. See note at 3.3 A. Same applies to excess excavated subgrade materials. 3.13 Grading A. General: Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, perform all rough and finish grading required to attain the elevations indicated on the Drawings. B. Treatment after completion of grading 1. After grading is completed and the Architect has finished his inspection, permit no further excavation, filling or grading except with the approval and inspection of the Architect. 2. Use all means necessary to prevent the erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed. May 30, 2012 31 20 00=9 EARTHWORK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 3.14 Cleanup and Damage A. At completion of work, clean and remove from site all debris, materials from work, machines. etc. B. Any damage done to foundations. utilities, etc., by this Contractor, or his subcontractors, during work under this Contract. shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner and Architect, without additional costs. 31 2000-10 EARTHWORK Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes information common to two or more technical plumbing specification sections or items that are of a general nature, not conveniently fitting into other technical sections. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Standards Quality Assurance Protection of Finished Surfaces Sleeves and Openings Sealing and Firestopping Codes Request and Certification for Payment Certificates and Inspections Operating and Maintenance Data Record Drawings PART2-PRODUCTS Identification Bedding and Backfill PART 3 -EXECUTION Excavation and Backfill Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing Dewatering Surface Repair Cutting and Patching Buildine Access Equipment Access Coordination Identification RELATED WORK REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. This section applies to all Division 22 00 00 sections of plumbing. STANDARDS Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as follows: ANSI American National Standards Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPS American society of Plumbing Engineers - - ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materially ` --- AWWA American Water Works Association --`I CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute - t CS Commercial Standards, Products Standards Sections, Office of Eng. Standards Service, NBS - EPA Environmental Protection Agency 05-30-2012 1205 00-1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Iowa Cit% Public Works Warm Storage Building FS Fedet-al Specifications, Superintendent of Documents. U.S. Government Printing Office LAP,MO International Association of Pl umbiug & .Mechanical Officials IELF1 histitutc of Electrical and }?lectronics Enginecis IS -MCA Mechanical Contractors Association NE('A Midwest Insulation Contractors Association i.JSS 1�fall ufacturcr's Standardization Societe of the Valve & Fitting Industry, Inc. N13S National Bureau of Standards NI:C National Electric Code NF.T.''fA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NI PA National Firc Protection Association NSF national Sanitation I oundation PD1 Plumbing and Drainage Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standards referenced in this section ACI 61=4 Recommended Practice for Measurmn , Mixing and Placing of Concrete ,SSTNI D1557 Standard Test Method for Nloieture-Density Relations of Soils ASTM L814 Standard Tcst Method for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops ASTN-I L84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building'Matcrials UL1479 Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops 11,723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section GC - General Conditions of the Contract. Equals and Substitutions. All products and materials used are to be nets', undamaged, clean and in good condition. Existing products and materials are not to be reused unless specifically indicated. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration, dimensions; ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs invoked in integrating the equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the intended performance from the system into which these items are placed. PROTECTION OF FINISIIED SURFACES Refer to Division 1. Gerieral Requirements, Protection of Finished Surfaces. SLEEFTSAND OPENINGS Refer to Division 1, General Requirements- Sleeves and Openings. SEALING AND FIRESI'OPPING Sealing and ftcstopping of steeves!openinas between piping, etc. and the sleeve or structural opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the sealing and fireproofing. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed in the sealing and fireproofing occupation. - CODES Comply with requirements of Iowa Administrative Code. REQUEST AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT - ' Within 10 days after Notice to Proceed, the successful bidder will submit to the Project Representative. in a form prescribed below and by the. General Conditions of the Contract - Scheduling and Coord.inatidn of Work. Reports, Records and Data, Payments to Conu'actor, a cost breakdown of the proposed values for, 05-30-2012 2205 00-2 COMMON WORK RLSULTS FOR PLUMBING Iowa Ciro Public Works Warm Storage Building work performed which, if approved by Owners Rep, will become the basis for construction progress and monthly payments. The cost breakdown items shall reflect actual work progress stages as closely as feasible. In addition, if payment is requested for approved off-site stored material, then that material shall be listed as a line itern in the request and certification for payment cost breakdown. CERTIFICATES AND INSPECTIONS Refer also to Division 1, General Conditions, Permits, Regulations, Utilities and Taxes. Obtain and pay for all required State installation inspections except those provided by the Architect,Fnainecr in accordance with State of Iowa. Deliver originals of these certificates to the Owner's Project Representative. Include topics of the certificates in the Operating and Maintenance histructions. SUBMITTALS Refer to Division 1, General Conditions, Submittals. Not more than two weeks after award of contract but before any shop drawings are submitted, contractor to submit the following plumbing system data sheet. List piping material type for each piping service on the project. ASIAI number, schedule or pressure class, joint type, manufacturer and model number where appropriate. List valves and specialties for each piping service, fixture and equipment with manufacturer and model number. The approved plumbing system data sheet(s) will be made available to the Project Representative for their use on this project. PLUMBING SYSTEM DAIA SHEET Item Pine Service/Sizes Manufacturer/Model No Remarks Pipe Fittings Unions Hangers & Supports Insulation Plbg. Specialties: Cleanouts Manhole Castings Interceptor Shop drawing submittals are to be bound, labeled, contain the project manual cover page and a material index list page showing item designation, manufacturer and additional items supplied with the installation_ Submit for all equipment and systents as indicated in the respective specification sections, marking each submittal with that specification section number. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number_, as indicated in the contract documents. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment. Submit sufficient quantities of data sheets and shop drawings to allow the following distribution: • Operating and Maintenance Manuals 2 topics • At chitect/Engineer 2 copy OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content requirements specified . under section GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. In addition to the general content specified under GENERAL REQUIREMENTS stip rly: the -following additional documentation: 1. Records of tests performed a to certify compliance with system requirements - t 05-30-2012 - ,.2n 05 00-3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Bar I ding 2 Nlanufaetmer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment 3. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies 4. Valve schedules 5. Lubrication nisu'ttetions, including list frequency of lubrication 6. Parts lista for fixtures, equipment, valves and speciaities. 7. Alanufactarers installation, operation and maintenance recommendations for fixtures, equipment, valves and specialties. 8. Additional information as indicated in the technical specification sections TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL Instruct user agency personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of systems and equipment provided as part of this project Include not Icss than 4 hours of instruction, using the Operating and Maintenance manuals during this instruction. Demonstrate startup, operation and shutdown procedures for all equipment. All training to be during normal working homy. Videotape all instructions and provide Owner with copy. RECORD DRAWINGS Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Record Drawings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS IDENTIFICATION UNDERGROUND TRACER WIRE: All underground non-metallic sewers'niains and water services/mains shall be provided with tracer wire installations. Tracer wire installations shall conform with Section 182.0715(2r) of Wisconsin Statutes and prevailing Department of Commerce Chapter 84 requirements. Tracer wire shall be continuous solid copper or steel plastic coated with split bolt or compression -type connectors. BEDDING AND BACKFILL Bedding up to a point 12" inches above the top of the pipe shall be thoroughly compacted sand or crushed stone chips meeting the following-Padations: Gradation for Beddina Sand Sieve Size 9.6 Passing (bv Wt) 1 inch 100 No. 16 45- 80 No. 200 2- 10 No. 100 Gradation for Crushed Stone Chip Bedding Sieve Size %Passins (bv Wt) 1.2 inch 100 No. 4 ]0- 25 75-100 Backfill above the bedding in lawn areas shall be thoroughly compacted excavated material free of latae stones, organic, perishable, and frozen materials. Backfill above the bedding under existing and future utilities, paving, sidewalks, curbs, roads and buildings shall be granular materials. pit run sand, gravel, or crushed state, free from large stones, organic, perishable, and frozen materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION E'XCAVA'IION AND BACKFILL Perform all excavation and backfilt work necessary to accomplish indicated plumbing systems installation- - Excavate to bottom of pipe and structure Bedding, 4" in stable soils, 6" in rock or wet trenches and 8" in" unstable soil. Finish bottoms of excavations to nuc, level surface. i At no time place excavated materials where they Nvitl impede surface drainage unless such drainage is being _ safely rerouted away from the excavation. j_ 0.5-30-20 12 2205 00.4 COMMON WORK RESUL"IS FOR PHA BING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Excavate whatever materials are encountered as required to place at the elevations shown, all pipe, manholes, and other work. Remove debris and rubbish from excavations before placing bedding and backfill material Remove surplus excavated materials from site Verify the locations of any water, drainage, gas, sewer, electric, telephone or steam lines which may be encountered in the excavation. Underpin and support all lines. Cut off service connections encountered which are to be removed at the limits of the excavation and cap. Provide and maintain all fencing, barricades, signs, warning lights, and/or other equipment necessary to keep all excavation pits and trenches and the entire subgrade area sate under all circumstances and at all times. No excavation shall be left unattended without adequate protection. Elevations shown on the plans are subject to such revisions as may be necessary to fit field conditions. No adjustment in compensation will be made for adjustments up to two (2) feet above or below the grades indicated on the plans. Install lines passing under foundations with minimum of 1-1/2 inch clearance to concrete and insure there is no disturbance of hearing soil. Bed pipe up to a point 12" above the top of the pipe. Take care during bedding, compaction and backfill not to disturb or damage piping. Mechanically compact bedding and backfill to prevent settlement. The initial compacted lift to not exceed 24" compacted to 95% density per Modified Proctor Test (_ASTM D-1557). Subsequent lifts under pavements, curbs, walks and structures are not to exceed 12" and be compacted to 95% density per Modified Proctor Test. In all other areas where construction above the excavation is not anticipated within 2 years, mechanically compact backfill in lifts not exceeding 24" to 90% density per Modified Proctor Test. Route the equipment over each lift of the material so that the compaction equipment contacts all areas of the surface of the lift. SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING Provide shoring, sheet piling and bracing in conformance with the Iowa Administrative Code to prevent earth from caving or washing into the excavation. Shore and underpin to properly support adjacent or adjoining structures. Abandon in place shoring, sheet piling and underpinning below the top of the pipe, or, if approved in advance by the engineer, maintained in place until other permanent support approved by the engineer is provided. DEWATERING Provide, operate and maintain all pumps and other equipment necessary to drain and keep all excavation pits, trenches and the entire subgrade area free from water under all circumstances. Obtain general permit for discharge of construction dewatering effluent. Comply with permit requirements. ROCK E%CAVAI ION Remove rock encountered in the excavation to a minimum dimension of six (6) inches outside the pipe. Rock excavation includes all hard, solid rock in ledges, bedded deposits and unstratified masses, all natural conglomerate deposits so firmly cemented as to present all the characteristics of solid rock; which material is so hard or so firmly cemented that in the opinion of the Engineer it is not practical to excavate and remove same with a power shovel except after thorough and continuous drilling arid' blasting.- Rock excavation includes rock boulders of 1/2 cubic yard or more in volume. 05-30-2012 ';'`..., i2 05 00-5 COMMON WORK RESULIS FQRPLUMBTNG ¢r Iowa City Public Works Wart Storage Building Rock excavation roil I be computed on the basis of the depth of rock removed and a irench Width two (2) feet larger than the outside diameter of the pipe whoa one (1) pipe is laid in the u-ench and three (3) feet larger than the combined outside diameter Where mo (2) pipes arc laid in the trench- Include 6" pipe and structure bedding in rock excavation. Include rock excavation shown on the plans in the Base Bid. SURFACE RESTORATION Completely restart the surface of all disturbed areas to a like condition of the surlaee prior to the toile. Level off all waste disposal areas and clean up all areas used for the storage of materials or the temporary deposit of excavated earth. Remove all surplus material. tools and equipment. CULIING AND PATCHING Refer to Division I, General Requirements, Cutting and Patching. BL ILDING ACCESS -,\riange lotthe necessary openings in the building to allots for admittance or removal of all apparatus. NFhen the building access was not previously arranged and must be provided by this contractor; restore any opening to its original condition after the apparatus has been brought into the building. EQUIPl1EiN-1 ACCESS Install all piping, conduit and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance and service. Coordinate the exact location of scall and ceiling access panels and doors with the General Contractor. making sure that access is available for all equipment and specialties. Access doors in general construction are to be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by the General Contractor. Provide color coded thumb tacks or screws, depending on the slit face, for use in accessible ceilings Which do not require access panels. COORDINATION Coordinate all work with other contactors prior to installation. Any Work that is not coordinated and that interferes with other contractor's work shall be removed or relocated tattle installing contractor's expense. Verify that all devices are compatible for the tope of construction and surfaces on which they Will be used. IDENTIFICATION Identify all exterior but piping for entire length er•ith underground tracer Wire. END OF SECTION 05-30-2012 2205 00-6 CONUMON WORK RLSULTS FOR PLUMBING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 22 05 14 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for, roof drains, cleanouts, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors and other miscellaneous plumbing specialties. PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Documents Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Shop Drawings Operation and Maintenance Data PART2-PRODUCTS C-leanouts Backflow Preventers Catch Basins Vent Flashings 3000 Gallon Separator PART 3 - EXECUI ION Installation RELATED DOCUMENTS Section 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage Section 22 05 23 - Gencral-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section GC - General Conditions of the Contract, Equals and Substitutions. Plumbing products requiring approval by the State of Wisconsin Dept. of Commerce must be approved or have pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission. SHOP DRAWINGS Include data concerning dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, certifications, weights, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content requirements specified under section GFNERAL REQUIREMENTS. PART 2 -PRODUCTS r, CLEANOUTS _ Manufacturer:losam, Smith, Wade, Watts, Zurn. W. UNFINISHED INTERIOR CONCRETE FLOOR AREAS: Heavy Duty, Enameled cast iron body with round adjustable scoriated cast iron cover; tapered 4hrpaded- -.- ABSclosweplug. Josam55000-1-13,., ' 05/30/2012 -220S 4-1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building EXTERIOR PAVED AREAS: Cast iron hub or plug with tapered threaded ABS or PVC closure plug, cast iron frost sleeve and cover set in 24" square by 4" min. thick reinforced concrete pad top or surrounding pavement, crowned for drainage. Neenah R-1976 with non-ferrous securing screw. EXTERIOR i1N_PAVED AREAS: Cast iron hub or plug with tapered threaded .ABS or PVC closure plug, cast iron or PVC frost sleeve and cover set in M" square by 4" min. thick reinforced concrete pad top. Neenah R-1976 wilt non-ferrous seeurin, screw. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS klanufactureas: Conbraco: Watts, Wilkins. REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BACKI'LONN' PREVENTERS: ASSE 1013 reduced pressure zone backflow assenmbly complete with inlet strainer, inlet and outlet ball valves. Constructed of bronze, SS or Plastic body with bronze and plastic internal parts, stainless steel springs, non -threaded vent outlet, 4 test cocks, rated for 175 psig and 2107. with air ,all apparatus on drain. CATCH BASINS Garage Catch Basin 42 Shall be 36" diameter inside diameter by 6 +/-deep. reinforced precast concrete with proper openings, OR Fiberglass basin 6" thick concrete base. Backfill shall be gravel or sand compacted. Frame and grate shall be heavy duty cast iron. See plan for elevations. VENT FLASHINGS Manufacturers: Sentco, Oatev. Formed 3 Ib./sq. ft. lead flashing with minimum base size of 15"x17". Single Ply Membrane Roofs: Flashing boot of material compatible xvith rooting membrane with base flange for adhering to membrane and stainless steel drawband for securing to vent pipe. 3000 GALLON OIL 'GRIT SEPERATOR Exterior Buried Reinforced precast concrete assembly for separation of oil/grease�'g.rit. Manhole covers & tank top shall be capable of withstanding Semi truck loading. 3000 gallon 5000 psi precast concrete unit with manholes as needed to inspect & clean tank _ compartments, manhole risers. riser rings, CI heavy duty frameisolid lids, bafflesidrop pipes as needed ,joints sealed with Mastic sealant, 6"pipe size. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION .. Coordinate location location and setting of plumbing specialties with adjacent construction. Install in accordance' mth ntanufaeturers recommendations. _ Set cleanouts level and plumb adjusted to finished floor elevation, roof elevation or finished wall location. Locate where settiiceable. Allow minimum of 18" clearance around cleanouts for rodding`. Lubricate, threaded cleanout plugs vith graphite and oil. teflon tape or waterproof grease. Install trap primer connections where indicated. ,Provide deep seal trap, on floor drains. a Install backllovS prcventcs in accordance with Iowa Code requirements maintaining minimum clearance distances for servicing and testing. Provide indirect waste piping with air gap installation from relief opening to above Imub drain or tloor drain. 05/30/2012 21205 14-2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Where backflow preventers requiring Iowa Code registration are installed, provide initial registration, testing and report filing required by Dept. of Commerce. List the name and address of the building that the backflow preventer installations occur in. Excavate for catch basins setting precast bases on granular backfill. Seal joints between base, sections, collars and castings with Basketing material for tightly packed waterproof seals. Adjust casting to match finished Rrade. Place piping into manholes providing full support of piping on exterior bedding and insuring pipe seals are Backfill and compact soil around catch basin. Excavate for interceptor setting precast bases on granular backfill. Seal joints between base, sections, collars and castings with gasketing material for tightly packed waterproof seals. Adjust castings to match finished grade. Place piping into manholes providing full support of piping on exterior bedding and insuring pipe seals are Backfill and compact soil around interceptor. Flash vent penetrations through roof. Turn down top of lead flashing into vent pipe. Tighten drawband of membrane boot to vent pipe. Adhere base flashing to deck or membrane. Provide waterproof patch around penetration on existing roofs. Install washing machine boxes in wall construction, secured to structure, directly behind proposed washing machine location. Provide water hammer arrestors in supply piping. Mount box a min. of 36' above floor - END OF SECTION 05/30/2012 22 0-5411-3 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK May 30, 2012 Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART1-GENERAL SCOPE This section includes valve specifications for all Plumbing systems except where indicated under Related Work. Included are the following topics: PART I - GENERAL, Scope Related Work Reference Quality Assurance Submittals Operation and Maintenance Data Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS Water System Valves Ball Valves Drain Valves PART 3 -EXECUTION General Shut-off Valves Drain Valves RELATED WORK Section 22 05 14 - Plumbing Specialties Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section GC - General Conditions of the Contract, Equals and Substitutions. SUBMITTALS Schedule of all valves indicating type of service, dimensions, materials of construction, and pressure/temperature ratings for all valves to he used on the project. Temperature ratings specified are for continuous operation. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content re3luiE meats specified under section GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. (s _,. 05/30/2012 .- 220523-1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Iowa City Public Works Warnt Storage Building DESIGN CRITERIA Where valve types (ball, butterfly, etc.) are specified for individual plumbing services (i.e. domestic water, ,as, etc.), each valve type shall be of the same manufacturer unless prior written approval is obtained from the Owner. Valves to be line size unless specifically nored otherwise. PART 2 -PRODUCTS [VATERSYSTEM VALVES All water system valves to be rated at not less than 125 water working pressure at 240 degrees P unless noted otherwise. BALL VALVES: 3" and smaller Two or three piece bronze body: sweat ends, chrome plated bronze ball; glass filled teflon seat; teflon packing and threaded packing mu, blowout -proof stem; 600 psig WOG. Provide valve stem extensions for valves installed in all piping with insulation. Apollo 70-200, 7omar T/S 100, Hammond 851 1, 'Milwaukee BA s0. Nibeo S580 -7Q Watts B-6001. DRAIN V kLVES: 1'4 inch ball valve with integral threaded hose adapter, sweat or threaded inlet connections, with threaded cap and chain on hose threads, Watts B -6000 -CCB -6001 -CC series. PART 3- EXEC UIION GENERAL Properly align piping before installation of valves. Install and test valves in strict accordance with valve manufacturer's installation recommendations. Do not support weight of piping system on valve ends. Mount calves in locations wfiich allow access for operation, servicing and replacement. Provide valve handle extensions for all valves installed in insulated piping. Install all valves with the stem in the upright or horizontal position. If possible, install butterfly valves with the stem in the horizontal position. Valves installed with the stems down will not be accepted. Prior to flushing of piping systems, place all valves in the fill -open position SHUT-OFF VALVES Install shut-off valves at each piece of equipment, at each branch take -off from mains for isolation or repair and elscwhere as indicated. DRAIN VALVES Provide drain valves for couhplete drainage of all systems. Locations of drain valves include low points of piping systems, downstream of riser isolation valves, equipment locations specified or detailed, other loco[tons required for drainage of systems and elsewhere as indicated. - END OF SECTION 05/W2012 22 05 23-2 -? GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PiPTVG' 7- 05/W2012 22 05 23-2 -? GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PiPTVG' Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for supports of all plumbing equipment and materials as well as piping system anchors. Included are the following topics: PARTI- GENERAL Scope Relal;ed Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Description Shop Drawings Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS Manufacturers Structural Supports Pipe Hangers and Supports Beam Clamps PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Hanger and Support Spacing RELATED WORK Section 22 11 00— Water Piping Section 22 13 00 — Sanitary Sewage REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work under this section. REFERENCESTANDARDS MSS SP -58 MSS SP -69 REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section GC - General Conditions of the Conti act, _ Equals and Substitutions. 05/30/2012 22 05 29=1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Iowa City Public Works warm Storage Building Provide all Supporting devices as required for the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. All suppotts and installation procedures are to conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for building piping. Do not hang any mechanical item directly from a metal deck or run piping so its rests on the bottom chord of any truss orjoist. Fasteners depending on soft lead for holding power or requiring powder actuation will not be accepted. Support apparatus and material under all conditions of operation, variations in installed and operating wveight of equipment and piping, to prevent excess Suess, and alloti for proper expansion and contraction. Protect insulation at all haneer points: see Related Work above SHOP DRAWINGS Schedule of all hanger and support devices indicating attachment methods and nTe of device for each pipe size and type of service. All submittals arc to comply with submission and content requircntents specified With in Section 17 00 00. DESIGN CRITERIA Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with rMSS Standard Practice SP -58 and SP -69 unless noted otherwise. Piping connected to pumps, compressors, or otherrotating or reciprocating equipment is to havc vibration isolation supports for a distance of one hundred pipe diameters or three support, away from the equipment, whichever is greater. Standard pipe hangersr'supports as specified in this section are required beyond the 100 pipe diameter +3 support distance. PART 2 -PRODUCTS NIANUFACTLRERS Anvil, B-T-inc, Pate. Piping Technology, Roof Products & Systems or approved equal. PIPE H ANGERS AND SUPPORTS HANGERS FOR PIPE SIZLS l/2" THROUGH 2": Carbon steel, adjustable swivel ring. B -Linc B3I70NF,Ain 1 69 or 70. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis, standard. B -Linc B3100, Anvil 260. FLAMERS FOR PIPE SIZES 2" AND LARGER: Carbon steel, adjustable clevis. standard. B -Line B3100, Anvil 260. _ I5_U.L ST.PPORT: Carbon steel welded bracket with hanger. 13 -Line 3065 Series. Anvil 194 Series. - - Perforated. epoxy painted finish, 16-12 gauge, min., steel channels securely anchored to Walt structure with a interlocking, split -n pe, bolt secured. gatvanized pipea!tubing clamps. B -Line type S channel with R-2600_ 05,130J2012 22 05 29-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building series clamps, Anvil type PS 200 H with PS 1200 clamps. When copper piping is being supported, provide flexible elastomeric/theimoplastic isolation cushion material to completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp, equal to B -Line 81999 Vibra Cushion or provide manufacturers clamp and cushion assemblies, 13 -Line BVI'series, Anvil PS 1400 series. FLOOR SUPPORT: Carbon steel pipe saddle, stand and bolted floor flange. B -Line B3088T/B3093. COPPER PIPE SUPPORTS: All supports, fasteners, clamps, etc. directly connected to copper piping shall be copper plated or polyvinylchloride coated. Where steel charnels are used, provide isolation collar between supports/clamps/fasteners and copper piping. PIPE HANGER RODS STEEL HANGER RODS: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, complete with adjusting and lock nuts. Size rods fir individual hangers and trapeze support as indicated in the followin, schedule. 'total weilght of equipment, including valves, fittings, pipe, pipe content, and insulation, are not to exceed the limits indicated. Maximum Load (Lbs.) Rod Diameter (650'F Maximum Teton) (inches) 610 3/8 1130 1/2 1810 5/8 2710 3/4 3770 7/8 4960 1 8000 1-1/4 BEAM CLAMPS MSS SP -69 Types 19 & 23 malleable black iron clamp for attachment to beam flange to 0.62 incites thick with a retaining ring and threaded rod of 3/8, 1/2, and 5/8 inch diameter. Furnish with a hardened steel cup point set screw. B -Line 133036L/B3034, Anvil 86/92. MSS SP -69 Type 28 or Type 29 forged steel jaw type clamp with a tie rod to lock clamp in place, suitable for rod sizes to 1-1/2 inch diameter. B -Line 133054, Anvil 228. PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Size, apply and install supports and anchors in compliance with manufacturers recommendations. Install supports to provide for ft expansion of the piping system. Support all piping from the structure using concrete inserts, beam clamps, ceiling plates, wall brackets, or floor stands. Fastep cciling!plates and wall brackets securely to the structure and test to demonstrate the adequacy of the ftsteitigg„ Coordinate hanger and support installation to properly group piping of all trades. 05/30/2012 2205 29-3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS IowaCity Public Works Mann Storage Building Size and install hangers and supports, except for riser clamps, for installation on the exterior ofpiping insulation. Where a vapor barrier is not required, hangers may be installed either op the exterior of pipe insulation or directlg on piping. HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 itch space between finished covering and adjacent work. Place a hanger within 12 mclies of each horizontal elbow, valve. strainer, or similar piping specialty item. Lse hangers with 1-1l2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Where several pipes can be installed in pat tltel and attire same elevation. provide multiple or trapeze hanacis. Support riser piping independently of connected horizotttal piping. Adjust hangers to obtain the slope specified in the piping section of these specifications. Space hangers for pipe as follows: Pipe Material Pipe Size Max Horiz Spacing* ap citta Max. Vert. Spacing - Cast Iron Cast 2" and laracr Y-0" 15'-0" Copper 1;2" through 3.4" 5'-0" 10'-0" Copper V through 1-114" 6'-0" 10'-0" Plastic Drain and Vent 4'-0" 10'-0" EiM OF SECTION 05/30/2012 22 05 29-4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 22 1100 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PART I -GENERAL SCOPE This section contains specifications for plumbing pipe and pipe fittings for this project. Included are the following topics: PARTI- GENERAL Scope Reference Reference Standards Shop Drawings Quality Assurance Delivery, Storage, and Handling Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS Domestic Water Dielectric Unions and Flanges Unions and Flanges PART 3 - EXECUTION General Preparation Erection Copper Pipe Joints Threaded Pipe Joints Domestic Water Unions Piping System Leal: Tests RELATED WORK 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 14 - Plumbing Specialties REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division I govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ANSI B 16.22 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ASTM B32 Solder Metal ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube ASTM B813 Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering Applications of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube SIIOP DR WINGS 1/20/2012 ` 2211 00-1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION looa CihPublic Works Warm Storage Bui I din, Schedule from the contractor indicating the ASTM specification number of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade if knos�n at the time of submittal, and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of ftrtings for each sorvice. Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that pipe furnished meets the ASTM specification contained in this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section GC —General Conditions of the Contract, Equals and Substitutions. Order all copper pipe with each length marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and type of pipe: with cacti shipping unit marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplies. Any, installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to the Owner. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Prompllg inspect shipments to insure that the material is undamaged and complies with specifications. Cover pipe to prevent corrosion or deterioration while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe. tube, and fitting, ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, talc precautions so the caps remain in place. Protect fittings, flanges, and unions by storage inside or by durable, waterproof, above ground packaging. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve the conuactor from using proper storage techniques. Storage and protection mettiods must allow inspection to verify products. DESIGN CRITERIA Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale. and meeting the latest revision of ASPM specifications as listed in this specification. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system. Non-metallic piping will be acceptable only for the services indicated. It will not be acceptable in ventilation plenum spaces, including plenum ceilings. I he Architect or Engineer reserves the right to test the work of any welder employed on the project. at the Otwmet's expense. if the work of the welder is found to be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the prof cot and all defective welds replaced. PART 2 -PRODUCTS _ DOMESTIC IYATER C. ' ABOVE GROUND: Type L copper water tube, I -I (drawn) temper, .ASTM BM wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B 16.22,,,, lead free (-.2%) solder= ASTM 1332; flux, ASTM B813 I I __ 1/20/2012 22 11 00-2 -. FACILITY \I ATER DISTRIBUTION '' Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building INTERIOR BELOW GROUND; Type K copper water tube, 0 (annealed) temper, ASTM B88; with cast copper pressure filings, ANSI B 16.18; wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B 16.22; lead free (C2%) solder, ASTM 1332; flux, ASTM 11813; or cast copper flared pressure fittings, ANSI B16.26. ONIONS Unions, flanges and gasket materials to have a pressure rating of not less than 150 psig at 180 degrees. Gasket material for flanges and flanged fittings shall be teflon type.'Freated papa gaskets are not acceptable. 2" AND SMALLER COPPER. ANSI 1316.18 cast bronze union coupling or ANSI 111524 Class 150 cast bronze flanges. PART 3 -EXECUTION GENERAL Install pipe and fittings in accordance with reference standards, manufacturers recommendations and recognized industry practices. PREPARATION Cut pipe ends square. Ream ends of piping to remove burrs. Clean scale and dirt from interior and exterior of each section of pipe and fitting prior to assembly. ERECTION Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. Coordinate locations of plumbing piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. In all cases. consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. Where copper piping is embedded in masonry or concrete, provide protective sleeve covering of elastomeric pipe insulation. Install underground warning tape 6"-12" below finished grade above all exterior below ground piping. Maintain piping in clean condition internally during construction. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, access to valves and piping specialties. Provide anchors, expansionjoints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelbomds, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment. , Install all valves and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified`aud/or detailed. Provide access to valves and specialties for maintenance. Make connections to all equip inepi;fixtures and systems installed by others where same requires the piping services indicated in this secuum. _.. 1/20/2012 r'22 11 0073 FACILITY WATERD1STRi'BUTION ..? r,, i Iowa Cite Public Works Warm Storage Building COPPER PIPE JOINTS Remove at slicers and burrs remaining from the cutting operation by reaming and filing both pipe surfaces. Clean fining and tube with metal brush- emery cloth or sandpaper. Remove residue from the cleaning operation, apply flux and assemhlejoint to socket stop. Apply flame to fitting until solder melts when placed at joint. Rento%e flame and feed solder into joint until full penetration of cup and ring of sotder appears. Wipe excess solder and flux from joint. THREADED PIPE JOINTS Use a thrcad lubricant or teflon tape when makin:rjoints: no hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed. DOMESTIC wAT ER Maintain piping system in clean condition during in,aallation. Remove dirt and debris from assembly of piping as work progresses. Cap open pipe ends taherc left ra ancnded or subject to contamination. Install exterior water piping below predicted host Ievel, but in no case less than W bun- depth to top of pipe. Install interior water piping with drain vahres where indicated and at low I)oittts of system to allots complete drainaae. TnstalI shLit of fvah es where indicated and at the base of risers to allow isolation of portions of system for repair. Do not install \%a Let piping within exterior walls. Prior totse, isolate and fill spstem with potable water. AtIow- to stand 24 hours. Flush cacti order proceeding from the sery ice cnd-ance to the furthest outlet for ininimum of 1 minute and until water appears clear. Fill system with a solution of water and chlorine containing at least 50 parts per million of chtorine and allow to stand for 24 hours. Alternately a solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine may be used and allowed to stand for 3 hours. Flush systetn with potable water until chlorine concentration is no higher than source water level. Wait 24 hours after final flushing. Take samples of water for lab testing. The number and location of samples shall be representative of the system size and configuration and are subject to approval by Engineer. Test shall show the absence of coliform bacteria. If test fails, repeat disinfection and testing procedures until no coliform bacteria are detected. Submit testreport indicating date andtime oCtest atong with test results, UNIONS Install a union or flange at each connection to each piece of equipment and at other items which may require removal for maintenance. repair, or replacement. PIPING SYS"PE9I LEAK TESTS Isolate or remove components from system m-hich are not rated for test pressure. Test piping in sections 4 entire systetn as required by sequence of construction. Do not insulate or conceal pipe until it has_ b_ een itp successfuth tested. if required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at finings or,expnrtsion joints. Backfill underground water mains prior to testing with the exception of thrust restrained valve's which may be exposed to isolate potential leaks. _. 1/20;2012 221100-4 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building For hydrostatic tests, use clean water and remove all air from the piping being tested by means of air vents or loosening of flanges/unions. Measure and record test pressure at the high point in the system. Inspect system for leaks. Where leaks occur, repair the area with new materials and repeat the test; caulking will not be acceptable. Entire test must be witnessed by the Division's representative. All pressure tests are to be documented on forms to be provided to the contractor. 1/20/2012 END OF SECTION .._2'110(15 .. . FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 'fest Initial Test Final Test System Medium Pressure _ Duration Pressure Duration Below Ground Domestic Water Water N/A 100 psig 8 hr Above Ground Domestic Water Water N/A 100 psig 8 hr 1/20/2012 END OF SECTION .._2'110(15 .. . FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building PIPING SYSTEM TEST REPORT Date Submitted: Project Name:_ Contractor E Plumbing Test Nledium: c; Air u Water c:i Other Test performed per specification section No Specified TestDoration IIours System Identification: Describe Location: Test Date: Start. Test Time: Stop Test Ti Tested By: Title: Date: Comments: Project N Specified Test Pressure IG Initial Pressure: PSIG Final Pressure: PSIG Witnessed By: Title: 1/20/2012 22 11 00-6 FACILITY WATERDISTRiBUTION Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section contains specifications for plumbing pipe and pipe fittings for this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Reference Reference Standards Shop Drawings Quality Assurance Delivery, Storage, and Handling Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS Sanitary and Waste and Vent PART 3 -EXECUTION General Preparation Erection Solvent Welded Pipe Joints Mechanical Hubless Pipe Connections Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping System Leak Tests RELATED WORK 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 14 - Plumbing Specialties REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM A74 Cast iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A888 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications ASTM C564 Standard Specifications for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM DI 785 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe ASTM D2466 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2665 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2729 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2855 Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittin,s ASTM D3311 Drain, Waste and Vent (DWV) Plastic Pitting Patterns -- CISPI301 Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fitting's for Sanitary and Stoma ffrAiu,.R'aI and Vent Piping Applications CISPI 310 Couplings For Use In Connection With Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe 4o€, ittmgs For San itary And Storm Drain, Waste And Vent Piping Appl icatio n s "qtr 05/30!2012 ' 22 1360-1 _- l'ACILTIY SAKITARY SEWERAGE Iowa City Public W otks Warnt Storage Facility SHOP DRAWINGS Schedule from the contractor indicating the ASTM, or CISPI specification number of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade if known at the time of submittal, and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of fittings for each service. Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that pipe furnished meets the ASTM, or CTSPI specification contained in this section. QUALfIY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section GC — General Conditions of the Contract, Equals and Substitutions. Ordcr all pipe with each length marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and type of pipe, with each shipping unit marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these speciGoarions vcidnout additional cost to the Owner. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Promptly inspect shipments to insure that the material is undamaged and complies with specifications. Cover pipe to prevent corrosion or deterioration while alloying sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe. tube, and Suing ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take precautions so the caps remain in place. Protect fittings, flanges, and unions by storage inside or by durable. waterproofabove ground packaging. Storage and protection methods must allow inspection to verify products. DESIGN CRITERIA Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting the latest revision of ASTM, or CISPI specifications as listed in thus specification. Conshvct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system. PART 2 -PRODUCTS SANITARY W ASLE AND FENT IN11iRTOR ABOVE GROUND. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings with no-Imb couplings, ASTM A888. CISPI 301- ASTM A74. P\ C. plastic pipe Schedule 40, Class 1344-B (PVC 1120), ASTNI DI 7V: PVC plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665: socket fitting patterns. ASB DI31 I; primer (Lo-VOQ, ASTM F656, solvent cement (I-o-VOC), ASTM D2564. - �> INTERIORBELMN GROlND: Hubless cast ,on soil pipe and fittings with no -hub couplings, ASTM A888, CISPI 301 ASTAT A74. LJ • ,I' 1 05/30/2012 22 13 00-2 FACILTIY SAM TARN' SEWERAGE Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility PVC plastic pipe, Schedule 40, Class 12454-B (PVC 1120), .ASTM D1785; PVC plastic chain, waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665; socket fitting patterns, ASTM D3311; primer, ASTM F656; solvent cement, ASTM D2564. EXTLRIOR BELOW GROUND 15" AND SMALLER: Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings with no -hub couplings, ASTM A888, C1SPI 301, ASTM A74. PVC plastic pipe, Schedule 40, Class 12454-B (PVC 1120), ASTM D1785; PVC plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665; socket fitting patterns, ASTM D3311; primer, ASTM F656; solvent cement, AS'I'M D2564. PART 3 -EXECUTION GENERAL Install pipe and fittings in accordance with reference standards, manufacturers recommendations and recognized industry practices. PREPARATION Cut pipe ends square. Ream ends of piping to remove burrs. Clean scale and dirt from interior and exterior of each section of pipe and fitting prior to assembly. ERECTION Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. Coordinate locations of plumbing piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to al low sufficient clearances. In al I cases. consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, cci ling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. Install underground warning tape 6"-12" below finished grade above all exterior below ground piping. Where existing underground warning tape is encountered, repair and replace. Maintain piping in clean condition internally during construction. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, access to valves and piping specialties. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, parelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment SOLVENT WELDED PIPE JOINTS Install in accordance with ASTM D2855 "Makin., Solvent Cemented JointsWith PVC Pipe and Fittings". Saw cut piping square and smooth. Tube cutters may be used if they are fitted with wheels designed for use with PVC/CPVC pipe that do not leave a raised bead on pipe exterior. Support and restrain pipe during cutting to prevent nicks and scratches. Bevel ends 10-15 degrees and deburr interior. Remove dust, drips, moisture, grease and other superfluous materials from pipe interior and exterior. Check dry fit of pipe and fittings. Reject materials which are out of round or do not fit within close tolerance. Use heavy body solvent cement for large diameter fittings. 1-1 Maintain pipe, fittings, primer and cement between 40 and 100 degrees during application and curing. Apply primer and solvent using separate daubers (3" and smaller piping only) or eleah natural bristic brushes about 1/2 the size of the pipe diameter. Apply primer to the fitting socket and_pipz surface with a` scrubbing motion. Check for penetration and reapply as needed to dissolve surface to;adepth of -4-5 —'-' thousandths. Apply solvent cement to the fitting socket and pipe in an amount greater-than"needed to fill any 05/30/2012 '-2213'00-3 FACILTIY SANITARY SEWERAGE Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility gap. While hoth surfaces are wet, insert pipe into socket fitting with a quarter turn to the bottom of the socket. Solvent cement application and insertion must be completed in less than I minute. Minimum oft installers is required on piping 4" and larger. Hold joint for 30 seconds or until set. Reference manufacturers reconnncndations for initial set tine before handling and for full curing time before pressure testis,. Cold weather sok cutcentem may be utilized only under unusual circumstances and when specifically approved by the Project Representative. MECHANICAL HUBLESS PIPE CONNECTIONS Place the gasket on the end of one pipe or fitting and the clamp assembly on the end of the other pipe or fitting. Firmly seat the pipe or fitting ends aaaittst the integrally molded shoulder inside die neoprene gasket. Slide the clamp assembly into position over the gasket. Tighten fasteners to manuCacuuers recommended torque. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT Verify invert elevations and building elevations prior to installation. install exterior piping pitched to drain at indicated elevations and slope. Install interior piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot where possible and in no case less than 1'8" per foot for piping 3" and larger. Install exterior piping below predicted frost level aid not less than 5' buy depth to top of pipe wherever possible. Flush piping inlets (floor drains. huh drains. ntop basins, fixtures, etc.) with high flow of water at eontpletion of project to demonstrate fill flow capacity. Reprove blockages and make necessary repairs where dow is found to he impeded. PIPING ST STEM LEAK TESTS isolate or remove components from system which are not rated for test pressure. Perform final testing for mcdicat and lab gas with all system components in place. Test piping in sections or entire system as required by sequence of construction. Do not insulate or conceal pipe until it bas been successfully tested. If required for the additional pressure load under test_ provide temporary restraints at fittings or expansion joints. Backfill underground water mains prior to tcsting with the exception of thrust restrained valves w%lucb may be exposed to isolate potential lcals- For- hydrostatic tests; use clean water and remove all air from the piping being tested by means of air vents or loosening of llangestunions, Nfeasu-c and record test pressure at the high point in the system. Tnspcct sstem for leaks, W here leaks occur, repair the arca with new materials and repeat the test_. caulking will not be acceptable. Entire test must be witnessed by the Owner's representative. All pressure tests are to he documented on forms to be provided to the contractor. Test Initial Test Final Test System Medium Prssure Iluration Pressm-c Duration Sanitary 1A'aste and Vent Water NIA IUwater 2hr LND OF SLCTIONr 05/30/2012 22 13`00-4 FACILTTY SANITARY SLWERAGE <n Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility PIPING SYSTEM TEST REPORT Date Submitted: Project Name: Location: Project No: Contractor: - Plumbing Test Medium: ❑ Air ❑ Water ❑ Other Test performed per specification section Specified Test Duration Hours System Identification: Describe Location: Specified Test Pressure PSIG Test Date: Start Test Time: Initial Pressure: PSIG Stop "fest Time: Final Pressure: PSIG Tested Signed 05/30/-_'012 Witnessed By: 22 13 00-5 FACiLTIY SANITARY SEWERAGE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK May 30, 2012 Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes information common to two or more technical specification sections or items that are of a general nature, not conveniently fitting into other technical sections. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Continuity of Existing Services Protection of Finished Surfaces Sleeves and Openings Sealing and Firestopping Submittals Off Site Storage Request and Certification for Payment Certificates and Inspections Operating and Maintenance Instructions Training of Owner Personnel Record Drawings PART2-PRODUCTS Access Panels and Doors Identification Sealing and Firestopping PART 3 - EXECUTION Demolition Excavation and Backfill Concrete Work Cutting and Patching Building Access Equipment Access Coordination Identification Lubrication Sleeves Sealing and Firestopping RELATED WORK Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories. REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in other sections are as follows: AABC Associated Air Balance Council ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ADC Air Diffusion Council AGA American Gas Association AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning EngineeP$:;.. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials = - AWWA American Water Works Association AWS American Welding Society 5/30/2012 23 05 00 - 1 of 7 Common Work Results for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility EPA Environmental Protection Agency GAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ISA Instrument Society of America MCA Mechanical Contractors Association MICA Midwest Insulation Contractors Association MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve & Fitting Industry. Inc. NBS National Bureau of Standards NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. Inc. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials UL1479 Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops UL723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Division 1. General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions_ Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration. dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract documents; the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the performance from the system into which these items are placed. This may include changes found necessary during the testing, adjusting, and balancing phase of the project. CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES Do not interrupt or change existing services without prior written approval from the A/E or Owner. When interruption is required, coordinate the down-time with the user agency to minimize disruption to their activities. Unless specifically stated, all work involved in interrupting or changing existing services is to be done during normal working hours. PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES Refer to Division 1; General Requirements, Protection of Finished Surfaces. Furnish one can of touch-up paint for each different color factory finish which is to be the final finished surface of the product. Deliver touch-up paint with other "loose and detachable parts" as covered in the General Requirements. SLEEVES AND OPENINGS Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Sleeves and Openings. SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING Sealing and firestopping of sleeves/openings between ductwork, piping etc. and the sleeve, structural or partition opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the sealing and fireproofing. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed in the sealing and fireproofing occupation. SUBMITTALS Refer to Division 1, General Conditions, Submittals. Submit for all equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification sections, marking each submittal with that specification section number. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated in the contract documents. Before submitting electrically powered equipment. verify that the electrical power and control requirements . for the equipment are in agreement with the motor starter schedule on the electrical drawings. Include a- J statement on the shop drawing transmittal to the architect/engineer that the equipment submitted and the. motor starter schedule are in agreement or indicate any discrepancies. See related comments,iih Sectidri— 23 05 13 in Part 1 under Electrical Coordination. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment. co uo uu-cu:r Common Work Results for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Submit sufficient quantities of shop drawings to allow the following distribution: • Operating and Maintenance Manuals 2 copies • Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor 1 copy • A/E 1 copy OFF SITE STORAGE Ductwork, metal for making ductwork, duct lining, sleeves, pipe/pipe fittings and similar rough -in material will not be accepted for off site storage. For material that can be stored off site, no material will be accepted for off site storage unless shop drawings for that material have been approved. REQUEST AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT Refer to general conditions for payment requirements. CERTIFICATES AND INSPECTIONS Refer also to Division 1, General Conditions, Permits, Regulations, Utilities and Taxes. Obtain and pay for all required State installation inspections except those provided by the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Wis Adm Code Section ILHR 50.12 and Wisconsin Department of Health Services. Include copies of the certificates in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Operating and Maintenance Instructions. Assemble material in three-ring or post binders, using an index at the front of each volume and tabs for each system or type of equipment. In addition to the data indicated in the General Requirements, include the following information: • Copies of all approved shop drawings. • Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment • Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements • Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies • Temperature control record drawings and control sequences • Parts lists for manufactured equipment • Valve schedules • Lubrication instructions, including list/frequency of lubrication done during construction • Warranties • Additional information as indicated in the technical specification sections TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL Instruct owner personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of systems and equipment provided as part of this project, video tape all training sessions. Include not less than 8 hours of instruction, using the Operating and Maintenance manuals during this instruction. Demonstrate startup and shutdown procedures for all equipment. All training to be during normal working hours. RECORD DRAWINGS Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Record Drawings. In addition to the data indicated in the General Requirements, maintain temperature control record drawings on originals prepared by the installing contractor/subcontractor. Include copies of these record drawings with the Operating and Maintenance manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS LAY -IN CEILINGS: Removable lay -in ceiling tiles in 2 X 2 foot or 2 X 4 foot configuration provided under Section 09500 are sufficient, no additional access provisions are required unless specifically indicated. M.a CONCEALED SPLINE CEILINGS: Removable sections of ceiling tile held in position with metal slats or tabs compatible with the ceiling system used will be provided under Section 09500. 5/30/2012 23 05 00 - 3 of 7 Common Work Results for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility PLASTER WALLS AND CEILINGS: 16 gauge frame with not less than a 20 gauge hinged door panel, prime coated steel for general applications. stainless steel for use in toilets, showers. and similar wet areas. concealed hinges, screwdriver operated cam latch for general applications, key lack for use in public areas, UL listed for use in fire rated partitions if required by the application. Use the largest size access opening possible, consistent with the space and the equipment needing service, minimum size is 12" by 12 IDENTIFICATION STENCILS: Not less than 1 inch high letters/numbers for marking pipe and equipment. SNAP-ON PIPE MARKERS: Cylindrical self -coiling plastic sheet that snaps over piping insulation and is held tightly in place without the use of adhesive, tape or straps. Not less than 1 inch high letters/numbers and flow direction arrows for piping marking. W. H. Brady, Seton, Marking Services, or equal. ENGRAVED NAME PLATES: White letters on a black background, 1116 inch thick plastic laminate, beveled edges, screw mounting, Setonply Style 2060 by Seton Name Plate Company or Emedolite- Style EIP by EMED Cc.. or equal by Marking Services, or W. H. Brady. VALVE TAGS'. Round brass tags with 112 inch numbers, 114 Inch system identification abbreviation, 1-114 inch minimum diameter. with brass jack chains or brass "S" hooks around the valve stem, available from EMED Co., Seton Name Plate Company, Marking Services, or W. H Brady. SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING FIRE AND/OR SMOKE RATED PENETRATIONS Manufacturers: 3M, Hilti, Rectorseal, STI/SpecSeal, Tremco, or approved equal. All firestopping systems shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Submittals: Contractor shall submit product data for each firestop system. Submittals shall include product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria, test data. MSDS sheets. installation details and procedures for each method of installation applicable to this project. For non-standard conditions where no UL tested system exists, submit manufacturer's drawings for UL system with known performance for which an engineering judgement can be based upon. Product. Fire stop systems shall be UL listed or tested by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Department of Commerce. Use a product that has a rating not less than the rating of the wall or floor being penetrated. Reference architectural drawings for identification of fire and/or smoke rated walls and floors. Contractor shall use firestop putty, caulk sealant, intumescent wrapstrips, Intumescent firestop collars, firestop blocks. firestop mortar or a combination of these products to provide a UL listed system for each application required for this project. Provide mineral wool backing where specified in manufacturer's application detail. NON -RATED PENETRATIONS: Pipe Penetrations: At pipe penetrations of non -rated interior partitions, floors and exterior walls above grade, use urethane caulk in annular space between pipe insulation and sleeve. For non -rated drywall. plaster or wood. partitions where sleeve is not required use urethane caulk in annular space between pipe insulation and wall material. ; Duct Penetrations: - 5/30/2012 23 05 Off - 4 of 7 Common Work Results for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Annular space between duct (with or without insulation) and the non -rated partition or floor opening shall not be larger than 2". Where existing openings have an annular space larger than 2", the space shall be patched to match existing construction to within 2" around the duct. Where shown or specified, pack annular space with fiberglass batt insulation or mineral wool insulation. Provide 4" sheet metal escutcheon around duct on both sides of partition or floor to cover annular space. PART 3 - EXECUTION DEMOLITION Perform all demolition as indicated on the drawings to accomplish new work. Where demolition work is to be performed adjacent to existing work that remains in an occupied area, construct temporary dust partition to minimize the amount of contamination of the occupied space. Where pipe or duct is removed and not reconnected with new work, cap ends of existing services as if they were new work. Coordinate work with the user agency to minimize disruption to the existing building occupants. All pipe, wiring and associated conduit, insulation, ductwork, and similar items demolished, abandoned, or deactivated are to be removed from the site by the Contractor. All piping and ductwork specialties are to be removed from the site by the Contractor unless they are dismantled and removed or stored by the user agency. All designated equipment is to be turned over to the user agency for their use at a place and time so designated. Maintain the condition of material and/or equipment that is indicated to be reused equal to that existing before work began. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Perform all excavation and backfill work to accomplish indicated mechanical systems installation in accordance with Division 31 - Earthwork. Blasting will not be allowed without written permission of the Architect/Engineer. Install lines passing under foundations with minimum of 1-1/2 inch clearance to concrete and insure there is no disturbance of bearing soil. CONCRETE WORK All cast -in-place concrete will be performed by the Division 3 Contractor unless otherwise noted. Provide all layout drawings, anchor bolts, metal shapes, and/or templates required to be cast into concrete or used to form concrete for support of mechanical equipment. CUTTING AND PATCHING Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Cutting and Patching. BUILDING ACCESS Arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance of all apparatus. When the building access was not previously arranged and must be provided by this contractor, restore any opening to its original condition after the apparatus has been brought into the building. EQUIPMENT ACCESS Install all piping, conduit, ductwork, and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance and service. Coordinate the exact location of wall and ceiling access panels and doors with the General Contractor, making sure that access is available for all equipment and specialties. Where access is required in plaster walls or ceilings, furnish the access doors to the General Contractor. Provide color coded thumb tacks or screws, depending on the surface, for use in accessible ceilings which do not require access panels. COORDINATION Verify that all devices are compatible for the surfaces on which they will be used. This includes, but is not limited to, diffusers, register, grilles, and recessed or semi -recessed heating and/or cooling termihdal units installed in/on architectural surfaces. Coordinate all work with other contractors prior to installation. Any installed work that is not coordigated _ and that interferes with other contractor's work shall be removed or relocated at the installing contractor's expense. Cooperate with the test and balance agency in ensuring Section 23 05 93 specification compliance. Verify system completion to the test and balance agency (flushing, pressure testing, chemical treatment, filling of 5/30/2012 23 05 00 - 5 of 7 Common Work Results for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Wane Storage Facility liquid systems, proper pressurization and air venting of hydronic systems. clean filters, clean strainers. duct and pipe systems cleaned controls adjusted and calibrated, controls cycled through their sequences, etc.), ready for testing. adjusting and balancing work. Install dampers. shutoff and balancing valves, flow measuring devices, gauges, temperature controls, etc., required for functional and balanced systems. Demonstrate the starting, Interlocking and control features of each system so the test and balance agency can perform its work. IDENTIFICATION Identify equipment in mechanical equipment rooms by stenciling equipment number and service with one coat of black enamel against a light background or white enamel against a dark background. Use a primer where necessary for proper paint adhesion. Do not label equipment such as cabinet heaters and ceiling fans in occupied spaces. Where stenciling is not appropriate for equipment identification, engraved name plates may be used. Identify piping not less than once every 30 feet, not less than once in each room. adjacent to each access door or panel, and on both side of the partition where exposed piping passes through walls, floors or roofs Place flow directional arrows at each pipe identification location. Use one coat of black enamel against a light background or white enamel against a dark background for stenciling, or provide snap -on pipe markers as specified In Part 2 — Products. Identify valves with brass tags bearing a system identification and a valve sequence number. Valve tags are not required at a terminal device unless the valves are greater than ten feet from the device or located in another room not visible from the terminal unit. Provide a typewritten valve schedule indicating the valve number and the equipment or areas supplied by each valve: locate schedules in each mechanical room and in each Operating and Maintenance manual. Schedules in mechanical rooms to be framed under clear plastic. Use engraved name plates to identify control equipment. LUBRICATION Lubricate all bearings with lubricant as recommended by the manufacturer before the equipment is operated for any reason. Once the equipment has been run; maintain lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions until the work is accepted by A/E. Maintain a log of all lubricants used and frequency of lubrication, include this information in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals at the completion of the project. SLEEVES PIPE SLEEVES: Provide galvanized sheet metal sleeves for pipe penetrations through interior and exterior walls to provide a backing for sealant or firestopping. Patch wall around sleeve to match adjacent wall construction and finish. Grout area around sleeve in masonry construction. In finished spaces where pipe penetration through wall is exposed to view, sheet metal sleeve shall be installed flush with face of wall. Pipe sleeves are not required in interior non -rated drywall, plaster orwood partitions and sleeves are not required in existing poured concrete walls where penetrations are core drilled. Pipe sleeves in new poured concrete construction shall be schedule 40 steel pipe (sized to allow insulated pipe to run through sleeve), cast in place. Extend the top of sleeve 1 inch above the adjacent floor in piping floor penetrations located in the mechanical rooms and wet locations listed below. In finished areas sleeves shall be flush with rough floor. For floor pipe penetrations through existing floors in mechanical rooms and wet locations listed below, core drill opening and provide 1-1/2'x 1-1/2' x 1/8" galvanized steel angles fastened to floor surrounding the penetration or group of penetrations to prevent water from getting to penetration. Provide urethane caulk between angles and floor and fasten angles to floor minimum 8"on center. Seal corners water tight_ _ with urethane caulk. Or, core drill sleeve opening large enough to insert schedule 40 sleeve and grout area around sleeve with hydraulic setting, non -shrink grout. If the pipe penetrating the sleeve is- - supported by a pipe clamp resting on the sleeve, weld a collar or struts to the sleeve that will transfer weight to existing floor structure Wet locations include: • Toilet Rooms 5!30/2012 23 05 00 - 6 of 7 Common Work Results for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility • Parking ramps • Swimming pool equipment rooms • Chemical storage and hazardous waste storage rooms For pipe penetrations through existing floors located in food service areas, core drill sleeve opening large enough to insert schedule 40 sleeve and grout area around sleeve with hydraulic setting, non -shrink grout. Size sleeve to allow insulated pipe to run through sleeve and paint the sleeve. Pipe sleeves are not required in cored floor pipe penetrations through existing floors that are not located in mechanical rooms, food service areas or wet locations listed above. DUCT SLEEVES: Duct sleeves are not required in non -rated partitions or floors_ Provide sleeve required for fire dampers in fire -rated partitions and floors. Reference fire damper details on drawings. For duct penetrations through mechanical room floors and wet locations listed below, provide 1-1/2"x 1- 1/2" x 1/8" galvanized steel angles fastened to floor around the perimeter of the duct opening to prevent water from getting to floor opening. Provide urethane caulk between angles and floor and fasten angles to floor 8" on center. Seal corners water tight with urethane caulk. Wet locations include. • Toilet Rooms • Parking ramps • Swimming pool equipment rooms • Chemical storage and hazardous waste storage rooms • Food service/kitchen areas (behind/under equipment, cabinets, tables, etc.) SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING FIRE AND/OR SMOKE RATED PENETRATIONS: Install approved product in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions where pipes penetrate a fire/smoke rated surface. When pipe is insulated, use a product which maintains the integrity of the insulation and vapor barrier. Where firestop mortar is used to infill large fire -rated floor openings that could be required to support weight, provide permanent structural forming. Firestop mortar alone is not adequate to support any substantial weight. NON -RATED PARTITIONS: Duct penetrations through non -rated partitions shall require sheet metal escutcheons with fiberglass or mineral wool insulation fill for spaces that include laboratories, clean rooms, animal rooms, kitchens, cart wash rooms, janitor closets, cart wash rooms, toilet rooms, mechanical rooms, conference rooms, private consultation rooms, and where noted on drawings elsewhere. END OF SECTION -- t, 5/30/2012 23 05 00 s 7 of 7 Common Work Results forHVAC Iowa City Public Works Warrn Storage Facility SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes valve specifications for all HVAC systems except where indicated under Related Work. Included are the following topics. PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Quality Assurance Submittals Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS Manufacturers Natural Gas Systems Shut-off Valves Gas Pressure Regulators PART 3 - EXECUTION General Shut-off Valves Gas Pressure Regulators RELATED WORK Section 23 05 15 - Piping Specialties REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section, QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to division 1, General Conditions; Equals and Substitutions. SUBMITTALS Refer to division 1. General Conditions. Submittals. Contractors shall submit a schedule of all valves indicating type of service. dimensions, materials of construction, and pressure/temperature ratings for all valves to be used on the project. Temperature ratings specified are for continuous operation. DESIGN CRITERIA Where valves are specified for individual mechanical services (i.e. hot water heating, steam, etc.) all valves shall be of the same manufacturer unless prior written approval is obtained from A/E. PART2-PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Anvil, Armstrong, Bell & Gossett; Cash -Acme, Consolidated; Conval, Crane. Crosby. DeZurik, Durco; Fisher, Grinnell, Gnswald, Hammond, Hancock- Hoffman. Illinois, Jamesbury, Keystone, Kunkle, Leslie, Lunkenheimer, Metraflex. Milwaukee, Mission, Mueller, Newco, Nexus. Nibco, Powell, RP&C, Sarco, Spence., Stockham; Taco, Tasco Thrush-Amtrol, Vogt, Watts, or approved equal NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS SHUT OFF VALVES: 2" and smaller: Ball valve. bronze body. threaded ends, stainless steel ball, full or conventional port, Teflon seat, blowout -proof stem, two-piece construction, suitable for 150 psig working pressure, U.L. listed for use as natural gas shut-off. General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility 2-1/2" through 4": Cast iron body, flanged ends, bronze bearings, electroless nickel plated cast iron plug with Hycar resilient plug seal, Buna-N stem seal packing, lever actuator, 175 psi W.O.G., U.L. listed for use as natural gas shut-off. GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS 2" and smaller. Cast iron body, aluminum spring and diaphragm, Nitrile diaphragm, threaded ends, 150 psi W.O.G., -20°F to 150°F. PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL Properly align piping before installation of valves in an upright position, operators installed below the valves will not be accepted. Install valves in strict accordance with valve manufacturer's installation recommendations. Do not support weight of piping system on valve ends. Install all temperature control valves. Install all valves with the stem in the upright position. Valves may be installed with the stem in the horizontal position only where space limitations do not allow installation in an upright position or where large valves are provided with chain wheel operators. Where valves 2-1/2" and larger are located more than 12'-0" above mechanical room floors, install valve with stem in the horizontal position and provide a chain wheel operator. Valves installed with the stems down, will not be accepted. Install stem extensions when shipped loose from valve. Prior to flushing of piping systems, place all valves in the full -open position. SHUT-OFF VALVES Install shut-off valves at all equipment, at each branch take -off from mains, and at each automatic valve for isolation or repair. GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS When the gas pressure regulator is equipped with a vent connection, run a connection size vent to outside air in accordance with codes. Use a larger size vent when required by the manufacturer's installation instructions. END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 23 05 23 - 2 of 2 General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping y 1 5/30/2012 23 05 23 - 2 of 2 General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1-GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for supports of all HVAC equipment and materials as well as piping system anchors. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Description Shop Drawings Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS Pipe Hanger and Support Manufacturers Structural Supports Pipe Hangers and Supports Beam Clamps Concrete Inserts Continuous Concrete Insert Channels Anchors Equipment Curbs Equipment Stands Pipe Penetration through Roof PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Hanger and Support Spacing Vertical Riser Clamps Concrete Inserts and Continuous Insert Channels Anchors Equipment Curbs Equipment Stands Pipe Penetration through Roof RELATED WORK Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS MSS SP -58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture. MSS SP -59 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Division 1, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions. DESCRIPTION Provide all supporting devices as required for the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. All supports and installation procedures are to conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for pressure piping. Do not hang any mechanical item directly from a metal deck or run piping so it rests on the bottom chord of any truss or joist. Support apparatus and material under all conditions of operation, variations in installed and operating weight of equipment and piping, to prevent excess stress. and allow for proper expansion and contraction. Protect insulation at all hanger points; see Related Work above. - - SHOP DRAWINGS Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Submittals. Schedule of all hanger and support devices indicating shields, attachment methods, and type of device for each pipe size and type of service- Reference section 23 05 00. DESIGN CRITERIA Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS Standard Practice SP -58 and SP -69 unless noted otherwise. Piping connected to base mounted pumps, compressors, or other rotating or reciprocating equipment is to have vibration isolation supports for a distance of one hundred pipe diameters or three supports away frorn the equipment, whichever is greater. Standard pipe hangers/supports as specified in this section are required beyond the 100 pipe diameter/3 support distance. Piping flexible connections and vibration isolation supports are required for piping connected to coils that are in a fan assembly where the entire assembly is mounted on vibration supports; the vibration isolation supports are required for a distance of one hundred pipe diameters or three supports away from the equipment, whichever is greater. Piping flexible connection and vibration isolation supports are not required when the fan section is separately and independently isolated by means of vibration supports and duct flexible connections. Standard pipe hangers/supports as specified in this section are required when there are no vibration isolation devices in the piping and beyond the 100 pipe diarneter/3 support distance. Piping supported by laying on the bottom chord of joists or trusses will not be accepted. Fasteners depending on soft lead for holding power or requiring powder actuation will not be accepted. Allow sufficient space between adjacent pipes and ducts for insulation, valve operation, routine maintenance, etc. PART2-PRODUCTS PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT MANUFACTURERS B -Line, Fee and Mason, Grinnell, Kindorf, Michigan Hanger, Unistrut, or approved equal. Grinnell figure numbers are listed below; equivalent material by other manufacturers is acceptable. STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS Provide all supporting steel required for the installation of mechanical equipment and materials, whether or not it is specifically indicated or sized, including angles, channels, beams, etc. to suspend or floor support tanks and equipment. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Until this section gets revised, the consultant will have to insert roller hangers for use on hot piping (LPS, HPS and any other service with a fluid temperature over 220°F) and insulation protection shields for use between a hanger and insulation. HANGERS FOR STEEL PIPE SIZES 112" THROUGH 2": Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis, black finish. Grinnell figure 65 or 260. HANGERS FOR STEEL PIPE SIZES 2-1/2" AND OVER: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis, black finish; or adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. Grinnell figure 260. Use Grinnell figure 181 for steam lines. MULTIPLE OR TRAPEZE HANGERS: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods if calculations are submitted. WALL SUPPORT: Welded steel bracket with hanger. B -Line 3068 Series, Grinnell 194 Series. Perforated epoxy painted finish, 16-12 gauge min., steel channels securely anchored to wall structure with - " interlocking, split type, bolt secured, galvanized pipe/tubing clamps. B -Line type S channel with B-2000 series clamps, Grinnell type PS200 H with PS 1200 clamps. When copper piping is being supported, provide flexible elastomeric/thermoplastic isolation cushion material to completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp, equal to B -Line 81999 Vibra Cushion or provide manufacturers clamp and cushion assemblies, B -Line BVT series, Grinnell PS 1400 series. 5130/12 23 05 29 - 2 of 5 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility VERTICAL RISER SUPPORT: Carbon steel riser clamp, copper plated when used with copper pipe. Grinnell figure 261 for steel pipe, figure CTI 21 for copper pipe. FLOOR SUPPORT FOR PIPE SIZES THROUGH 4 Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, Iocknut nipple, floor flange. and concrete pier or steel support. FLOOR SUPPORT FOR PIPE SIZES 5' AND OVER: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. COPPER PIPE SUPPORT: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated or polyvinylchloride coated. INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS: Galvanized carbon steel of not less than 18 gauge for use on insulated pipe 2-1/2 inch and larger. Minimum shield length is 12 inches. Equal to Grinnell figure 167. STEEL HANGER RODS: Threaded both ends. threaded one end, or continuous threaded, black finish. Size rods for individual hangers and trapeze support as indicated in the following schedule. Total weight of equipment, including valves, fittings, pipe, pipe content, and insulation, are not to exceed the limits indicated. Maximum Load Lbs. 650°F Maximum Tem Rod Diameter inches 610 318 1130 1/2 1810 518 2710 314 3770 718 4960 1 f 8000 1-114 Provide rods complete with adjusting and lock nuts. BEAM CLAMPS MSS SP -69 Type 23 malleable black iron clamp for attachment to beam flange to 0.62 inches thick for single threaded rods of 3/8. 1/2, and 5/8 inch diameter. for use with pipe sizes 4 inch and less. Furnish with a hardened steel cup point set screw. Grinnell figure 86. MSS SP -69 Type 28 or Type 29 forged steel jaw type clamp with a tie rod to lock clamp in place, suitable for rod sizes to 1-1/2 inch diameter but limited in application to pipe sizes 8 inch and less without prior approval. Grinnell figure 228. CONCRETE INSERTS MSS SP -69 Type 18 wedge type or universal concrete inserts Wedge type to be constructed of a black carbon steel body with a removable malleable iron nut that accepts threaded rod to 7/8 inch diameter. Wedge design to allow the insert to be held by concrete in compression to maximize the load carrying capacity. Universal type to be constructed of black malleable iron body with a removable malleable iron nut that accepts threaded rod to 718 inch diameter. Use drilled steel shell with plug type inserts when the inserts are placed after the concretelispoured. CONTINUOUS CONCRETE INSERT CHANNELS Steel inserts with an industry standard pre -galvanized finish, nominally 1-5/8 inch wide by 1'-3%8 inch deep by length to suit the application, designed to be nailed to concrete forms and provide a linear slot for attaching other support devices. Installed channels to provide a load rating of 2000 pounds per foot in Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility concrete. Manufacturer's standard brackets, inserts, and accessories designed to be used with the channel inserts may be used. Select insert length to accommodate all pipe, duct, and conduit in the area. ANCHORS Use welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to secure piping to the structure. EQUIPMENT CURBS Manufacturers: Custom Curb, Pate, Roof Products and Systems, ThyCurb, Vent Products. Constructed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel reinforced so it is structurally capable of supporting the intended load with no penetrations through the curb flashing, inside and outside corner sections that are mitered and continuously welded, filled with 3 pound density insulation, integral deck mounting flange, nominal two inch wood nailer, galvanized steel counter flashing. Do not use built-in metal base flashings or cants. Use 18 inch high equipment curbs where the curb completely surrounds the perimeter of the equipment and there is no roof exposed to the weather. EQUIPMENT STANDS Use contractor fabricated stand consisting of structural steel members supported by pipe supports; protect the pipe through roof as specified below under Pipe Penetration Through Roof. All steel exposed to the weather to be galvanized or stainless. PIPE PENETRATION THROUGH ROOF Manufacturers: Custom Curb, Pate, Roof Products and Systems, ThyCurb, Vent Products. Curb assembly constructed of not less than 18 gauge galvanized steel reinforced so it is structurally capable of supporting the intended load, inside and outside corner sections that are mitered and continuously welded, filled with 3 pound density insulation, integral deck mounting flange, nominal two inch wood nailer, laminated acrylic clad thermoplastic cover with graduated step boots to accommodate various size pipes, fastening screws for cover, and stainless steel clamps for securing boots around the pipe. Do not use built-in metal base flashings or cants. Height of assembly to be as follows: Len th of Su ort Railinches Min. Curb ei ht Above Deck to 24 14 inches 25-36 18 37-48 24 49-60 30 61 and over 48 PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install supports to provide for free expansion of the piping and duct system. Support all piping from the structure using concrete inserts, beam clamps, ceiling plates, wall brackets, or floor stands. Fasten ceiling plates and wall brackets securely to the structure and test to demonstrate the adequacy of the fastening. Coordinate hanger and support installation to properly group piping of all trades. Where piping can be conveniently grouped to allow the use of trapeze type supports, use standard structural shapes or continuous insert channels for the supporting steel. Where continuous insert channels are used, pipe supporting devices made specifically for use with the channels may be substituted for the specified supporting devices provided that similar types are used and all data is" submitted for prior approval. Perform all welding in accordance with standards of the American Welding Society. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint or other foreign matter and properly align before welding. Use wire_ISrush on welds after welding. Welds shall show uniform section, smoothness of weld metal and freedom' -from porosity [i and clinkers. Where necessary to achieve smooth connections, joints shall be dressed s7siboth. HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING - _ 9 5/30/12 23 05 29 - 4 of 5 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow, valve. strainer, or similar piping specialty item. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation. provide multiple or trapeze hangers. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Adjust hangers to obtain the slope specified in the piping section of this specification. Space hangers for pipe as follows: Pipe Material I Pipe Size Max Horiz. Spacing Max Vert. S acin Steel I''throu h1-114 6'-6' Steel 1-12''throu h6" 10-0" 15'-0' Copperr %" through '/<' S'-0" 10'-0` Copper 1" 111! oug h 1-114° 6'-0" 10-0` Copper 1-112° t'nrou h 2-112' 8'-0° 10-0" Co er 3" 10'-0' 10'-0" Co er 4" and above 12'-0" 10-0, VERTICAL RISER CLAMPS Support vertical piping with clamps secured to the piping and resting on the building structure or secured to the building structure below at each floor. Piping 5" and above, of lengths exceeding 30 feet, shall be additionally supported on base elbows secured to the building structure, with flexible supporting hangers provided at top of riser to allow for pipe expansion. CONCRETE INSERTS AND CONTINUOUS INSERT CHANNELS Select size based on the manufacturer's stated load capacity and weight of material that will be supported. Locate continuous insert channels on 8'-0" maximum centers and 2'-0" from corners. Furnish inserts to the General Contractor far placement in concrete formwork. Use insets for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inch size. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling. provide inserts that are flush with the slab surface. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with the slab. ANCHORS Install where indicated on the drawings and details. Where not specifically indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. EQUIPMENT CURBS Secure bottom of support flat on roof deck. Secure equipment to curb in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions, Flashing and counter flashing by the General Contractor. PIPE PENETRATION THROUGH ROOF Install at points where pipes penetrate roof. Install as shown on the drawings. as detailed and according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. Flashing and counter flashing by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Iowa City Public Works Warn Storage Facility SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART1-GENERAL SCOPE This section includes all air and water testing, adjusting and balancing for the entire project. This work will be performed by a Contractor independent from the mechanical Contractor. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Reference Reference Standards Description Related Work Pre -Balance Conference Submittals PART2-PRODUCTS Instrumentation PART 3 - EXECUTION Preliminary Procedures Performing Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Deficiencies REFERENCE Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and General Requirements in Division 1 govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS AABC National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems, Fifth Edition, 1989. ASHRAE ASHRAE Handbook, 1987 HVAC Systems and Applications, Chapter 57, Testing Adjusting and Balancing. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems, Fifth Edition, 1991. DESCRIPTION Provide an independent test and balance agency to perform all testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems required for this project. Work related to the testing, adjusting, and balancing that must be performed by the installing mechanical contractor is specified in other section of these specifications. Provide total mechanical systems testing, adjusting and balancing. Requirements include the balance of air and water distribution, adjustment of new and existing systems to provide design quantities indicated on the drawings, electrical measurement and verification of performance of all equipment, all in accordance with standards published by AABC or NEBB. Test, adjust and balance all air and hydronic systems so that each room, piece of equipment or terminal device is using the quantities indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. Accomplish testing, adjusting and balancing work in a timely manner that allows partial occupancy of major buildings, occupancy of one building when the project involves many buildings, and completion of the entire project in the time stated in the Instruction to Bidders and in accordance with the completion schedule established for this project. The test and balance agency is encouraged to make periodic site visits to make sure that provisions are being made to accomplish the specified testing, adjusting and balancing work. If problems are found, handle as specified in Part 3 under Deficiencies. RELATED WORK Division 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning (HVAC) for hvac shop drawings to be given to the test and balance agency and for coordination between the Division 23 00 00 contPat:tor and -the firm - performing the work in this section. -- 5/30/2012 '23 05 83 - 1 of 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancirt for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Division 23 00 00 drawings and specifications which define the scope of the systems to be balanced. Refer to construction bulletins for proposed changes and to change orders for changes that have been accepted. Division 26 00 00 - Electrical drawings and specifications which define the scope of the electrical systems that serve the mechanical equipment. PRE -BALANCE CONFERENCE Prior to beginning testing., adjusting and balancing, schedule and conduct a conference with the Architect/Engineer. and the mechanical system and temperature control system installing Contractors. The objective is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting and balancing procedures and scheduling procedures with the above mentioned parties. Indicate work required to be completed prior to testing, adjusting and balancing and identify the party responsible for completion of that work. SUBMITTALS See also Related Work in this section. Submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the NEBB or AABC Certified Test and Balance Supervisor. The reports to be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards, are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed and are operating, and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured to establish normal operating values of the systems. Submission: Submit four (4) complete sets of reports. If information is incomplete or further testing, adjusting and balancing is deemed necessary, resubmit four (4) final complete sets. Distribution of submittals will be: Architect/Engineer Owner Two (2) copies Two (2) copies. Format: Bind report forms in three-ring binders or portfolio binders. Label edge or front with label Identifying project name, project number and descriptive title of contents. Divide the contents of the report into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs • General Information • Summary • Air Systems Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data: General Information: Inside cover sheet identifying Test and Balance Agency, Contractor, Architect, Engineer. Project Name and Project Number. Include addresses, contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Supervisor. Summary: Provide summary sheet describing mechanical system deficiencies. Describe objectionable noise or drafts found during testing. adjusting and balancing. Provide recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory performances and indicate whether modifications required are within the scope of the contract, are design related or installation related. List instrumentation used during testing. adjusting and balancing procedures. The remainder of the report to contain the appropriate standard NEBB or AABC forms for each respective item and system. Fill out forms completely. Where information cannot be obtained or is not applicable indicate same. PART 2 -PRODUCTS INSTRUMENTATION Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements. Application of instrumentsand accuracy of instruments and measurements to be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB or AAQC Standards and instrument manufacturer's specifications. niK/2012 23 05 93 - 2 of 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument to be available for examination by Architect/Engineer upon request. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments to be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB or AABC Standards PART 3 - EXECUTION PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES Obtain preconstruction meeting report, applicable construction bulletins, applicable change orders and approved shop drawings of equipment, outlets/inlets and temperature controls. Check filters for cleanliness, dampers and valves for correct positioning, equipment for proper rotation and belt tension, temperature controls for completion of installation, hydronic systems for proper charge and purging of air, and refrigerant coils charged. Identify deficiencies preventing completion of testing, adjusting and balancing procedures. Do not proceed until systems are fully operational with all components necessary for complete testing, adjusting and balancing. Installing Contractors are required to provide personnel to check and verify system completion, readiness for balancing and assist Balancing Agency in providing specified system performance. PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Perform testing, adjusting and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards except as may be modified below. Unless specifically instructed in writing, all work in this specification section is to be performed during the normal workday. Cut insulation, ductwork and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for adequate performance of procedures. Patch using materials identical to those removed, maintaining vapor barrier integrity and pressure rating of systems. In air systems employing filters, blank off sufficient filter area to simulate a pressure drop that is midway between that of a clean filter and that of a dirty filter. Measure and record system measurements at the fan and/or pump to determine total flow. Adjust equipment as required to yield specified total flow at terminals. Proceed taking measurements in mains and branches as required for final terminal balancing. Perform terminal balancing to specified flows balancing branch dampers, deflectors, extractors and valves prior to adjustment of terminals. Measure and record static air pressure conditions across fans, coils and filters. Indicate in report if cooling coil measurements were made on a wet or dry coil and if filter measurements were made on a clean or dirty filter. Spot check static air pressure conditions directly ahead of terminal units. Adjust outside air, return air and relief air dampers for design conditions at both the minimum and maximum settings and record both sets of data. Balance modulating dampers at extreme conditions and record both sets of data. Balance variable air volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and minimum flow rate, full heating; record all data. Adjust register, grille and diffuser vanes and accessories to achieve proper air distribution patterns and uniform space temperatures free from objectionable noise and drafts within the capabilities of the installed system. Provide fan and motor drive sheave adjustments necessary to obtain design performance. Include in scope of services drive changes specifically noted on drawings, if any. If work of this section indicates that any drive or motor is inadequate for the application, advise the owner's project representative by giving the representative properly sized motor/drive information (in accordance with manufacturers original service factor and installed motor horsepower requirements); make sure that any change will keep the duct/piping system within its design limitations with respect speed of the device and pressure classification of the distribution system. Time and material for motor/drive changes will be considered a reimbursable expense and will require an itemized cost breakdown of all time and drive changes submitted to owner's project representative; prior authorization is needed before this work is started. 5/30/2012 — 23 05 93 - 3 of 4.. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC r,� Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Areas or rooms designed to maintain positive, negative or balanced air pressures with respect to adjacent spaces, as indicated by the design air quantities, require special attention. Adjust fan drives, distribution dampers, terminals and controls to maintain indicated pressure relationship. Final air system measurements to be within the following range of specified cfm: Fans -5% to +10% Supply grilles, registers, diffusers -5% to +10% Return/exhaust grilles, registers -5% to -10% Room pressurization air -5% to +5% Final water system measurements must be within the following range of specified gpm: Heating flow rates 0% to -10% Cooling flow rates -5% to +5% Contact the temperature control Contractor for assistance in operation and adjustment of controls during testing, adjusting and balancing procedures. Cycle controls and verify proper operation and setpoints. Include in report description of temperature control operation and any deficiencies found. Permanently mark equipment settings, including damper and valve positions, control settings, and similar devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors and electrical boxes, and restoring temperature controls to normal operating settings. DEFICIENCIES Division 23 00 00 contractor to correct any installation deficiencies found by the test and balance agency that were specified and/or shown on the Contract Documents to be performed as part of that division of work. Test and balance agency will notify the Architect/Engineer of these items and instructions will be issued to the Division 23 00 00 contractor for correction of the deficient work. All corrective work to be done at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 23 05 93 - 4 of 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART1-GENERAL SCOPE This sections includes insulation specifications for heating, ventilating and air conditioning piping, ductwork and equipment. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Standards Quality Assurance Description Definitions Shop Drawings PART 2 -PRODUCTS Materials Insulation & Jackets Accessories PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Piping, Valve and Fitting Insulation Duct Insulation Equipment Insulation RELATED WORK Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC Section 23 11 00 - Facility Fuel Piping Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM C165 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulations ASTM C177 Heat Flux and Thermal Transmission Properties ASTM C195 Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement ASTM C240 Cellular Glass Insulation Block ASTM C302 Density of Preformed Pipe Insulation ASTM C303 Density of Preformed Block Insulation ASTM C449 Mineral Fiber Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulation Cement ASTM C518 Heat Flux and Thermal Transmission Properties ASTM C533 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation ASTM C534 Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation ASTM C552 Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation ASTM C553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation ASTM 0578 Preformed, Block Type Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation ASTM C591 Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyan u rate Thermal Insulation ASTM C610 Expanded Perlite Block and Thermal Pipe Insulation ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation ASTM C921 Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation ASTM C1136 Flexible Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials MICA National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards NFPA 225 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions 5/30/2012 23 07 00 - 1 of 3 HVAC Insulation Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Label all insulating products delivered to the construction site with the manufacturer's name and description of materials. DESCRIPTION Furnish and install all insulating materials and accessories as specified or as required for a complete installation. The following types of insulation are specified in this section: • Pipe Insulation • Duct Insulation • Equipment Insulation Install all insulation in accordance with the latest edition of MICA (Midwest Insulation Contractors Association) Standard and manufacturer's installation instructions. Exceptions to these standards will only be accepted where specifically modified in these specifications, or where prior written approval has been obtained from the A/E. DEFINITIONS Concealed: shafts, furred spaces, space above finished ceilings, utility tunnels and crawl spaces. All other areas, including walk-through tunnels, shall be considered as exposed. SHOP DRAWINGS Refer to division 1, General Conditions. Submittals. Submit a schedule of all insulating materials to be used on the project, including adhesives, fastening methods, fitting materials along with material safety data sheets and intended use of each material. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating density; thermal characteristics, jacket type, and manufacturer's installation instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS MATERIALS Materials or accessories containing asbestos will not be accepted. Use composite insulation systems (insulation, jackets, sealants. mastics, and adhesives) that have a flame spread rating of 25 cr less and smoke developed rating of 50 or lesswith the following exceptions. Pipe insulation which is not located in an air plenum may have a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 150. INSULATION AND JACKETS Manufacturers. Anmacell, Certainteed, Manson. Childers, Dow, Extol, Fibrex, Halstead, H.B Fuller, Imcoa. Johns Manville, iOwens-Corning, Partek, Pittsburgh Corning, Rubatex or approved equal. Insulating materials shall be fire retardant moisture and mildew resistant and vermin proof. Insulation shall be suitable to receive jackets, adhesives and coatings as indicated. RIGID FIBERGLASS INSULATION. Minimum nominal density of 3 lbs. per cu. ft., and thermal conductivity of not more than 0.23 at 75 degrees F. minimum compressive strength of 25 PSF at 10% deformation. rated for service to 450 degrees F. Piping: White kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier all service jacket, factory applied to insulation with a self- sealing pressure sensitive adhesive lap, maximum permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units. Ductwork: Foil -scrim -kraft vapor barrierjacket, factory applied to insulation, maximum permeance of .02 perms. - SEMI-RIGID FIBERGLASS INSULATION _ y Minimum nominal density of 3 lbs. per cu. ft., thermal conductivity of not more than 0.28_at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 125 PSF at 10% deformation, rated for service to 456 degrees F. Insulation fibers perpendicular to jacket and scored for wrapping cylindrical surfaces. - i White kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier all service jacket factory applied to insulation with a maximum permeance of .02 perms and minimum beach puncture resistance of 50 units , , HVAC Insulation Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility ACCESSORIES All products shall be compatible with surfaces and materials on which they are applied, and be suitable for use at operating temperatures of the systems to which they are applied. Adhesives, sealants, and protective finishes shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications specified. Insulating cement to be ANSI/ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool. Vapor barrier coatings and tapes to have maximum applied water vapor permeance of .05 perms. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install insulation; jackets and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions and under ambient temperatures and conditions recommended by manufacturer. Surfaces to be insulated must be clean and dry. Do not insulate systems or equipment which are specified to be pressure tested or inspected. until testing, inspection and any necessary repairs have been successfully completed. Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces. Poorly fitted joints or use of filler in voids will not be accepted. Provide neatly beveled and coated terminations at all nameplates, uninsulated fittings, or at other locations where insulation terminates. Install fabric reinforcing without wrinkles. Overlap seams a minimum of 2 inches. Use full length material (as delivered from manufacturer) wherever possible. Scrap piecing of insulation or pieces cut undersize and stretched to fit will not be accepted. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and openings except where fire rated penetration materials require interruption of insulation. Vapor barriers shall be maintained continuous through all penetrations. Provide a complete vapor barrier for insulation on the following systems: • Insulated Duct DUCT INSULATION GENERAL- Secure ENERALSecure flexible duct insulation on sides and bottom of ductwork over 24" wide and all rigid duct insulation with weld pins or speed clips. Space fasteners 18" on center or less as required to prevent sagging for flexible duct insulation. Space fasteners not less than 3" from edge or corner and 12" on center or less for rigid duct insulation. Install weld pins without damage to the interior galvanized surface of the duct. Clip pins back to washer and cover penetrations with tape of same material as jacket. Firmly butt seams and joints and cover with 4" tape of same material as jacket. Seal tape with plastic applicator and secure with staples. All joints, seams, edges and penetrations to be fully vapor sealed. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing insulation orjacket material. External supply duct insulation is not required where ductwork contains continuous 1" acoustical liner. Provide 4" overlap of external insulation over ends of acoustically lined sections. DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE: Provide duct insulation on new and existing remodeled ductwork as scheduled on the plans. 5/30/2012 23 07 OQ - 3 of 3 HVACilrsulation Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 09 14 ELECTRIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This sections includes pneumatic control system specifications for all HVAC work as well as related pneumatic control for systems found in other specification sections. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Point List Related Work Quality Assurance Reference Standards System Description Submittals Design Criteria Operating and Maintenance Manuals Training Material Delivery and Storage PART 2 -PRODUCTS Manufacturers Control Dampers Electric Thermostats Timeclocks CO/NO2 Detectors Power Supplies PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Control and Smoke Dampers Control System Instrumentation Room Thermostats and Temperature Sensors RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting. and Balancing for HVAC - Coordination Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operation Section 23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories - for control damper installation Division 23 - HVAC - Equipment provided to be controlled or monitored Division 26 - Electrical - Installation requirements & Equipment provided to be controlled or monitored Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security QUALITY ASSURANCE Installing contractor must be a manufacturer's branch office or an authorized representative of the control equipment manufacturer that provides engineering and commissioning of the manufacturers control equipment. submit written confirmation of such authorization from the manufacturer. Indicate in letter of authorization that installing contractor has successfully completed all necessary training required for engineering. installation, and commissioning of equipment and systems to be provided for the project; and that such authorization has been in effect for a period of not less than three years. REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ANSI/ASTM B32 Specification for Solder Metal ASTM B75 Seamless Copper Tube ASTM D1693 Environmental Stress -Cracking of Ethylene Plastics ASTM D 635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position - UL 94 Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliance's AMCA 500-D Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers for Rating SYSTEM DESCRIPTION System is to be electric/electronic 5130(2012 23 09 _14- 1 of 6 Pneumatic and Electric Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SUBMITTALS Include the following information: Manufacturer's data sheets indicating model number, pressure/temperature ratings, capacity, methods and materials of construction, installation instructions, and recommended maintenance. General catalog sheets showing a series of the same device is not acceptable unless the specific model is clearly marked. Schematic flow diagrams of systems showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and other control devices. Label each device with setting or adjustable range of control. Indicate all wiring, clearly, differentiating between factory and field installed wiring. Wiring should be shown in schematics that detail contact states, relay references, etc. Diagrammatic representations of devices alone are not acceptable. Schedule of control dampers indicating size, leakage rating, arrangement, pressure drop at design airflow, and number and size of operators required. A complete description of each control sequence for equipment that is not controlled by direct digital controls. Prior to request for final payment, submit record documents which accurately record actual location of control components including panels, thermostats, wiring, and sensors. Incorporate changes required during installation and start-up. DESIGN CRITERIA Size all control apparatus to properly supply and/or operate and control the apparatus served. Provide control devices subject to corrosive environments with corrosion protection or construct them so they are suitable for use in such an environment. Provide devices exposed to outside ambient conditions with weather protection or construct them so they are suitable for outdoor installation. Use only UL labeled products that comply with NEMA Standards. Electrical components and installation to meet all requirements of the electrical sections (Division 26) of project specifications. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Furnish three (3) bound operating and maintenance manuals for review and approval prior to substantial completion, performance testing, and training. Manuals to include the following: • Operation and maintenance instructions for the equipment and systems provided, including the following items: • Recommendations for frequency of service and preventative maintenance. • List indicating types and grades of oil and/or grease, packing materials, normal and abnormal tolerances for devices, and method of equipment adjustment. • A description of recommended replacement parts and materials which the owner should stock. • A summary of equipment vendors, or location where replacement parts can be purchased. • Manufacturer's literature indicating features, materials of construction, and operating limits of installed equipment. (Brochures giving brief descriptions of multiple pieces of control apparatus are not acceptable.) • A complete set of record control drawings. • Name, address, and telephone number of the person or office to contact for`seplice during the warranty period. • Name, address, and telephone number of the person or service organizatio636 be contacted ..� for service after the warranty period. 2309714-2of6 Pneumatic and Electric Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility TRAINING Provide a minimum of 4 hours of training to the owner, concerning the proper operation and maintenance of all control systems and all sensing. monitoring, and control equipment. Training sessions shall be conducted during normal business hours after system start-up and acceptance by A/E. Submit operating and maintenance manuals to Owner a minimum of five (5) working days prior to training session. Use these manuals as the basis for instruction at all training sessions. MATERIAL DELIVERY AND STORAGE Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. This contractor is responsible for storage of equipment and materials inside and protected from the weather. PART 2 -PRODUCTS CONTROL DAMPERS Manufacturers: Greenheck, or Ruskin. Provide control dampers shown on the plans and as required to perform the specified functions. Dampers shall be rated for velocities that will be encountered at maximum system design and rated for pressure equal or greater than the ductwork pressure class as specified in Section 23 31 00 of the ductwork where the damper is installed. Use only factory fabricated dampers with mechanically captured replaceable resilient blade seals. stainless steel jamb seals and with entire assembly suitable for the maximum temperature and air velocities encountered in the system. All dampers in aluminum ductwork shall be constructed of stainless steel or aluminum. Dampers in galvanized ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel and/or aluminum. All dampers, unless otherwise specified, to be rated at a minimum of 180° F working ternperature. Leakage testing shall be certified to be based on latest edition of AMCA Standard 500-D and all dampers, unless otherwise specified, shall have leakage ratings as follows: Damper Class DifferentialPressure Leakage Class IA 1, w.g. s3 CFM/ft z Class 1 4" w.g. <_8 CFM/ft2 Class 1 8" w.g. <_11 CFMIft2 Class 1 12' w.g. -14 CFM/ft' Leakage rate dampers for differential pressures that they will encounter at maximum system design pressures. Steel framed dampers. Nailer models 2010 & 2020: Greenheck models VCD-33 & VCD-42; Johnson Controls model V-1330; Ruskin Models CD60 & CD40: other approved equal. Aluminum frame and blade dampers, Nailor models 2010EAF & 202EAF, Greenheck model VCD-43; Ruskin model CD50; Arrow model AFD -20; other approved equal. Dampers used for isolation on the discharge of centrifugal fans shall have damper blades perpendicular to the fan shaft to minimize system effect. Dampers mounted with blades vertically shall be designed for vertical blade orientation. Maximum damper width is 48 inches; where required width exceeds 48 inches, use multiple damper sections. Inside frame free area shall be a minimum of 90% of total inside duct area. Multiple width damper sections shall utilize jack shaft linkages unless noted below. Sections,over 144 inches wide shall be actuated from two locations on the jack shaft. Double width damper 8ections:for two" position operation may be actuated without jack shafts if each damper section is actuated separately. Dampers that have multiple width and multiple vertical sections shall have a jackshaft for.each vertically stacked set of dampers and be provided with crossover linkages between jack shafts to transfer uneven loading. Jack shafts shall be extended outside of the ductwork for external actuator mounting. Provide bearings on the point of exit for support of damper shafts to prevent wear on the shaft and the ductwork. If locating actuators out of the air stream is impossible, obtain mounting location approval from the designer unless 5/30/2012 23 09 14 - 3 of 6 Pneumatic and Electric Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility the contract documents indicate in air stream mounting is acceptable. In no cases shall damper actuators for fume exhaust systems be located in the air stream or require entering the air stream to service an actuator. Provide weatherproof stainless steel enclosures or NEMA 4 watertight actuator housing to prevent actuator failure or freeze-up when mounting in locations exposed to harsh environments or outdoor locations. Size operators for smooth and positive operation of devices served, and with sufficient torque capacity to provide tight shutoff against system temperatures and pressure encountered. For pneumatic actuation, use rolling diaphragm, piston type operators with adjustable stops. For electric modulating actuation, use fully proportional actuators with 0-10VDC inputs and zero and span adjustments. For two -position electric actuation use 24 VAC for DDC controlled actuators, 120 VAC actuators may be used for hardwire interlocking. Actuator stroke times shall match the requirements of the DDC controllers provided under 23 09 24 or 23 09 23 and/or the specific system requirements for proper operation. All electric actuators will be provided with overload protection to prevent motor from damage when stall condition is encountered. Equip operators with spring return for applications involving fire, freeze protection, moisture protection or specified normally open/closed operation. Provide damper end switches with form "C' contacts where control sequences require damper position indication. All power required for electric actuation shall be provided by this contractor if it is not able to be directly provided from the DDC controller. Provide operators with linkages and brackets for mounting on device served. ELECTRIC THERMOSTATS LOW VOLTAGE THERMOSTATS: Electronic type with automatic night setback, suitable for heating or heating and cooling as required. Provide setback schedule adjustment through keypad entry on front of unit. Standalone HW radiation use Honeywell TB6980/TB7980 thermostat or approved alternate. LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTATS: Use single or two pole as required; with minimum rating equal to electrical load of device being controlled. Provide integral manual On/Off/Auto selector switch, maximum dead band of 2°F, concealed temperature adjustment, and locking cover. CO/NO2 DETECTORS CO/NO2 detection system shall be manufactured by Vulcain, Brasch, Critical Environments, Conspec, or toxalert. Vulcain 301M stand alone CO detector with remote NO2 sensor and 2 alarm modes. • Low alarm shall engage Intake louver Damper and garage exhaust fan • High alarm shall continue energizing make up air unit and exhaust fan and shall energize an audible alarm in garage. CO/NO2 sensors shall be installed and calibrated by a factory certified installer. The factory certified installer shall conduct the owner training and provide maintenance personal with contact information for future system calibrations. POWER SUPPLIES Provide all required power supplies for transducers, sensors, transmitters and relays. Alt low voltage transformers shall have a resettable secondary circuit breaker. PART 3 - EXECUTION - c INSTALLATION Install system with trained mechanics and electricians employed by the control equipment: manufacturer or: an authorized representative of the manufacturer. Where installing contractor is an authorized representative of the control manufacturer, such authorization shall have been in effect:for a period of no less than three years. 230914-4of6 Pneumatic and Electric Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Install all control equipment, accessories. wiring, and piping in a neat and workmanlike manner. All control devices must be installed in accessible locations. This contractor shall verify that all control devices furnished under this Section are functional and operating the mechanical equipment as specified in Section 23 09 93. Label all control devices with the exception of dampers. valves, and terminal unit devices with permanent printed labels that correspond to control drawings. Temperature control junction and pullboxes shall be identified utilizing spray painted green covers. Other electrical sytem identification shall follow the 26 05 53 specification. All control devices and electrical boxes mounted on insulated ductwork shall be mounted over the insulation. Provide mounting stand-offs where necessary for adequate support. Cutting and removal of insulation to mount devices directly on ductwork is not acceptable. This contractor shall coordinate with the insulation contractor to provide for continuous insulation of ductwork. Mounting of electrical or electronic devices shall be protected from weather if the building is not completely enclosed. This Contractor shall be solely responsible for replacing any equipment that is damaged by water that infiltrates the building if equipment is installed prior to the building being enclosed. Provide all electrical relays and wiring, line and low voltage, for control systems, devices and components. Install all high voltage and low voltage wiring (includes low voltage cable) In metal conduit, Electrical Non- metallic Tubing (ENT), or Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), as scheduled below and hereafter referred to generically as conduit. See Wire and Air Piping Conduit Installation Schedule below for specific conduit or tubing to be used. All conduit must be installed in accordance with electrical sections (Division 26) of this specification and the National Electrical code. Conduit shall be a minimum of 1/2 " for low voltage control provided the pipe fill does not exceed 40%. Minimum low voltage wiring gauge to be 18 AWG for outputs and 20 AWG for inputs. All low voltage wiring to be stranded. All wiring in mechanical rooms, above inaccessible hard ceilings, exterior locations. and in any exposed areas. and in all other locations should be in conduit. Wire for wall sensors must be run in conduit Where wiring is installed free-air, installation shall consider the following: • Wiring shall run at right angles and be kept clear of other trades work. • Wiring shall be supported utilizing "J" or "Bridal -type" steel mounting rings anchored to ceiling concrete, piping supports. walls above ceiling or structural steel beams. Mounting rings shall be of open design (not a closed loop) to allow additional wire to be strung without being threaded through the ring. For mounting rings that do not completely surround the wire.. attach the wire to the mounting ring with a strap. • Supports shall be spaced at a maximum 4 -foot interval unless limited by building construction. If wiring "sag" at mid -span exceeds 6 -inches; another support shall be used. • Wiring shall never be laid directly on the ceiling grid or attached in any manner to the ceiling grid wires. • Wall penetrations shall be sleeved. Wiring shall not be attached to existing cabling, existing tubing, plumbing or steam piping, ductwork, ceiling supports or electrical or communications conduit. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments of controls. _ CONTROL AND SMOKE DAMPERS All control dampers furnished by the control manufacturer are to be installed by the MechanicaPCortractor under the coordinating control and supervision of the Control Contractor in locations shown on.plans ori J where required to provide specified sequence of control. 5130/2012 23 09 14 - 5 of 6 Pneumatic and Electric Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Coordinate installation with the sheet metal installer to obtain smooth duct transitions where damper size is different than duct size. Blank off plates will not be accepted. Each operator shall serve a maximum damper area of 36 square feet. Where larger dampers are used, provide multiple operators. ROOM THERMOSTATS AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS Check and verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate room thermostats and sensors 48 inches above floor. Align with light switches and humidistats. For drywall installations, thermostat mounting shall use a back -box attached to a wall stud, drywall anchors are not acceptable. Any room thermostats or sensors mounted on an exterior wall shall be mounted on a thermally insulated sub -base. Subbase to provide a minimum of one half inch of insulation. Where thermostats or sensors are mounted on exterior walls or in any location where air transfer will affect the measured temperature or humidity seal the conduit and any other opening that will effect the measurement. Provide guards on thermostats in entrance hallways, other public areas, or in locations where thermostat is subject to physical damage. Provide temperature sensors in resident room for room setpoint setting by the building automation system END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 23 09 14 - 6 of 6 Pneumatic and Electric Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART1-GENERAL SCOPE This section includes control sequences for HVAC equipment as well as equipment furnished by others that may need monitoring or control. Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Related Work Description of Work Submittals Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 — EXECUTION CO/NO2 Detection Syste. RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section. Section 23 05 93 - Testing; Adjusting; and Balancing for HVAC - Coordination Division 23 - HVAC - Equipment provided to be controlled or monitored Division 26 - Electrical - Equipment provided to be controlled or monitored Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security REFERENCE Section 23 09 14 work includes furnishing and installing all field devices. equipment, and all related field wiring, interlocking control wiring between equipment, pneumatic tubing, sensor mounting: etc., that is covered in that section. Motorized control dampers and actuators. thermowells (temperature sensing wells). automatic control valves and their actuators are also covered in Section 23 09 14. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Control sequences are hereby defined as the manner and method by which automatic controls function. Requirements for each type of operation are specified in this section. Operation equipment, devices and system components required for automatic control systems are specified in other Division 23 control sections of these specifications. All temperature. humidity, and pressure sensing, and all other control signal transportation for the control sequences shall be furnished under Section 23 09 14. All pneumatic, electronic, and electric input/output signals shall be extended under Section 23 09 14, with adequate lead length for termination within the appropriate control panel being provided under Section 23 09 23. Sequences for equipment controlled by pneumatic or electric self-contained controls are accomplished by hardware provided under Section 23 09 14. 5/30/2012 23 U9 W - I of 2 Sequence of Operation for HVAC.,Controls Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SUBMITTALS Refer to Division 1, General Conditions, Submittals, Section 23 05 00 and Sections, and 23 09 14 for descriptions of what should be included in the submittals. Shop drawings shall be provided by contractor(s) providing equipment under 23 09 14. The contractor providing the 23 09 14 equipment shall provide a complete narrative of the sequence of operation for equipment that is controlled directly from that equipment (without control logic through the DDC system). The narrative of the sequence of operation shall not be a verbatim copy of the sequences contained herein, but shall reflect the actual operation as applied by the contractor. DESIGN CRITERIA Reference Section 23 09 14. PART2-PRODUCTS Not applicable to this Section — reference Sections 23 09 14 for product descriptions. PART 3 - EXECUTION CONTROL SEQUENCES EXHAUST FANS All interlocking, operation, and/or monitoring of exhaust fans shall be performed by electronic controls. Exhaust fan (EF -1) Vehicle garage emergency exhaust fan 1s` speed shall run 24/7. On a call for alarm the CO/NO2 system shall energize the 2°d speed of the exhaust fan and open the OA Damper. CO DETECTION SYSTEMS CO/NO2 detection system shall have 3 detections levels 1. Normal operating condition 2. Alarm condition 1 shall energize garage exhaust fans interlocked with the system 3. Alarm condition 2 shall continue exhausting the garage and an audible alarm. FUEL FIRED UNIT HEATER Suspended gas fired (UH -1, UH -2) unit heaters shall be controlled by a thermostat located on the plans. Each thermostat shall be programmed for occupied setpoint of 60F and a unoccupied setpoint of 50F END OF SECTION 15940 5!30/2012 23 09 93 - 2 of 2 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls - 5!30/2012 23 09 93 - 2 of 2 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 11 00 FACILITY FUEL PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section contains specifications for fuel pipe and fuel pipe fittings for this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Reference Standards Shop Drawings Quality Assurance Delivery, Storage, and Handling Design Criteria Welder Qualifications Natural Gas Service PART2-PRODUCTS Natural Gas Vents and Relief Valves Unions and Flanges PART 3 - EXECUTION Preparation Erection Welded Pipe Joints Threaded Pipe Joints Natural Gas Vents and Relief Valves Unions and Flanges Piping System Leak Tests Piping System Test Report RELATED WORK Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping and Equipment Section 23 05 23 - General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI 816.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ASTM A53 Pipe. Steel. Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM A234 Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures SHOP DRAWINGS Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements, Administrative Requirements. Contractor shall submit schedule indicating the ASTM specification nurnber of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade and sufficient information to Indicate the type and rating of fittings for each service. TYPE E OR S STEEL PIPE: Mill certification papers. also known as material test reports, for the pipe furnished for this project, in English. Heat numbers on these papers to match the heat numbers stenciled on the pipe. Cherrical analysis indicated on the mill certification papers to meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced ASTM specification. QUALITY ASSURANCE Order all Type E and Type S steel pipe with heat numbers rolled, stamped, or stenciled to each length or - each bundle. depending on the size of the pipe, and in accordance with the appropriate ASTM specification. Facility Fuel Piping Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to the Owner. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Promptly inspect shipments to insure that the material is undamaged and complies with specifications. Cover pipe to eliminate rust and corrosion while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe, tube, and fitting ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take precautions so the caps remain in place. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve the contractor from using proper storage techniques. Storage and protection methods must allow inspection to verify products. DESIGN CRITERIA Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting the latest revision of ASTM specifications as listed in this specification. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system in accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 125 psig unless specifically indicated otherwise. Non-metallic piping will be acceptable only for the services indicated. It will not be acceptable in occupied spaces and ventilation plenum spaces; including plenum ceilings. Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows having a centerline radius of 1.5 pipe diameters. Where ASTM A53 grade A pipe is specified, ASTM A53 grade B pipe may be substituted at Contractor's option. Where the grade or type is not specified, Contractor may choose from those commercially available. WELDER QUALIFICATIONS Before any metallic welding is performed, Contractor to submit his Standard Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and/or the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Before any polyethylene fusion welding is performed, Contractor to submit certification that the welders to be used on this project have successfully demonstrated proper welding procedures in accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.285. The A/E reserves the right to test the work of any welder employed on the project, at the Contractor's expense. If the work of the welder is found to be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the project. PART2-PRODUCTS NATURAL GAS(Systems 14"WC and Below) 2" and Smaller: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe with ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 class 150 black malleable iron threaded fittings or ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fittings. NATURAL GAS(Systems above 14"WC) All Piping: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight black steel pipe with ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, seamless, carbon steel weld fittings. VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES Use pipe and pipe fittings as specified for the system to which the relief valve or vent is -connected. UNIONS AND FLANGES 2" and Smaller: ASTM A1971ANSI 816.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use uni6iij of a pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for the fittings of the respective piping service but not less than 250 psi. Fuel Piping Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility 2-1/2" and Larger: ASTM A181 or A105, grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded welding and of a pressure class compatible with that specified for valves, piping specialties and fittings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller than 2-1/2" may be used as needed for connecting to equipment and piping specialties. Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI 316.1 flat face flanges with full face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION Remove all foreign material from interior and exterior of pipe and fittings. ERECTION Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway. or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field. offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping. Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. Mitered ells, notched tees; and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded piping. bushings are not acceptable. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half (1/2) the diameter of the main. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment Do not route piping through return air plunums. Install all valves, and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all equipment installed by others where that equipment requires the piping services indicated in this section. THREADED PIPE JOINTS Use a Teflon based thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making joints; no hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed. NATURAL GAS Pitch horizontal piping down 1" in 60 feet in the direction of flow. Install a 4" minimum depth dirt leg at the bottom of each vertical run and at each appliance. When installing mains and branches, cap gas tight each tee or pipe end which will not be immediately extended. All branch connections to the main shall be from the top or side of the main. Do not install gas pipe in a ventilation air plenum. If an above ground vent terminates in an area subject to snow accumulation, terminate the line at least five feet above grade. Install a shut off valve at each appliance. Provide a valved connection at the main for equipment and appliances furnished by others. Piping through a roof shall be run through an approved roof penetration with flashing and counter flashing Each gas pressure reducing valve vent and relief valve vent shall be run separately to a point outside of the building, terminated with a screened vent cap, and located according to gas utility regulations. Clean all welded piping before all regulators and control valves. Test by placing target-61bth over piping and blow with compressed air. Clean piping until target cloth is clean and free of debris' VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES 5/30/2012 -- --- - — -- - 23 11 00 - 3 of 5 Facility Fuel Piping Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Install vent and relief valve discharge lines as indicated on the drawings, as detailed, and as specified for each specific valve or piping specialty item. In no event is a termination to occur less than six feet above a roof line. UNIONS AND FLANGES Install a union or flange, as required, at each automatic control valve and at each piping specialty or piece of equipment which may require removal for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Where a valve is located at a piece of equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment side of the valve. Concealed unions or flanges are not acceptable. PIPING SYSTEM LEAK TESTS Verify that the piping system being tested is fully connected to all components and that all equipment is properly installed, wired, and ready for operation. If required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at expansion joints or isolate them during the test. Verify that hangers can withstand any additional weight load that may be imposed by the test. Provide all piping, fittings, blind flanges, and equipment to perform the testing Conduct pressure test with test medium of air or water unless specifically indicated. Minimum test time is indicated in the table below; additional time may be necessary to conduct an examination for leakage. If leaks are found, repair the area with new materials and repeat the test, caulking will not be acceptable. For air tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one half of the test pressure; then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. The piping system exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing shall show no evidence of leaking. After testing is complete, slowly release the pressure in a safe manner. System Pressure Medium Duration Natural gas 100 psig Air 24 hr On piping that can not be tested because of connection to an active line, provide temporary blind flanges and hydrostatically test new section of piping. After completion of test, remove temporary flanges and make final connections to piping. Die penetrate test pass weld or x-ray the piping that was not hydrostatically tested up to the active system. END OF SECTION _L r� 231100-4of5 Facility Fuel Piping PIPING SYSTEM TEST REPORT Date: Submitted: Project Name: Location: Project No: Contractor: ❑ HVAC ❑ Power Plant Test Medium: ❑ Air Refrigeration El Plumbing ❑ Water ❑ Other Test performed per specification section Specified Test Duration Hours System Identification: Describe Test Date: Start Test Time: Stop Test Time: Tested By: Signed: Comm ❑ Controls ❑ Sprinkler Specified Test Pressure PSIG Initial Pressure: PSIG Final Pressure: PSIG Witnessed By: Title: Signed: Date: 5/30/2012 23 11 M - 5 of 5 Facility Fuel Piping Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS PART1-GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for all duct systems used on this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Shop Drawings Design Criteria PART2-PRODUCTS General Materials Low Pressure Ductwork (Maximum 2 inch pressure class) Duct Sealant Gaskets PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Low Pressure Duct (Maximum 2 inch pressure class) Cleaning Leakage Test Structural Test RELATED WORK 23 07 00 — HVAC Duct Insulation 23 33 00 — Air Duct Accessories 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section. REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI SS -EN 485-2 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys -Sheet, Strip and Plate -Part 2: Mechanical Properties ASTM B209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM A90 Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles ASTM A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip ASTM A623 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process ASTM A527 Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality ASTM 924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Metallic -coated by the Hot -dip Method ASTM C 1071 Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation ASTM C 411 Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM C1338 Test Method for Determining Fungal Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings ASTM G 21 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Poeric Materials to Fungi ASTM C 916 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulati6nNFPA�90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 5/30/2012 23 31 00 - 1 of 5 HVAC Ducts and Casing Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility UL 181 Standard for Safety for Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors. NAIMA Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to division 1, General Conditions. Equals and Substitutions. SHOP DRAWINGS Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Submittals. Include manufacturer's data and/or Contractor data for the following: • Fabrication and installation drawings. • Schedule of duct systems including material of construction, gauge, pressure class, system class. method of reinforcement, joint construction, fitting construction, and support methods, all with details as appropriate. • Duct sealant and gasket material. Duct liner including data on thermal conductivity, air friction correction factor, and limitation on temperature and velocity, DESIGN CRITERIA Construct all ductwork to be free from vibration, chatter, objectionable pulsations and leakage under specified operating conditions. Use material, weight, thickness, gauge, construction and installation rnethods as outlined in the following SMACNA publications, unless noted otherwise: • HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metpl and Flexible. 2"' Edition, 1995 • HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Maual. 1 s Edition, 1985 • HVAC Systems - Duct Design. 3r Edition, 1990 • Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standard Is Edition. 1980 • Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, 2ndEdition. 1999 • Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual, 2nc Edition, 1995 • Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, 2nd Edition, 1999 • Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. 15` Edition, 1980 Use products which conform to NFPA 90A, possessing a flame spread rating of not over 25 and a smoke developed rating no higher than 50. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Ductwork is undamaged and complies with the specification. Protect Ductwork against damage. Protect Ductwork by storing inside or by durable. waterproof. above ground packaging. Do not store material on grade. Protect Ductwork from dirt, dust, construction debris and foreign material. Where end caps/packaging are provided, take precautions so caps/packaging remain in place and free from damage Offsite storage agreements do not relieve the contractor from using proper storage techniques. Storage and protection methods must allow inspection to verify products. PART2-PRODUCTS GENERAL All sheet metal used for construction of duct shall be 24 gauge or heavier except for round and spiral , 1 ductwork and spiral duct take -offs 12' and below ma dy be 26 gauge where allowed in SMACNA:HVAC'_ Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 2" Edition, 1995. 5/30/2012 23 31 '00 - 2 of 5 HVAC Ducts and Casing Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Duct sizes indicated on plans are net inside dimensions; where duct liner is specified, dimensions are net, inside of liner. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS Minimum acceptable duct pressure class, for all ductwork except transfer ductwork, is 2 inch W.G. positive or negative, depending on the application. Transfer ductwork minimum acceptable duct pressure class is 1 inch W.G. positive or negative, depending on the application. Duct system pressure classes not indicated on the drawings to be as follows: MATERIALS GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET: Use ASTM A 653 galvanized steel sheet of lock forming quality. Galvanized coating to be 1.25 ounces per square foot, both sides of sheet, G90 in accordance with ASTM A90. LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK (Maximum 2 inch pressure class) Fabricate and install ductwork in sizes indicated on the drawings and in accordance with SMACNA recommendations, except as modified below. Construct so that all interior surfaces are smooth. Use slip and drive or flanged and bolted construction when fabricating rectangular ductwork. Use spiral lock seam construction when fabricating round spiral ductwork. Sheet metal screws may be used on duct hangers, transverse joints and other SMACNA approved locations if the screw does not extend more than 1/2 inch into the duct. Use elbows and tees with a center line radius to width or diameter ratio of 1.5 wherever space permits. When a shorter radius must be used due to limited space, install single wall sheet metal splitter vanes in accordance with SMACNA publications, Type RE 3. Where space will not allow and the C value of the radius elbow, as given in SMACNA publications, exceeds 0.31, use rectangular elbows with turning vanes as specified in Section 15820. Square throat -radius heel elbows will not be acceptable. Straight taps or bullhead tees are not acceptable. Where rectangular elbows are used in supply ductwork, provide turning vanes in accordance with Section 15820. Provide expanded take -offs or 45 degree entry fittings for branch duct connections with branch ductwork airflow velocities greater than 700 fpm. Square edge 90 -degree take -off fittings or straight taps will not be accepted. Button punch snaplock construction will not be accepted on aluminum ductwork. Round ducts may be substituted for rectangular ducts if sized in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission of the Architect/Engineer. Round snap lock duct is acceptable on duct up to 12"diameter, duc t larger than 14" and larger shall be spiral seam. Exposed round duct shall be spiral seam. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees, convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. DUCT SEALANT Manufacturer: 3M 800, 3M 900, H.B. Fuller/Foster, Hardcast, Hardcast Peal & Seal, Lockformer cold sealant, Mon -Eco Industries, United Sheet Metal, or approved equal. Silicone sealants are not allowed in any type of ductwork installation. ^' Install sealants in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, paying special attention to . temperature limitations. Allow sealant to fully cure before pressure testing of ductworR;.or before startup..:,' of air handling systems. 17) GASKETS -"17. 2 INCH PRESSURE CLASS AND LOWER: J 5/30/2012 23 3100 - 3 of 5 HVAC Ducts and Casing Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Soft neoprene or butyl gaskets in combination with duct sealant for flanged joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Verify dimensions at the site, making field measurements and drawings necessary for fabrication and erection. Check plans showing work of other trades and consult with Architect in the event of any interference. Make allowances for beams, pipes or other obstructions in building construction and for work of other contractors. Transform. divide or offset ducts as required, in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Figure 2-7, except do not reduce duct to less than six inches in any dimension and do not exceed an 8:1 aspect ratio. Where it is necessary to take pipes or similar obstructions through ducts, construct easement as indicated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Figure 2-8, Fig. E. In all cases; seal to prevent air leakage. Pipes or similar obstructions may not pass through high pressure or fume exhaust ductwork. Test openings for test and balance work will be provided under Section 15. Install duct to pitch toward outside air intakes and drain to outside of building. Solder or seal seams to form watertight joints. Install all motor operated dampers and connect to or install all equipment furnished by others. Blank off all unused portions of louvers. as indicated on the drawings, with 1-112 inch board insulation with galvanized sheet metal backing on both sides. Do not install ductwork through dedicated electrical rooms or spaces unless the ductwork is serving this room or space. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. Provide adequate access to ductwork for cleaning purposes. Provide temporary capping of ductwork openings to prevent entry of dirt, dust and foreign material. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Round duct passing through fire rated construction shall be a minimum of 26ga sheet metal. DUCTWORK SUPPORT Support ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Figure 4-4. LOW PRESSURE DUCT (Maximum 2 inch pressure class) Seal all duct, with the exception of transfer ducts, in accordance with SMACNA seal class listed in specifications. Install a manual balancing damper in each branch duct and for each diffuser or grille. The use of splitter dampers, extractors, or grille face dampers will not be accepted for balancing dampers. Hangers must be wrapped around bottom edge of duct and securely fastened to duct with sheet metal screws or pop rivets. Trapeze hangers may be used at contractor's option. CLEANING Remove all dirt and foreign matter from the entire duct system and clean diffusers, regist2rs, grilles and the inside of air -handling units before operating fans. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines where systems have been used`for temporary heat, air-conditioning. or ventilation purposes during construction. Protect equipment that may be harmed_ _ by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. LEAKAGE TEST 5/30,2012 2331 00 - 4 of 5 HVAC Ducts and Casing Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility Test all ductwork in accordance with test methods described in Section 5 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Do not insulate ductwork until it has been successfully tested. Test pressure shall be equal to the duct pressure class. If excessive air leakage is found locate leaks, repair the duct in the area of the leak, seal the duct, and retest. Leakage rate shall not exceed more than 5% of the system air quantity for low pressure ductwork, determined in accordance with Appendix C of the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Leakage rate shall not exceed more that 1 % of the system air quantity for high pressure ductwork, determined in accordance with Appendix C of the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Leakage test for ductwork downstream of air terminal devices may be omitted but will not relieve the contractor from duct sealing requirements. Submit a signed report to the Division's Construction Representative, indicating test apparatus used. results of the leakage test, and any remedial work required to bring duct systems into compliance with specified leakage rates. STRUCTURALTEST Deflection limits shall not exceed those listed in accordance with Chapter 7 of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 3.0 Performance Requirements. END OF SECTION _ 5(30/2012 2331 00 - 5 of 5 HVAC Ducts and Casing Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART1-GENERAL SCOPE This sections includes accessories used in the installation of duct systems. Included are the following topics. PART 1 -GENERAL Related Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Shop Drawings PART 2 -PRODUCTS Manual Volume Dampers Turning Vanes Control Dampers Access Doors Flashings Louvers Suspended PART 3 - EXECUTION Manual Volume Dampers Turning Vanes Control Dampers Access Doors Flashings Louvers Suspended Vehicle Exhaust Hose reels Welding Exhaust Arms RELATED WORK 23 05 29 — Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 — Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 31 00 — HVAC Ducts and Casings REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section. REFERENCE STANDARDS NFPA 90A Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2nd Edition, 1995 UL 214 UL 555 (6" edition) Standard for Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers UL 5558 (4" edition) Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions SHOP DRAWINGS Refer to division 1. General Conditions, Submittals. Submit for all accessories and include dimensions: capacities, ratings., installation instructions, and appropriate identification. Include certified test data on dynamic insertion loss, self -noise power levels, and aerodynamic performance of sound attenuators. Submit manufacturer's color charts where finish color is specified to be selected by the Architect/Engineer, PART 2 -PRODUCTS 5!30/2012 23 33 00 - 1 of 3 Air Duct Accessories Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS Manufacturers: Ruskin, Vent Products, Air Balance, or approved equal. Dampers must be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Fig. 2-12, Fig. 2-13, and notes relating to these figures, except as modified below. Reinforce all blades to prevent vibration, flutter, or other noise. Construct dampers in multiple sections with mullions where width is over 48 inches. Use rivets or tack welds to secure individual components; sheet metal screws will not be accepted. Provide operators with locking devices and damper position indicators for each damper; use an elevated platform on insulated ducts. Provide end bearings or bushings for all volume damper rods penetrating ductwork constructed to a 3" w.c. pressure class or above. TURNING VANES Manufacturers: Aero Dyne, Anemostat, Barber -Colman, Hart & Cooley, or approved equal. Construct turning vanes and runners for square elbows in accordance with SMACNA Fig. 2-3 and Fig. 2-4 except use only airfoil type vanes. Construct turning vanes for short radius elbows and elbows where one dimension changes in the turn in accordance with SMACNA Fig. 2-5 and Fig. 2-6. CONTROL DAMPERS Control dampers are specified in section 23 09 14. ACCESS DOORS Access door to be designed and constructed for the pressure class of the duct in which the door is to be installed. Doors in exposed areas shall be hinged type with cam sash lock. Hinges shall be steel full length continuous piano type. Doors in concealed spaces may be secured in place with cam sash latches. For both hinged and non hinged doors provide sufficient number of camp sash latches to provide air tight seal when door is closed. Do not use hinged doors in concealed spaces if this will restrict access. Use minimum 1" deep 24 gauge galvanized steel double wall access doors with minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel frames. For non -galvanized ductwork, use minimum 1" deep double wall access door with frame that shall use materials of construction identical to adjacent ductwork. Provide double neoprene gasket that shall provide seals from the frame to the door and frame to the duct. When access doors are installed in insulated ductwork or equipment provide insulated doors with insulation equivalent to what is provided for adjacent ductwork or equipment. Access doors constructed with sheet metal screw fasteners will not be accepted. Use insulated, 1-1/2 hour UL 555 listed and labeled access doors in kitchen exhaust ducts FLASHINGS Provide flashing to completely weatherproof connection of ductwork to louvers Flashing to be constructed of material similar to louver material. Flashing and counterflashing for roof curbs will be provided by others. Flashing and curbs for duct and pipe penetrations of roof assemblies to be in accordance with details. LOUVERS Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin or approved equal. Similar to Greenheck Type ESD -603, extruded aluminum alloy not less than 12 gauge (.081" thick), 6063 series frame and blades, all -welded assembly, 30 degree blades with water baffle, 6 inches thick. Provide with bird screen of/" x %" mesh aluminum in 12 gauge aluminum frame and an aluminum sill. Locate the bird screen inside of the louver unless noted otherwise. Louver to bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for both air performance and water penetration, having a free area not less than 50% based on a 48" x 48" section, a water penetration less than 0.1 oz/square foot under AMCA test at 1000 feet per minute, and an intake pressure drop less than 0.20 finches of water at 1000 feet per minute. Furnish sufficient paint in the same color as the louver to paint the outer surface of panels_ovepunused portions of louvers and to paint the interior portion of ductwork visible through the louvers. _ 5/30/2012 23 33, 00 - 2 of 3 Air Duct Accessories Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility PART 3 - EXECUTION MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS Install manual volume dampers in each branch duct and for each grille, register, or diffuser as far away from the outlet as possible while still maintaining accessibility to the damper. Install so there is no flutter or vibration of the damper blade(s). CONTROL DAMPERS Install dampers in locations indicated on the drawings, as detailed, and according to the manufacturer's instructions. Install blank -off plates or transitions where required for proper mixing of airstreams in mixing plenums. Provide adequate operating clearance and access to the operator. Install an access door adjacent to each control damper for inspection and maintenance. DUCT LINING Apply lining to the following ductwork: No lining allowed on this project. FLASHINGS Flashing for roof curbs, equipment supports or rails located on roof. will be installed by others, LOUVERS Furnish louvers to the General Contractor for mounting in exterior walls. Connect outside air intake duct to the louver, sealing all connections air and water tight. Provide bird screen on inside of active louver area where none is provided with louvers. Where louvers are equipped with inside birdscreen, remove screen at all locations where duct connections are not made. Install insulated metal panel on unused portion of louver. Panels must be sealed weathertight to louver assembly with flashing as required for proper drainage to outside of building. Paint outside surface of panel to match louver prior to installation. Where ductwork is visible through louver when viewed from outside the building, paint inside of duct to match louver color. END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 23 33 00 - 3 of 3 Air Duct Accessories Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for fans that are not an integral part of a manufactured device. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Shop Drawings Design Criteria PART 2 -PRODUCTS General Sidewall Exhaust Fan PART 3 -EXECUTION Installation RELATED WORK Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section. REFERENCE STANDARDS AMCA 203 AMCA Fan Application Manual - Troubleshooting AMCA 210 Laboratory Method of Testing Fans for Rating AMCA 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions. SHOP DRAWINGS Refer to division 1. General Conditions, Submittals. Include dimensions, capacities, fan curves, materials of construction, ratings, weights, motors and drives, sound power levels, appropriate identification and vibration isolation for all equipment. Sound power levels to be based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 300. Submit color selection charts for equipment where applicable. Fan curves shall indicate the relationship of CFM to static or total pressure for various fan speeds. Brake horsepower, recommended selection range, and limits of operation are to also be indicated on the curves. Indicate operating point on the fan curves at design air quantity and indicate the manufacturer's recommended drive loss factor for the specific application. Tabular fan performance data is not" acceptable. For variable air volume application, include data which indicates the effect of capacity control devices, such as inlet vanes, on performance. DESIGN CRITERIA Tested and certify all fans in accordance with the applicable AMCA test code. Each fan and motor combination shall be capable of delivering 110% of air quantity scheduled at scheduled static pressure. The motor furnished with the fan shall not operate into the motor service factor when operating under these conditions. 5/30/2012 23 34 00 - 1 of 2 HVAC Fans Iowa City Public Works Warin Storage Facility Consider drive efficiency in motor selection according to manufacturer's published recommendation or according to AMCA Publication 203, Appendix L. Where inlet and outlet ductwork at any fan is changed from that shown on the drawings, provide any motor, drive and/or wiring changes required due to increased static pressure or baffling necessary to prevent uneven airflow or improve mixing. All internal insulation and other components exposed to the airstream are to meet the flame spread and smoke ratings contained in NFPA 90A. All roof mounted equipment to be provided with curbs or equipment stands in accordance with specification in Section 23 05 29. PART2-PRODUCTS GENERAL Use fan size, class, type. arrangement, and capacity as scheduled. Furnish complete with motors, wheels, drive assemblies, bearings, vibration isolation devices, and accessories required for specified performance and proper operation. All single phase motors to have i nherent thermal overload protection. Provide variable pitch sheaves far drives 3 hp and smaller, fixed pitch sheaves for drives 5 hp and larger. Design all drives for 150% of motor rating. Use OSHA approved belt guards that totally enclose the entire drive. Construct guards of expanded metal to allow for ventilation: provide tachometer openings at shaft locations. Statically and dynamically balance all fans so they operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Use AMCA Type A spark resistant construction for all fans handling flammable or grease laden vapors. Provide a corrosion resistant coating on all surfaces exposed to fume and other corrosive exhaust air. Coating to be as scheduled. SIDEWALL EXHAUST EXHAUST FANS Manufacturers. Greenheck, Penn Barry, Cook, or approved equal. Provide upblast fan, with aluminum housing, non -overloading type centrifugal wheel, inlet cone, factory mounted and wired motor and disconnect switch, and bird screen. Provide ECM motor on single phase fans as scheduled Electrical Contractor will provide disconnect switches and thermal overload protection for units with three phase motors. PART 3 - EXECUTION Install as shown on the drawings, as detailed, and according to manufacturer's installation instructions. INSTALLATION On units provided with a drain connection, reduce drain connection down to'/ fitting and leave open. Install thrust restraints in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 48. Contractor shall balance blade assembly of destratification fans after installation to assure stable operation. END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 23 34,880 - 2 of 2 HVAC Fans Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS & GRILLES PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for air terminal equipment. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Submittals Design Criteria PART2-PRODUCTS Manufacturers Square Ceiling Diffusers - Plaque Square Ceiling Return Grilles Side -Wall Registers and Grilles PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation RELATED WORK Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. UL 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connectors. ARI -ADC Standard 880 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions. SUBMITTALS Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Submittals. Furnish submittal information including, but not limited to, the following: v Manufacturers name and model number Identification as referenced in the documents Capacities/ratings Materials of construction Sound ratings Dimensions Finish Color selection charts where applicable Manufacturers installation instructions All other appropriate data 5/30/2012 23 37 13 - 1 of 2 Diffusers, Registers & Grilles Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility DESIGN CRITERIA All performance data shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Test Code 1062 GRD 84. PART 2 -PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Metal -Aire, and E.H. Price, Nailor, and United Sheet Metal. Acceptable manufacturers for specific products are listed under each item. SIDE-WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES Titus series series 350 (return/exhaust), Carnes model R series. EH Price series 530, Metal Aire series V4000 or H4000, Krueger series 880. Steel unless otherwise indicated, with frame type appropriate to installation. Fixed blade (45 degree) core return and exhaust registers and grilles. Register and grille sizes as shown on drawings and/or as scheduled. Unless noted otherwise, baked enamel finish with color selected by Architect. Screw holes on surface counter sunk to accept recessed type screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on drawings and according to manufacturer's instructions Furnish diffusers with equalizing grids where it is not possible to maintain minimum 2 duct diameter straight duct into diffuser. Equalizing grids shall consist of individually adjustable vanes designed for equalizing airflow into diffuser neck and providing directional control of airflow. Unless otherwise indicated, size ductwork drops to diffusers or grilles to match unit collar size. Seal connections between ductwork drops and diffusers/grilles airtight. Blank off unused portion of linear slot diffusers and linear bar diffusers and grilles. Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside duct, paint inside of duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility. In clean rooms and animal holding rooms, caulk space between diffuser or grille and ceiling or wall to be air and watertight. User clear, non -hardening silicone sealant compatible with ceiling or wall surfaces. Sealant shall be resistant to microbiological growth. END OF SECTION - r `y 51130/2012 23 37 13 -2 of 2 Diffusers, Registers & Grilles Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Facility SECTION 23 54 00 FUEL FIRED HEATING EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for gas fired equipment that use direct and indirect gas firing to heat air. Included are the following topics: PART 1 -GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Reference Standards Quality Assurance Submittals Warran PART 2 - PRMUCTS Gas Fired Unit Heaters PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Gas Fired Unit Heaters RELATED WORK Section 23 05 29 — Hangers and Support for HVAC Equipment and Piping Section 23 05 23 — General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Section 23 11 00 — Facility Fuel Piping REFERENCE Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. REFERENCE STANDARDS AGA American Gas Association ANSI Z83.4 Direct Gas Fired Makeup Air Heaters ANSI Z83.6 Gas Fired Infrared Heaters ANSI Z21.64 Direct Vent Central Furnaces GAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association NEC National Electrical Code QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Equals and Substitutions. SUBMITTALS Refer to division 1, General Conditions, Submittals. Include specific manufacturer and model numbers, equipment identification corresponding to project drawings and schedules, dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, power requirements and wiring diagrams, filter information and information for all accessories. WARRANTY Furnace primary and secondary heat exchangers warranted for 20 years under normal use and maintenance. Remainder of furnace components warranted for 1 year from date of start up. Gas fired unit heaters heat exchangers warranted for five years. Remainder of unit heater components warrated for 1 year from startup. Radiant heat tubes warranted against internal corrosion for 10 years. Remainder of infrared radiant heater components warranted for 1 year from date of startup. Direct fired make-up air units warranted for 12 months from date of startup. Indirect fired make-up air units warranted for 12 months from date of startup. PART2-PRODUCTS 5/30/2012 23 54 00 - 1of 2 Fuel Fired Heating Equipment Iowa City Public Works Warn Storage Facility GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS Manufacturers: Modine, Reznor, Roberts Gordon, Sterling or Trane Horizontal discharger direct vent sealed combustion type. AGA certified for use with [natura[][propane]gas. Minimum annual fuel utilization efficiency (A.F.U.E.) of 80. All wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Construct casing of cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish. Direct drive propeller type fan statically and dynamically balanced and including fan safety guard and adjustable vertical and horizontal louvers for control of air diffusion on discharge of unit. Aluminized steel burners, electronic spark ignition with electronic flame supervision and timed lockout control. Heavy gauge stainless steel heat exchanger and factory installed induced draft blower for heat exchanger prepurge and combustion gas venting. Provide a hinged access panel on the bottom of the unit to access the burner or provide side access (pull out drawer) to burner assembly. Single point power connection. Unit must be approved for vertical or side wall venting Provide spark ignited intermittent pilot system with electronic flame supervision AGA gas controls, including manual main shut-off valve, 24 volt redundant combination gas control valve with 100 percent safety shut-off valve and main gas pressure regulator. Provide fan controls and limit safety controls including but not limited to: -Pressure switch to verify combustion/exhaust gas airflow -high limit controls -Fan time delay to delay the fan start until the heat exchanger reaches a predetermined temperature and to allow the fan to operate, after burner shut down, to remove heat exchanger residual heat. This Contractor shall provide all temperature control and interlocking necessary to perform the specified control sequence. All relays, transformers and controls are to be in enclosures. Provide factory installed 24 volt control transformer along with 24 v wall mounted thermostat. All wiring shall be in conduit in accordance with division 16 and comply with the NEC. Provide an air inlet/vent termination assembly and threaded hanger connections PART 3 -EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install units as shown on plans, as detailed and according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. Pipe vents from gas regulator to outside (where regulators are provided). Install remote panels and thermostats where indicated on the drawings. Provide all wiring between remote panels/thermostats and the gas fired item. GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS Install units and connect gas, combustion air and vent piping as instructed by the manufacture and in compliance with applicable code requirements. Suspend from building structure to maintain headroom beneath units as indicated in mechanical codes. Connect combustion air and venting to outside of building as indicated on the drawings and terminate per the manufacturer's instructions. Install fuel or oil piping per manufacturer recommendations. END OF SECTION 5/301'2012 23 54 00 - 2 of 2 Fuel Fired Heating Equipment Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building ELECTRICAL INDEX 2 pages 2605 00 Electrical Provisions 6 pages 2605 19 Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 6 pages 2605 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 4 pages 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 2 pages 2605 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 6 pages 26 05 33.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems 4 pages 2605 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 2 pages 2605 83 Wiring Connections 2 pages 2609 16 Electric Controls and Relays 2 pages 2621 16 Low -Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance 2 pages 2624 16 Panelboards 6 pages 2627 16 Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures 2 pages 2627 26 Wiring Devices 6 pages 2628 13 Fuses 2 pages 2628 16.16 Enclosed Switches 4 pages 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 6 pages 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 6 pages - Cv 5/30/2012 -TC -1 ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS - Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building THIS PAGE LEFT FNTF.NTTONALLY BLANK TC -2 ELECTR-CAL TAB=,E OF CONTENTS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 00 ELECTRICAL. PROVISIONS PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work included. B. Temporary power and lighting. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Applicable provisions of Division 0 and Division 1 shall govern work Linder this section. B. All 26 00 00 electrical and 28 31 00 fire alarm sections. C. All other sections requiring electrical work. D. Coordinate work under provision of Division One - General Requirements. E. Temporary light and power Section of Division 1. F. Perform all trenching and backfilling required in connection with the work of this section in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 2 of these Specifications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSTINFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NECA "Standard of Installation." C. All state and local codes. 1 A REG[ FLATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. 1.5 WORK 1NCLUDED ty A. The mention of any article, operation or method rc-quires that the Contractor shall provide same and work in complete accordance with the conditions stated. The contractor shall provide all materiuL labor, equipment, tools and transportation as needed to complete the project according to contract documents:' This work 5/30/2012 26 05 00-1 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS r, Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building tire I rides all items to complete the electrical installation of all items indicated on the drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and operable facility but not specificalI% described in any other sections of this document. Among the items required are: L Temporary power and lighting. 2. Branch circuit panels far power and lighting. 3 Complete branch circuit wiring system for lighting, motors, receptacles. junction boxes and similar uses. 4. Aab switches.. receptacles and simitar items. i. lNew service per plans. 6_ Distribution panels as shown on plans. 7. Complete feeder System,inConduit, to power panels, large individual loads and branch circuit panels. S. Lighting fixtures. 9. Necessary equipment as shown on plans. 10. All items and appurtenances necessarc, reasonably incidental or customarily included, cycn though each and ever}itenn is not specifically called out for or shown. B. All work shall be installed in accordance with all state and local inspection authorities having jurisdiction together with the recommendations ofthc manufacturer whose equipment is to be supplied and installed under this contract. C. Before submitting his bid, each bidder shall examine the drawings relating to his work and shall become fully unformed as to the extent and character of the work required and its relation to other work in the building. D. The contractor shall coordinate with the architect and establish exact locationsofall materials and equipment to be installed. Consideration shall lie given to construction features, equipment of other trades and requirements of the equipment. L. Bids to include cost of all necessary permits and review fees. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND WARRANTY A. Qualifications of installers: For the actual fabrication, installation and testing of thework of this section, use only thoroughly trainecl and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements for this work and with the installation recommendations ofthe Manufacturers of the specified items. B. Perform work to meet all codes. C. Contractor shall warranty all parts and labor, except lamps, for one year. All lamps will be working at time of substantial completion. The contractor will replace any lamps not working at time of substantial completion. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Within 14 days after award of contract, anti before any of the materials of this section are delivered to the job site, submit eight complete sets to the Architect in accord with the provisions of Division One - General Requirements, the following: 1. Shop drawings I Distribution equipment 2 Liaht fixtures including lamp data 3 Fire alarm equipment 26 05 00-2 5/30/2012 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 4 Generator equipment 5 Wiring devices 6 Any additional data requested 2. Show variations ham contract documents, 3. The contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for executing work in accord with contract documents, even though such drawings have been approved. B. Affidavits: The contractor shall execute the standard State Electrical Affidavit of Compliance with the Electrical Code and safepractices. Notarize and file two copies with the owner before final payment is made. C. Record Drawings: Day by day, as installed, details shall be transferred to a set of scale tracings prepared by the electrical contractor. The completed tracings shall be turned over to the Owner upon completion. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: The contractor shall provide two sets in loose leaf binders a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item of equipment used in the electrical work and shall present this compilation to the Architect before final payment is made. Descriptive data and printed installation, operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare parts list for each item of equipment shall be. included. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Division One -General Requirements. B. All materials shall be suitably stored and protected prior to installation and all work, including equipment of other trades, shall be protected after installation, during construction and prior to acceptance. C. The contractor shall follow the manufacturer's directions completely in the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials_ Equipment and materials shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt. water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. At the completion of the work, fixtures, equipment and materials shall be cleaned and polished thoroughly and shall be in a condition satisfactory to the architect. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall visit the site of construction to familiarize himself with the site and existing conditions so as to become fully informed as to extent and character of the work and its relationship to work of other trades and existing facilities. B. Failure to provide for the cost of all contingencies in original bid will not be accepted as an excuse for extra payment. 10 ALTERNATIVES ` A. The work of this section is affected by alternatives as described on the drawings and in section 01030 of these. specifications. All alternates must be approved before bids are submitted. : __ ,.,• V 5/30/2012 26 05 00-3 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building The Electrical Contractor shall assumc full responsibility for any alternate material or item proposed, iceardlessifitisapprovedornot. This responsibility w ill also illehrclean% and all cosisofniodify in-. feeders, branch circuits, ceilings, finishes, supports, structural; HVAC: or any other ineidental changes brought about by the alternate. PART2 PRODUCIS 2.1 VIA11RIALS A. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless specifically noted otherwise and shall bear the Manufacturer's name, trademark and ASNW., CL andlor other labels in every case where a standard has been established for the paiticular item. Equipment shalt be the latest approved design of the standard product of a manufachrrerregularly engaged in the production oftherequiredtype ofcguipmentand shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion ofthe architeetreasonably convenient to the site. Itis the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that items inmished fit the space aw-aiIable. He shall make field measurements to ascertain space requirements. includingthose connections, and shall furnish and install such sizes and shapes of egtdpment that, in the final installation, will suit the true intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specifications. C. The Contractor shall furnish and install all e.quipntentaeeessories, connections and incidental iters necessary to complete the work and operations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Priorto all work ofthis section, carefully inspect the installed work ofall other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verify Conditions: Verify that all electrical installation may, be made in complete accord wwith all pertinent codes, regulations, drawings and specifications. C. Discrepancies, In the event of discrepancy, notity the Architect art([ or Engineer immediately for clarification. Do not proceed until discrepancies hare been frilly resolved. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Co-ordination of Vb'ork: The Contractor shall compare the electrical drawings and specifications with the draeings and specifications of other trades and report any discrepancies for changes necessary in the electrical work. I'lie electrical work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, the Contractor shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences. Changes required in the work of the. Contractor caused by neglect to do so. shall be made at the Contractor's own expense. B. Verification of Dimensions: 'fhe contractor shall visit the premises to verify all dimensions in tile field; and shall advise the Architect andor Engineer of any discrepancies before perforating any work. 33INS1ALLATION 26 05 00-4 `9/30/2012 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. It is the intent of this Specification that the Owner is presented with a complete, operable facility and the Electrical Contractor shall include ALL costs in the original bid. When the Architeethas reviewed equipmerttsubmittals and _eiven instructions to precede with the installation of items of equipment that require arrangements or connection different from those shown on the drawings, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to install the equipment to operate properly and in accord with the intent of the drawings and specifications and shall provide any additional controllers, fittings or other equipment and materials that may be required. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. All changes shall be made at no increase in the contract amount or additional costs to other trades. C. The contractor shall support work and equipment plumb, rigid and true to line. The contractor shall study the general, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings, shop drawings and catalog data to determine ]low equipment, fixtures, conduit, etc. are to be installed and shall provide foundations, bolts, inserts, stands, hangers, brackets and accessories for proper support whether or not shown on the drawings. D. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accord with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer. the best practices of the trade, and in conformance with contract documents. Should the contractor perform any work that does not comply with the manufacturers directions, the contractor shall bear all costs arising in correcting deficiencies. E. Interferences: 1. Locations: Locations of conduit, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the work to interferences anticipated or encountered. Devices specifically dimensioned on the drawings are critical dimensions and shall installed as shown. The contractor shall determine the exact route and locations of each conduit prior to installation. 2. Right-of-way: Lines which pitch shall have right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example, plumbing drains shall normally have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. 3. Offsets: Offsets and changes in direction in conduit shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and not interfere with pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. I. Location of 1ightingswitches,outlets and equipmentas shown ondrawings is approximate and exact locations will be verified. G. Minor modifications in location of switches,outlets and equipmentisconsideredincidental uptoadistanceof 10 feet with no additional compensation, provided necessary instructions are given prior to rough in. H. Existing Conditions (if applicable): 1. Move or remove electrical connections, devices or equipment necessary for completion ofproject and reconnect reused existing equipment or wiring removed to accommodate new work. 2. Existing electrical equipment indicated on the drawings as being removed, reworked m relocated, are shown for guidance and estimating purposes only; additional work found in field or changes required but not shown shall be included in the base bid. 3. Existing equipment that is removed shall remain the property of the owner. That which the owner does not want shall be disposed of by the electrical contractor. 4. Work involving shutdown of present service and equ ipment now functioning in present area shall be done at such time as to provide the least amount of inconvenience to the owner at times established by die owner. 5. Any existing electrical devices orequipmenl found at thejob site, but not shown on the drawings shall be reconnected to spare circuit breakers in new panels, if such circuits are necessary for operation of the remodeled portion of the building. <' J 6. Locations and elevations of utilities have been obtained from utility maps or other•sources and are: 5/30/2012 26.05 00=5 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building offered as a general eaide only without guarantee as to accuracy. The Contractor shall verify, the location and elevation of utilities and their relation to the work before bettumung work. Unless otherwise specified, job finish painting will be done by the painting contractor. Electrical equipment shall have abaked enamel finish. The electrical contractor shall restore damaged painted surfaces ofcleetrieal equipment to its original condition. 3.417LELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Control circuits, branch circuits, feeders, motor circuits and transformers: 1. Monger check of phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground insula[ion levels. Do not negger check solid state equipment. 2. Continuity. 3. Short circuit. 4. Operational check. B. Wiring devices: 'fest receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal tester for correct polarity, proper _*round connection and wiring faults. 3.5 CI,F.ANING A. The electrical contractor shall daily remove crates; boxes. metal curings and debris from the building. Attire end of the project, all electrically related debris shall be removed and the building shall be left in a clean condition. B. The electrical contractor shall Ieave all electrical equipment (interior and exterior), in a clean condition, 3.6 EQUIPMENT START -LP AND TESTING A. The contractor shall instruct the owner's operating personnel during start-up and separate operating test of each major item of equipment. During the operating test, the contractor shall prove the operation of each item of equipment to the satisfaction of the architect. At least two days notice shall be given to the architect of equipment start-up and operating tests. B. Should any item of the system fail to perform in an approved manner, this test shall be repeated until the operating test is approved by the architect. C. following the successful completion ofoperating tests by the Contractor, the owner shall have the privilege of making such tests as they may desire to ascertain in detail if any corrections are to be made to the system. At the end of the testing by the owner and architect, the architect shall direct the contactor in writing to make such corrections to the system as are within the scope of the contract. END OF SECTION 26 05 00-6 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELFCTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Underground feeder and branch circuit cable. C. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit. B. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes. C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification. 13 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1 A SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements_ Provide upon request. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. E. Contractor shall review and stamp all shop drawings prior to submitting them for review. Engineer will not review any submittals that have not been stamped by the contractor. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. _. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 5/30/2012 28a51,9-1 y LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. Conform to requircmcnts of AVSI,1,TPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. Furnish prod acts listed and classified by L-Adcnvritcis Laboratorics, Inc. as suitable for purposespecitied and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. 1-7PROTECT CONDITIONS :1. Vcrify that Held measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Wire and cable r'oudin: shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and tengths required. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work, PART PRODUCTS 2.t MANUFACTURERS -BUILDING WIRE A. Carol. B. Triangle. C. Southwire- D. Substitutions: I Ender provisions ofDivision One -General Requirements. 2.2 BUILDFNG WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Cropper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THW,RHW, TW, THHN/THWN. k11HW. I, E Insulation: Material rated 75 degrees C minimum for branch circuits or feeders in wet and damp' locations. \laterial rated 90 degrees C for feeders in dry locations. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS —BUILDING MC CABLE 2605 19-2 M-30/2012 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A, Anixter Brothers, Inc. B. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. C. General Cable Company. D. Rome Cable Corp. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. 24 BUILDING CABLE: MC A. Description: Multi -conductor metal clad cable, polypropylene tape, galvanized steel armor. Lightweight steel metal clad or steel metal clad cable on branch circuits. Steel metal clad fire alarm cable on fire alarm systems. B. Conductor: Copper. Where type MC cable carries multiple phase conductors, the cable shall include an oversized neutral conductor (150 to 200%) or one neutral conductor per phase for multi phase systems. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN, material rated 90 degrees C minimum. E Grounding Conductors: An insulated grounding conductor, sized per code, shall be cabled with the circuit conductors and identified as a ground. F. 'type MC cable may only be used in concealed areas inside walls, above drop ceilings or at structure or joists in high bay areas. 2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Bumdy. 2. T&B. 3. Blackburn. 4. Panduit. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: 1. Burndy. 2. T&B. 3. Blackburn. 4. Panduit _ 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. C. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. 3M. 2. Ideal. 5/30/2012 2605 19-3 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 3. 1'&B. 4, Blackburn. 5. Parduit, 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. D. Compression Connectors L Burnda. ?, T&B. 3. Blackburn. d. Blackburn. �. Substitutions: Linder provisions of Division One. General Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAVINATION r1. Verif% that interior of buddine has been protected from weather. B. Vca-ify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 32 PREPARATION A. Completely and thorou,lib. swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire Type IHHN/T11WN m type MC cable. MC cable may only be used for branch circuits or fire alarm circuits in concealed locations. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THNNrN• XHHN+ instdation, in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN: XI LAW insulation, in raceway or Typc \.IC cable as allowed by code. D. Wet or Damp Interior locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN, XHHW insulation, in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire Type TH 1N/THWN, X1 -111W insulation, in raceway. F. Underground Installations: Use only building wire Type THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW insulation, in raceway. G. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSI'ALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Use solid or stranded conductors for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.' - 2605 19-4 5/30/20-12 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. Use oversized neutrals on electronic loads per code. E. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. I'. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 50 feet. Size conductors for 3% voltage drop for circuits longer than 100 feet. G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 100 feet. Size conductors for 3% voltage drop for circuits longer than 200 feet. H. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. 1. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. J. Protect exposed cable from damage. K. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. L. IJse suitable cable fittings and connectors_ M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. N_ Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. O. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry fill ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. P. Use suitable reducing connectmns or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors. Q. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. R. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. S. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings: 5/30/2012 26 05',19-5- LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL, POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing. R. inspect Hire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. D. Verify continuity of all conductors. FND OF SECTION 26 05 19-6 5/3012012 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL f i POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL L l SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 12 REFERENCLS A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Metal frame of the building. C. Concrete -encased electrode. D. Rod electrode. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 chins. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit upon project completion. B. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes_. C. Record overall resistance to ground. D. Contractor shall review and stamp all shop drawings prior to submitting them for review. Engineer will not review any submittals that have not been stamped by the contractor. - - 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS r A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum 3, years experience. - - d 5/30/2012 26 05 26-1'' GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 1.7 REGULATORS' REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSi/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODE A. Manufacturers: 1. Appleton. 2. Clouse -Hinds. 3 Burndc. 4. Or approved equal. B. Material: Copper -clad steel. C. Diameter: 3/4 inch , D. length: 10 feet. 22 NfECHANICAL CONNECTORS -A. Manufacturers: I. Appleton. 2. Crouse -Hinds. 3. Bundy. 4. Or approved equal. B. Material: Bronze. 23 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturer;: I. Cad-NN'eld. 2. Or approved equal. 24 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Foundation Electrodes: per drawing. C. Gounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 or local requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.1 EXAMINATION - ' -... tr:--� 26 05 26-2 5/30/2012 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 32 INSTALLATION A. Instill Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. C. Provide grounding electrode conductorand connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together. D. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. F. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. F. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain structures. G. Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying electronic equipment. H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder circuit raceway_ Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 1. Ground each additional separate neutral to ground rods and water service. J. Use 4 AWG minimum copper conductor to ground communications service. K. Isolated ground: connect insulated ground conductor from service ground to device. -.-FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. A. ]aspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. 13. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall- of -potential method. END OF SECTION' i C• 5/30/2012 26 05 26-3 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building TUTS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 26 05 26-4 5/30/2012 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS] ORELEC['RICAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSINFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. I.-, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc_ as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCI'REQUIREVIEN'1'S A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide mamrials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: I . Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system, expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions_ Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. _ 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. ' 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.2 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: - 1. UniStrut - s'3 5/30/2012 26 05 29-1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 2, B-[_inc. 3. Allied. 4, Kindorf, 5. Or approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized (wet, damp locations) of painted steel (dry locations). PART 3 ENECUTION 3.1 IN'SfALLA'I'1 ON A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. provide anchors, 13stencrs, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Ito not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use ponder -actuated anchors. F. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Lse spring lock washers under all nuts. H. Ltstatl surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimmn of four anchors. 1. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SEC 140N 26 05 29-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 33.13 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL LI SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Fittings and conduit bodies. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Requirements - Division 7 - Roof penetrations and fire stopping. B. Section 26 OS 33.16 - Boxes. C. Section 26 OS 26 - Grounding and Bonding_ D. Section 26 05 29 - Supporting Devices. E. Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification. L3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. ANSVN]'PA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." F. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC -40 and EPC -80). G. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing_ _ .. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 5/30/2012 26 05"33.13-4' CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 15 PROTECT RECORD DOCUN ENTS A. Submit under provisions of 26 05 00. B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 1" inches. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMEN 1'S A. Conform to requirements ofANSUNTP_170. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwi iters Laboratories, Inc as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. 1.7DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver. store, protect. and handle Products to site underprovisionsOfDivisionOne- GeneralRcquiicments. B. Acccpt conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosionand entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1..8 PROTECT CONDITIONS A. Verifi that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. Conduit routine is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch in interior, 3/4 inch exterior. B. Underground Installations: I. Site: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or nonmetallic PVC conduit. PVC conduit may only be used per local code. 2. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit. intetnediatemetal conduit or thinwall nonmetallic conduit. 3. D7inimma Size: 3,'4 inch. 4. PVC conduit may be used below grade per code, but not for elbows or stub tips. PVC conduit may be run up inside light pole bases if allowed by local code. C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit . - ll. In Slab Above Grade: <-a ..., 26 05 33.13-2 5130/20=12 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 1. Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing conduit. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: I inch. Maintain a minimum of 2" concrete covering. Run conduits within concrete parallel to each other and spaced on center at least three times the conduit trade size. Conduits over 1 inch may not be installed in slabs without approval of Architect. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or PVC (where not subject to damage) per code. F. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Republic Steel. 2. Allied. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB I; material to match body. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUH A. Manufacturers: 1. Electri-Flex. 2. Alflex Corp. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Description: interlocked steel construction. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Electri-Flex. 2. Alflex Corp. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: ANSUNEMA FBI. 25 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: I. Republic Steel. 5/30/2012 c, J 26 05 83.13-3 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 2. Allied. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Description: ANSI C30.3; galvanized tubing. C. fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEM , FB I; set screw crnnreotors and couplings may be used on interior EMT conduit. PART EXECU"FION 3.1 INSTALLATION' - A. Install conduit in accordance with N -ECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack usiagsteel channel; provide space oneach for 25 percent additional conduits. F_ Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary, supports H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. 1. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpeadicular to walls. L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. M. Do not cross conduits in slab. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings;. fasten securely. _ R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry sand. clean before joining. Apply ftill even coat of cementto entire area inserted in fitting. A]JoiW joint:to cure for 20 minutes, miturnut. -- 26 05 33.13-4 -5%30/201.2 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building S. Use conduithubs or sealing lockouts to fasten conduitto sheetmetal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. I Install no more than equivalent ofthree 90 -degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes indirection, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53. AA. All conduit to be concealed, except in mechanical rooms. If accessible walls and ceilings are present in mechanical rooms, conduits and devices will also be concealed. Surface wiring to be used only were absolutely necessary. 3.2 fNTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduitto preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods as recommended by manufacturer and underthe general provisions. All conduits penetrating non -rated walls shall be caulked. B. Route conduit through roof openings forpiping and ductwork orthrough suitable roofjackwith pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installer. 5/30/2012 END OF SECTION i 7 26 05 33.13-5 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building T1IIS PAGE LEFT INNTENTIONALI N BLANK . as 26 05 33.13-6 5130/2012 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 33.16 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Floor boxes. C. Pull and junction boxes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Requirements - Division 7 - Roof Penetrations and Fire Stopping. B. General Requirements - Division 8. C. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas, floor box service fittings, Fre-rated poke -through fittings, and access floor boxes. D. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Alar and Smoke Detection Systems. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB I - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C- NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Muximum). F. NEPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 14 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements if requested. B. Contractor dial I review and stamp all shop drawings prior to submitting them for review. Engi.ni cr will not review any submittals that have not been stamped by the contractor. - 1.5 REGiFLATORY REQUIREMENTS ---- A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.'- , 5/30/2012 26 05 33.16-1 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building B. Provide Products listed and classified b -v Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Conform to all local codes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NT'.N1A OS 1, galvanized sl l,4" square minimum. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported: include 1'2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB L Type FD, aluminum . Provide ;asketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26. 2.2 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS I, fully adjustable, I -112 inches deep or as shown on drawings. B. Material: Cast metal- Formed steel or PVC per drawing. C. Shape: Round, or rectangular as shown on drawings. D. Service Pittings: As specified in Section 26 27 26. 2.3PIILL AND JUNCLION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS I, galvanized steel. B. lunged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 26. C. Surface Mounted Gast Metal Box: N'LN1A 250, Type d; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast is Cast alu niitill al. 2. Cover: 1'111rtish rvidt ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PARTS EXECUTION 3.1 EXANTNATTON A. Verity locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices, and work areas prior to rough -in. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." -- B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings. and as requited for splices, taps, wire polling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. 26 05 33.16-2 5/30%2092 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated and specified in section for outlet device. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 5 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26. P. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet andjunetion boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. 1. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods as required. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. R. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. U. Support boxes independently of conduit. J V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. W. Use gang box with plaster ring ton single device outlets. _ X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. �\ 5/30/2012 26 05 33.16-3 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Y. Use cast floor boxes for installations in stab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. Z. Set floor boxes level. AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry- locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected under Section 26 05 33.16. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust floor box flush vvith finish floorin_ material. B. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush v<ith finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.5 CLLANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. EN`D OF SECTION 26 05 33.16-4 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 53 IDE -N I111CATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Ittdicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory rcquiremcnts. Include instructions for storage, handling protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product. 1.5 REGULATORY REOUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable farpurpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. -" B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with black letters on white background in shop/mechanical areas or black letters on clear background in office areas. i 5/30/2012 2B 05 53-T IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets. D. Letter Size: I. Use 1/8 or 1;4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 or 112 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Manufacturers I. Brady self [aminating type. 2. Substitutions: Cnder provisions of Division One- General Requ6cincutt. B. Description: sell=laminating type wire mai9cers. C. Legend: 1. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings and/or shop drawings. 2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNTK(3 PAPE A. Description: 4 inch wide (minimum) tape. colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines; HTU6Y-E '!v7odel as manufactured by Panduit or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive natneplates and labels. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate and/or label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape pe trench at 12 inches above conduit. END OF SECTION 26 05 53-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 05 83 WIRING CONNECTIONS PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 33.13 - Conduit. B. Section 26 05 19 - Building Wire and Cable. C. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes. 13 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. 1.4 REGULATORS' REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwrites Laboratories, Inc. as suitable forpurpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under all other sections. B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. C. Determine connection locations and requirements. D. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. E. Sequence eleelrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. PART PRODUCTS --- 5/30/2012 260583-1 WIRING CONNECTIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. All motor provided under other sections. PART 3 EXLCC'lION 3.1 EJiADIINATION A. Verifv conditions. B. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 32 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufactuuer's instructions. B. Makc conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable fortemperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. D. Provide receptacle outlet Ni here connection with attachment plug is indicated Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is indicated. E. Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for card connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. F. Install disconnect switches. controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated. G. Modify equipment control white with terminal bloekjumpers as indicated. H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated. I. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings. END OF SECTION 4 e 26 05 83-2 5/30/2012 WIRING CONNECTIONS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECT70N 26 09 16 ELECTRIC CONTROLS AND RELAYS PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pushbutton and selector switches. B. Control stations. C. Relays. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 27 16 - Enclosures: Cabinets and terminal blocks. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. C. NEMA JCS 6 - Enclosures for industrial Controls and Systems. D. NEMA ST 1 - Standard for Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type.) E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SLIBMITFALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit to NEMA ICS 1 indicating control panel layouts, wiring connections and diagrams, dimensions, support points. C. Product Data: Provide for each component showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NEPA 70. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for,-patpose specified and indicated. 5/30/2012 26 09 16-1 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS --, Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C. Conform to all local requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL SWITCHES AND STATIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 30mm. 2. Siemens 30mm. 3. GE 30mm. 4. Cutler-Hautmer 30mm. B. Contacts: NEMA ICS 2.1 orm C. C. Contact Ratings: NEMA ICS 2, Al s0. D. Selector Switches Operators: Two, Three position rotary selector switch. E. Pushbutton Operator: Unguarded, Recessed, Shrouded, Shielded. Covered or lockable type per drawings. F. Control Stations: Heavy duty oiltight type pushbutton station. 2 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAYS A. Manufacturers: I . Square D 2. Siemens 3. GE 4. Cutler -hammer B. Magnetic Control Relays: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300. C. Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form C, per drawing. D. Contact Ratings: NEMA ICS 2. Class A150, per drawing. E. Coil Voltage: per drawing PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. install individual relays and time delay relays in enclosures. C. Install cabinets under the provisions of Section 26 27 16. D. Make electrical wiring interconnections as indicated. END OF SECTION 26 09 16-2 -5/30/2012 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS .. 3 Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 21 16 LOW -VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Service racks. B. Metering transformer cabinets. C. Meter bases. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 24 13 - Distribution Switchboards: Metering hansfomter compartment. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. All local codes. D. Utility requirements and specifications. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: 1201240 Volts, single phase, three -wire, 60 Hertz per drawings. B. ServiccEmranee: Underground. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit Utility Company prepared drawings if required by utility. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility Company: MidAmerican Fnergy. B. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. - -" 5/30/2012 =i 2621 16-1 LOW -VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND- ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE Iowa City Public Warks Warm Storage Building C. Maintain one copy ofIJul try requirements on site. 1.A REGULATORY REQUIRENTF-NTS A. Conform to requirements of NEPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. Products: Listed and classified by underwriters Laboratones, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. G. Conform to all local codes. 1.9 PRE -INS LALLATION MEETING A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Pre -installation meeting. B. Coordinate with utilit% as required. Review service entrance requirements and details with Utility Company representative. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 METERING A. Provide metering as shown on drawings. All metering to meet utility requirements, B. Description: Aluminum cabinet with hinged door, conforming to Utility Compam requirements, with provisions for locking and sealing on services above 200 Amp. Steel metering cabinet on 200 Amp services. PARI' 2.2 EXECUTION 2.3 PREPARATION A. Arrange with Utility Company to obtain pennanent electric service to the Protect. 2.4 FNS"IALLATION A. Install service rack, weatherhead and/or metering as required by Utility Company. 2.5 UTILITY CHARGES A. All utility service installation costs charged by utility to be paid by owner. B. General contractor to pay for electrical enerey used on the temporar7 and permanent service until the building is complete and turned over to the owner. EVD Ol SECTION 2621 16-2 5/3,0/2012- LOW- VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Distribution parelboards. B. Branch circuit panelboards. C. Load centers (only if shown on drawings). 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 29 - Supporting Devices. B. Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of installation." B. NENIA AB 1 -Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrical Control Dcvices, Controllers, and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. F. NEMA PB I - Panclboards. F, NEMAPB 1.1 - Tustructions for Sale Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. G. NIT A 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacily, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. C. Conti actor shall review and stamp all shop drawings prior to submitting thein for review. Engineer will not review any submittals that have not been stamped by the contractor. - - 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement.__. - 5/30/2012 26 24 16-1 PANELBOARDS 1.6 OPERATION AND MAl\"PENANCE DATA Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements, B. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one cope of document on site. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer. I.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Provide two of each panelboard key. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Provide all accessories as needed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFAC"rURERS A. General Electric. - -,-5 B. Square D. C. Cutler -Hammer. D. Siemens ITE. E. Above manufacturers to provide equipment equal to that shown on drawings. I 2.2DISTRTBUTION PANF,LBOARDS 2624 16-2 5/3012012 PANELBOARDS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type. B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 65,000 amperes rnrs symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 18,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards or as indicated on drawings. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1. Provide bolt -on circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: NEMA AB 1. Provide bolt -on circuit breakers with replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. F. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMAAB 1. Provide bolt on circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically reseting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let -through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK -5 fuse. G. Provide circuit breaker accessory trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated. H. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type I(indoor/dry) Type 3R (outdoor/wet/damp). 1. Cabinet Front: Recessed or surface type. Provide hinged door with flush lock. Finish in manufacturers standard gray enamel. 2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Lightingand Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type_ B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated. D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. E. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1. Provide bolt -on circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically reseting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical amperes, let -through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK -5 fuse. F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Typc 1 (indoor/dry), Type 3R (outdoor/wet/damp) G. Cabinet box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. 5/30/2012 26''416-3 PANELQOARDS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 11. Cabinet Front: Plush or Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturers standard gray 2.4 LOAD CENTERS A. Load Centers: Circuit breaker load center, with bus ratings as indicated. Load centers may only be used if indicated on the drawings. B. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes tuts symmetrical. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: N-EMA AB 1, plug -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers CL listed as Type SV4D for lighting circuits. Provide IA_ Class A ground fault interrupter circuit br'eaker's where indicated, Do nor use tandem circuit breakers. D. Enclosure: General Purpose or rainproof per drawinp. E. Box: Flush or Surface type with door, and lock on door. Finish in manufacturers standard gray enamel. PART 3 EXECi:TTON 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB Lt. B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelhoards flush with wall finishes. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. C. lleighr: 6 ft to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 ft with bottom no more than 4 inches (10 cm) above floor. D. Provide tiller plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panetboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 OS 93. G. ProN ide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboardto an accessible locationalbove ceihng or below floor. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty I inch . Identify each as SPARE. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under Division One - General Requirements B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. 'Maintain proper phasing for nmlti-wire branch circuits. C.A'isualandXlechanicalinspection: Inspect for physical damage. proper alignment, anchrn'age, add, ground ing. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers. fusible switchcs, and fuses - 26 24 16-4 5/30/2012 PANELBOARDS.-` Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building THIS PAGE LETT EN TENTIONALLY BLANK 26 24 16-6 5'/30/2012 PANELBOARDS Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 27 16 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Terminal blocks. C. Accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 29 - Supporting Devices. 1.3REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. G ANSINFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 REGULATOR/' REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified byUndenwitersLaboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTL!RURS A. Hoffman. B. Saginaw. C. Or approved equal. 2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES . A. Construction: NFMA 250, Type 1, 3R, 4,4x steel enclosure as required for application"'. - B. Covers: Continuous hinge, beld closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver. Outdoor enclosures to have hasp and staple for padlock. - 5/30/2012 2627 16-1 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C, Provide interior metal panel for mounting tcninnal blocks and electrical cotnponents; finish with white enamel D. Enclosure Finish: A7all ufaeturer's standard enamel. 2.3rIERMINALBLOCKS A. Manufacturers: I. Allcn-Bredlcv. 2, Culler -Hammer. 3, General Electric. 4. Square D. B. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NLNIA TCS 4. C. Powcr Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and mbularprzssure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. D. Si-ual and Control Terminals: 1N4odular construction type. suitable for channel mounting with tubular pressure screw connectors. rated 300 volts. E. Provide ground bus terminal block. with each connector bonded to enclosure. Ground enclosure door. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic RacewaN I. Hoffman. 2. Panduit. 3. TS°ion. 4. Description: Slotted. light gray with cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMNATION A. Coordinate installation with other trades. B. V erif% that surfaces are ready to receive Work. 3.2INSTALLA'110N A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to trall and structural supports at each corner. YND OF SEC]10-N 26 27 16-2 5/30/201.2 ' ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. I7. Device plates and decorative box covers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEhL4 WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Contractor shall review and stamp all shop drawings prior to submitting them for review. Engineer will not review any submittals that have not been stamped by the contractor. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70. ' B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable fortlie purpose specified, 5/30/2012 26 27 26-1 WIRING DEVICES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building and indicated. C. Conform to all local codes. PART2 PRODUC`1'S 2.1 WALL SWLICIILS ,1. Single Pole Switch: 1. Lcviton: CSB I-20 20 Amp commercial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: 20 Anip commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: 20 Amp commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. Double Pole Switch: 1. Leviton: CSB2-20 20 Amp commercial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: 20 Amp commercial specification grade equal to Leviton_ 3. Eagle: 20 Amp commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. C. Three-way Switch: 1. Leviton: CSB3-20 20 Amp commercial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: 20 Amp commercial specification made equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: 20 Amp commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. D. Four-way Switch: 1. Leviton: CS134-20 20 Amp commercial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: 20 Amp commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. 3. Eaglc: 20 Amp commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. F.. Indicator Switch: 1. Leviton: 122 IPL_ 1222PL, 1223PL 20 Amp industrial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: 20 Amp industrial specification grade equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: 20 Amp industrial specification grade equal to Leviton. Locator Switch: 1. Leviton: 1221LH_ 1223LI1 20 Amp industrial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: 20 Amp industrial specification grade equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: 20 Amp industrial specification grade equal to Leviton. G. Substitutions: under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. H. Color: Per architect and owner. 2.2 INCANDESCENT WALL DLVIMERS A. Manufacturers 1. Lithonia: per drawing. 2. Leviton: Equal to specified. 3. Lutron: Equal to specified 4. Substitutions: under provisions of Division One -General -Requirements. - - B. Description: NEMA WD 1, architectural grade preset slide control dimmer for incand'e'scent lamps. - 26 27 26-2 5/30/2012 WIRING DEVICES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C. Power rating as needed for circuit or as indicated on drawing. D. Color: Per architect and owner. Switches on emergency power shall be red. 2.3 RECEPTACLES Single Convenience Receptacle: 1. Leviton: 5088 15 Amp, 5891 20 Amp commercial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: commercial specification grade equal to Leviton . Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1. Leviton: BR15 15 Amp, BR20 20 Amp commercial specification grade. 2_ Hubbell: commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: commercial specification grade equal to Leviton. C. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Leviton: Interior - 7599 Smart lock pro 15 Amp GFCI, 7899 Smart lock pro 20 Amp GFCI. Interior tamper resistant - T7599 Smart lock pro 15 Amp GFCI, T7899 Smart lock pro 20 Amp GFCI. Exterior weather resistant - W7599 Smart lock pro 15 Amp GFCI, W7899 Smart lock pro 20 Amp GFCI. Exterior weather and tamper resistant- W7599 -TR Stuart lock pro 15 Amp GFCI, W7899 -TR Smart lock pro 20 Amp GFCI. 2. Hubbell: Equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: Equal to Leviton. 4. Weather resistant in damp or wet locations. D. Isolated Ground Receptacle: 1. Leviton: 52624G 15 Amp, 5362 -IG 20 Amp industrial specification grade. 2. Hubbell: industrial specification grade equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: industrial specification grade equal to Leviton. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One -General Requirements. Color: Per architect and owner. Receptacles on emergency power shall be red. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Thermoplastic (nylon). 1. Leviton: 80700 series. 2. Hubbell: Equal to Leviton. 3. Eagle: Equal to Leviton. 4. Substitutions: under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Metal Platte: Surface mount. 1. Appleton: 8300 series or equal. - 2_ Substitutions: under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. , C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed aluminum with hinged gasketed in -use aluminum device cover. ' 1. Red Dot: CKMG series wet location in -use receptacle cover or equal. 1/20/2012 26 27 26-3 WIRING DEVICES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 2. Red Dot: CCT series raintight switch cover or equal. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements_ PARTS EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division I - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning wort:. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. C. Verify, that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed; tested. and ready forconrectionto wiring devices. F. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. 3.2 PREP ARA TION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. ` E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper or branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. H. Install decorative plates on switch. receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. 1. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terniinal. J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. - K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above -accessible " ceilings. and on surface ntotmted outlets. 26 27 26-4 5/30/2012 WIRING DEVICES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Install protective rings on active flusb cover service filings- 3 ttings_ 3.4 INTERFACE W ITH OTHER PRODUCI'S A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 to obtain mounting heights [specified and] indicated on drawings. B. Install top of wall switch box 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install bottom of convenience receptacle box 18 inches above finished floor. D. Install bottom of convenience receptacle box 6 inches above counter or backsplash of counter. E. Install top of box dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. F. Install bottom of telephone jack box 18 inches above finished floor, G. Install top of telephone jack box for side -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished floor. H. Install top of telephone jack box for forward -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 above finished floor. 1. Coordinate installation of access floor boxes with accessfloorsystemprovidedunderDivisionOne- General Requirements. J. Coordinate the installation of wiring devices with underfloor duct service fittings. 3.5 FIELD QUALIFY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verity proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. c - 3.7CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. 1/20/2012 26 27 26-5 WIRING -DEVICES Iowa City Public Works Warin Storage Building END OF SF,CTION 26 27 26-6 5/3012012' WIRING DEVICES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses for switchboards, distribution equipment, motor control centers, combination starters, transformer protection and disconnect switches. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16441. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. C. Conform to all local codes. PAR'f2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann. B. Gould Shawnmt. C. Littelfuse. 2.2 FUSE REQUIREMENTS A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. ' B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase -to -phase voltage.: , C. Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L current limiting time delay_? - -9 D. Main Service Switches: Class RK1 time delay. - 5/30/2012 26 28 13-1 FUSES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building E. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RKl time delay. F. Lighting Load Leedcr Switches: Class RKI time delay. G. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 time delay, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INS'I ALL-ATION A. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SLCTION -i 2628 13-2 5%30/2092 FUSES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 28 16.16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL I_I SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. C. Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. B. NFPA70- National Electrical Code. C. UL 198C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. D. UL 198E- Class R Fuses. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. D. Contractor shall review and stamp all shop drawings prior to submitting them for review. Engineer will not review any submittals not stamped by the contractor. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS - A. Manufacturer: Company specializing inmanufacturing Products specifiedinthis Section withniihimrun ten years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS — 5/30/2012 2628 16.16-1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. 1.7 EX7'RA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Provide three of each size and type fuse installed. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric. B. Square D. C. Cuder-Hammer. D. Siemens%ITL. E. Above manufacturers to provide equipment equal to that shown on drawings 2.2 ENCLOSED SW'iTCHES A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA ICS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1. Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosures: NE-'vLA KS 1. I. Interior Dry Locations: Type]. 2. Exterior Locations: T}pe3R. 3. Wash down locations: Type 4,4X_ 2.3 FUSES A. Manufacturers: I. Bussmann 2. Gould Shawnmt. 3. Littelfuse. B. Description: Dual element. current limiting, time dela}, one-time fuse. 250, 600 volt; UL 198L, Class RK 1. C. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 26 28 16.16-2 5/30/2012 ENCLOSED SWITCHES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. Install disconnect switches where indicated. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. C. Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size for replacement. END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 2628 16.16-3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building THIS PAGE 1.EP1 1NTMMONALLYBI ANK 26 28 16.16-4 5/30/2012 ENCLOSED SWITCHES Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts. E. Fluorescent dimming ballasts and controls. F. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply, G. Lamps. H. Luminaire accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 05 33.16 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High- Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps — Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. C. ANSI 082.4 - Ballasts for Higlr-intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type). D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. ANSL NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. - F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements. I A SUBMITTALS i A. Submit tinder provisions of Division One - General Requirements. mea c, B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard produet of the 5/30/2012 2651 00-1 INTERIOR LIGHTING manufacturer. Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatorr Requirements. E. Nlanufacturer's htstructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. F. Contractor shall review and stamp all shop drawings prior to submitting them for review. Lngineerveill not review any submittals that have not been stamped by the contractor. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Acquirements. B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list. 1.6 QUALIFICA'T'IONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQL:IREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSUNFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), B. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 101 C. Furnish products listed and classified by UnderuvritersLaboratories. Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. D. Conform to all local codes. PART PRODUCTS 21 LUMNAIRES A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings. B. Install ballasts, lamps. and specified accessories at factory. 22 EMERGENCY LiGH"IING UNITS A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings. 23 EXIT SIGNS A. Furnish products as specified in schedules on drawings. 2.4 BALLASTS 2651 00-2 INTERIOR LIGHTING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building A. Fluorescent Ballast 1. Advance. 2. Universal. 3. Velmont. 4. Motorola. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. 6. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Tue. B. High Intensity Discharge tH1D) Ballast: 1. Advance. 2. Universal. 3, Velmont. 4_ Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. 2.5 LAMPS A. Incandescent Lamp MantEacturels: 1. General Electric. 2. Phillips.. 3. Sylvania. 4. Suhstitulions: Under provisions of Division One- General Requiremearts. B. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Phillips. 3. Sylvania. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. 2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS Per drawings. 1. Leviton 2. Wattstopper 3. Or equal. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One- General Requirements. 2.7 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS A. Lighting control panel: 1. Leviton Greenma. series. 2. Lithonia: equal to specified. 3. lntermatic: equal to specified. 4. GE TLC series: equal to specified. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division Once General Acquirements. I a B. Override switches with pilot light: 1. PCI RP2 or AML series. - y 2. Lithonia LVMS series. - 3. GE R series. - 5/30/2012 26 51 00-3 INTERIOR LIGHT(NG Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for hnninaires. B. Examine each luminaire to determinc suitability for lamps specified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufaenrtors instructions. B. Install suspended luminaires and exit sic is using, pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. C. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framht;. D. Locate recessed ceiling lwuinaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. E. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to al igo with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. G. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meetregulalory requirements for fire rating. H. Install clips to secure recessed -'rid-supported luminaires in place. L Install wall mounted luminaires. emergenec lighting units and exitsigns atlteight as indicated on Drawings. J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Connect luminaires . emergency lightia'units add exit si-Ms to branch circuit outlets proN ided underSeciion 26 05 33.16 using flexible conduit as indicated. L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grouncling conductor. N. Install specified lamps in each luminaire, emergengv lighting unit and exit sign. 3.3 FIELD QUALIT}• CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. _ 3.4ADJl-STING - - a A. Adjust Rork under provisions of Division One -General Requirements. 2651 00-4 5/302012 INTERIOR LIGHTING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building B. Aim and adjust luminaires as required. C. Adjust exit sign directional arrows as indicated. D. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean Work under provisions of Division One - Genral Requirements. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration. END OF SECTION 5/30/2012 Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building THIS PACE LEE] 1NTENTiONALLY BLANK 2651 00-6 5/3A/2012 INTERIOR LIGHTING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires and accessories. B. Poles. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Foundations for poles. 13 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and lligh- intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps- Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High -Intensity -Discharge and Low -Pressure Sodium Lamps ('Multiple -Supply Type). D. ANSI 05.1 - Specifications and Dimensions for Wood Poles. E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. ANSVIES RP -8 - Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting. G. ANSVIES RP -20 - Lighting for Parking Facilities. 1.4 SS'STEM DESCRIPTION A. Roadway lighting per drawings. B. Parking area lighting per drawings. 1.5 SUBMPITALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Shap Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire which is not a.stnndard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, 5/30/2012 26 56 00-1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building installation, and starting of product. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT . -S A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Acem"ately record actual locations of each luminaire and conduit. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for maintaining luminaires. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacnger: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with mininumrthreo years experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements ofANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by [[Jnderwriters Laboratories, Inc.] [testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction] as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Conform to all local codes. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site underprovisions oflliN ision One- General Requirements. B. Accept products on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect poles from finish damage by handling carefidl,-. D. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI 05.1. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as specified in schedule on Drawings. B. Substitutions. No substitutes accepted after bids are turned in. -- - C. Mounting: As specified on drawings. 26 56 00-2 5/3D/2012` EXTERIOR LIGHTING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building D. Accessories: I. Provide photocell and control per drawings.. 2.2 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Advance. 2. GF.. 3_ Or equal. 4. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electromagnetic ballast. 5. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified. 6. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. 7. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. High intensity Discharge (HID) Ballast: 1. Advance. 2. GE. 3. Or equal. 4. Description: ANSI C82.3.4, mercury vapor, metal halide, low pressure sodium, high pressure sodium lamp ballast. 5. Provide ballast suitable for lamp specified. 6. Voltage: Match luminairevoltagc. 23 LAMPS A. Incandescent Lamp Manufacturers: 1. Phillips 2. GE. 3. SO%ania. 4_ Or approved equal. B. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturer s: 1. Phillips. 2. GE. 3. Sylvania. 4. Or approved equal. C. High Tntcnsity Discharge (HID) Lamp Manufacturers: I. Phillips. 2. GE. 3. Sylvania. 4. Or approved equal. D. Provide lamp type specified for luminaire. - r, 1:. Reflector LampBcamPatterns: ANSI C78379. 2.4 POLES 5/30/2012 26 56 QQ-3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING A. T,4anufacturers: Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building L Per schedule on drawings, B. Material and Finish: per drawing. C. Accessories: I. Handhole. D. Loading Capacity Ratings: 1. Verify pole loadin, capacity is not exceeded. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAi F NATION A. Examine excavation and concrete foundation for lighting poles. 13. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified. 32INS 'IALLAI ION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install lighting poles at locations indicated. C. Install poles plumb. Provide double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base. D. Install lamps in each luminaire. E. Bond luminaires ,metal accessories and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. 3AADNS'TI IG A. Adjust work under provisions ofDivision One - Genet -it Acquirements. B. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution indicated on Drawings or as directed. ` C. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Date of Substantial Completion" ` f ; 3.5 CLEANING --- A. Clean work under provisions of Division One - General Requirements. - B. Clean electrical parts to remoec conductive and deleterious materials. - 26 56 00-4 5/30/2012' EXTERIOR LIGHTING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OP SECTION 5/30/2012 26 56 00-5 EXTERIOR LIGHTING Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building TMS PAGE LEFT IYEENTIONALLYKANK 26 56 00-6 5/30/2012 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 12� "Onniw Prepared by: Melissa Clow, Public works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319)356-5413 RESOLUTION NO. 12-306 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE TO BIDDERS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the General Obligation Bonds account #38389. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 3:00 p.m. on the 19`h day of July, 2012. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 315` day of July, 2012, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 19th day of June , 20 12 ATTEST: A&eL zr1 CITY'CLERK pwengkes\pwarmstorage-appp&s.doc 6/12 � MAYOR Approved by X_ - �i City Attorney's Office Resolution No. 12-306 Page 2__ It was moved by Dickens and seconded by Pay IP the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgruorton Publish 6/25 NOTICE TO BIDDERS PUBLIC WORKS COMPLEX WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 3 P.M. on the 19th day of July, 2012. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee- Bids sub- mitted by fax machine or email shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 31st day of July, 2012. The Project will involve the following: Construction of a pre -fabricated steel or wood frame structure with four (4) overhead doors and a poured concrete floor. The project will include floor drains and a sanitary sewer connection, water service and electric heat. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Kueny Architects, L.L.C., of Pleasant Prairie, Wisconsin, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) year(s) from and after its completion and formal accep- tance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Working Days: 64 Specified Start Date: August 1, 2012 Liquidated Damages- $100 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of the Engineering Division of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $40 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to the City of Iowa City. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals at (515) 281-5796 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s)_ The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontrac- tors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Printer's Fee $ Qa. aLo CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN FED.ID#42-0330670 I, sRi &viii calXk� being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN,a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): T N6�- I r 12- Legal C e Subscribed and sworn to b me this i /'4` day o£ A.D. 21 Notary Public 4ol g MOAK" Cath nMicn Nijilln 73261 My Commissar Expires January 27, 201u OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS', Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifica- tions, forms of contract and esti- mated costs for the construction of the: 1. U.S. Highway 6 and Sycamore Street Intersection Improvement Project 2.2012 Muscatine Avenue Water Main Improvements Project 3. Highway 1 Trail Project - Orchard Street to Sunset Street 4. Public Works Complex - Warm Storage Building Project in said city at 7',00 p.m. on the 19th day of June, 2012, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is can- celled, atthe next meeting of the City Council thereafter as post- ed by the City Clerk. _ Said plans, specifications, forms of contract and estimated costs are now on file In the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall In Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments con- cerning said plans, specifications, contracts or the costs of making said improvements. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK ev as m3 June 11, 2012 Prepared by: Melissa Clow, Special Projects Administrator, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356-5413 RESOLUTION NO. 12-362 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT. WHEREAS, Septagon Construction Company, Inc. of Cedar Rapids, IA has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $208,885.00 for construction of the above-named project, and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Warm Storage Building, Napoleon Park Public Works account # 3970. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: The contract for the construction of the above-named project is hereby awarded to Septagon Construction Company, Inc., subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above-named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The Public Works Director is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above-named project. Passed and approved this 31st day of rule 20 12 MAYOR App oved by r� ATTEST: CITY CLERK City Attorney's Office It was moved by Payne and seconded by Dobyns the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: X Champion X Dickens _ X— Dobyns X Hayek X Mims X Payne Throgmorton Printer's Fee CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN FED.ID#42-0330670 1, being duly sworn) say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper _(_ time(s), on the following date(s): Subscribed and sworn to bef e fne this ay of R A.D. 20j,). _• Notary Public OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE TO BIDDERS PUBLIC WORKS COMPLEX WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 3 P.M. on the 19th day of July, 2012. Sealed propos- als will be opened "immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine or email shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for pur- poses of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Haat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 31st day of July, 2012. The Project will involve the fallow- ing: Construction of a pre -fabricated steel or wood frame structure with four (4) overhead doors and a poured concrete floor. The project will include floor drains and a sani- tary sewer connection, water ser- vice and electric heat, All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans are specifications prepared by Kueny Architects, L.L.C., of Pleasant Prairie, Wisconsin, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clark. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the Scate of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful perfor- mance of the contract and mainte- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the low- est two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred per- cent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of two (2) year(s) from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Working Days: 64 Specified Start Date: August 1, 2012 Liquidated Damages: $100 per day The plans, specifications and pro- posed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of the Engineering Division of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. A $40 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifica- tions provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to the City of Iowa City. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals at (515j281-5796 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the con- tract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extend- ed dollar amounts Byvirtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to prod- ucts and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder prefer- ence law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive techni- calities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK. ro.row.or:,, June 25, 2012 ADDENDUM NO. 1 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT IOWA CITY, IA ISSUED July 9, 2012 FROM: Melissa Clow, Engineering Division, City of Iowa City Jon Wallenkamp, Kueny Architects, L.L:C. Part 1: Revisions to the Project Manual 1.1 Geotechnical Report A. ADD SECTION: "00 31 32 GEOTECHNICAL DATA" immediately following the Table of Contents. 1.2 Pre -Bid Substitutions A. ADD SECTION: 'PRE-BID SUBSTITUIONS" (PS -1 through PS -4) to the front ends immediately following Instruction To Bidders (IB). r I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed N., Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa .......... ;, L�O' ``tea JOHN F.. 7 Z nature) (date) zSCMIDBAUER e m _ �v 17116 My license renewal date is December 31, 2013 ..ZO1N P % ��flllll�' % r THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING SECTION 00 3132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. A limited number of borings have been made for the Owner. The records made during the boring operations are attached for informational purposes only. The report was obtained for the Architect/Engineer's use in design and has been included in this specification. In transmitting information regarding the materials expected to be encountered, the Architect/Engineer does not guarantee the accuracy or completeness of the data given, and assumes no responsibility for the data or its subsequent use(s). The Contractor shall draw their own conclusions from whatever information is available through the report, through the Owner's Representative, Arch itect/EngIneer or through other means. 1. The locations of utility mains, structures, and service connections plotted on these drawings are approximate only and were obtained from records made available to Kueny Architects, L.L.C. There may be other existing utility mains, structures and service connections not known to Kueny Architects, L.L.C. and not shown on the drawings. The verification of existence and the determination of the exact location of utility mains, structures and service connections shall be the responsibility of the construction contractor(s). 2. The Contractor is responsible for locating subsurface utilities prior to starting construction. B. All grading, excavation, and backfilling shall be in accordance with the Geotechnical Report prepared by Terracon Consultants, dated February 18, 2000 and Job No. 06995251.01 located at the end of this section. C. The site plan provided In the provided Geotechnical Report was preliminary and does not match the master plan design. PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED 0031 32-1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA July 6, 2012 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED PUBLIC WORKS FACILITY IOWA CITY, IOWA JOB NO. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 prepared for: CITY OF IOWA CITY Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Prepared by: TERRACON Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52406 lrerrac®n February 18, 2000 City of Iowa City Civic Center 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Attention: Mr. Charles J. Schmadeke, P.E. Director of Public Works RE: Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Public Works Facility Iowa City, Iowa Job No. 06995251.01 Dear Mr. Schmadeke: Irerracon 5655 Willow Crook Drive S.W. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404 (319) 3668321 Fax: (319) 366-0032 We are submitting the subsurface exploration results for the referenced project. The attached report presents the findings of the subsurface exploration and provides recommendations regarding the design and construction of the foundations, floor slabs, and pavement sections for the Public Works Facility, as well as preliminary recommendations for the proposed future development. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you and look forward in assisting you during the construction phase. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service to you, please contact us. Sincerely, TERRACON Brian r: M51, E.l.,:, Project Engineer 3 FG:AM G/arndV eports0699,9251.01 Enclosures Copies to: Addressee (2) Mr, Mark Logan, MMS Consultants (1) A'5�- "ndr !R. Cal --t, P.E. Iowa No. 13430 Arizona ■ Arkansas 7 Colorado ■ Deorgla ■ Idaho ■Illinois ■ Iowa ■ Kansas ■ Kentucky ■ Mlnnenuia: Mlosnond ■ Monlana Nebraska 11 Nevada 111New Mexico ■ Oklahoma klahoa ■ Tennessee ■ Texas ■ Utah ■ Wisconsin Wyoming Quality Engineering Sinoe 1965 vE .�a Arizona ■ Arkansas 7 Colorado ■ Deorgla ■ Idaho ■Illinois ■ Iowa ■ Kansas ■ Kentucky ■ Mlnnenuia: Mlosnond ■ Monlana Nebraska 11 Nevada 111New Mexico ■ Oklahoma klahoa ■ Tennessee ■ Texas ■ Utah ■ Wisconsin Wyoming Quality Engineering Sinoe 1965 TABLE OF CONTENTS CoverLetter ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----- i INTRODUCTION------------------------•--•---•------------------------------------------------------------1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ------------------ ----------------- ------------------------- -------------- __._.-.1 SITE EXPLORATION PROCEDURES-•-----------------------------------------------------------------2 FieldExploration------------•------------------•--------.---.-••------------------------------------ --.-2 LaboratoryTesting --------------------- ...--------- —------------------------- — ----- — --------------- ----2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ------------ —------------------------------------------ — ------------------ —--- 3 Geology ------------------------•-------- -------------------------•----•--•--•-------------------------------3 SoilConditions --------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------ ----3 GroundwaterConditions ----------------------------------------------- ----------------------------- —--- 3 Engineering Recommendations --------- ---------------------------------- ------------------------ ------ 4 Geotechnical Considerations--------------------------------------------•-------•------------•----------4 FoundationSupport----••----•---------------------------------------------------------------------------4 Office Building, Enclosed Garage, and Warehouse/Storage Buildings -----------------4 Vehicle Maintenance Shop, Truck Wash, and Pump Canopy --------------------------------5 General Foundation Recommendations -------------------------------------------------------------5 FoundationExcavations --------------- —---------------------------------------- — ------------------- — ---- 5 Floor Slab Design and Construction-------------------------------------------------------•----------6 Pavements--------------------------------- --------------------------------------------- — --------------- ------ 7 Earthwork-------•---------------•-----------•-----•-------•---•--•-------------------------------------------8 GENERALCOMMENTS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------ 10 APPENDIX A Location Diagram Boring Logs APPENDIX B General Notes Unified Soil Classification System GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED PUBLIC WORKS FACILITY IOWA CITY, IOWA JOB NO, 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 INTRODUCTION Subsurface exploration for the proposed Public Works Facility to be located southwest of the intersection of Napoleon Lane and South Gilbert Street In Iowa City, Iowa has been completed. Thirty-seven (37) borings were proposed at this site; however, due to the inaccessibility of some borings, a total of thirty-five (35) soil borings were performed for this development. The individual boring logs and a Boring Location Diagram are included with this report. The purpose of this report was to obtain subsurface information and, based on this data, provide recommendations regarding the design and construction of the foundations, floor slabs, pavements, and general site preparation for the proposed Public Works Facility, as well as preliminary recommendations for a possible future expansion area. PROJECT DESCRIPTION It is our understanding the proposed development will be located southwest of the intersection of Napoleon Lane and South Gilbert Street in Iowa City, Iowa. The Public Works Facility will consist of the construction of four single -story structures, storage bins for sand and salt, a truck wash, and a fueling area. The single -story structures will consist of an approximate 40 foot by 160 foot office building, a 140 foot by 250 foot enclosed garage, a 100 foot by 140 foot combination equipment storage and warehouse building, and a 120 foot by 220 foot vehicle service shop. Structure load and loading conditions were not available at the time of this report; however, we have assumed the structures will be supported by load- bearing walls and individual columns with maximum loads on the order of about 2 to 4 kips per linear foot; and 50 to 75 kips, respectively. ^. future cxp=c on arca v.cst of the vehicle service shop is also being considered. Ancillary construction of parking and drive areas within the facility are also planned. Based on the supplied topographic information, the area of the proposed development is currently relatively level with existing grades ranging from about 648 to 651 feet. We understand the finished floor of the main complex which will consist of the office building, enclosed garage, and equipment storage building will be at an elevation of about 653 feet. The finished floor of the vehicle service shop has not yet been finalized, but is anticipated to be on the order of about 652.5 feet. Based on the anticipated finished floor elevation, fill thicknesses of about 3 feet or less will be required to achieve the finished grade. Minor grade changes are also assumed for the development of parking and drive areas. _ ' Proposed Public Works Facility Terracon Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 SITE EXPLORATION PROCEDURES Field Exploration The field exploration consisted of drilling and sampling thirty-five (35) borings to depths of about 10 to 20 feet below the existing grade. The original boring locations were selected by Terracon personnel based on the supplied site plan; however, these locations were modified by MMS Consultants based on alterations made to the site prior to our mobilization. It should be noted that Borings 30 and 35 were not accessible to the drill rig. The approximate location of each boring Is shown on the attached Boring Location Diagram. The boring locations were staked and surveyed in the field by MMS Consultants; however, the ground surface elevations indicated on the boring logs have been rounded to the nearest 1/2 foot. The location and elevation of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the means and methods used to define them. The borings were drilled with a track -mounted rotary drilling rig using continuous flight solid - stemmed augers to advance the boreholes. Representative samples were obtained using split -barrel sampling procedures in accordance with ASTM Specification D-1586. In the split -barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2 -inch O.D. split -barrel sampling spoon is driven into the ground with a 140 -pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a normal 18 -inch penetration is recorded as the standard penetration resistance value. These values are indicated on the boring logs at the depths of occurrence. The samples were sealed and returned to the laboratory for testing and classification. Field logs of each boring were prepared by the drill crew. These logs included visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling as well as the driller's interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. Final boring logs inoluded with this report represent an interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on laboratory observation and tests of the samples. Laboratory Testing Selected samples retrieved from the borings were tested to determine their natural water contents. A hand penetrometer was used to measure the approximate unconfined compressive strength of the cohesive samples. The hand penetrometer test has been correlated with the unconfined compression test and provides a more reliable estimate of the soil's consistency and strength than visual observation alone. The results of the laboratory tests are shown on the boring logs, adjacent to the soil profiles, at their corresponding sample depths. 2 Proposed Public Works Facility Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 Terracon As part of the testing program, the recovered samples were classified in accordance with the attached General Notes and the Unified Soil Classification System based on the material's texture and plasticity. The estimated group symbol for the Unified Soil Classification System is shown on the boring logs, and a brief description of the Unified System is included in this report. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Geology Geologic information was obtained from a review of the soil survey of Johnson County by the Soil Conservation Service/United States Department of Agriculture. Geologically, the proposed development is located in the Nodaway — Lawson — Waukee Association. In general, these soils consist of stream deposited (alluvial) soils. This area is typified as having a groundwater table greater than 5 feet with somewhat droughty conditions. The sandy soils have a rapid permeability and slow runoff, Soil Conditions Conditions encountered at each boring location are indicated on the Individual boring logs. Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes in soil types, In-situ, the transition between materials may be gradual. Please review the individual boring logs for a detailed description of the soils encountered at this site. Based on the results of the borings, subsurface conditions on the project site can be generalized as follows. The borings generally encountered about 1.5 to 5 feet of dark brown, very loose to medium dense, fine to medium sand with varying amounts of clay, clay nodules, seams, and layers. Where clay layers were encountered, they consisted of stiff to very stiff, sandy lean clay deposits. Below the surficial sand and clay deposits, the borings encountered brown, very loose to medium dense, fine to medium and fine to coarse sand with varying amounts of clay and gravel to the borings' termination depths of about 10 to 20 feet below the existing, ground surface. Groundwater Conditions The borings were monitored during drilling operations for the presence and level of groundwater. Water levels observed in the borings are noted on the individual boring logs. At that time, groundwater was observed at depths of about 19.5 to 20 feet in Borings 9, 11, 16, 21, 25, and 34; however, groundwater was not observed in the remaining borings during drilling operations or in any of the borings during observation of delayed groundwater levels. K Proposed Public Works Facility Terracon Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 Dry cave-in depths ranging from about 6.5 to 18.5 feet were measured when delayed groundwater levels were measured. At the time the borings were drilled, the groundwater table at the boring locations was apparently below the maximum drilling depth. However, it should be noted that the borings were performed during a relatively dry season, and fluctuations in the groundwater table can occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff, river level, and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. In addition, perched water can develop over low permeability soil strata following periods of heavy or prolonged precipitation. This possibility should be considered when developing design and construction plans and specifications for the project. Long term monitoring in cased holes or piezometers would be necessary to accurately evaluate the potential range of groundwater conditions on the site. ENGINEERING RECOMMENDATIONS Geotechnical Considerations Based on the information obtained from the subsurface exploration, it is our opinion that the site soils are suitable to support the proposed structures on spread footings. However, special design and construction considerations will be required due to the presence of very loose to loose sandy deposits. Further details are provided below, Foundation Support Office Building, Enclosed Garage, and Warehouse/Storage Buildings Barings 5,'6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 14, 15, 16, 18, 20, and 21 were performed within this main complex of structures. We understand the finished floor of the proposed complex will be about 653 feet. Based on the topographic information provided, it appears about 3 feet of fill will be required to achieve the desired finished grade. Depending on the foundation bearing elevations, either structural fill or sandy soils will be encountered during foundation excavations. We recommend the sandy soils encountered at the foundation bearing elevation be moisture conditioned and surficially compacted with hand-held vibratory equipment prior to concrete placement. Spread footings designed and constructed as recommended in this report and bearing on properly compacted structural fill or native, medium dense sand could be designed for a maximum net allowable bearing pressure of 2,500 psf, It should be noted that loose sandy deposits may be encountered at the foundation bearing elevation. If it is not possible to improve these soils by means of surficial compaction, we recommend the soils be overexcavated and replaced with well -compacted structural fill as described in the Foundation Excavations section of this report. Thenet bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. 4 Proposed Public Works Facility Terracon Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 Vehicle Maintenance Shop, Truck Wash, and Pump Canopy Barings 3, 25, 26, 30, 34, 35, and 36 were performed within these structures. We understand the finished Floor of the vehicle maintenance shop will be about 652.5 feet. The finished floor of the truck wash is anticipated to be at about 653 feet. Based on the topographic Information provided, it appears less than 3 feet of fill will be required to achieve the desired finished grades Depending on the foundation bearing elevations, either structural fill or sandy soils will be encountered during foundation excavations. We recommend the sandy soils encountered at the foundation bearing elevation be moisture conditioned and surficially compacted with hand-held vibratory equipment prior to concrete placement. Spread footings designed and constructed as recommended in this report and bearing on properly compacted structural fill or native, medium dense sand could be designed for a maximum net allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 psf, The net bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. The allowable bearing pressure presented above could be increased by 33% for resistance to transient loading such as that due to wind. General Foundation Recommendations The wall bearing footings should be designed with a minimum width of 15 inches, while the " individual column footings should have minimum widths of 2.5 feet. Perimeterfootings and footings beneath unheated areas should be designed with a minimum embedment depth of 3.5 feet, as measured from the base of the footing to the lowest adjacent outside grade for frost protection. The actual magnitude of settlement that will occur beneath the foundations would depend upon the variations within the subsurface soil profile, the actual structural loading conditions, the embedment depth of the footings, the actual thickness of compacted fill, and the quality of the earthwork operations. Assuming that the foundation related earthwork and the foundation designs are completed in accordance with our recommendations, it is our opinion that settlements will be about 1 inch or less. Differential settlements on the order of 1/2 to% of the total settlement could occur across the building areas. Groundwater within footing excavations is not anticipated; however, if encountered, it should be removed as soon as possible to minimize disturbance of bearing soils. Where high moisture conditions are encountered at footing bearing elevations, consideration should be given to stabilizing the bottom of the excavations with well -graded crushed stone, or a lean concrete mud mat to provide a working base for construction. 5 Proposed Public Works Facility Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 Foundation Excavations Tarracon All excavations should be sloped or braced as required by OSHA Regulations to provide stability and safe working conditions. All footing excavations should be observed and tested by Terracon personnel. In the event that unsuitable bearing soils are encountered in the footing excavations, the excavations should be extended deeper to suitable soils and the footings could bear directly on these soils at the lower level or on lean concrete backfill placed In the excavations. The footings could also bear on properly compacted backfill extending down to the suitable native soils. Overexcavation for compacted backfill placement below footings should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footings at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below footing base elevation. The overexcavation should then be backfilled up to the footing base elevation with approved structural fill placed in lifts of 6 inches or less in loose thickness and compacted to at least 98% of the soil's Design Fo maximum standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D-698). An overexcavation and backfill procedure diagram is illustrated in the adjacent figure. The base of all footing excavations should be free of water and loose soils prior to placement of-concrete.-If''groundwater is encountered during construction, it should be maintained a minimum of 1 foot below the foundation bearing elevation during footing construction. Should the soils at the bearing level become disturbed, the affected soil should be removed prior to placement of concrete. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after excavating to minimize disturbance of bearing soils. Floor Slab Design and Construction We understand salt and storage bins are proposed at the southwest section of the facility, Depending on the amount of storage planned in these areas, settlements in excess of 1, inch could occur if large contact pressures are anticipated on the floor slabs. An overexcavation procedure could be implemented in these areas to help control settlements. We would be pleased to provide further information once the facility has beenfinalized, and maximum salt and/or sand storage heights are established. 0 Proposed Public Works Facility Terracon Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 A minimum 6 -inch thick granular base such as relatively clean, well -graded crushed stone containing less than 6% passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve is recommended directly below floor slabs. This material will serve as a leveling course, a capillary moisture break, a help provide load distribution. Care will be necessary to avoid contaminating this layer with soil prior to floor slab placement. Construction joints should be used to isolate the floor slab from load- bearing walls and/or isolated columns in order to allow for differential movement, Pavements Subgrades for support of pavements should be prepared as discussed below. We recommend the upper 1 foot of the pavement subgrade be compacted to at least 98% of the material's standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-698). In addition, prior to fill placement, the subgrade should be prepared as indicated in the Earthwork section of this report. It should be noted that the sandy soilscan easily rut under construction equipment; thus, we recommend a granular base course beneath the pavement to stabilize the subgrade and help expedite construction. For light vehicle loads (automobiles), we recommend 4 inches of asphaltic cement concrete (ACC) (minimum surface course thickness of 2 inches) over a 6 -inch crushed stone base and 5.5 inches of ACC over a 6 -inch crushed stone base for lightly loaded drive areas. We understand some pavement and drive areas will be subject to heavy truck traffic, In these areas, we recommend a minimum thickness of 6.5 inches of ACC over a 6 -inch crushed stone base be used. The crushed stone base should consist of a dense -graded material meeting the specifications IDOT 4120.04. - As an alternative, Portland cement concrete could be considered. For Portland cement concrete (PCC), 5 inches is typical in automobile parking areas and 6 inches is typical in low 'p volume drives, For dumpster and delivery truck areas, a minimum 7 -inch thick Portland cement concrete is recommended, It should be noted that a 4 -inch thick crushed stone base beneath the PCC sections will help stabilize the anticipated sandy subgrade soils. A Portland cement concrete mix designed with a minimum 28 -day modulus of rupture of 600 psi should be used for concrete pavements. This is roughly equivalent to a 28 -day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Concrete mix designs should also include air entrainment. The material identification as presented on the Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT) Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction is as follows: Asphaltic Surface - IDOT Type A Asphaltic Cement Concrete: Section 2303 Asphaltic Base - IDOT Type B Asphaltic Cement Concrete, Class I: Section 2303 7 Proposed Public Works Facility Terracon Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 Concrete Pavement - IDOT Portland Cement Concrete Type C: Section 2301 The above sections represent minimum design thicknesses and as such periodic maintenance should be anticipated. Higher traffic volumes may require thicker pavement sections. Additional recommendations can be provided after traffic volumes and loads are known. Pavements should be sloped to provide rapid drainage of surface water. Water allowed to pond on or adjacent to the pavement could saturate the subgrade and contribute to premature pavement deterioration. Periodic maintenance should be anticipated for minimum pavement thicknesses. This maintenance would consist of the sealing of cracks and repair in isolated distressed areas. Earthwork In preparing the site for construction, all deleterious materials such as organic soil, or loose, soft, frozen, or otherwise unsuitable materials should be stripped from below the proposed building and pavement areas. Based on the data obtained from our subsurface exploration, it appears that stripping depths will generally be less than '/z foot; however, greater depths may be required in isolated locations. The actual stripping depth will be variable and should be evaluated by Terracon personnel during construction. After rough grade has been established and prior to placement of fill, the exposed subgrade should be surficially compacted with a steel -drum vibratory roller. In addition, we recommend the area be thoroughly proofrclled. The surficial compaction and preefrolling of subgrade soils aids in providing a firm base for compaction of new fill and delineating soft or disturbed areas that may exist below subgrade level. Unsuitable areas observed at this time should be improved by compaction or by undercutting and replacing with suitable compacted fill. Subgrade stability should be observed by a geotechnical engineer during construction. It siiuuld be'noteu that thesoilsEiiuoultcreu'Grf the siie'are ausuepiiuie io disiutbanc:e from construction activities, particularly if the soil is wetted by surface water or seepage. Care should be taken during the site grading operation to minimize disturbance of the bearing soils. Heavy equipment traffic directly on bearing surfaces should be avoided in saturated soils. If unstable soils are encountered, it may be necessary to use a layer of well -graded crushed. stone (2 inch maximum particle size) to increase subgrade stability and help expedite construction. All fill materials should consist of approved materials, free of organic and debris. The fill should be -a low plasticity cohesive soil with a liquid limit less than 45% and a plasticity index less than 20%, or a granular soil. Some adjustments in the moisture content of on-site soils may be required to achieve adequate compaction. The soil's water content at the time of compaction -should be at -1 to +3% of the soils optimum moisture value as determined by the Proposed Public Works Facility Job No, 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 Terracon standard Proctor test (ASTM D-698) for cohesive soils and ±3% for well -graded, granular soils. All fill materials should be placed and compacted In lifts not exceeding 9 inches in loose thickness. All fill material placed above the footing base elevation for lightly loaded floor slab support should be compacted to at least 95% of the soil's maximum standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D-698). All fill material placed below the footing base elevation should be compacted to at least 98% of the soil's maximum standard Proctor dry density. The higher degree of fill compaction below footings should extend laterally beyond the exterior edges, of the perimeter footings for at least 8 inches per foot of fill thickness below the footing base elevation. In pavement areas, all fill materials should be compacted to at least 95% of material's maximum standard Proctor dry density with the exception of the upper 12 Inches of the subgrade. The upper 12 inches should be compacted to at least 98% of the material's maximum standard Proctor dry density. Upon completion of filling operations, care should be taken to minimize the subgrade disturbance and maintain the subgrade moisture content prior to construction of foundations and floor slabs. On-site subgrade soils are highly susceptible to disturbance from construction activity. Weather conditions such as freezing, thawing, rain, or dry weather can also contribute to subgrade disturbance. Equipment traffic directly on bearing surfaces should be avoided when possible to minimize disturbance of bearing soils, particularly on high moisture content soils or saturated soils. Therefore, care should be taken during, the site grading operation to provide adequate site drainage and minimize disturbance of the bearing soils. If the subgrade should become saturated, desiccated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed or replaced, or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned as necessary, and recompacted prior to construction of footings or floor slabs. If time elapses between subgrade preparation and turther construction, subgrades should be reworked and retested prior to placement of structures. Adequate surface drainage should be provided at the site in order to minimize wetting of the foundation soils. Excessive moisturecan significantly reduce the soils bearing capacity and contribute to foundation settlement. For protection of the footing bearing soils, we recommend that the surrounding grades be sloped away from the structures on all sides. In addition, roof drainage should be collected by a system of gutters and downspouts and transmitted by pipe to a stormwater drainage system or discharged at least 8 feet away from the structures. As an altemative, splash blocks may be used as long as the ground surface is .a paved and slopes away from the structures. w 9 M Proposed Public Works Facility Job No. 06995251.01 February 18, 2000 GENERAL COMMENTS Terracon Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide testing and observation during excavation, grading, foundation and construction phases of the project. The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations which may occur between borings or across the site. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until construction. If variations appear, It will be necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this report. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental assessment of the site or Identification of contaminated or hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination, other studies should be undertaken. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. In the event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report, are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless Terracon reviews the changes, and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. e ^ I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional ngineeLun,',',, the laws of the State of Iowa, AN®Rft m GALLET 134;10 f cc M. G le Date My license renewal date Is December 31, 2000. 10 .2 m e2 02 tw LOG OF BORING NO. 1 Page 1 of 1 CWNERICLIENT ARCH ITECTIENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Pro osed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TES76 C, DESCRIPTION m oR w g U a d y C m W O Z Z WF >D LL OW W C7 O � Z K Nm �0 Oli. =)M 3" Root Zone PA CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND Dark SC 1 SS 12 6 13 Brown, Loose 9 PA SANDY LEAN CLAY Brown, Stiff CL 2 SS 14 5 13 `4000 4.5 5 PA SP 3 SS 12 7 4 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY. Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PA SP 4 SS 18 13 9 ' 10 1D BOTTOM OF BORING c - 0 z 3 rr The stratification (Ines represent the appm)dmate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: ln-situ, the br nsitlon may be gradual. "CME 1401b, SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft BORING STARTED 2-1-00 � WL Q NONE WD =NONE (214100) BOETE1 2 1 -00 COMPL#5 %rr ac®n FOREMAN �wLs v R GRING TM WLI DCi @ 8,5'(214/00) APPROVED BFG JOB # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 2 Pagel of I OWNEIRICUENT ARCHITECT/ENGI NEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 0 DESCRIPTION yw: �oc 0 Z W z 0 z 0 Z' W o W 2 D Z U L9 0M 00 a z :2 0 3" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY, SP 1 SS 18 4 6 5 -ark: -Brown, Loose 3.5 PA SP 2 SS 18 5 6 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA SP 3 SS 18 9 5 WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES. Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PA Becoming coarser with depth. SP 4 S SS 18 20 5 BOTTOM OF BORING The stratificatlon Ines represent the approximate boundiury fines *Calibrated Hand Penetrometer bebvreen soN and rock types; in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 1401b. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, it BORING STARTED 2-7-00 BORING COMPLETED 2-7-00 WL12NONE WD= I IrerraconRIG WL 2 N TM a WL Backfilled APPROVED BFGIJOB# 06995251j LOG OF BORING NO. 3 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS O J m rS ❑ 4 DESCRIPTION 4Q 2 o V! W > ZCe Z WW r- z ZZ S F W ❑ D Z F K Um yU ❑q Dw 3" Root Zane PA PIZ CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND Dark Brown, Loose SC 1 SS 18 8 6 2.5 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA SP 2 SS 6 10 2 Brown, Medium Dense 5 5 _ PA SP 3 SS 6 6 3 - FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA & GRAVEL, Brown, Loose to Medium Dense SP 4 SS 6 20 4 10 PA I '! 12 ED/S 5 SS 14 21 9 c FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY - & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense 15 PA SPIV V6 SS 12 29 11 i BOTTOM OF BORING - The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types; m-situ, the transition may be gradual. **CME 1401b. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft � f�rr�con BORING STARTED 2-1-00 WL V NONE WD � NONE (2/4/DO) 2-1-00 RING COMPL#5 WL L RIG FOREMAN TM WL DCI @ 18.5'(2/4/00) APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 4 Page 1 of 1 O NERICLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa city MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS C9 DESCRIPTION m d z U C W {n Z 2 Z i W } 1-112" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES. SP 1 SS 16 15 5 Dark Brown, Medium Dense ^G?' 3 PA SP 2 SS 12 9 5 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY 5 WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY SEAMS. PA Brown, Loose to Medium Dense SP 3 SS 14 16 4 PAI I SP 4 SS 18 11 5 10 10 BOTTOM OF BORING In 0 c z 3 'Calibrated The stratificatlon Ihas represent the apprmdmate boundary lines Hand Penetrometer between sell and rock types: In-situ, the transition maybe gradual. "CME 1401b. SFr automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, tt BORING STARTED 2-3-00 WL NONE WD = NONE (214100) BORING COMPLETED 2-3-00 Irerracon aWL Y Y RIG #5 FOREMAN TM APPROVED BFG JOB # 06995251 WL DCI @ 8.5' (2/4/DO) LOG OF BORING NO. 5 Pagel of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Propos d Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS q w DESCRIPTION _ N Wm S Z F W KQ V 0 J Z it Nm ?i( O =1 1.112" Root Zone PA CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND Dark SC 1 SS 14 5 5 Brown, Loose 3 PA SP 2 SS 10 7 4 5 PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY SP 3 SS 16 16 3 - Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PA SP 4 SS 12 7 3 - 10--PA i 125 /S 5 I SS 16 11 5 FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY 15 & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense PA PISI V 6 SS 14 14 6 'r: z° 20 .."a BOTTOM OF BORING 5 z i 0 u a The atratiFlcation lines represert the appm)dmate boundary Imes "Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and reek types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140 Ib. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It BORING STARTED 2-3-00 WL - NONE WD =NONE(2/4100) BORING COMPLETED 2-3-00 1I'�rricon RIG #5 FOREMAN TM r WL Y w WL DCI @ 185 (2!4100) A APPROVED BPG JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 6 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa city, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 01 0 DESCRIPTION Z� cc > z M z zo 0 0 Z '0 w 0 0 n D z W v Woo 30 0 x z ON 2" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY, Dark Brown, Loose SP 1 SS 18 5 4 PAI I SP 2 '9S 18 10 3 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY SEAMS Brown, Medium Dense PA I SP 3 SS 14 13 4 PA SPISW4 SS 18 15 4 PA FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY ... 8. GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense Cc PIS, V 5 SS 18 17 -4 PA EP/SW6 SS 18 24 '5 20 BOTTOM OF BORING 20— --- The stratification lines represent the appmodmade boundary lines *Calibrated Hand Penettomeler between set and rock types: In-situ, the transition may be gradual. -CME 140 1b. SFF automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It Irerracon BORING STARTED 2-7-00 EF��T NONE (2/9/fDO) BORING COMPLETE2-7-00 FOREMAN WL If RIG #5 TM o WL APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO, 7 Page 1 of I OWNER/CLIENT ANCH11 ECTIENGI NEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa city. Iowa Proposed Public: Works Facility SAMPLES T-TESTS o 0 DESCRIPTION 0 e >: W tt 0 a 2W oc W > - i-: z 0 =1 Lu 0 >� - 'zu 0 � O o r aQ- 0 0 , C) zo n PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY Dark Brown, Medium Dense SP I SS 18 12 3 2.5 PA SP- 2 SS 18 15 —4 FINE To MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA I Brown, Medium Dense SP 3 SS 18 16 4 PA SP 4 SS 13 23 2 PA 13 S IS v 5 SS 18 16 5 FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY PAI & GRAVEL Brown, Medium Dense y/Sivs SS 18 13 4 20 20--- BOTTOM OF BORING The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer 5 between soil and rock types: In-situ, the hansidjor, may be gradual. **CME 140 1h. SPT automatic hemmer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft irerracon BORING STARTED 2-7-00 WLIVNONE WD 1-Y NONE (2J9100) ING COMPLE BORTED 2-7 -001 i�� IT RIG #5 FOREMAN TMI �4 WL I APPROVED BFGJOB# 06995251j SITE c 0 U_ 2 K O LOG OF BORING NO. S City of Iowa City South of Napoleon Park hwa city. Iowa DESCRIPTION SINE1— MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY Dark Brown, Loose FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY Brown, Loose to Me turn Dense FINE TO COARSE SAND TRACE CLAY & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense Inc. s � O E5 z t zO w m W ? K z' ow ¢O tt`- z� 3 O 7 Z Nm U OX 7N PA SP 1 SS 16 6 4 1 15 20 The sttatiricatlon lines ropresent the approximate boundary lines between soil and rock types: In-situ, the tmnedlon may be gradual - WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft WL NONE WD =NONE (219100) lrerracon WL Y Y WL I DCI @ 18.5' (2/9100) 1 1 'Calibrated Hand PenetMrneter ACME 1401b. SPT aulomatic hammer BORING STARTED 2-7-00 BORING COMPLETED 2-7-00 RIG #5 FOREMANTM APPROVED BFG J213 1; 06995251 r- LOG OF BORING NO. 9 Paqe 1 of 1 Ci �Naon it MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South oPark PROJECT Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility DESCRIPTION r zo luooi- z Z 0 Un �N 1- 3" Root Zone PA SP 1 SS 18 15 7 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY V,TH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES ft SEAMS Dark Brown, Medium Dense -_ PA SP 2 SS 18 14 7 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY &GRAVEL Brown, Medium Dense FINE TO COARSE SAND TRACE GRAVEL Brown, Medium Dense SP Thesbatiflcalion lines represent the approximate boundary lines between soil and rock types: in-s@u, the transition may be gradual. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft WL T- 20 WS =NONE (219/00) I r` r■ acon WL � Y �7 WL 18 1 1 ff 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer --CME 140 ib. SPT automatic hammer BORING STARTED 2-7-00 BORING COMPLETED 2-7-00 RIG #5FOREMAN TM APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 10 Page I of 1 OWNERICLIENT ARCH ITECTIENGINEER CRY of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS (9 0 190 * 1 DESCRIPTION W - 9 � 0 z PZ z Ir 2 wo z zW 2 0Ir ❑ n z 0 z Dw 2" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY Dark Brown, Loose SID 1 SS 111 11 4 IPA I SID 2 ISS 16 1 15 3 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA SP 3 SS 18 12 5 WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY SEAMS, Brown, Medium Dense PA SP 4 SS 18 13 3 PA q 13 SID 6 SS 18 26 4 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY 5 PA & GRAVEL,Brown, Medium Dense SP 6 SS 18 28 4 20 20 BOTTOM OF BORING The stratinootion lines represent the approAmade boundary lines *Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rook types: In-situ, the transition may be gradual. -*CME 1401h. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It BORING STARTED 2-7-00 ULWL la NONE WD IT NONE (2/9/00)2-7-00 1rerracon JAPPROVED BORING COMPL USED tFOREMAN TM aLWLJ BFG[JOB# 06995251, LOG OF BORING NO. 11 Page 1 of 1 OWNERICLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION to �, z a > � _= rcZ z Z O 0 UDo r7 Z y 1— � N m 'may 0 M 1 3" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY, SP 1 SS 18 9 4 Dark Brown, Loose PA SP 2 SS 18 9 3 1 PA SP 3 SS 18 14 3 - PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY & GRAVEL Brown, Medium Dense SP 4 SS 18 21 3 to PA !? 13 -ZISN v 5 SS 18 28 4 FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY s5 PA & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense 1S 6 SS 18 21 8 3 ���•'• 2U 20 1 BOTTOM OF BORING I i 3 r r The strabricallon lines represent the approximate boundary Imes •Callbrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: In-sltu, the tminsition may be gradual. -CME 1401b. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft 1 re rr icon BORING STARTED 2-7-00 g Wl 17 20 WS Ly NONE (2 9100) BORING COMPLETE2-7-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM J WL DCI @ 18,5' (219100) APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 SITE LOG OF BORING NO. 12 ARCH ITECTIENG INEER of Iowa City MMS Consul of Napoleon Park PROJECT _.. Proposed Public DESCRIPTION 6" Root Zone FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Dark Brown, Loose FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODUSES Brawn, Medium Dense 0 .5 O > Z C j O Z 'a U O 7 i }a} U Z r a �U FQQ-2 Vim $U >_ O 0W - �� PA spF 1 SS 1 18 1 8 1 4 :8P 2"11 SP3 IV The stratiFlcation lines represent the approximate boundary lines IWATER soil and rock types: In-situ, the transition may be gradual, LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft NONE WD t NONE (2/9100) 1rerrscion �-DCI @ 11.5' AB 24 . Calibrated Hand Penetrometer "CME 140 lb. SP7 sulomatic hammer BORING STARTED 2-7-00 BORING COMPLETED 2-7-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM APPROVED BFGIJOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 13 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc, SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS w DESCRIPTION m > za w m > p z �Z w pW 00 Z }a F w K o_� woo ¢0 �0 tt� ❑ Z� 7o 1-112" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES SP 1 SS 1B 6 4 Dark Brown, Loose PA SP 2 SS 14 6 B FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY Brown, Loose 5 PA ss SC 3 SS 16 6 1C CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND PA Brawn, Loose SC 4 SS 10 7 9 10 10 BOTTOM OF BORING l' J 6J a F 0 u i 0 u W The slroiiflcation lines Represent the approximate bwndery IInes 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and mak types) 1rrsrtu, the transition may be gradual. "CME 1401b. SPT automatic hammer n WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft BORING STARTED 2-3-00 NONE WD NONE (2/4100) BORING COMPLETED2-3 WL Q r�rr�c®n R G FOREMAN TM WLI i'(2/4/00) APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 14 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 5 t p� u DESCRIPTION = S 9 y m O zw N ww> K �z eiU >_ Oi£ U� ❑ ❑ Z z F Wm 7ZW 1-112" Root Zone PA CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Dank SC 1 SS 12 5 6 Brown, Loose 3 PA SP 2 SS 19 7 3 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES, a PA Brown, Loose SP 3 SS 1G 8 3 PA PIS V4 SS 18 14 3 10 PA FINE TO COARSE SAND. TRACE CLAY - - - & GRAVEL Brown, Loose to Medium Dense /S 5 SS 16 12 4 15 PA IS 6 SS 12 6 4 ' '• 20 20 a BOTTOM OF BORING 0 i 3 a rc The straGllcation Tins represent the apprmdmate boundary Tines 'Callbrated Hand Penetrometer holm en soil and rock types: In•attu, the transition may be gradual. -CME 140 Ib. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, it BORING STARTED 2-3-00 Is WL Q NONE WD = NONE (214/00) BORING COMPLETED 2-3-00 '-0 r�rr icon #5 FOREMAN TM vRIG FWL-7 DCI @ 16' (2/4/00) APPROVED BFG JOB # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 15 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Propos d Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 0 0 DESCRIPTION M >: WF K x Pj �' z �CD z 7 0. 0 OX (D co D z �: x OL) CE R zo 2" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY, SP —1 SS 2 12 7 7 5 Dark Brown, Loose PA SP 2 SS 18 16 16 3 —A SP 3 SS 18 1 8 15 15 3 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES PA� Brown, Medium Dense 4 SS 18 27 8 to PA PA 18 21 4 FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY is PA & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense S 31 SS 18 27 4 20 20— 76 BOTTOM OF BORING Ln 7bestretifioation 11nes represent the approximate boundary Imes -Calibrated Hand penetrometer bets soli and rock types: In-situ, the transition may be gradual, -CME 140 Ib. SPT automatic hammer NS ft WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ����a can BORING STARTED 2-7-00 o WL 17 NONE WD -T NONE (2�J9/00) BORING COMPLETED 2-7-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM WL WL o DCI @ 1t6.5'(2/9100) APPROVED BFGIJOB # 06995251 r- LOG OF BORING NO. 16 Pa aof 1 City of Iowa C" SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT o....,,.�ea Ouhlir_ W�rkc Facility 81 J W p DESCRIPTION W N 7 T"Root Zone CLAYEY FINE To MEDIUM SAND Dark Blown, Laose FlNE TIM" O MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Brown, MedlUrn Dense FINE TO COARSE SAND TRACE CLAY & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense GI 55 The stratification Imes represent the appro)dmate boundary Imes between sell and rock types; In-sRu, the transition may be gra dual. WATETLFVEL 8SERVATIONS, ttWL �WS =NONE (219100) 1rerracon W L `�Y WL I DCI IT 18'(2/9100) I 12 18 1 16 .0allbrated Hand Penetrometer "CME 1401b, SPT alltom20C hammer BORING STARTED 2-7-00 BORING COMPLETED 2-7-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 17 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCH ITECTIENGI NEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 0 r Og DESCRIPTION M �, SF z a 0w 5' z 12 z o W it 12 azo 00M o'd. onpu,) 1-172" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY & ROOTLETS Dark Brown, Medium i SP 1 SS 16 10 5 Brown PA SP2 SS 18 11 3 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY a PA WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Brown, Medium Cense SP 3 SS 14 15 3 PA SP 4 SS 18 11 3 to tc BOTTOM OF BORING i 3 v S 3 r c u The stratification Imes represent the approbmate boundary Imes *Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soll and rock types: irrsltu, the transition may be gradual. "GME 140 It. SPT autotnallo hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, R 1 �� rr�e®n 1 BORING STARTED 2-4-00 3 WL a NONE WD L NONE (2!9100) BORING COMPLETED 2-4-00 WL 2 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM WL DCI @ 6.5'(219/00) APPROVED BFG 1J08 # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 18 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTIONm J Y n; d 7A W z U 2 uJ y W m > O 2L� µ�� r - Z ZO OW 0. U `t W Q}- U {.S O R F2 QO Y K UZ Z� U, O 7 Z F- Nm o O ON 2-1/2" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY, 1.5 Dark Brown SP 1 SS 10 4 3 PA SP 2 SS 18 9 4 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY, _ Brown, Loose to Medium Dense _ 5 PA 3 SS 18 14 6 1SPI PA SP 4 SS 18 14 6 10 10 PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND. TRACE CLAY & GRAVEL Brown, Medium Dense SP 5 SS 12 19 8 1s PA FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY - & GRAVEL Brown, Loose IS 6 SS 18 3 8 . ' 20 20 a BOTTOM OF BORING 5 11 u i c� a rc 'calibrated Hand Penetrometer The straBflcation Ilnes represent the approzlrnate boundary lines "CME 14016. SPT automatk hammer between soil and rook types: In-situ, the transition may be gradual. #5WAATEIR LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft BORING STARTED 2-7-00 COMPLETED 2-7-00 RIGo 8 NONE WD = NONE (2/9/00) 1%rriconBORING o $ APPROVED BFG JOB # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO, 19 Pagel of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa C" , Iowa Pro used public Works Facilit SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION F t U C N ZC7 Z m @ S Z 1-1/2" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY, SP 1 SS 14 5 6 TRACE OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Dark Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PA SP 2 SS 12 12 6 4,5 5 PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY. SP 3 SS 16 11 5 Brown, Medium Dense PA SP 4 SS 18 15 6 10 10- — BOTTOM OF BORING 3 v 5 3 Y Y Y L The stratilloatlon tines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: In-situ, the transidon may be gradual. -CME 14016. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It BORING STARTED 2-4-00 2-4-00 BORING COMPLETED#5 4TM WL 17 NONE WD NONE (217/00) G ���� �`o� WL 2 SL RIG #5 RIG OREMAN FOREMAN TM = WL DCI @ 8' (217/00) APPROVED BFG JOB # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 20 Pae 1 of 1 OWNERICLIENT ARCHITECTIENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION 0 E w �dnn r 5E W LL ED 0 0 7 2 K Nm �0 O zN F 1-112" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY Dark Brown, Loose SP 1 SS 16 7 4 <3 PA SP 2 SS 12 B 4 s PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY. Brown, Loose to Medium Dense SP 3 SS 14 9 3 PA SP 4 SS 10 11 4 10 PA J: 12 IS 5 SS 14 12 7 FINE TO COARSE SAND. TRACE CLAY 15 PA & GRAVEL Brown, Medlum Dense IS V6 SS 16 10 5 @ 20 20 a BOTTOM OF BORING 0 u i 0 U K The str dificatlon lines represent the approzlmate boundary lines "CME 'Callbreled 140 Ib. Hand SFr automatic Penetrometer hammer 'a between soil and rock types: In-shu, the transition may be gradual. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, it ���� ��0�D 2-4-DO WL g NONE WD 7 NONE (217/00) 2-4-00 LDCI FOREMAN TM En @ 17' (2f7100)JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 21 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Propos d Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION f° >. flf> c 5 M z z =z W y W I grcz O U 0 n Z F c- S U ti 7 1-11[2" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY, SP 1 SS 16 fi 5 Dark Brown, Loose 3.5 PA SP 2 SS 12 9 3 5 PA SP 3 SS 14 11 4 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PA SP 4 SS 10 17 3 _ , 10 PA .': 13 /S 5 SS 16 14 6 is PA FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY & GRAVEL Brawn, Medium Dense Is 6 SS 12 17 7 s 8 ... 20 __ 20 BOTTOM OF BORING c z 0 V K 2 The stratification Imes represent the approbmeto boundary Imes 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between call and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. _CME 14016, SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft S�®� BORING STARTED - 2-4-00 B WL --- 19.5 WS L NONE (217100) BORING COMPLETED 2 4-00 �� �� fai71 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM WL o Y APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 o WL WCI @ 18'Ae LOG OF BORING NO. 22 page 1 of 1 OWNERICLIENT ARCHITECTIENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 0 DESCRIPTION J m 5 w - 2 N LLl iow Z� ZZ o 0 z Z rc �m 3 o x 1-1/2" Root Zone PA CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND Dark Brown, Lcase SC 1 SS 14 3 6 3 PA SP 2 SS 16 8 3 a PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES SP 3 SS 14 10 4 Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PAI I SP 4 SS 18 10 3 10 PA :12 SP 5 SS 12 14 4' V� FINE TO MEDIUM SAND. TRACE CLAY 15 PA ' & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense SP 6 SS 16 19 4 20 BOTTOM OF BORING 20 The strattrcatlon Ilnes represent the app c:dmate boundary Ilnes •Callbrated Hand Penetrometer between sail and rock types: In Itu, the transtaon may be gradual- "CME 140 ib. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It 1 %rr acon BORING STARTED 2-4-00 WL V- NONE WD = NONE (2/7!00) BORING COMPLETED 2-4-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM WL Y s WL DCI @ 18.5'(Z7/00) APPROVED BFG JOB # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 23 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Pu61ic Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS U' DESCRIPTION J O c ZR 6 z� his KW LL Z'z a D F 00 OW F- cl n z }} 1- K W N O li. 7 4) 1-112" Root Zone PA FINETO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY SP 1 SS 12 5 7 &OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Dark Brown, Loose as PA SP 2 SS 16 12 6 a PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES SP 3 SS 14 11 4 Brown, Medium Dense PA SP 4 SS 18 11 4 10 i BOTTOM OF BORING � 4 'a 0 c� z g 4 ¢LL F es represent the appmate boundary Imes 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer The strabreation Imrott "'GME 14D Ib. SPT allomallc hammer between soil and rock types: in-o lu, the lransdlon may be gradual. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft 1 %rr icon BORING STARTED 2-4-00 WL `� NONE WD � NONE (2/7100) BORING COMPLETED 2-4-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM r WL a WL DCI @ 8' (2J7/00) APPROVED BFG I JOB # 06995251 m LOG OF BORING NO. 24 Page I of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECTIENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS ED 0 0 DESCRIPTION M z W z W r t z n CO 7 0 N0 �O 'z >- 0 0 0 0 D z Lu W mm 0 �U Ir Q zl� Do 1-112" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY. 5iiF—Brown, Very Loose SP 1 SS 10 2 6 2.5 PA SP 2 SS 14 8 4 PAT FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY, Brown, Loose to Medium Dense 3 SS is 9 17 -SP PA SP 4 SS 14 11 4 to PA 13 S FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY PIS) V 5 SS 12 12 5 & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense BOTTOM OF BORING tt The stratification lines represent the appmdrnata boundary llnes *Callbrated Hand Peneimmeter between soil and rock types: In-situ, the transition may be gradual. **CME 1401b. SPT automatic hemmer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It BORING STARTED 2-3-00 WL V NONE VVID =NONE (214/00) BORING COMPLETED 2 -3 -OD Irerracon WL IT -V RIG TM ()0) wkWL DCI @ 141(2/4/00) APPROVED BFGIJOB# 06996251 LOG OF BORING NO. 25 Page 1 of 1 City of Iowa City SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City. Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility c o DESCRIPTION _ W N M8 U W W W 5� Z ZZ l as w m ya wn~. F¢- ° M1 z 1 ° 3.112" Root Zone PA CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND Dark j Brown, Loose SC 1 SS 14 5 6 12 PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY RPA Brown,.Medium Dense 10 5 ISSI161 15 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY R GRAVEL, Brown, Very Loose to Medium Dense 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer The strallrication lines represent the approdmate boundaryIlnes --CME 140 lb, SPT automatic hammer bcb n soil and rock types! in-sllu,thetmnsitionmay be gradual. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft M—j 2-4-00 WL iQ20 WS =NONE(217100) r�rraeon 2-4-00 WL IT EMAN TM WL j DCI @ 18' (2R/00) # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 26 page 1 of 11 Inc. :ity of Iowa (;It) Ih of Napoleon Iowa City, Iowa 3.112" Root Zone FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY Dark Brown, Loose FINE TO MEDIUM SAND AY TRACE CL WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODUSES Brown, Medium Dense M FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY &GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense SS The stratification lines represent the approdmate twundary line een soil and rock types; In-situ, the transition may be gradual. TW7ATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft V NONE WD Y NONE(217/00) Irerracon 2 WL A 16 4 -Calibrated Hand Penetrometer "CME 140 lb. SFr automatic hammer BORINGSTARTED 2-4-00 BORINGCOMPLETED 2-4-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 o DESCRIPTION ` w� Zr w y m W 0HOW � ❑ �. O 2 0:5U 3.112" Root Zone FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY Dark Brown, Loose FINE TO MEDIUM SAND AY TRACE CL WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODUSES Brown, Medium Dense M FINE TO MEDIUM SAND TRACE CLAY &GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense SS The stratification lines represent the approdmate twundary line een soil and rock types; In-situ, the transition may be gradual. TW7ATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft V NONE WD Y NONE(217/00) Irerracon 2 WL A 16 4 -Calibrated Hand Penetrometer "CME 140 lb. SFr automatic hammer BORINGSTARTED 2-4-00 BORINGCOMPLETED 2-4-00 RIG #5 FOREMAN TM APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 27 Page I of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Propos d Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 0 DESCRIPTION 0 JZ Z� WW ZO Z 0, 0 W � z z n z 003 0 0 n 1-112" Root Zone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY Dark Brown, Very Loose SIP 1 SS 16 2 6 3 PA SP� 2 SS 16 8 5 PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY, SPI 3 SS 18 10 5 Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PA SPI 4 SS 14 PA SP 5 SS 16 18 5 15 BOTTOM OF BORING 0 Thetratireation lines represent the approAmate boundary lines -Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soli and rock types: In-situ, the transifion may be gradual, -CME 14011 SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, fit Irerricon BORING STARTED 2-4-00 WIL4NONE W T- NONE i BORING COMPLETED 2-4-00 I X RIG #5 1 FOREMAN TIM NWIL WL Oct @ 11.5' APPROVED BFGjJOB# 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 28 Page 1 of 1 OWNERIC LI ENT ARCH ITECTIENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION m > z > z of Z ZZ ¢. W OW 0 y 7 Z y Y C N5ro �F0 ❑� PA CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND Dark Sc 1 SS 12 3 11 Brown, Loose 3,5 PAI I SP 2 SS 10 6 7 5 PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY N' ES SP 3 SS 8 9 5 Brown, Loose PAI I SP 4 SS 14 7 6 to PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND. TRACE SP 5 SS 18 13 7 GRAVE Brown, Medium Dense "' 15 15 BOTTOM OF BORING a 5 K K The stratificagon Imes represent the epprmdmate boundary Ilnes `Callbrated Hand Penetrometer u between soil and rock types: In-situ, the tranattlon may be gradual. "CME 1401b. SPT automagc hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft SORING STARTED 2-3-00 WL �' NONE WD -T NONE 1%rr�con BORINGCOMPLETED 2-3-00 o WL -V RIG #5 FOREMAN TM o WL APPROVED BFG JOB# 06995251 m LOG OF BORING NO. 29 Page 1 of 1 OWNERICLIENT ARCH ITECTIENG I NEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Pro osed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION JO t Z � d -1S 22 e• a U U Fp ¢z X„ U }a O D 2 1— Nm 1() 7 4" Crushed Stone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY Dark Brown, Loose SP 1 SS 14 3 8 2,5 PA SP 2 SS 12 5 8 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY SEAMS a PA Brown, Loose to Medium Dense SP 3 SS 16 7 4 PA SP 4 SS 14 15 10 ` to to BOTTOM OF BORING 'a 0 0 u a 5 K The stratificalicn lines represent the approximate taundary Imes 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer "CME 14016. SPT automatic hammer 'a betwesoll and rock types: In-situ, the transition maybe gradual. en WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft STARTED 2-3-00 2 3-00 WL 4 NONE WD NONE (214/00) COMPL#5E FOREMAN TM 1 �� rr ��on L o WL DCI @ 8.5'(2/4lDO) VED BFG JOB # 06995251 m LOG OF BORING NO. 31 Page I of I OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS 0 DESCRIPTION Ex W > z of 12 z z oz� a0 0 0 W pi 0 W Z� =1 z z x SU Ott DU) PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY. SP I SS 10 2 5 Dark Brown, Very Loose 1PAi SP 2 SS 14 4 4 PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY SP 3 SS 18 7 6 WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PAI I SP 4 SS 16 13 9 10 PA SP 5 SS 14 16 i9 BOTTOM OF BORING r. RThe stn"catIon lines represent the approAmate boundary Anes 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between mil and neck types) 1"Ru, the transition may be gradual. **CME 1401b. SPT automatic hammer c WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, R Irerracon BORING STARTED 2-4-00 8 WL j5Z NONE WD I -T NONE (2f7100) BORING COMPLETED 2-4-00 '0 WL 1-7 1-v RIG #5 FOREMAN TM ffi - APPROVED 19FGIJOB # 06995251 WL DCI @ 13- (217/00) LOG OF BORING NO. 32 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCH ITECTlENGI NE ER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS O DESCRIPTION z- U > K W z ~ r y a] C) o. w aO ap rc•- Or o z Woe 3v ❑ ii Do 1-112" Root Zone PA VERY SANDY LEAN CLAY Brown, Stlff CL 1 SS 16 7 12 "3500 to Very Stiff PA CIL 2 16 S 12 `5000 ml 4.5 5 ISS IPA SP 3 ISS 12 11 4 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY SEAMS Brown, Medium Dense pq SP 4 SS 14 12 11 10 PA 12.5 FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE CLAY /S 5 SS 14 16 7 & GRAVEL, Brown, Medium Dense 15 BOTTOM OF BORING I i The slraligcatlon lines represent the appm)dmate boundary (Ines 'Callbraled Hand Penetrometer between sell and rock types fn-eifu, the trarsitlon may be gradual, "CME 1401b. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft 1 %rracon BORING STARTED 2-3-00 WL 4 NONEWD =NONE (214100) BOR GRING COMPLETED FOREMAN 2 3-00 TM WL [VVL DCI @ 13' (214100) APPROVED BFG I JOB # 06995251 I LOG OF BORING NO. 33 Pagel of 1 CRY of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc, SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Pro used Public Works Facility Iowa City, Iowa SAMPLES TESTS O S DESCRIPTION t H T K m DY Ow 7 2 yy Lu 0— 3U 03 zy F PA fj �iM 6" Crushed Stone SANDY LEAN CLAY, Dark Brown, Stiff CL '4000 1 SS 16 13 3 PA CL 2 SS 18 8 14 '3500 SANDY LEAN CLAY Brown, Stiff s FINE T IMEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES Brown, Medium Dense FINE TO COARSE SAND TRACE CLAY & GRAVEL. Brown, Medium Dense -Calibrated Hand Penetrometer The stratication fines represent the apprmdmate boundary Ira "CME 140 Ib. SPT automatic hammer between soli and rock types: In-situ, the bansftlon may ba gradual, TWATERVEL OBSERVATIONS, ftBORINGSTARTED 2-3-00 NE WD 1 NONE (2!4100) � �� �� �SA� BORINGCOMPLETED 2 -3 -DO rcRIG #5 FOREMAN TMDCI GD 12' (2/4/00) APPROVED BFG JOB # 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 34 ARCHITECTIENGI NEER Inc. FINE TO MEDIUM SAND. TRACE CLAY Dark Brown, Very Loose to Loose 9 FIIUM NE TO MEDSAND. TRACE CLAY Brown, Loose to Medium Dense FINE TO COARSE SAND TRACE CLAY _&GRAVEL. Brown, Loose to Medium „ Dense - S 5 SS SS 1 of 'Catbmted Hand Penetrometer The stratification linea represent the approximate boundary Ilnes --CME 140 ib. SPT automatic hammer between loll and rock types: In-situ, the transition tmay be gradual. gORI NG STARTED 2-3-00 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft WL 4 19.5 WS X ONE (214100) �� rr icon BORING COMPLETED 2-3-00 WL Y Q RIG #5 FOREMAN TM WL DCI @ 18' (214100) APPROVED BFG JOB4 06995251 City of Iowa CitySITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Pro osed Public Works Facllih Iowa Ci , Iowa SAMPLES TEST: C, To DESCRIPTION c w a z ¢� y U m � LuzWF H p Z pKa o 7 ZK�� oe FINE TO MEDIUM SAND. TRACE CLAY Dark Brown, Very Loose to Loose 9 FIIUM NE TO MEDSAND. TRACE CLAY Brown, Loose to Medium Dense FINE TO COARSE SAND TRACE CLAY _&GRAVEL. Brown, Loose to Medium „ Dense - S 5 SS SS 1 of 'Catbmted Hand Penetrometer The stratification linea represent the approximate boundary Ilnes --CME 140 ib. SPT automatic hammer between loll and rock types: In-situ, the transition tmay be gradual. gORI NG STARTED 2-3-00 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft WL 4 19.5 WS X ONE (214100) �� rr icon BORING COMPLETED 2-3-00 WL Y Q RIG #5 FOREMAN TM WL DCI @ 18' (214100) APPROVED BFG JOB4 06995251 LOG OF BORING NO. 36 Page I of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECTIENGI NEER City of Iowa city MMS Consultants. Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS CD 0 0 DESCRIPTION sW LL U: 0 z z Zz 0 0 W CL W 11; 0 0 0 0 � 0 z 0 0 D Z 6" Crushed Stone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY —Brown, P I SS 18 26 Dark Medium Dense .3 PA SP 2 SS 16 6 4 5 PA SP 3 SS 18 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA 7 WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY NODULES, sP 4 SS 14 a Brown, Loose to Medium Dense 1G PA Sp 5 SS 10 13 9 15 PA SID 6 SS 14 16 9 20 BOTTOM OF BORING The strafffication Itram represent the approodmsteZu.ny1Lr,,1-Calibrated Hand Penetrometer 40 1h. SPT autmatic hammer "CME 1401 between soil and rock types: in-sftu the hanitio radual. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS. it BORING STARTED 2-4-00 W BORING COMPLETED 2-4-00 -w—L N:0NE WD Y- a � RIG #5 FOREMAN TM 3z Irerra Irerracon ff2 L APPROVED BFGJJOB # 0699525IJ WL Backfilled LOG OF BORING NO. 37 Page 1 of 1 OWNER/CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City MMS Consultants, Inc. SITE South of Napoleon Park PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Proposed Public Works Facility SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION 0 w ZL C3 T �� Zi ��` = N m W U OW O Z Km �U O =Z) 6" Crushed Stone FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA SP 1 SS 16 22 5 Dark Brown, Loose to Medium Dense PA SP 2 SS 14 6 4 5 5 PA PIC 3 SS 18 10 16 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE CLAY PA _ WITH OCCASIONAL CLAY SEAMS _ SP 4 SS 14 11 8 Brown, Medium Dense PA -- SP 5 SS 16 15 4 -.'. 15 BOTTOM.OF.BORING a 5 i K QThe strafincatlon lines represem the apprmdmate boundary fines Oc hammer between soli and rock types: in-elu, the transition may be gradual, •CME'Calib 140 Sed automatic WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft � ��rr�con BORING STARTED 2-4-00 8W -V NONE. WD � BORING COMPLETED 2-4-00 RIG 45 FOREMAN TM o WL X V SWL Backfilled APPROVED BFG I JOB 06995251 GENERAL NOTES DRILLING & SAMPLING SYMBOLS: Very Soft 500- 11000 SS Split Spoon - 1'/r" I.D., 2" O.D. unless otherwise noted PS WS Piston Sample WashFish Sam ST Thin -Walled Tube - 2" O.D., Unless otherwise noted FT all Bete PA Power Auger RB ; Rock Bit HA Hand Auger BS Bulk Sample DB Diamond Bit - 41, N, B PM Pressuremeter AS Auger Sample DC Dutch Cone HIS Hollow Stem Auger WB Wash Bore Standard "N" Penetration: Blows per foot of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches on a 2 inch CD split spoon, except where noted. WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WS While Sampling WL Water Level WD While Drilling WCI Wet Cave In BCR Before Casing Removal DCI Dry Cave In ACR After Casing Removal AB After Boring Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the times Indicated. In pervious soils, the indicated levels may reflect the location of groundwater. In low permeability soils, the accurate deter- mination of ground water levels Is not possible with only short term observations. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION: Solt Classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System and ASTM Designations D-2487 and D-2488. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as: clays, if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non -plastic. Major con- stituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on gain sze. In s are defined density a drfine �g grained soiils on the basis of their consion to gradation, coarse istency. ned lExample: Lean nclay with sand htrace the basis of teir lgravel, ative tstiff e (CL); silty sand, trace gravel, medium dense (SM). CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS: Unconfined Compressive Strength, Qu, psi Consistency < 500 Very Soft 500- 11000 Soft 1,001 - 2,000 Medium 2,001 -4,000 Stiff 4,001 -8,000 Very Stiff 8,001 -16,000 Hard > .16,000 Very Hard RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS: N-Blowsl1t. Relative Density 0.3 Very Loose 4.9 Loose 10-29 Medium Dense 30-49 Dense 50-80 Very Dense 80+ Extremely Dense GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL Major SamComponent Size Range Descriptive Term(s) (of Components Also Percent of Boulders Over 12 In. (300mm) Present in Sample) Dry Weight Cobbles 12 in. to 3 in. Trace < 15 (300mm to 75mm) V!ith 15 -29 Gravel 3 in. to #4 sieve Modifier > 30 (75mm to 4.75mm) Sand #4 to #200 sieve RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES (4.75mm to 0.075mm)' Silt or Clay Passing #200 sieve -"� Descriptive Term(s) (0.075mm) (of Components Also Percent of Present in Sample) Dry Weight Trace < 5 With 5.12 Modifier > 12 1 rerracon Form 109-6E I UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Still Classlllcellon Crllerla for Asslgning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory TestsA Group Symbo Coarse -Grained Soils Gravels Clean Gravels Cu e 4 and 1 s Ccs 3s GW More than 50%retained on Moro than 50% of coarse Less than 5°/e, flows Cu < 4 aedlor 1 > Cc > 3s GP No. 200 slave fraction retained on No. 4 slave Fines classify as ML or MH GM Gravels with Fines - / More than 12% finesc Fines ciasslly as CL or CH GG Sands Clean Sands Cu e 6 and 1 s Co s 3s SW O� 5o% or more of coarse Lass fhan 5% (mess Cu < 6 and/or 1> Cc > 3e SP Traction passes _ / No. 4 sieve Fines ciasslly as ML or MH SM Sands with Flues - — MLOROL Mom than 12% Iinesa Fines classify as CL or CH so Flne.Gratned Solis Sills and Clays inorganic PI > 7 and plots on or above "A" liner CL 50% or more passes the Liquid limit less than 50 of < 4 or plots below "A" Ilnef ML No. 200 slave organic Liquid limit — Even dried < 0.75 OL Liquid limit — not dried Silts and Clays inorganic Pi plots on or above "A" line CH Liquid limit 50 or more PI lots below "A' line MH Highly organic soils ABased on the material passing the 3 -In. 75 -mm) sieve. Bit field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. EGravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols GW -GM well -graded gravel with sill _ GW_GC weal -graded gravel with clay GP -GM poorly graded gravel with s't GP -G0 poorly graded gravel with clay o5ands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols SW -SM well -graded sand with slit SW -SC well -graded sand with clay SPSM poorly graded sand with slit SP -SC goody graded sand with clay W 0 Fenn 111—a -ea p organic Liquid Ilmil —oven dried < 0.75 OH Liquid limit — not dried Primarily organic matter, dare In color, and organic odor PT (D,E)2 ECu = DidDlo Cc = Din x D, Fit soil contains z 15% sand, add "with sand" to group name. sit fines classify as CL -ML, use dual symbol GC - GM, or SC -SM. "If fines are organic, add "with organic tines" to group name. lIf soil contains z 15% gravel, add'Wlth gravel" to group name, 411 Atlerberg limas plot In shaded area, soil Is a CL ML, silty clay. Group Namen 1Nellgraded gravel° Poorly graded gravele Silly gravels` oa, Clayey gravile o'" Well graded sand' Roddy graded send Silty eando H' l ..,,.r.. _„Q, H, i Lean cEyx L. M Sllts 4 M Organic clays' H M, N Organic sill%' Fat clays'e'M Elastic silt%, 4 M Organic clayK M'" Orgaglc ally 4 M' o Peal Kit soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add 'With sand" or 'With gravel", whichever is predominant. 4f soil contains a• 30% plus. No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name. "If soil contains >_ 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add "gravelly' to group name. NPI a 4 and plots on or above "A" line. OF < 4 or plots below "A" line. PPI plots on or above "A" line. Ertl plots below "A" ids. IIFor classification of finegralned soils and linegralned fraction o1 ccerse- grained soils l Equation of "A" - line Horizontal at PI = 4 to LL = 25.5. then PI = 0.73 ILL - 20) Equatlon of "U" - line Vertical al LL = 16 1, PI = 7, / Then PI = 0.9 (LL • in / I / I / / O .P G / O� / MH GROH MLOROL I d a 1n 1s 20 30 ao 50 se, 70 ao 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT (LL) 1 rerracon IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Bidder's Options A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select one of the products or manufacturers named which complies with the technical specifications. No substitutions will be allowed. C. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer, and stating "or equivalent", "or equal", or "or Architect approved equivalent", or similar wording, submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named for review and approval. D. For products specified by naming only one product or manufacturer, there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed. 1.2 Substitutions A. Base Bid shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for products may be made during the bidding period by submitting completed substitution request form and substantiating product dateiterature to the Architect a minimum of seven (7) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 2. The Architect will consider requests from the bidder utilizing this section for substitution of products or manufacturers in place of those specified. 3. Requests submitted at least seven (7) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids will be included in an addendum, if deemed acceptable. 4. Substitution requests may be submitted utilizing a facsimile machine (FAX) or as an e-mail attachment, if substitution request forms and substantiating data are included. B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in contract documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature, identifying: _- 1) Product description _ 2) Reference standards 3) Performance and test data C. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, listing significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. All effects of substitution on separate contracts. PS -1 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 7. Availability of maintenance services, and sources or replacement materials. C. Requests for substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents. 2. In judgment of the Architect, adequate product data/literature necessary for complete evaluation was not submitted. D. The Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.3 Bidder's Representation A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid Is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 1.4 Architect's Duties A. Review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Issue an addendum to identify accepted substitutions. C. No verbal or written approvals other than by addendum will be valid. 1.5 Substitution Request Form A. The blank form is bound into this project manual. B. Substitutions will be considered only when the attached form, or a copy thereof, is completed and included with the substantiating data. PS -2 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING TO: Kueny Architects, L.L.C. Attn: Jon Wallenkamp, AIA 10505 Corporate Drive, Suite 100 Pleasant Prairie, WI 53158 Phone: (262) 857-8101 Fax: (262) 857-8103 Email: ionwC�kuenvarch.com We hereby submit for your consideration the following product, instead of the specified item: DWG. NO. DRAWING TITLE SPEC. SECT. PARAGRAPH SECTION TITLE SPECIFIED ITEM PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and / or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit with request necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. The undersigned certifies that the function, appearance and quality are of equal performance and assumes liability for equal performance, equal deisgn and compatibility with adjacent materials. Submitted by: Signature rint Name Title Date PS -3 Phone Firm Fax Address Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above items. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For Use by Owner For use By Architect Recommended Recommended as Noted _ Recommended _ Recommended as Noted _ _ Not Recommended ._ Received Late _ Not Recommended _ Received Late _ Insufficient Data Received _ Insufficient Data Received Date By Date PS -3 IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING Fill in the Blanks Below (Attach additional sheets if necessary): A. Does the substitution affect dimensions indicated on the Drawings? Yes No If yes, clearly indicate changes below: B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design. including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? Yes No If yes, clearly indicate changes: C. What effect does substitution have on other contracts or other trades? D. What effet does substitution have on construction schedule? E. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different Explain: F. Reason for Request: G. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution (list significant variations): H. _Designation of mainentance services and sources: PS -4 Warm Storage Building Project Iowa City Public Works City of Iowa City Kueny Architects LLC. PUBLIC WORKS COMPLEX WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT IOWA CITY, IA ADDENDUM #2 DATE: July 12, 2012 OWNER City of Iowa City, Iowa City Public Works FROM: Jon Wallenkamp, Kueny Architects, L.L.0 1. To all Contract Bidders of record. This Addendum is issued to modify, explain or correct the original Drawings and Specifications as noted below, and is hereby made a part of the Contract documents. Please attach this Addendum to the Specifications in your possession. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject Bidder to disqualification. 2. This addendum consists of 5 written pages CHANGES TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS w Table of Contents A. REVISE "Section 09 90 00 — Painting" to "Section 09 91 00 — Painting". Instructions to Bidders, Article 6 — Post -Bid Information A. REVISE A.3. 'Within 24 hours of the bid opening, the apparent low bidder shall supply a list of names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom they intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount." Form Of Proposal - A. ADD Number of calendar days required to complete Design Option 'A' and Design Option 'B' is now shown for contractor completion. Calendar days shall be shown for each building bid and will be used to determine a project based completion date and working days from which liquidated damages would be assessed. B. REVISE Bid Security language "The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ , ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount OR ten percent (10%) of Alternate #1 amount OR ten percent (10%) of the lowest of the two amounts if both building systems are bid." 1 Warm Storage Building Project City of Iowa City Iowa City Public Works Kueny Architects LLC, C. CLARIFY ALTERNATE #1 — OPTION `B' - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS SECTION 13 34 19 Alternate #1 as it relates to painting must include the painting of the bollards (color yellow), doors, and door frames per 09 90 00. All exterior elements to be factory painted and is part of this alternate. The metal building steel components; frames, purlins, girts and misc. steel will be delivered to the site factory primed will receive finish painting per section 09 90 00 as part of alternate #3. D. CLARIFY ALTERNATE #3 — PAINTING - SECTION 09 90 00 The (13 34 19) metal building steel components; frames, purlins, girls and misc. steel will be delivered to the site factory primed will receive finish painting per this section. E. CLARIFY Unit Price will be used during excavation of foundations if a soft spot of unsuitable soil is encountered and verified by the soils engineer. F. DELETE 'The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract and following space for listing." Supplementary Conditions Part 1, Article 11 — Insurance & Bonds, Section E.11.3 - PROPERTY INSURANCE A. CLARIFY The OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance as described in parts .1 through .8. Section 01 50 00 1.1 - Description — A. Work Included A. CLARIFY Temporary sanitary facilities (Porta-jon) are required for this project. Contractor will not have access to the Streets Administration Building. Section 01 50 00 2.1 D - Temporary Telephone Service A. DELETE This section is not required in this project. No hard wire phone required. Section 01 50 00 2.5 Temporary Controls A. CLARIFY An NPDES permit has been obtained by the OWNER for the entire Publid Works Complex. The Contractor will be required to comply with all federal standards, state rules, and state administrative codes. Section 01 50 00 2.8 — Project Identification and Signs A. DELETE This section is not required in this project. No Project Identification or Signs, required. Sections 08 41 00 — Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts & 08 80 00 - Glazing A. CLARIFY Sections 08 41 00 & 08 80 00 are required for the dormer windows specified in Section 13 34 19 - Metal Building Systems. Section 13 34 18 — Pole Barn Building —Article 1.3.C.3 —Structural Design A. REVISE The limit allowable deflection shall be U180 Warm Storage Building Project Iowa City Public Works City of Iowa city Kueny Architects LLC. Section 13 34 18 — Pole Barn Building — Article 2.12 Component Color A. REVISE A.1.Siding Panels to be MBCI Signature 300 — Colonial Red. B. REVISE B.1. Roof Panels to be MBCI Signature 300 —Medium Bronze. C. ADD Interior Metal panels to be factory painted Color white. Doors, door frames and bollards shall be painted on site as part of the base bid. Bollards shall be painted yellow per 09 90 00. CMU walls, exposed interior & exterior ducts, pipes and conduits shall not be painted, only metal doors and bollards. Section 13 34 19 — Metal Building Systems — Article 1.2.D.1 —Structural Design A. REVISE b.8. Exterior wall and roof system to withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of span: L/180 Section 13 34 19 — Metal Building Systems — Article 1.7 Warranties A. REVISE B. Weather Tightness Endorsement - 20 years REVISE C. Coated Steel Finished — 25 years Section 13 34 19 — Metal Building Systems — Article 2.1 Materials A. REVISE H.3.a. Color: Medium Bronze Section 13 34 19 — Metal Building Systems — Article 2.2 Acceptable Manufactures A. ADD the following as approved manufactures; American Buildings (Part of the Nucor Building Systems Group) and Behlen Building Systems. Section 22 05 14 — Plumbing Specialties — Part 2 Catch Basins A. REVISE The use of equivalent square catch basins is acceptable in lieu of round ones. CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS Sheet 1.0 Title Sheet A. CLARIFY Building Code to use for the pole barn and the metal building is IBC 2009 as noted on the title sheet. Sheet 2.1 — Floor Plans A. REVISE Detail 1/2.1 — Pole Barn - Option A Elevation Tags Elevation tag 1/2.2 (North elevation) should read 3/2.2 Elevation tag 2/2.2 (South elevation) should read 1/2.2 Elevation tag 3/2.2 (East elevation) should read 2/2.2 — - B. REVISE Detail 2/2.1 - Metal Building — Option B Elevation Tags Elevation to 1/2.3 North elevation should re 2 9 ( ) ad 3/ .3 Elevation tag 2/2.3 (South elevation) should read 1/2.3 Elevation tag 3/2.3 (East elevation) should read 2/2.3 Warm Storage Building Project Iowa City Public Works City of Iowa City Kueny Architects LLC, Sheet 2.2— Exterior Elevation — Pole Building A. REVISE Detail 1/2.2 — should read South Elevation Pole Building and not North Elevation Metal Building. B. REVISE Detail 2/2.2 — should read East Elevation Pole Building and not South Elevation Metal Building. C. REVISE Detail 3/2.2 — should read North Elevation Pole Building and not East Elevation Metal Building. D. REVISE Elements indicated with spec section (13 43 19) should read (13 43 18) E. REVISE Downspouts shall discharge to the North and South at grade level and not to pavement on the east as shown on the elevations. Sheet 2.3 — Exterior Elevation — Metal Building A. REVISE Detail 1/2.3—should read South Elevation Metal Building and not North Elevation Metal Building. B. REVISE Detail 2/2.3 — should read East Elevation Metal Building and not South Elevation Metal Building. C. REVISE Detail 3/2.3—should read North Elevation Metal Building and not East Elevation Metal Building. D. REVISE Downspouts shall discharge to the North and South at grade level and not to pavement on the east as shown on the elevations. Sheet 2.2 Exterior Elevation Pole Barn Building & 2.3 Exterior Elevation Metal Building A. CLARIFY A reverse R metal panel —Architectural III is acceptable to be used on this project. In both (13 34 18) Pole Building & (13 34 19) Metal Building it will only be one type of panel and not two (2) as shown on elevations on sheets 2.2 & 2.3. B. CLARIFY Color reference notes shall read: "colors per specs" in lieu of `colors to match existing" Sheet 4.1 — Wall Sections and Details - Pole Building A. REVISE Insulation Section should read (07 21 00) and not (07 20 00) as indicated. B. REVISE Hollow Metal Doors & Frames section should read (08 11 00) and not (08 11 13) as indicated. C. REVISE Concrete on all wall sections shall be the following: 6" concrete slab per floor plan over 7" compacted stone by (03 30 00) D. REVISE Detail 4/4.1 - All bollards shall be painted yellow per (09 91 00) -4w J Warm Storage Building Project City of Iowa City Iowa City Public Works Kueny Architects LLC. E. CLARIFY Detail 8/4.1 - The text that is cut off should read: (13 34 18) R-39 blown -in insulation w/vented air space vapor barrier @ warm side Sheet 4.2 Metal Building Wall Sections A. CLARIFYIt is acceptable to have a clearance of 15'-6" (approx.) under the metal building frame at the haunch. B. REVISE Insulation Section should read (07 21 00 ) and not (07 20 00) as indicated. C. REVISE Hollow Metal Doors & Frames section should read (08 11 00) and not (08 11 13) as indicated. D. REVISE Concrete on all wall sections shall be the following: 6" concrete slab per floor plan over 7" compacted stone by (03 30 00) E. REVISE Detail 2/4.1 - Detail Section tag 5/4.1 should read 5/4.2 F. REVISE Detail 3/4.2 - Detail Section tag 6/4.1 should read 6/4.2 G. REVISE Detail 3/4.2 - All bollards shall be painted yellow per (09 91 00) H. REVISE Detail 7/4.2 - Elements indicated with spec section (13 43 18) should read (13 43 19) I. REVISE Detail 8/4.2 - Detail Section tag 6/4.1 should read 6/4.2 Sheet 9.1 Foundation Plans A. REVISE Slab on Grade concrete schedule should read as, "Concrete profile type "A" — 6" concrete w/ 6x6 W2.9 x W2.9 WWF w/ 0.006 mil polyethylene vapor barrier over 7" compacted limestone. B. CLARIFY The pad has been graded to approx. 651.20 at the middle of the pad and 650.84 at the northwest corner, 650.72 at the southwest corner, 650.91 at the southeast corner and 650.62 at the northeast corner. As noted on the foundation sheet the finish floor elevation at the wall line is 652.00 and 651.50 at the catch basin rims. All rough and final grading required to meet the listed final grade elevations is the responsibility of this contractor. Revised floor slab thickness list prior. Sheet 9.2 Framing Plan A. CLARIFY Purlins are allowed to pass through skylights B. CLARIFY Lintels and Plates: ASTM A 36. Shop Paint Primer: Standard primer: SSPC Paint 13. See plans for Lintel types and dimensions. Sheet Hi — Warm Storage HVAC plans A. REVISE Warm Storage HVAC North Elevation should read South Elevation B. REVISE Warm Storage HVAC South Elevation should read North Elevation. ATTACHMENT -� co , Revised Form of Proposal — Purple paper 5 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed oFEsaro,y'�, 4< Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa F y JOHN F. %o ^ -7 Q Zo I Z z = SWMIDBAUER z nature)(date) 10% 17116 :ia *ti My license renewal date is December 31, 2013 Ir Pages or sheets covered by this seal: r Specification - Division 1 through Division 31 Warm Storage Building Project City of Iowa City Iowa City Public Works Kueny Architects LLC. WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT IOWA CITY, IA ADDENDUM #3 DATE: July 16, 2012 OWNER City of Iowa City, Iowa City Public Works FROM: Jon Wallenkamp, Kueny Architects, L.L.C. To all Contract Bidders of record. This Addendum is issued to modify, explain or correct the original Drawings and Specifications as noted below, and is hereby made a part of the Contract documents. Please attach this Addendum to the Specifications in your possession. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject Bidder to disqualification. 2. This addendum consists of 1 written page and 8 printed sheets (8.5 x 11) CHANGES TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS No changes. CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS Sheet E.1 —Warm Storage Electrical Plans A. ADD New electrical notes #13 and 14. See notes on attached page 1. B. REVISE Relocated electrical panel location, EM light and light switches on Detail 1/E.1, See new details on attached page 2. C. ADD New electrical switch locations on Detail 1/E.1. See new details on attached page 3. D. ADD New Utility pad mount transformer, relocated electric panel, electric meter and notes on Detail 2/E.1. See new details on attached page 4. Sheet E.2—Schedules, Details A. REVISE New electrical detail. See attached page 5. ADD Sheet E.3 —Electric Site Plan A. Warm Storage transformer pad and notes. See new details on attached page 6. B. New notes for electrical site plan. See new notes on attached page 7. "] C. See attached electric transformer containment area detail. D. See new transformer containment details. See attached Details 2/E.3 & 3/E.3 on Page 8..: � $ X222 ¢\ 22(§ �/ � \gym® 2m )OR RB \m -Z m2 \ k§ro \) §Em , ° d§ ` �§ § > �)§ §■ §()§§ > mm2 §% zk\ > 2 \ \ ADDENDUM #3 S -WARM STORAGE ELECTRICAL PLANS ADDITIONAL NOTES (pg. 1) ADDENDUM #3 E.1 - WARM STORAGE ELECTRICAL PLANS REVISED ELECTRICAL - DETAIL 1 /E.1 (Pg. 2) i w ADDENDUM #3 E.l - WARM STORAGE ELECTRICAL PLANS REVISED ELECTRICAL - DETAIL 1 /E.l (Pg• 3) OK ; � O U 0 z 08 0 En c� z ADDENDUM n3 E.2 - FUEL ISLAND ELECTRICAL PLANS NEW DETAIL ON SHEET E.2 (P9. 5) Wrom N00 om O C g2g m�rz O Z Z cn ADDENDUM#3 E.3 - ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN REVISED ELECTRICAL INFORMATION (Pg. 6) FU TUR WARS STOAT TURE 01-D )RAGI A FUTUR WASH Ol 4' HDPE I� PRIMARY CONDOR O ' �r \m 1 \ FUTURE BUILDING NOT PART OF THIS PROJECT W, SITE SHEET NOTES O COORDINATE ELECTRIC SERVICE WITH MIDAMERICAN ENERGY AS REQUIRED. INSTALL NEW SERVICE PER MIDAMERICAN SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL APPLICABLE CODES. OPROVIDE 4" PRIMARY CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40 HDPE COILABLE WITH MINIMUM COVER OF 42") TO TRANSFORMER. INCLUDE PULL LINE. INSTALL PER MID AMERICAN ENERGY SPECIFICATIONS. MID AMERICAN TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL PRIMARY CABLE. O PROVIDE SECONDARY CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS FROM PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER TO SERVICE PANEL PER MID AMERICAN SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL APPLICABLE CODES. OPROVIDE CT TRANSFORMER ENCLOSURE ON BUILDING OR ON 3" GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT PEDESTAL PER MID AMERICAN ENERGY SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE 1" RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL OR SCHEDULE 80 PVC CONDUIT UNDERGROUND FROM PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER. CONDUIT ABOVE GRADE AT CT ENCLOSURE SHALL BE RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL PROVIDE 3/4" X 10' COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD, CONDUIT AND GROUND CONDUCTOR TO MID AMERICAN ENERGY REQUIREMENTS. O PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER CONCRETE PAD AND CONTAINMENT PER MID AMERICAN ENERGY REQUIREMENTS BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. GROUND ROD SLEEVES BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. ADDENDUM #3 E.3 - ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN NEW ELECTRICAL NOTES (Pg. 7) L BOLLARDS (TYP.) CONTAINMENT AREA PER OCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 24' DEEP MIN IN 4' CONCRETE SLAB 6x6 - 1.4xW1.4 W.W.F. OVER 4' A COMPACTED 4 a O o \-5OLLARD (TYP.) wContainment Area - Floor plan E3 2' ROCK SCREENED OVER SILT FENCE OR OTHER FABRIC WITH EQUAL OR LOWER POROSITY. BOLLARD 4/4.2 ( TRANSFORMER --- ----------I TRANSFORMER PAD PE -LOCAL UTILIItY / REQUIREMENTS 2" ROCK SCREENED OVER SILT FENCE OR OTHER FABRIC WITH EQUAL OR LOWER POROSITY. RIVER ROCK OVER SILT FENCE FABRIC. G.C. TO VERIFY WITH )CAL UTILITY EXACT LAYOUT 4 LOCATIONS 'ERIOR FLOOR FINISH PER SITE PLAN LAYOUT E.3 3 Containment Area - Section ADDENDUM #3 E.3 - ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN CONTAINMENT AREA DETAILS (Pg. 8) IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING * * * * k * * * * * * * * * July 16, 2012 Addendum #3 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed s�py'.,� Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa yQ�.J6HNF. �5�a. :, �G 7//10/2_ __ ,u SCHMIDBAUER :a-, signature) (date) 17116 My license renewal date is December 31; 2013 '"; roWN aa% Pages or sheets covered by this seal: 118f+eesscaa Specification - Division 1 through Division 31 July 16, 2012 Addendum #3 --7T-TT-Tr- 4c(8) Prepared by: Melissa Clow, Special Projects Administrator, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 319-356-5413 RESOLUTION NO. 14-93 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE IOWA CITY PUBLIC WORKS WARM STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Iowa City Public Works Warm Storage Building Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Septagon Construction Company, Inc. of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, dated August 21, 2012, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Engineer's office; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Warm Storage Building, Napoleon Park Public Works account # 3970; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $228,523.00. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 15th day of April , 20 14 MAYOR Approved by ATTEST: 27a—, tom+*/ iC . 2 '14 -Ca � CITY C ERK City Attorney's Office q(c-//y It was moved by Mims and seconded by Dobvns the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were. AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: �i Pwenglmastersfacptwork. doc 4114 Botchway Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton C n 01 LVJ rel U U U 22 U Floor Plan m Pole Barn = Option A __0 __0 U WALL. WIDTH >R PLANS CAULK ON BOTH SIDES @ MASONRY O I 42 D - 3 22 4 23 t 3 � Door Frame Details ®1 N Schedule — — — — — — — — — — — — r — — — — — — — — — — — —1— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 20'-0' 20'-0' 20'-0' 20'-0' I I I I I ° ° I I I I I I I F — — — — — — — — — r — — — — — — — — — — — —I— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — I I I I I O 1 °I. _ __ ____ _—_ _ _ __ if _ _ I I --p I Glass Remarks Numbet ° I I I I Number I 03 I I I r 941--T— I Width I 0 I ;p I O i 4.1 16-0" 3" 11-314" - Insulated �ry mry I 0 I I I I I 13'-6" 15-0" BW ge ICq- I I_ I I I I Exterior to Storage 102 I I 13'-6" I I O I - CHardware per Division 08300 C D Exterior to Storage 101 OH Steel OH - I 154" X' 1 1,14" - 1 o 0 1 1 I I I I eto ge I - 2 I I I� - X - X X X - - 2 IC12la, _—_—_ _ _ _ _ _ LH I 1 - B I C' Head 3 I I I I 3 Z D, IM I ' a ° °I_ 0 _ _ 1 m Z 0 I 0 01�n I d I I I I I F- I. OA I 0 I I F I I I I I I I O ° I 0 I ------------I------------ ----G,45f1gT€R 20'-0' 0 20'-0' 20'-0' I ^ 4.1 80'-0' A I ° I I I I I 2 I I 4.1 I stor Some I I I IceI� I - I Z I O I O 1= I o mZ O ° TYP. CONTROL JOINT } I I I OA I I_ I� r I IM I I COLUMN: (3)-2x10'e I I 14L (13 34 15) 44 A I I I k I I� L — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 3-8—� 20'-0' 20'-0' 20'-0' 20'-0' 60'-0' U U U 22 U Floor Plan m Pole Barn = Option A __0 __0 U WALL. WIDTH >R PLANS CAULK ON BOTH SIDES @ MASONRY O I 42 D - 3 22 4 23 t 3 � Door Frame Details ®1 2 Floor Plan m Metal Building= Option B 1 /B" - 1 '-Cr A B Frame Types SEE ELEVATIONS FOR MULTIPLE DOORS. TRANSOM AND SIDELRE DETAILS OH Special Door Types ENTRANCE LOCK 0 Turn/Push—button locking. Pushing and turning button locks outside lever requiring use of key until button is manually unlocked. Push—button locking. Pushing button locks outside lever until unlocked by key outside or by turning inside lever. Lockset Types N Schedule — — — — — — — — — — — — r — — — — — — — — — — — —1— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — D, - I I I I I ° ° I I I I I I I stol age I^ I I I I O 1 °I. _ __ ____ _—_ _ _ __ _—_ _ _ _ _ _ _ --p Thickness Louver Glass Remarks Numbet Lockset Number 03 I I Type Material I Width Height Thickness Louver ° 01 I 13' 6"' 16-0" 3" 11-314" - Insulated �ry mry A I I I I I 13'-6" 15-0" I Insulated I I_ I I I L I I I I Exterior to Storage 102 I I 13'-6" I Im I I I 1= W1 1-314" - Insulated - CHardware per Division 08300 C D Exterior to Storage 101 OH Steel OH - I 154" X' 1 1,14" - 1 o 0 1 1 I I I I eto ge I - 2 I I I� - X - X X X - - 2 IC12la, Storage 101 to Storage 102 HG Metal LH I 1 X B I C' Head 3 I I I I 3 Z I I ' a ° °I_ _ _ 1 m Z 0 I 0 01�n TYP. CONTROL JOINT d I F- I. OA I 0 I I F I I I � I I r a? I O 02 L------------� ------------I------------ ----G,45f1gT€R 20'-0' 20'-0' 20'-0' 20'-0' 80'-0' A 2 Floor Plan m Metal Building= Option B 1 /B" - 1 '-Cr A B Frame Types SEE ELEVATIONS FOR MULTIPLE DOORS. TRANSOM AND SIDELRE DETAILS OH Special Door Types ENTRANCE LOCK 0 Turn/Push—button locking. Pushing and turning button locks outside lever requiring use of key until button is manually unlocked. Push—button locking. Pushing button locks outside lever until unlocked by key outside or by turning inside lever. Lockset Types Special N Schedule Hardware Hardware Schedule Door Door Frame Normal Size Special Door Schedule Hardware Hardware Schedule Door Door Frame Normal Size Alternate Number Rooms Type Material Swing Label Width Height Thickness Louver Glass Remarks Numbet Lockset Number Number S Rooms Type Material Swing Label Width Height Thickness Louver A Exterior to Storage 102 OH Steel OH - 13' 6"' 16-0" 3" 11-314" - Insulated - A Hardware per Division 08300 A B Exterior to Storage 102 OH Steel OH - 13'-6" 15-0" 3'° 1314" - Insulated - B Hardware per Dirvtsion 08300 B C Exterior to Storage 102 OH Steel OH - 13'-6" 160 W1 1-314" - Insulated - CHardware per Division 08300 C D Exterior to Storage 101 OH Steel OH - 13T-6" 154" X' 1 1,14" - Insulated - D Hardware per Division 08300 D 7'-0" 1314" - Insulated B Metal - - - 2 Entrance - - - X - X X X - - 2 3 Storage 101 to Storage 102 Door Schedule Hardware Schedule Door Frame Alternate Normal Size Number S Rooms Type Material Swing Label Width Height Thickness Louver Glass Type Material Label Glass Transom Remarks Number Lockset Push -Pull Hold open Closer Hinge Door Stop Threshold Weatherstrip lock Plate Soundstop Name Plate Hardware Notes Numbe 1 Exterior to Storate 101 HO Metal LHRB T-0" 7'-0" 134" Insulated B Metal i Entrance - X X X X - 1 2 Exterior to Storage 102 HG Metal RHRB T-0" 7'-0" 1314" - Insulated B Metal - - - 2 Entrance - - - X - X X X - - 2 3 Storage 101 to Storage 102 HG Metal LH T -W 7'-0 " 13/40 X B Metal - C' Head 3 Entrance - - - X X - - - - 3 3 Roof Plan 1/16 -=l. -Cr A TRUE NORTH PLAN NORTH Floor Plans A. Noted ® 2012 K u e n y A r In In 1 t e c t a, L.L.C. -AII Rights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building May 30. 2012 113 34 I5XI3 34 19) 7 North Elevation - Metal Building 1/B'-1'-0' (13 34 18) METAL /I0. 0.d IA) AI I[MIMI IM 3 East Elevation= Metal Building 1/B'=1'-0' 2 South Elevation= Mortal Building 1/S'-1'-0' f ER .5 rER s N O_ N CD C..) W im West Elevation - Metal Building: m Exterior Elevations= Pole Building ® 2012 Ku a n y Ar c h its c t s. L.L.C. - ighte Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building May 30, 2012 2m2 ALUMINUM GUTTER t 9 North Elevation= Metal Building 1 /B" - 1 '-U 2 South Elevation - Mortal Building 1 /B" = 1 '-0' QI I I I I METAL ROOFING Y ALUMINUM GUTTER t Q 3 East Elevation= Metal Building 1 /S' = 1 '-O' TER .5 TER .9 v o_ N 4 West Elevation - Metal Building Exterior Elevations= Metal Building ® 2012 K u s In y A r c h i t e c t a, L.L.C. - AffRights Reserved Iowa City Public Warks Facility- Storage Building May 30, 2012 (04 20 00) BOND BEAM (I3 34 18) METAL PANELS i 18) R-39 BLOWN -IN INVENTED AIR SPACE %RRIER ® WARM SIDE (13 34 18) RE -ENGINEERED TRUSSES PER FRAMING PLAN I (13 34 IS) ROOF METAL ELS. COLOR TO BE ET RMINED BY OWNER (04 20 00) BOND BEAM (13 34 18) ROOF METAL PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED BY OWNER FAJ (13 34 18) METAL ROOFING. VAPOR BARRIER - WARM SIDE VENT SPACER AT ROOF LINE (13 34 18) 12' Q 3' T (13 34 18) METAL ROOFING 4 FLASHING (13 34 18) METAL ROOFING. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS 12' Q 3' A" VAPOR BARRIER - WARM SIDE VENT SPACER AT ROOF LINE (13 34 18) (13 34 18) METAL ROOFING 4 FLASHING / X \ X X \ TOP OF WALL Jk TOP OF WALL I I I — F ELEV..18'-0' ELEV..I8'-0' B/TRUSS B/TRUSS (13 34 IS) (I3 34 IB) ALUMINUM GUTTER, (13 34 18) IIi2' METAL (13 34 18) ALUMINUM GUTTER, 7IN5ULATION V. VARIES ELEV. VARIES (13 34 18) g• METAL PANELS METAL PANELS 2'-0' FASCIA ANp SOFFIT. PANELS 2'-0' FASCIA AND SOFFIT. — BLOCKING AS REQUIRED BLOCKING AS REQUIRED (13 34 IS) (13 34 18) R-39 BLOWN -IN PRE-ENGINEERED TRUSSES (13 34 18) ALUMINUM SOFFIT W/ (13 34 18) ALUMINUM SOFFIT W/ (13 34 IS) R-39 BLOWN -IN INSULATION W/VENTED AIR SPACE 3• (13 34 18) R-39 BLOWN -IN PER FRAMING PLAN VENT EACH 4'-0' O.C. VENT EACH 4'-0' O.G. W/VENTED VAPOR BARRIER ® WARM SIDE INSULATION W/VENTED AIR SPACE VAPOR AIR SPACE VAPOR (13 34 18) R-39 BLOWN -IN CI3 S IS) BARRIER ® WARM SIDE (13 34 18) BARRIER o WARM SIDE INSULATION W/VENTED AIR SPACE (I3 E 18) lie' METAL PRE-ENGINEERED TRUSSES PRE-ENGINEERED TRUSSES VAPOR BARRIER a WARM SIDE PANELS PER FRAMING PLAN FIELD VERIFY. WALL TO BE (13 34 18) RI9 BATT INSULATION FIELD VERIFY. WALL TO BE AS CLOSE TO JOIST AS AS CLOSE TO JOIST AS POSSIBLE (13 34 18) B R BARRIER POLY VAPOR (13 34 18) R -3S BLOWN -IN POSSIBLE Ii2' METAL PANELS BARRIER PER SPEC INSULATION W/VENTED AIR SPACE VAPOR BARRIER o WARM SIDE (04 20 00) 8' MASONRY WALL W/HORIZONTAL (13 34 IS) RIGID INSULATION (13 34 16) RI9 BATT INSULATION REINFORCING B 16' O.G. (13 34 18) HEADER W/REINFORCED POLY VAPOR S-03 34 18) SHEET METAL COLUMNS AS INDICATED ON BARRIER PER SPEC l09 91 00) PAINTED WALLS FASCIA FRAMING PLANS (13 34 18) (04 20 00) 8' MASONRY WALL W/HORIZONTAL 2x10's m 16' O.G. (13 34 18) REINFORCING ® I6' O.C. _ (05 12 00) LINTEL PER6 (05 12 00) LINTEL (2) (13 34 18) I'i2' METAL 4.1 STRUCTURAL PLANS + 31i2'x 31/2'x1/4' L's PANELS (13 34 18) 111/z' METAL PANELS (08 II 13) HOLLOW METAL FRAME W/4' HEADER 9 (09 91 00) PAINTED WALLS (03 30 00) 5' CONCRETE SLAB PER FLOOR PLAN (03 30 00).006 MIL VAPOR BARRIER (03 30 00) 6' COMPACTED STONE a a" B/CONCRETE PAD• ELEV. -I'-6' (03 30 00) CONCRETE PAD PER FOUNDATION PLAN I' I.L 34' LI. IV2' (13 34 IS) 2x10's WOOD BLOCKING (13 34 18) (3) 2XIO'S (03 30 00) 6' CONCRETE WOOD COLUMN FLOOR PER FLOOR PLAN (03 30 00). 006 MIL VAPOR BARRIER (03 30 00) FELT (03 30 00) 1' COMPACTED STONE (03 30 00)CONCRETE PER SITE PLAN FF. —,� ELEV. +0'-0' (03 30 00) FOOTING PER FOUNDATION PLAN (0T 20 00) 2' PERIMETER INSULATION R-4.11 PER INCH -- TOTAL R-834 5/FOOTING ELEV. -4'-0' (08 II 13) HOLLOW METAL DOOR (03300) 5' CONCRETE SLAB PER FLOOR PLAN 0 1/i 1/i 1/i 1/i _ MIL VAPORBARRIER (0 - - ri 1/i o) ro' COMPA STONE n�il_]3i�Jft.7 I\ (03 30 00) CONCRETE PAD PER FOUNDATION PLAN Detail - Footing @ Columns 4.1 3' • 1'-0' (08 30 00) INSULATED OVERHEAD DOOR (03 30 00) 6' CONCRETE FLOOR PER FLOOR PLAN (03 30 00). 006 MIL _ VAPOR BARRIER (03 30 00) 7 COMPACTED STONE (03 30 00) FOOTING PERS FOUNDATION PLAN II I I I L 2 4.1 �CAULK 4 BACKER ROD EA. SIDE VM/ CONTINUOUS REINF. 'DUROWAL' THRU JOINT EVERY SECOND COURSE MAX SPACING 24' O.C. 1 Masonry Control Joints 1`12' ' (03 30 00) COPCRETE PER SITE PLAN V OIL FF. ELEV. -0' -0' (0l 60 00) METAL FLASHING BY CONCRETE CONTRACTOR (03 30 00) CONCRETE FOOTING AS RQUIRED — JI 5/FOOTING ELEV. -4'-0' O.H. COI, IT (13 34 18) 2x10's WOOD BLOCKING (03 30 00) 6' CONCRETE FLOOR PER FLOOR PLAN (03 30 00). 006 MIL VAPOR BARRIER (03 30 00) l' COMPACTED STONE I2' (03 30 00) FOOTING PER °, I • °a FOUNDATION PLAN SMOOTH FINISH TOP 4'0 STEEL TUBE CONCRETE FILLED PROVIDE 2 or 4 POSTS ® EA. O.H. DOOR PER PLAN ELECTRICAL PER PLAN (13 34 18) 2' INSULATION — (03 30 00) FELT (03 30 00)CONCRETE PER SITE PLAN FF. ELEV. +0'-0' (01 20 00) 2' PERIMETER INSULATION R -4.1T PER INCH -- TOTAL R-834 B/FOOTING ELEV. -4'-0' VERIFY DISTANCE W/ O.H. DOOR GONTR ATTACHMENT L ° a , BLOCKING (13 34 18) 3/4' CUBIC YARD PANEL (13 34 18) OF CONCRETE PER e TION BATT (13 34 18) II I• PANEL (13 34 18) rN 5 OH doorjamb detail 4 bollard detail (1 s units) 4.1 1V2. , 1.-0. 4.1 ,2• . 1.-0. Wall Sections and Details= Pole Bern 0 2012 K u e n y A r c h i t e c t e, L.L.G. -AII Rights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building May 30, 2012 0 C-)-< �r G 9 a i f�•l � 5 OH doorjamb detail 4 bollard detail (1 s units) 4.1 1V2. , 1.-0. 4.1 ,2• . 1.-0. Wall Sections and Details= Pole Bern 0 2012 K u e n y A r c h i t e c t e, L.L.G. -AII Rights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building May 30, 2012 2 (04 20 00) BOND BEAM (13 34 IS) ROOF METAL PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED BY OWNER (13 34 19) ROOF METAL PANELS. COLOR TO BE DETERMINED BY OWNER FAJ (13 34 IS) 6' METAL BUILDING RIS BATT INSULATION W/REINFORCED POLY VAPOR BARRIER PER SPEC aLLLL 0 (13 34 IS) METAL FRAME N �q 7 y W y (13 34 19) STEEL PERLINS 113 34 19J j PER FRAMING PLAN PRE-ENGINEERED TRUSSES PER FRAMING PLAN 5/TRUSS 5/TRUSS ELEV. VARIES I ELEV. VARIES (04 20 00) �' BOND BEAM (13 34 19) R-39 BLOWN -IN (13 34 IS) R -3S BLOWN -IN INSULATION W/VENTED INSULATION W/VENTED AIR SPACE VAPOR AIR SPACE VAPOR BARRIER a WARM SIDE BARRIER ® WARM SIDE (08 30 00) O.H. DOOR TRACK FIELD VERIFY. WALL TO BE FIELD VERIFY. WALL TO BE AS CLOSE TO FLANGE AS M AS CLOSE TO FLANGE AS POSSIBLE POSSIBLE (04 20 00) 8' MASONRY (13 34 1S) COMPOSITE STEEL (09 91 00) PAINTED WALLS WALL W/HORIZONTAL COLUMN/BEAM PER REINFORCING S 16' O.G. FRAMING PLAN (04 20 00) 8' MASONRY (0S SI 00) PAINTED WALLS WALL W/HORIZONTAL REINFORCING a 16' O.G. (05 12 00) LINTEL PER f6 I 1 1 (05 12 00) LINTEL (2) STRUCTURAL PLANS 4.1 I3112'x 3112'x1/4' L'e (08 II 13) HOLLOW METAL fl� FRAME W/4' HEADER (08 30 00) INSULATED OVERHEAD DOOR (08 11 13) HOLLOW METAL DOOR (03 30 00) 6' CONCRETE (03 30 00) 5' CONCRETE 10,530015' CONCRETE FLOOR PER FLOOR —SLAB PER FLOOR 4 SLAB PER FLOOR PLAN PLAN 42 PLAN (03 30 00).006 M 103 30 00).006 MIL (03300).006 MIL VAPORVAPOR BARRIER (03 30 00) (o' ��SP�BARRIER (03 30 00) 1' COMPACTED (03 30 00) 6' COMPACTED (03300) 6' COMPACTED STONE STO --�-'r'. -- -' r -z -4, METAL ROOF AND FLASHING (13 34 19) TOP OF WALL ELEV. +18'-2* (13 34 IS) ALUMINUM GUTTERS 4 DOWN SPOUTS (13 34 19) 6' METAL BUILDING RIS BATT INSULATION W/REINFORCED POLY VAPOR BARRIER PER SPEC (13 34 19) METAL FASCIA (03 30 00) CONCRETE PER SITE PLAN (03 30 00) 1' ="PAGTED STONE OL FF. — — — — —If ELEV. +0'-0' FOOTING (01 20 00) 2' PERIMETER BEYOND /\/\/ //<INSULATION •4 /\\T_OTAL R-534 H -- :ONTIN000S FOOTING R FOUNDATION PLAN 00) REINFORCING P FOUNDATION PLAN 2 4.2 BL±E—''WALL -J ELEV-. -4'--0' �CAULK 4 BACKER ROD £A. SIDE INVM CONTINUOUS REINF. 'DUROWAL' THRU JOINT EVERY SECOND COURSE MAX. SPACING 24' O.G. Masonry Control Joints 1/2. , I._0. O.H. GOh (13 34 19) 6' METAL BUILDING RIS BATT INSULATION W/REINFORCED POLY VAPOR BARRIER PER SPEC (13 34 19) STEEL PERLINS PER FRAMING PLAN (13 34 IS) COMPOSITE STEEL COLUMN/BEAM PER FRAMING PLAN (01 20 00) 1' PERIMETER INSULATION R-4.11 PER INCH -- TOTAL R-4.11 (03 30 00) 6' CONCRETE FLOOR PER FLOOR PLAN (03 30 00).006 M VAPOR BARRIER (03 30 00) 1' COMPACTED STONE i �T-r-1517-------�'-==--r�N• (03 30 00) COLUMN PIER/FOOTING (03 30 00) CONTINUOUS FOOTING PER FOUNDATION PLAN i (03 30 00) REINFORCING F FOUNDATION PLAN 1 4.2 ATTACHMENT L BLOCKING (13 34 18) PANEL (13 34 IS) TION BATT (13 34 18) PANEL (13 34 18) 5 OH doorjamb detail 4.2 11'2' • 1'-0' METAL ROOF AND FLASHING (13 34 IS) TOP OF WALL ELEV. +18'-2' (13 34 IS) ALUMINUM GUTTERS t DOWN SPOUTS (13 34 19) 6' METAL BUILDING R15 BATT INSULATION W/REINFORCED POLY VAPOR BARRIER PER SPEC (13122) METAL BUILDING HORIZONTAL STEEL WALL GIRTS SPACING PER FRAMING PLAN (13 34 19) ANCHOR BOLTS PER METAL BUILDING SYSTEM (13 34 19) STEEL BEARING PLATE (13 34 19) ANCHOR WALL PANELS PER METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 4QMJ9) METAL DRIP FLASHING 4 W NM1A T 41"'6fdL a (03 30 00) CONCRETE 4., PER SITE PLAN w.n (03 30 00) 1' COMPACTED STONE /Af, FF. -/G��'?0 ELEV. (01 20 00) 2PERIMETER INSULATION a //\\TOTAL PERINCHH -- SMOOTH 4'4, STEEL TUBE CONCRETE FILLED PROVIDE 2 or 4 POSTS o EA. O.N. DOOR PER PLAN ELECTRICAL PER PLAN 3/4' CUBIC YARD OF CONCRETE PER /FOOTING 4 WALL ELEV. -4'-0' VERIFY DISTANCE W/ O.H. DOOR CONTR bollard detail (1 s units) 4.2 Well Sections and Details = Metal Buildin1/2'=1--U 0 2012 K u e n y A r c h i t e c t a, L.L.C. -AII Ights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storsgs Building May 30, 2012 0 � yr N �q 7 y y L7 bollard detail (1 s units) 4.2 Well Sections and Details = Metal Buildin1/2'=1--U 0 2012 K u e n y A r c h i t e c t a, L.L.C. -AII Ights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storsgs Building May 30, 2012 --------- `--------- ` FF AT WALL LINE 652.00 — -- II I II I II II II I I RIM AT GB 651.50 �- I F 2'-2Y4' I' -(1Y4. N r J J 4 - - -- - - -- - - - - �— - - - IN N 4 IS � I II Z etortege II li3 I 17 3 it Q BYOMPLE BUILETE LDI DE OG DESIGN Q ---A -- - - - -- -- -- - - - - ---- - -}--- I / CONCRETE I I COMPLETE FLOOR I RIM AT GB 651.50 II II COLUMN: (3)-2x1O's 4 (13 34 18) rrA/ 1 I ( l I I I --- __--� FF AT WALL LINE 652D0 -------- J -�--�---- T--- 7 ----� -- -A --- ,� Foundation Plan - Pole Barn 1/e'-1'-0' TYP FOUNDATION WALL 8'X3'-0' X CONTINUOUS U.N.O. W/ 2 05's CONTINUOUS OR AS NOTED MARK SIZE RE INF. F-1 4'-0' x 4'-0' x I'-0' 4 - 05's E.W. T45 F-2 4'-6' x 4'-6' x 1'-0' 4 - 05'5 E.W. T45 2,500 P.S.F. BEARING CAPACITY TYP FOUNDATION WALL 8'X3'-0' X CONTINUOUS U.N.O. W/ 2 05's CONTINUOUS OR AS NOTED CONCRETE 'B' COMPLETE FLOOR 6' CONCRETE SLAB 6x6 W2.9 x W2.9 WWF W/ 0.006 MIL POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIER OVER 4' COMPACTED LIMESTONE BASE. IJ li I' I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I --------� I — — — — — — — — — - ----------- I I I I I I I I I Ll J FF AT WALL LINE 652.00 I I I I RIM AT GB 651.50 I I I I eeo ge I 1 1 CONCRETE '11' COMPLETE FLOOR I FF AT WALL LINE 652.00 - –— --- STRIPFOOTING'A' � ;7:l `--------- I ----- T__ I — I RIM AT CB 65150 I I� I seo -age 17 IA Ia 3 I I IQ I � CONCRETE 'B' L ICOMPLETE FLOOR Oft P-/ I I I L1 F �2 L I I I I I I I I r L------- t.�-------- I � I Q)RIM AT CB 65150 sr I 4� rr r T FF AT WALL LINE J ...1... L 2 Foundation Plan - Metal Building 1/B'=1'-0' N O 2,500 PSF BEARING CAPACITY MARK SIZE I REINFORCING A 2'-0' WIDE x 12' DEEP 1 3 - 5 BARS CONTINUOUS TYPICAL AT ALL WALLS CONCRETE 'B' COMPLETE FLOOR 6' CONCRETE SLAB 6x6 W2.9 x W2.9 WWF W/ 0.006 MIL POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIER OVER 4' COMPACTED LIMESTONE BASE. IJ li I' I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I --------� I — — — — — — — — — - ----------- I I I I I I I I I Ll J FF AT WALL LINE 652.00 I I I I RIM AT GB 651.50 I I I I eeo ge I 1 1 CONCRETE '11' COMPLETE FLOOR I FF AT WALL LINE 652.00 - –— --- STRIPFOOTING'A' � ;7:l `--------- I ----- T__ I — I RIM AT CB 65150 I I� I seo -age 17 IA Ia 3 I I IQ I � CONCRETE 'B' L ICOMPLETE FLOOR Oft P-/ I I I L1 F �2 L I I I I I I I I r L------- t.�-------- I � I Q)RIM AT CB 65150 sr I 4� rr r T FF AT WALL LINE J ...1... L 2 Foundation Plan - Metal Building 1/B'=1'-0' PLA NORTH A TRUE NORTH Foundation Plans 1/ao=1'-0' 0 2012 K u s n y Arch its c t a, L.L.C. -All Rights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility - Storage Building May 30, 2012 ISO 1 N O O n N C 9 PLA NORTH A TRUE NORTH Foundation Plans 1/ao=1'-0' 0 2012 K u s n y Arch its c t a, L.L.C. -All Rights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility - Storage Building May 30, 2012 ISO 1 Roof Framing Plan - Pole Barn ROOF FRAMING DESIGN BY Roof Framing Plan - Metal Building ROOF FRAMING DESIGN BY 1/B"= 1'-0" POLE BUILDING DESIGNER 1/B'= 1'-0' METAL BUILDING DESIGNER * I PLA NORTH A TRUE NORTH Roof Framing Plans 1/S•=1'-0' © 201 2 K u e n y Arch its c t s, L.L.C. -All Rights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building Mey 30, 201 2 Sn2 N O E ZE:� N C • Y C-) :<M 6 •� PLA NORTH A TRUE NORTH Roof Framing Plans 1/S•=1'-0' © 201 2 K u e n y Arch its c t s, L.L.C. -All Rights Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building Mey 30, 201 2 Sn2 6 CAPPED STUB FOR FUTURE OUTSIDE WASH AREA. INVERT 645.0 VERIFY EXACT LOCATION IN FIELD 6- 4"CO 2'VENT 4' OUTLET: N THRU SIDEWALL EXTEND 6' BELOW WATER UNEMINIMUM OF 2' BELOW 3' BOTTOM OF PIPE 6"FLUSH CO w/FROST SLEEVE AT CONNECTION TO 8"SAN STUB USAN INV 644.75 J 6 SANITARY SEWER / EXTEND TO 8' SAN STUB INVERT 640+/-, VERIFY VERIFY EXACT LOCATION IN FIELD PRECAST CONCRETE 3000 GALLON OIL/GRIT SEPARATOR, 2 MANHOLES, (18'Lx8'Wx7'D) GRADE 652.0 TOP OF TANK 646.0 INLET 645.0 BOTTOM OF TANK 638.0 OUTLET 644.75 VERIFY ALL ELEVATIONS VERIFY EXACT LOCATION IN FIELD IT TO 5' OUTSIDE BUILDING CONNECT TO WATER STUB VERIFY LOCATION DINATE INSTALLATION WITH UTILITY CONTRACTOR SERVICE Warm Storage Buildin%lie--1-0' 02012 Ku s n y Arc h i t e c t s, L.L.C. -All Rig Reserved Iowa City Public Works Facility- May 30, 2012 f=LA NORTH 4 TRUE: NORTH Warm Storage HVAC North Elevation 1/9--147 GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL DUCTWORK IS DIAGRAMMATIC AND COORDINATED TO THE BEST AVAILABLE INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY STRUCTURE AND LOCATION OF OTHER TRADED PRIOR TO FABRICATION. 2. INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT PER LOCAL AND STATE CODES AND PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS 3. OUTSIDE AIR INTAKES SHALL BE MINIMUM OF 10'-0" FROM ANY BUILDING EXHAUST, FLUES, PLUMBING VENTS AND LOT UNE. 4. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING SHALL BE BY HVAC CONTRACTOR 5. DUCT SIZES LISTED ON PLANS ARE THE REQUIRED CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSION. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE OWNER WITH WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT 7. THERMOSTAT LOCATIONS SHALL BE REVIEWED BY OWNER, TENANT do CONTRACTOR BEFORE INSTALLATION. CONTROLS SHALL BE LOCATED 480 ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR Warm Storage HVAC Plan 1/B'-1 7 FUEL FIRED HEATER SCHEDULE SYSTEM TYPE MATERIAL SIZES JOINTS INSULATION NOTES TYPE EQUIPMENT TAG SERVES ELECTRICAL HPIV/PH/HZ KW STARTER MOCP FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY LOCATION TYPE TAG SERVES AIR FLOW CFM PD HEATING SECTION TYPE MBH IN MBH OUT EAT DB LAT D8 VENT COMB ELECTRICAL V/PH/HZ HP MOCP MODEL MFG WEIGHT (LBS) NOTES UH -1 LARGE STORAGE 14483 INA IGAS 1350 1291 ISO 1110 6" INA 1151l/60 8 EF -1 JUDAP350 IREZNOR 1294 1,2,3,4 UH -2 SMALL STORAGE 11921 INA IGAS 1150 1125 150 1110 5' INA 111511160 1 1/8 115 JUDAP150 IREZNOR 1172 1,2,3,4 NOTES: LARGE STORAGE 1/30 115/1/60 ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SEE E -PLANS 24V CONTACTOR HVAC HVAC PRE -WIRED 1 EF -4 SMALL STORAGE 1/30 115/1/60 — ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SEE E -PLANS 1 PROVIDE VERTICLE VENT KIT FOR ROOF VENTING IHVAC HVAC PRE -WIRED 1 NOTES: Is 114.2SX14,25 111511160 INA 1 1/30 SEl-8-440-D IGREENHECK 45 3 2 IMODINE, REZNOR, STERLING, OR TRANE FAN TO RUN 2417 2 HVAC CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 24V WIRING FROM EXHAUST FAN RELAY CONTACTOR TO OA LOUVER DAMPER SERVING SAME SPACE 3 1 PROVIDE 2 -STAGE GAS VALVE jLROVIDE DISCONNECT 3 HVAC CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 24V HARING CO DETECTOR RELAY TO EXHAUST FAN 4 1PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL HEAT EXCHANGER GALVANIZED BIRDSCREEN HVAC STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS SYSTEM TYPE MATERIAL SIZES JOINTS INSULATION NOTES TYPE EQUIPMENT TAG SERVES ELECTRICAL HPIV/PH/HZ KW STARTER MOCP FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY LOCATION TYPE DISCONNECT FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY LOCATION NOTES UH -1 LARGE STORAGE 1/2 115/1/60 HVAC HVAC PRE-WRED CONTACTOR ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ON UNIT 120 UH -2 SMALL STORAGE 1/6 115/1/60 HVAC HVAC PRE-WRED CONTACTOR ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ON UNIT 8 EF -1 LARGE STORAGE 1 115/1/60 ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SEE E -PLANS 24V CONTACTOR HVAC HVAC PRE -HARED 2,3 EF -2 SMALL STORAGE 1/3 115/1/60 — ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SEE E -PIANS 24V CONTACTOR HVAC HVAC PRE -WIRED 2.3 EF -3 LARGE STORAGE 1/30 115/1/60 ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SEE E -PLANS 24V CONTACTOR HVAC HVAC PRE -WIRED 1 EF -4 SMALL STORAGE 1/30 115/1/60 — ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SEE E -PLANS 24V CONTACTOR IHVAC HVAC PRE -WIRED 1 NOTES: Is 114.2SX14,25 111511160 INA 1 1/30 SEl-8-440-D IGREENHECK 45 3 1 FAN TO RUN 2417 2 HVAC CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 24V WIRING FROM EXHAUST FAN RELAY CONTACTOR TO OA LOUVER DAMPER SERVING SAME SPACE 1 jLROVIDE DISCONNECT 3 HVAC CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 24V HARING CO DETECTOR RELAY TO EXHAUST FAN Warm Storage HVAC South Elevation 1/6'-Iq7 11E!.A: ;R0CFIING Warm Storage HVAC West Elevatoin 1/6--11-0' PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE SYSTEM TYPE MATERIAL SIZES JOINTS INSULATION NOTES TYPE MATERIAL K -VALUE THICKNESS NATURAL GAS SCH 40 BLACK RON 2" AND BELOW THREADED NONE — — — 1 NOTES: 1GREENHECK 11,2 1 PROVIDE GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR AND SHUTOFF AT ALL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS LOUVER SCHEDULE SYSTEM TYPE TAG SERVES AIR FLOW CFM PD IN WC VELOCITY FPM FREE AREA SIZE (IN) WIDTH IHEIGHT MODEL MFG NOTES L-1 UH -1 13,500 10.044 1530 16.3 160 130 JEDK430 1GREENHECK 11,2 L-2 UH -2 11,200 10.043 1552 12.2 136 120 EDK-430 IGREENHECK 11,2 NOTES 2" 1 GENERAL EXHAUST ALL GALVANIZED 2" 8 NONE 1PR2VIDE 18" SLOPED ROOF CURB INSTALLED BY ROOFING CONTRACTOR — WASH BAY EXHAUST DUCT ALL ALUMINUM 2" 2 PROVIDE WHITE FINISH NONE — — NOTES: INA 1 1/3 CW -101-A DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE SYSTEM TYPE SYSTEM LOCATION MATERIAL SMACNA PRESSURE CLASS SMACNA SEAL CLASS INSULATION TYPE MATERIAL R -VALUE NOTES THICKNESS COMBUSTION AIR ALL GALVANIZED 2" B FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS 4.2 1-1/2" 1 OUTSIDE AIR ALL GALVANIZED 2" B RIGID FIBERGLASS 5.8 2" 1 GENERAL EXHAUST ALL GALVANIZED 2" 8 NONE NONE — — WASH BAY EXHAUST DUCT ALL ALUMINUM 2" B NONE NONE — — NOTES: INA 1 1/3 CW -101-A IGREENHECK 165 11,2 EF -3 1 JOWENS CORNING, KNAUF, OR 3M INSULATION, JOHNS MANVILLE 1289 10.25 11650 19.2 18.25X16.25 EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE TAG SERVES MOUNTING AIR FLOW [CFM] ESP RPM SONES OPENING WALIJROOF ELECTRICAL V/PH/HZ WA.f-I.S HP MODEL MFG WEIGHT (LBS) NOTES EF -1 LARGE STORAGE SIDEWALL 3744 0.5 1140 16.3 17.5X17.5 115/1/60 INA 11 CW -180-B 1GREENHECK 1120 11.2 EF -2 SMALL STORAGE SIDEWALL 1234 10.6 1725 111.6 12.5X12.5 115/1/60 INA 1 1/3 CW -101-A IGREENHECK 165 11,2 EF -3 LARGE STORAGE SIDEWALL 1289 10.25 11650 19.2 18.25X16.25 115/1/60 INA 1 1/30 SE1-10A28-P IGREENHECK 155 13 EFA SMALL STORAGE ISIDEWALL 1123 10.25 11550 Is 114.2SX14,25 111511160 INA 1 1/30 SEl-8-440-D IGREENHECK 45 3 NOTES 1 jLROVIDE DISCONNECT 2 GALVANIZED BIRDSCREEN 3 PROVIDE SHORT WALL HOUSING AND 45 DEGREE GALVANIZED WATHERHOOD Warm Storage HVAC Plan 1/B'-1Lu O 2012 K u s n y Architects. L.L.C. -AM FpphCe Reaerlvsd lows Clby Public Wort® Facility- Ekxx ege BuYding May 30. 2012 TRUE NORTH n e n 0 M N N R -13 LD n n n H An 80'-0" 80'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 9 20'-0" J _ 20'-0" J6 20'-0" 20'-0" 200 AMP COPPER C 20'-0" rypG METER RODS W PRESSURE - - - - r - - 24 AFG-Er - - - - - CONNECTORS A-1 -� - O TC 3 EM1 o I I of PANE3I I I I A A A A-1 A O AA -31 A ° I I R3 A I 7 I I !"A-3 S UH -2 / A-21 I A A Sw A I I 2 27 A-27 ER ® SENSORS �1` G �18' A-25 A-1'184 \ G O A 18 °I G 48• © N A -14 G 4W A +- �- A-18 © G 118• LOW VOLTAGE � N * 2 A-188 G WATER GROUN D 2 G 0° ° A 18 TRANSFORMER® SENSORS A 20 SERVICE A-15 A-15 I S I I ' A-19 A-19 ° M O O Rz I I / A A A A_ A A LOUVER L-1 I A-27 A -s I I 01 _ _-- - - - - - G 48• - - - A-20 � bA I I I I ° °1 I I A-6 o I I I I I s -I - -A - - I I I A- - -lam I I 0 �- G 48' - - — - I I I I A:% 000 I I I I I I I I I SW / I I I I I r I I I I I I I Do 11 I 00 I II t A A A A A GI G A II+442884 A 24 EF A I .03 A-9 0 I I I II L— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — w� I I 24r AFG A-11 A4 20'-0" 20'-0" A A A 80'-0' A A I I7=44 II ------------------I---- ------- - -- �" 20'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 80'-0° N N R -13 LD n n n H An E 7 Warm Storage Lighting Plan 2 1/e"=1 -a SHEET NOTES 0 TYPICAL: CENTER EXIT AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS AT 10' AFF. O TYPICAL, MOUNT TYPE OB LIGHT 12' 03 PROVIDE INTERMATIC ET8015C 7 DAY ASTRONOMICAL TIME CLOCK WITH 30A SPST CONTACT AND BATTERY BACKUP TO CONTROL EXTERIOR LIGHTS. ® TYPICAL• PROVIDE EMPTY CONDUIT AND BOXES AS REQUIRED AT ALL CO/NO2 LOCATIONS. CO SENSOR LOCATED APPROXIMATELY 3'-5' AFF. NO2 SENSOR LOCATED APPROXIMATELY 1' TO 3' BELOW CEILING. VERIFY LOCATIONS WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR. HVAC CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL TRANSFORMER WIRING BETWEEN SENSORS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 120V POWER TO MAIN SENSOR AND LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL TRANSFORMER. 120V POWER WANG SHALL NOT BE RUN IN THE SAME CONDUIT AS THE LOW VOLTAGE WIRING. 5O GENERAL NOTE: EXHAUST FANS EF -1, 2, 3, AND 4 HAVE DISCONNECTS PROVIDED BY HVAC CONTRACTOR. © PROVIDE BOX AND 1/2• CONDUIT UP TO CEILING AREA FOR THERMOSTATS. O PROVIDE RELAY R1 AT EF -1 AND RELAY R3 AT EF -2. WIRE 120V EXHAUST FAN CIRCUIT THRU RELAY CONTACT TO EXHAUST FAN. LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING TO RELAY COIL BY HVAC CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE MANUAL SWITCH BEFORE RELAY AS A DISCONNECT. © PROVIDE RELAY R2 AT LOUVER L-1 AND RELAY R4 AT LOUVER L-2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO WIRE 120V THRU RELAY CONTACTS TO LOUVER. PROVIDE LIGHT SWITCH AS A DISCONNECT. LOW VOLTAGE RELAY COIL WIRING BY HVAC CONTRACTOR. 9 GROUND WATER SERVICE, BUILDING STEEL, REPAIR AND GROUND RODS TO CODE. 10 BUILDING BID AS WOOD FRAMED WITH STEEL EXTERIOR AND A METAL INTERIOR CEILING AT 18' AFF OR STEEL FRAMED WITH A STEEL EXTERIOR UNDER THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. IF THE BUILDING IS WOOD FRAMED, TYPE A LIGHTS WILL BE HUNG FROM THE METAL PAN CEILING AT 17' AFF. IF THE BUILDING IS STEEL FRAMED, THE LIGHTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 2' BELOW THE PURLINS. PROVIDE STROT BETWEEN PURLINS AS REQUIRED TO HANG LIGHTS. 11 TYPICAL-- SET TYPE A LIGHT FIXTURE OCCUPANCY SENSOR ADJUSTABLE TIME DELAY TO 10 MINUTES. 12 GENERAL NOTE: EXHAUST FANS EF -3 AND EF -4 RUN CONTINUOUSLY. M U Warm Storage Power and Sytems Plan 1/8-=1--0" U N O 80'-0" -T7 20'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 9 20'-0" J _ 120/208Y 3/4• X 10 200 AMP COPPER C GROUND rypG METER RODS W PRESSURE - - - - r - - 24 AFG-Er - - - - - CONNECTORS A-1 I -�— _ A `` PANEL AEF-4��,� / _ -1 AF G A O AA -31 �� -23 00 ° A 10 G 48• R3 A 7 I I S UH -2 / A-21 Sw L-2 LOWVOLTAGE A 2 27 A-27 ER ® SENSORS G �18' A-25 A-1'184 \ G O A 18 °I G 48• © N A -14 G 4W A +- �- A-18 © G 118• LOW VOLTAGE � N * 2 A-188 G WATER GROUN D 2 G 0° ° A 18 TRANSFORMER® SENSORS A 20 SERVICE A-15 A-15 I S A-19 A-19 M O O Rz S / I A_ LOUVER L-1 A-27 0 01 c 48' A-� -- - - �---- - --- - - - - - G 48• - - - A-20 I I ° °1 I I A-6 I I I I I s / I � I I I I I 0 48N• I I 0 �- G 48' - - — - 000 A:% 000 0 0) I I I SW / I I I I A-8 I G 48• I A- 6 R1 7 GI G A II+442884 A 24 EF Q01 .03 II L— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — w� — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 24r AFG A4 20'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 20'-0" 80'-0' E 7 Warm Storage Lighting Plan 2 1/e"=1 -a SHEET NOTES 0 TYPICAL: CENTER EXIT AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS AT 10' AFF. O TYPICAL, MOUNT TYPE OB LIGHT 12' 03 PROVIDE INTERMATIC ET8015C 7 DAY ASTRONOMICAL TIME CLOCK WITH 30A SPST CONTACT AND BATTERY BACKUP TO CONTROL EXTERIOR LIGHTS. ® TYPICAL• PROVIDE EMPTY CONDUIT AND BOXES AS REQUIRED AT ALL CO/NO2 LOCATIONS. CO SENSOR LOCATED APPROXIMATELY 3'-5' AFF. NO2 SENSOR LOCATED APPROXIMATELY 1' TO 3' BELOW CEILING. VERIFY LOCATIONS WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR. HVAC CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL TRANSFORMER WIRING BETWEEN SENSORS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 120V POWER TO MAIN SENSOR AND LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL TRANSFORMER. 120V POWER WANG SHALL NOT BE RUN IN THE SAME CONDUIT AS THE LOW VOLTAGE WIRING. 5O GENERAL NOTE: EXHAUST FANS EF -1, 2, 3, AND 4 HAVE DISCONNECTS PROVIDED BY HVAC CONTRACTOR. © PROVIDE BOX AND 1/2• CONDUIT UP TO CEILING AREA FOR THERMOSTATS. O PROVIDE RELAY R1 AT EF -1 AND RELAY R3 AT EF -2. WIRE 120V EXHAUST FAN CIRCUIT THRU RELAY CONTACT TO EXHAUST FAN. LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING TO RELAY COIL BY HVAC CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE MANUAL SWITCH BEFORE RELAY AS A DISCONNECT. © PROVIDE RELAY R2 AT LOUVER L-1 AND RELAY R4 AT LOUVER L-2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO WIRE 120V THRU RELAY CONTACTS TO LOUVER. PROVIDE LIGHT SWITCH AS A DISCONNECT. LOW VOLTAGE RELAY COIL WIRING BY HVAC CONTRACTOR. 9 GROUND WATER SERVICE, BUILDING STEEL, REPAIR AND GROUND RODS TO CODE. 10 BUILDING BID AS WOOD FRAMED WITH STEEL EXTERIOR AND A METAL INTERIOR CEILING AT 18' AFF OR STEEL FRAMED WITH A STEEL EXTERIOR UNDER THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. IF THE BUILDING IS WOOD FRAMED, TYPE A LIGHTS WILL BE HUNG FROM THE METAL PAN CEILING AT 17' AFF. IF THE BUILDING IS STEEL FRAMED, THE LIGHTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 2' BELOW THE PURLINS. PROVIDE STROT BETWEEN PURLINS AS REQUIRED TO HANG LIGHTS. 11 TYPICAL-- SET TYPE A LIGHT FIXTURE OCCUPANCY SENSOR ADJUSTABLE TIME DELAY TO 10 MINUTES. 12 GENERAL NOTE: EXHAUST FANS EF -3 AND EF -4 RUN CONTINUOUSLY. M U Warm Storage Power and Sytems Plan 1/8-=1--0" U N O O _ N -T7 J _ PLAN NORTH A TRUE NORTH Warm Storage Electrical Plans 1/6•=1'-0• 0 201 K u a In y A r c h i t e c t s, L.L.C. -Al RightB Reserved El Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building May 30, 2012 SYMBOLS S SINGLE POLE SWITCH -TOP 48" AFF S2 TWO POLE SWITCH -TOP 48' AFF S3 THREE WAY SWITCH -TOP 48" AFF SO DIMMER SWITCH -TOP 48" AFF SL LIGHTED SWITCH - LIGHT ON W/LOAD-TOP 48" AFF SL3 LIGHTED THREE WAY SWITCH - LIGHT ON W/LOAD TOP 4-8' AFF 0 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R-48- AFF C COUNTER MOUNT 6" ABOVE COUNTER BACKSPLASH B BELOW COUNTER G GFCI WP G WEATHER PROOF IN -USE GFCI TV I' BELOW CEILING ® FLOOR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R jq 20§V, 1 PHASE RECEPTACLE 18 AFF OFFICE, TOP 48 AFF SHOP ' TWO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES NEMA 5-20R TOP 48 AFF -SHOP, VENDING SM 30 AMP MANUAL MOTOR SWITCH PADLOCKABLE IN THE OFF POSITION EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR WP WEATHER PROOF U 30 AMP UNFUSED DISCONNECT -60" AFF OR 3 p AS REQUIRED. 50 60 AMP FUSED DISCONNECT WITH 50 AMP 6 P FUSES -60' AFF OR AS REQUIRED. 1/ 1/2 HP MOTOR VIF VERIFY IN FIELD IG ISOLATED GROUND NL NIGHT LIGHT LC LIGHTING CONTACTOR OP PHOTOCELL T© TIME CLOCK O RELAY OPROVIDE BOX AND 1/2' CONDUIT UP TO CEILING. THERMOSTAT AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING BY HVAC CONTRACTOR SECONDARY TO TRANSFORMER PER MIDAMERICAN REQUIREMENTS 200 AMP METER SOCKET PER MIDAMERICAN ENERGY SPECIFICATIONS 43/0 #4 GND 20 RIGID GROUND PANEL C A CODE 9.10W. 200 MCB 42 POLE 120/208Y 3 PH 4 W 200 AMP COPPER BUSS STARTER/CONTACTOR/RELAY SCHEDULE NO. DESCRIPTION BKR KW PHASE KW I BKR DESCRIPTION NO. 1 SMALL STORAGE N LIGHTS 20/1 .72 CONTROL CONTROL LOAD LOAD LOAD 3 LOW VOLTAGE NOTES .72 DEVICE LOCATION LOAD TYPE 4 FUSE TRANSFORMER COIL HP/KW VOLTAGE PHASE POLES CONTROL RELAY (SEE BELOW) R1 LARGE STORAGE- N CENTER LIGHTS LARGE STORAGE EF -1 SPST POWER RELAY WITH ENCLOSURE, 30 AMP CONTACT, 2 HP MAX. RATING, NONE NONE LOW VOLTAGE 1 HP 120 1 1 NONE 3 201/1 NW SMALL STORAGE RECEPTACLES 10 11 SQUARE D 8501-006• WITH 9991-UE1 ENCLOSURE (•-VOLTAGE). 20/1 .84 C .90 20/1 NE SMALL STORAGE RECEPTACLES 12 13 EXTERIOR LIGHTS AND TIME CLOCK 20 1 R2 A LARGE STORAGE LOUVER L-1 SPST POWER RELAY WITH ENCLOSURE, 30 AMP CONTACT, 2 HP MAX. RATING, NONE NONE LOW VOLTAGE - 120 1 1 NONE 3 17 LARGE STORAGE EF 20/1 1.92 SQUARE D 8501-CO6• WITH 9991-UE1 ENCLOSURE (•-VOLTAGE). 1.08 20/1 NW LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES 18 19 LARGE STORAGE UH -1 20/1 1.18 A 1.08 R3 NE LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES SMALL STORAGE EF -2 SPST POWER RELAY WITH ENCLOSURE, 30 AMP CONTACT, 2 HP MAX. RATING, NONE NONE LOW VOLTAGE 1/3 120 1 1 NONE 3 1.18 C 1.26 20/1 SQUARE D 8501-006• WITH 9991-UE1 ENCLOSURE (•-VOLTAGE). 24 25 SMALL STORAGE CO NO2 SENSORS,CONIROL 20/1 .36 A 1.08 20/1 SE LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES 26 R4 LOUVERS L-11, L-2 SMALL STORAGE LOUVER L-2 SPST POWER RELAY WITH ENCLOSURE, 30 AMP CONTACT, 2 HP MAX. RATING, NONE NONE LOW VOLTAGE - 120 1 1 NONE 3 20/1 SPARE 30 31 I SQUARE D 8501-006• WITH 9991-UE1 ENCLOSURE (•=VOLTAGE). 20/1 .86 A - 20/1 SPARE 32 33 SPARE 20/1 OPTIONS AND NOTES: B - 20/1 SPARE 34 35 SPARE 20/1 - 1. PRESS -TO -TEST PILOT LIGHT. 20/1 SPARE 36 37 - - - A - 2. MAN/OFF/AUTO SELECTOR SWITCH. 38 39 - - - B - - - 3. LOW VOLTAGE RELAY. VERIFY COIL VOLTAGE. - - - C - - - 42 4. STARTERS TO HAVE ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD PROTECTION. GENERAL NOTES: 1. 'OR EQUAL" MEANS EQUAL EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY APPROVED MANUFACTURERS LISTED IN SPECIFICATIONS. SECONDARY TO TRANSFORMER PER MIDAMERICAN REQUIREMENTS 200 AMP METER SOCKET PER MIDAMERICAN ENERGY SPECIFICATIONS 43/0 #4 GND 20 RIGID GROUND PANEL C A CODE 9.10W. 200 MCB 42 POLE 120/208Y 3 PH 4 W 200 AMP COPPER BUSS W/GRD BAR SQUARE D NQOD SURFACE NO. DESCRIPTION BKR KW PHASE KW I BKR DESCRIPTION NO. 1 SMALL STORAGE N LIGHTS 20/1 .72 A 1.18 20/1 SMALL STORAGE OVERHEAD DOOR 2 3 SMALL STORAGE S LIGHTS 20/1 .72 B 1.18 20/1 N LARGE STORAGE OVERHEAD DOOR 4 5 LARGE STORAGE- N LIGHTS 20/1 .84 C 1.18 20/1 C LARGE STORAGE OVERHEAD DOOR 6 7 LARGE STORAGE- N CENTER LIGHTS 20/1 .84 A 1.18 20/1 S LARGE STORAGE OVERHEAD DOOR 8 9 LARGE STORAGE- S CENTER LIGHTS 20/1 .84 B 1.08 201/1 NW SMALL STORAGE RECEPTACLES 10 11 LARGE STORAGE- S LIGHTS 20/1 .84 C .90 20/1 NE SMALL STORAGE RECEPTACLES 12 13 EXTERIOR LIGHTS AND TIME CLOCK 20 1 .32 A 1.08 20/1 SW SMALL STORAGE RECEPTACLES 14 15 LARGE STORAGE CO NO2 SENSORS, CONTROL 20 1 .36 B .72 20/1 SE SMALL STORAGE RECEPTACLES 16 17 LARGE STORAGE EF 20/1 1.92 C 1.08 20/1 NW LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES 18 19 LARGE STORAGE UH -1 20/1 1.18 A 1.08 20/1 NE LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES 20 21 SMALL STORAGE UH -2 20/1 1.53 B .72 20/1 W LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES 22 23 SMALL STORAGE EF 20/1 1.18 C 1.26 20/1 SW LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES 24 25 SMALL STORAGE CO NO2 SENSORS,CONIROL 20/1 .36 A 1.08 20/1 SE LARGE STORAGE RECEPTACLES 26 27 LOUVERS L-11, L-2 15/1 .18 B - 20/1 SPARE 28 29 LARGE STORAGE EF -3 20/1 .86 C - 20/1 SPARE 30 31 SMALL STORAGE EF -4 20/1 .86 A - 20/1 SPARE 32 33 SPARE 20/1 - B - 20/1 SPARE 34 35 SPARE 20/1 - C - 20/1 SPARE 36 37 - - - A - - - 38 39 - - - B - - - 40 41 - - - C - - - 42 • INCLUDE HANDLE CLAMP TO HOLD CIRCUIT BREAKER IN -ON- POSITION GENERAL NOTES 1. VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT, RECEPTACLE AND SWITCH LOCATIONS WITH OWNER. 2. ALL DEVICES SHALL BE COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE. ALL LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SHALL BE 20 AMP. 3. EMT CONDUIT SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED. MC CABLE AND PREMANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS MAY BE USED ABOVE JOISTS OR AT CEILING STRUCTUREIN HIGH BAY AREAS. 4. ALL BOXES TO BE 4" SQUARE MINIMUM. 5. ALL CIRCUITS TO HAVE A MAXIMUM VOLTAGE DROP OF 3%. 120V CIRCUITS: 0-50FT. #12; 51-10OFT, #10; 101-150, #8; 151 FT AND UP, SIZE LESS THAN 3%. LIGHTING CIRCUITS ABOVE 20OV: 0-10OFT, #12; 101-20OFT, #10; 201-30OFT, #8; 30OFT AND UP, SIZE LESS THAN 3%. POWER: SIZE LESS THAN 3%. 6. EC TO LABEL ALL RECEPTACLES AND DISCONNECTS WITH CIRCUIT NUMBERS. LABEL FRONT OF RECEPTACLE COVER PLATE WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER. USE BROTHER OR KROY OR EQUAL SELF LAMINATING ADHESIVE LABELS. IN SHOP AREAS, USE BLACK LETTERS ON WHITE BACKGROUND. IN FINISHED AREAS, USE BLACK LETTERS ON CLEAR BACKGROUND. DO NOT LABEL BY HAND. 7. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE COPPER (#12 MINIMUM). 8. SECURE ALL CHAIN, CABLE OR PENDANT HUNG LIGHTS NEAR HVAC DUCT OR OVERHEAD DOOR OPENINGS AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT MOVEMENT. 9. MAINTAIN FIRE RATING AT ALL PENETRATIONS. CAULK CONDUITS AT ALL WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS. C13 66k .� .�. $ � U Schedules, Details 1/e„=1'-0" © 2012 K u e n y A r c h i t e c t s, L. L.C. -All Rights Reserved E 2 Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building May 30, 201 2 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER CATALOG NUMBER VOLTAGE LAMP NO. LAMP BALLAST AMPS WATTS MOUNT NOTES A HIGH BAY FLOURESCENT RUUD H2 -A -2X54 -1 -W -K 120 2 F54T5H0 4100K T5HO PROGRAMMED RAPID START, 1.10 BF, < 10% THD OR EQUAL 1.00 120 CABLE, CORD, PLUG 2,3 EM1 EMERGENCY LIGHT LfTHONIA ELM618 120 2 6V, 9W KRYPTON .167 5.2 SURFACE 4 X3 EMERGENCY EXFT LIGHT LITHONIA LHQM-S-W-3-R-120 277 120 3 LE.D. PANEL, MR24 K0606, 6V, 6W .23 3.3 SURFACE 4 OA RECESSED CANOPY BETA CAN -227 -5S -RM -03 -0 -UL -BZ -350-40K 120 3 LED BARS 350 mrnA LED DRIVER .57 69 SURFACE OB TYPE IV SECURITY WITH HOUSE SHIELD BETA SEC-EDG-4MB-WM-02-D-UL-BZ-350-43K 120 1 LED BAR 350 mA LED DRIVER .20 26 SURFACE SCHEDULE NOTES GENERAL NOTES 1. DUAL SWITCHING REQUIRES STEP DIMMING OR MULTIPLE BALLASTS 1. UNLESS NOTED. EQUIVALENT FIXTURES FROM THE FOLLOWING AS SPECIFIED. MANUFACTURERS WILL BE ACCEPTED: 2. PRE -WIRED OCCUPANCY SENSOR (ALL LAMPS ON/OFF). GENLYTE THOMAS (DAY-BRITE, CAPRI, OMEGA, EMCO, McPHILBEN), HUBBELL LIGHTING COLUMBIA, PRESCOLITE, SPAULDING, LITHONIA, 3. CORD AND PLUG. DUAL LITE), RUUD AND COOPER LIGHTING (METALUX, HALO, 4. LEAD CALCIUM BATTERY. LUMARK, SURE-LITES). 5. HO LEAD CALCIUM BATTERY. 2. FIXTURES SHALL BE LABELED WITH LAMP TYPE BY MANUFACTURER. C13 66k .� .�. $ � U Schedules, Details 1/e„=1'-0" © 2012 K u e n y A r c h i t e c t s, L. L.C. -All Rights Reserved E 2 Iowa City Public Works Facility- Storage Building May 30, 201 2